ICE Study Pack

Topic: Information about Institution of Civil Engineers
1. Why you want to be a member of ICE?

- With the trend of globalization, I see that the future opportunity in civil
engineering works should be worldwide.
- ICE is an international institution in civil engineering which promotes a
place for exchange of ideas and learning.
- I believe that being a chartered member for ICE would enrich me for the
continuing professional development of my career.
2. Do you know the background of ICE?

- ICE was founded on 1818 by a small group of young engineers.
- Mr. Thomas Telford was the first President of ICE.
- Today, ICE has nearly 95,000 members all over the world.
- ICE now provides the focal point for the exchange of ideas and learning.
3. Do you know who is the current President of ICE?

- The current (157th) President of ICE is Mr. Edd McCann (affiliated to Ex-
pedition and Useful Simple Trust)
- Improve productivity and efficiency with which they design, build and
operate infrastructure to fight key challenges today (including climate change)
- Reduce the rework and error rates in design and construction to provide
lean design, lean construction by eliminating error (as a means to minimize carbon
costs
- Mr. Keith Howells (Mott MacDonald) will succeed Ed McCann in No-

vember 2022.
4. Do you know who is the recent past President of ICE?

- The recent past President of ICE was Ms. Rachel skinner.
- She is a British Civil Engineer with the consultant WSP Global.
5. Do you know who is the representative of ICE Hong Kong Office?

- Mr. Ricky Lau, JP is the ICE representative in Hong Kong.
- Mr. Louis Wong is the current Chairman of ICE Hong Kong Association
Committee (ICE HKAC).
6. Do you know what are the criteria to be qualified as a chartered engineer?
1
- Communication competence
- Technical competence
- Commercial competence
- Health, safety and welfare
- Exercise of independent responsibility and judgement
- Leadership, managerial or interpersonal skills
- Professional commitment
- Written assignment quality
7. Do you know the anything about the Rules of Professional Conduct?

All members shall discharge their professional duties with integrity:
- Carry out the professional duties objectively and impartially
- Declare conflict of interest
- Duty of confidence to other professionals
- Duty of care to clients
All members shall only undertake work that they are competent to do:
- Get to know the nature and extent of the involvement in a project
All members shall have full regard for the public interest, particularly in relation
to matters of health and safety:
- Take all reasonable steps to protect the health and safety of the public and
those engaged in the project during construction, operation and maintenance
stages
- Not enter into any contract which compromise this overall responsibility
All members shall show due regard for the environmental and sustainable
development:
- To take into account the environmental impacts and opportunity for
sustainable development throughout the planning, design and construction
stages.
All members shall acquire continuing professional development:

- Duty to improve and update technical knowledge, and to keep abreast of
relevant developments, including new or changed statutory provisions
All members shall notify the Institution for any breach of the Rules:
- Criminal offence, bankrupt, or any other misconduct
2
8. Can you tell me more about the ethical conduct?

Sustainability and the environment:
- To promote the use of recycled or reusable materials wherever practicable
- To make use of energy-efficient techniques in the construction
- To minimize the production of waste
- To reduce the impacts on the natural and “non-built” environment
Risk:
- To take all appropriate measures to limit risk inherent in the project by
ensuring that there is adequate risk analysis or assessment, and an effective
management process
Preventing disasters:
- To take action to prevent the potential hazard becoming actual disasters
Clarity of communication with clients:

- To take all reasonable steps to satisfy themselves that the client fully
understands the service that is to be provided
Conflict of interest:
- Members must declare conflicts of interest to minimize the potential
contention
Preventing bribery and corruption:

- To observe the relevant anti-corruption legislations and ensure themselves
not to be involved in bribery and corruption
3
Contract Payment
Procedure: (also refer to GCC Cl. 78&79, and PAH section 7 of chapter 7)
1. At the end of each monthly period, contractor will submit a statement showing: estimated
contract value for the work done, materials on site and further estimated sums.
2. ER will check and correct the statement. The engineer shall value and certify an interim
payment within 21 days.
3. The sum to be certify is listed in the GCC clauses. The sum shall also be adjusted by
taking retention money and price fluctuations.
Q1: What have you involved in the checking of interim payment?

1. make sure that the quantities of works were measured and recorded accurately by the site
staff and survey officers from time to time. Preferably, the measurement were jointly
measured and agreed by both parties.
2. When the Contractor submitted his monthly statement:
a) checked and corrected the quantities of permanent works executed against the running
abstract prepared by the site staff/ SoQ.
b) ensure that the work is being paid for under the appropriate items
c) ensure the correctness of the extension of quantities and rates, the summation of the
amounts shown against each item.
d) make adjustment due to CPF and retension money
e) prepare the Engineer’s certificate for the Engineer’s Signature.
3. Timing: ensure that all the checking and the preparation for Engineer’s Certificate will be
carried out within 14 days. It is important to ensure timely payment to the Contractor as
required under the Contract.
Q2: Brief the procedure for assessing IP?
Q3: How did you handle disagreement in IP?

1. Disagreement in measurement:
Joint site measurement and agreement should be carried out to agree the quantities. If
there is a disagreement in measurement, I will discuss with the Contractor and the site staff
to agree on the quantities and value the sum for the purpose of interim payment. The
correct quantities can be jointly measure and agree on site afterwards.
2. Disagreement in rate:
Very often, contractor will disagree on ER’s estimated rate in an VO item. It is
necessary for the ER to value the VO as soon as possible and ask Contractor to agree on the
VVO. I will exercise my judgement and refer to the SMM and PP in the valuation of VO to
estimate the rate and value the VO item carried out that month. If the Contractor disagree, I
will ask him to submit relevant information to substantiate his rate. Rate meeting will be hold
to discuss and agree on the correct rate and item coverage. Before the rate has been
agreed, I will certify the estimated rate for interim purpose (on-account).
Topic: Civil Engineering Contracts

p
1. What is contract?
Definition of contract:
- Contract is an agreement which is legally enforceable.
Different between contract and tortious liability:

- One is only liable in contract to those with whom he has contracted by
choice.
- In Tort, he can have liability imposed upon him whether he is willing or not.
Consensus ad idem:
- The contract that the parties enter must be the same contract, with the
same terms and conditions.
- Usually, this is not a problem where the agreement is in writing, but
contracts may also be in oral in nature.
Freedom to contract:
- In many cases today, the law may impose terms called “implied terms”
whether the parties wish to include them or not.
2. What are the essentials of a valid contract to make it enforceable by

court?
Offer:
- Contract requires agreement. This is usually defined in terms of a clearly
defined “offer” being unambiguously “accepted”.
- An offer is a “clear expression” of a willingness to contract on definite terms.
Once an offer is validly accepted a contract exists. It is therefore crucial to
distinguish an offer, which is capable of producing a contract, from a mere
indication that a party may, perhaps, consider forming a contract but is not
yet fully committed.
- Withdrawal of an offer is effective only when the other party knows.
- Sufficient time has elapsed to bring the offer to an end. Where an offer is
stipulated to last for a fixed time, it comes to an end when that time expires.
When no time is fixed offers comes to an end after a “reasonable” time.
Acceptance:
- An acceptance is a “final and unqualified” expression of assent to the terms
1
offered. Unconditional acceptance binds both parties.

- A conditional acceptance is not in fact an acceptance but a counter offer
and is equivalent to rejection of initial offer unless it is a condition or
stipulation normally implied in law.
- The acceptance may take any form provided that it is clear unless the
offeror has stipulated a particular form.
- The general rule for acceptance is that there must be communication.
Silence is not sufficient. An offeror cannot impose a contractual obligation
upon the offeree by stating that, unless the latter expressly rejects the offer,
he will be held to have accepted it. The general rule is to protect the offeree
and therefore it should not apply where its application would cause
hardship to the offeree.
- In general, if the method of communication is instantaneous, acceptance
takes effect when notification of acceptance is received by the offeror. The
exception to this general rule is the “postal rule” which applies to letters of
acceptance. An acceptance by post will take effect as soon as it is validly
posted even if it never arrives.
Consideration:
- All “simple contracts” must be supported by consideration or they will not
be binding.
- Only an agreement which has an element of bargain will be enforced by
the courts. One party “give something” to another party in return for the
benefit he is receiving.
- The consideration need not be equal in any way to the benefit being
received, and may be actually doing something for the other party, or not
doing something which would be to his advantage, or promising to do either
in the future. The law of contract will only enforce bargains but it is not,
generally, concerned whether these bargains are fair.
- When consideration takes the form of a completed act, it is said to be
“executed”, when it takes the form a promise it is described as “executory”.
Both executed and executory considerations are equally valid.
Intention:
- The parties intend the agreement to be legally bound.
Certainty:
- The terms of an agreement must be sufficiently certain to have a practical
2
meaning.
- Both parties must have a correct understanding as to the existence of the
subject matter of the contract and of its nature. Otherwise, the contract will
be void by mistake.
- An ambiguity may result in a dispute.
Legality of object:
- The object of the contract must not be one of which the law disapproves.
Writing:
- It is perfectly effective even though a contract is not recorded in writing.
- However, written contract is strongly recommended. A detailed written
contract does supply a framework for preventing and settling disputes.
Capacity:
- The parties to a contract must have the capacity to contract.
- A person under 18 is in general not bound by a contract.
3. How the terms of contract are classified?

Conditions:
- Legally a condition is so fundamental to a contract which goes to the root
or heart of the contract. A breach of condition will entitle the aggrieve party
to rescind the Contract.
- Examples of such are the non-possession of Site, non-payment of the
Employer, consistent breach of a contractor in terms of safety or
workmanship, his lack of progress1, etc.
- The breach of above by either party may entitle the other to abandon or
terminate the contract and claim for damages.
- In order to avoid unnecessary arguments as to which condition will be
fundamental, it is normal to express such conditions in a clause called
forfeiture which serves as a basis for either party to terminate the Contract,
i.e. to put it to an end.
- If the Employer does not pay punctually, the Contractor will have problem in
cash flow and so he may lose his control over sub-contractors, suppliers,
manufacturers, plant hirers, etc. and the contractor cannot perform, so as
land availability, if land is not available.
1
Case law suggests that even if a contractor is delaying the Employer is not entitled to forfeit the contract if it does not have the
words, like “time is of the essence”. In government’s GCC, a contractor’s consistent failing to proceed with the works with due
diligence is therefore expressly stated as a condition of repudiation.
3
Warranties:
- If the terms are not conditions, they are in fact called warranties. The
breach of which only entitles the aggrieved party to claim damages2, but
not to rescind the Contract, and to continue to perform his obligations
under the Contract.
Grounds on which the court to decide a term is a condition or a warranty:

- A breach of condition entitles a party to repudiate the Contract, whilst a
breach of warranty does not.
- Who can decide these, only the judges.
- In many contracts, most terms are called conditions. But naming terms as
conditions will not mean that these are really fundamental conditions and
the attitude of the court is to look at the various clauses and construe the
contract as a whole and sometimes consider the consequences of the
breach.
- It is therefore always for construction contracts to state clearly what are the
fundamental breaches which entitles an aggrieved party to repudiate the
party.
4. What is the standard form contract for PWP?

Invitation to treat:
- In standard form contracts for PWP, invitation to treat means the invitation
to tender by the Government.
- Tendering may open, selective, prequalified or single.
Offer by tenderer:
- The tenderer will send in a bid, with a tender price in a prescribed form at a
specific time and manner.
- This tender price and any other conditions attached to it will be the offer by
a tenderer.
- In usual situations, this is only an offer and not until the Government
accepts the offer will a validly binding contract be established.
Acceptance by the Government:

- The acceptance by the Government would be in form of a letter of
2
Case law suggests that even if a contractor is delaying the Employer is not entitled to forfeit the contract if it does not have the
words, like “time is of the essence”. In government’s GCC, a contractor’s consistent failing to proceed with the works with due
diligence is therefore expressly stated as a condition of repudiation.
4
acceptance.
- The letter of acceptance will state the acceptance of the tender price and
offered by a tenderer.
- It will also state what correspondence and any other terms offered by the
tenderer be accepted and be incorporated in the Contract.
- Also, some particular requirement will be stated in the letter, for instance
the need of the tenderer to procure third party insurance before
commencing the works.
- This letter also includes important point like who will be the Engineer for the
Contract.
- Once the letter is delivered to the tenderer, or in some cases, sent to the
post office, the act of acceptance is accomplished and a binding contract is
in existence.
Consideration:
- The total of the tender price accepted by the Government will be the
consideration of the Contract.
- From the legal point of view the price to carry out work in return of money is
the consideration. There is a point called sufficiency of consideration.
- We need not be concerned too much whether the price is good or not,
whether the bargain is favourable to the Contractor or the Employer or not,
even $1 value can amount to good consideration.
- Of course, if we really have a cut-throat price, the employer may have to
ask the question whether the Contractor can live with the price and
complete the works as anticipated.
- For most standard form contracts, the contract will be executed under seal
and legally speaking a seal will amount to good consideration.
Limitation period of the contract:

- An oral contract or a contract not made under seal is a simple contract. The
only difference is on the limitation period, applicable to the two types of
contracts.
- A simple contract, i.e. one without a seal is only binding upon the parties
until 6 years after the substantial performance of the Contract. In fact, if a
party wishes to bring proceedings against the other, he would lose his right
to claim subject to a statutory time bar of six years after the accrual of
action.
5
- This situation will be 12 years for a sealed contract3.

- Normally, we say in construction contracts the time bar period starts to
accrue at the time when the contract is substantially performed. This is not
absolute and depends on the circumstances of the breach.
5. Why do we need conditions of tender?

Misrepresentation:
- A party through innocence, no fraud, made a statement of fact called
representation, which is untrue and because of this statement the other
party who rely on the mis-representation and enters into contract with the
other.
- The party which makes contract based on the mis-representation may
rescind the Contract.
Conditions of tender:
- The condition of tender tries to set these matters clear and straight forward
for the sake of certainty and clarity in order to avoid allegation of
mis-representation in the tendering process.
6. What are included in the contract documents?

Articles of agreement:
- To execute the articles of agreement under seal
Letter of acceptance:
- To accept the offer (tender) as submitted by the tenderer
Form of tender (FT):

- This form provides a model letter to the employer from a tenderer offering
to enter into a contract for the works.
- The appendix provides a document for listing contract data, particularly the
time for completion of the whole works (and for different sections, if
required), amount of insurance, rates of payment for liquidated damages,
and period of maintenance.
General conditions of contract (GCC):

- Conditions of contract which set out the responsibilities of each party.
- GCC consists of clauses expected to be relevant to a range of type of
3
Therefore, to have a sealed contract is to ensure a limitation of 12 years and also to provide consideration for the contract.
6
project and are intended to be used in conjunction with drawings,

specifications and other documents that define the particular scope of the
works.
Special conditions of contract (SCC):

- SCC will cater the need for advancement or changes in the emphasis of
policy, e.g. the emphasis on safety, so we have the pay for the safety
scheme in most contracts nowadays; use of insurances; delayed
possession so as come round with the fundamental breach position as
stated earlier; sections subject to excision, etc.
- We wish that by virtue of such SCC, the prescribed measure of damages
and the situations upon which a deletion is ordered will make the contract
subsisting i.e. not repudiable on the volition of contractors.
- Government maintains a library for these standard special conditions of
clauses.
General specification (GS):

- The GS lays down the quality of materials, the standards of workmanship,
the testing methods and the acceptance criteria for civil engineering works
undertaken for the government.
Particular specification (PS):

- Since the GS provides only the requirements on the quality of materials,
standard of workmanship, methods of testing and the criteria of acceptance
for typical civil engineering works, amplifications and modifications to the
GS were necessary to suit particular circumstances of individual contract
by means of the PS.
- The PS clauses elaborate and supplement the requirements that are not
shown in the drawings.
- The specifications also stipulate the general obligations and special
responsibilities the contractor has to observe and take up respectively in
addition to those stated in the Conditions of Contract.
- Compatibility of all changes must be ensured by the department preparing
the contract documents.
- It is essential to ensure that the PS does not alter or conflict with the GCC
or SCC.
Standard method of measurement (SMM):
7
- The SMM standardize the layout, structure and content of BQ, the rules
and units of the measurements, as well as the descriptions of the items and
the requirements of the unit rates.
- The SMM provides detailed measurement methods and item coverage for
most items in the Bills of Quantities (BQ) of the Contract.
- It provides a guidance to agree to the exact technical manner in which the
quantities are to be measured; to secure uniformity of tendering practice; to
facilitate valuation of extra works and assessment of claims; and to
facilitate interim payment.
Particular preamble:
- For items which are not included in or deviated from the SMM, PP is given
to specify the particular requirements in the method of measurement,
itemisation and item coverage.
Bills of quantities:
- The BQ would be issued with the invitations for tenders.
- The BQ helps the tenderers to realize the nature of the works, and to price
their rates for each item of work.
- In addition, it allows the Employer to compare different contractors by
looking into the rates inserted by different tenders on respective items.
- The priced BQ forms the basis for future valuation of the works, and cost
control during construction stage by comparing the percentage of work
completed with the time elapsed.
Drawings:
- The drawings which show what is to be constructed need to be listed in the
tender documents.
- The tender drawings become the contract drawings unless others or
modified drawings are agreed in tendering period.
- The drawings provide the tenderers with a good perspective of the nature
and extent of the Works.
- The requirements of the works are highlighted in form of notes on the
drawings to supplement or amplify the specification.
7. How to interpret the contract documents?

Things of the same kind:
- The rule that when particular words are followed by general words, the
8
general words are limited to the same kind as that of the particular words4.
Meaning of a word can be considered from the immediate context:

- It simply means that the meaning of a particular word derives its meaning
or derives its colour from those which surround them5.
Mention of one or more things in a particular class is silently excluding all other
members of the class:
- The contract should be so written to avoid such from occurrence.
Interpretation in a way less favourable to the drafter:

- This rule works against the drafter when the clause is having ambiguity.
Delete the surplus clause:

- There is a rule which says any clause which purports to clarify or amplify
another clause but eventually cannot make a more definite meaning of all
the concerned clauses then one may delete the “surplus” clause to have a
clear picture of what was intended.
Implied term/express term:

- An implied term is a term not incorporated in the contract. Such term
should be written into the contract by judges when they have to find out the
efficacy of the contract as a whole.
- It can be said that such a term has a characteristic that someone after
reading the implied term will say that such term must be there without
saying it.
8. How to draft the contract documents?

- Remember when you draft the contract documents, you must draft the
clauses clearly. Say what you intended to say and check the objective
meaning of your words accord with your intention.
- Do not insert clause which have conflicting meaning. Therefore when you
say draft a section of PS once it is completed, you must read it again. Then
you may have to read the section again with the remaining parts of the
4
In the method of measurement, we have extra over for overcoming hard material and hard material means rock, boulder...and
the like; rock is geologoically defined, so as boulder. Under this rule, the general thing can only be limited to the same kind as
that of the particular word. In this case soil cannot be treated as the same kind as rock.
5
Although soil and rock have the same geological composition, is not the same under the method of measurement because rock
and boulder have such a hardness that normal tools cannot break split them up unless by special tools which could be more costly
and time consuming and by virtue of the immediate context.
9
document.
- There is a rule called priority of document i.e. the SCC prevails the GCC.
Similarly drawing and its notes prevails the PS and BQ.
- It is always correct to conclude that the objective meaning of the contract
has to be deduced from whole of the contract. The judge will not try to find
out what is your real intention but interpret the objective meaning of the
clauses.
- Do not rely on the force of an exemption clause too much. There is always
a limit of such an exemption clause, i.e. one cannot exclude all liability of
an event from whatsoever situation.
- Remember general words will be overruled by specific words, and also
remember that very often a term in the contract is defined. The defined
meaning or application will have discrepancy from the common meaning of
the general words.
- In some cases do not over elaborate too much or amplify too much of a
clause. You may say something redundant and may obscure your true
intention.
- Do not try to be too clever in making so-called all-embracing clauses, i.e.
clauses which cover all situations. In this situation write general words. The
more general you write, the more situation you may cover but of course
with less force.
- Never try to dictate what the contractor should do in the contract. What you
stipulate is what he cannot do or what he must do. The contractor is always
a better person to construct his works than the consultant.
- However, if something which must not be done or you cannot allow it to
happen, say so clearly. If it is something forbidden by Law, then better not
repeat it again.
9. Why do the clients employ contractors to carry out the projects?

- To utilize the skills and expertise of contractors for the limited duration of
the projects
- To get contractors to take some of the cost risks of a project with regard of
people, plant, materials, etc
- To get contractors to obtain the financial resources for a project
- To enable the clients focusing on the objectives of the projects
- To have the benefit of contractors’ special resources or skills such as
licensed processes, unique plant, materials, etc.
- To get work started quicker than would be possible by recruiting and
10
training direct staff.

- To encourage the development of successful contractors
10. What are the pros and cons of employing one main contractor?
Advantages:
- One organization is responsible for managing all the people, plant,
materials, sub-contractors, etc.
- The risk of planning and design between contractors may be eliminated.
Disadvantages:
- The whole contract has to be agreed before construction starts
- No direct contractual link with or control of sub-contractors
- The degree of satisfaction of the results are largely depends on capacity
and motivation of the contractor chosen and the planning and management
of the contract by the clients
11. What are the pros and cons of employing joint venture?
Definition:
- Two or more contractors acting together
Advantages:
- Enable the local contractors to work together with experienced international
contractors
- To provide the expertise and resources of individual contractors more
effectively
- One organization is responsible for the project but all partners in the joint
venture should be committed to the success of the project
- To enable the small scale contractors jointing together to compete with the
large contractors
Disadvantages:
- Dispute may arise among the partners in the joint venture
12. What criteria will you consider in selecting the type of the contract?
Client’s expectation:
- Depends on the client’s expectation on speed, quality, economy, flexibility,
experience, etc.
11
Contractor’s knowledge to the type of contract:

- It is also a limitation that some contract forms may not be familiar to the
local contractors
Risk allocation:
- One major consideration in selecting the appropriate type of contract is
how the risks in respect of the design and construction are allocated
between the client and the contractor
- A risk should be the responsibility of whichever party is best able to
manage it to suit the objectives of a project
13. What is the most common type of the contract?

Design by consulting engineer and construct by contractor:
- In the traditional system, the design of a project is carried out by the
consulting engineer employed by the client whereas the construction is
undertaken by the contractor.
- In this way, the client takes up the risk of design and the contractor is
responsible for the construction except those which are out of his control.
Competitive tendering:
- To make a contract like this, tender documents include the contract terms,
drawings, specification and bills of quantities have to be prepared for the
prospective contractors to compete by price.
- The purpose of competitive tendering is to get contractors to compete in
how efficiently they would deploy their manpower and resources to carry
out the works.
- In selecting the most appropriate tenderer, the client should consider the
tenderers, apart from price, resources available, past performance,
proposed construction methods, construction programme, etc.
Advantages:
- The client may choose the cheapest tender
Disadvantages:
- Separate the responsibilities for design and construction – the
designer has to make assumptions on how the project will be carried out
- Engineers employed in one stage of a project cannot see the whole
project which affects their motivation at work
12
14. What are the pros and cons for design and build contract?
Design and build contracts (or turnkey contracts):
15. Can you explain how the risks inherent in different capital works contract
forms be allocated among different parties?
Re-measurement contract with bills of quantities:
- Re-measurement contract form is the most common contract form adopted
for capital works contracts.
- The final measurement will be subject to actual final measurement. Only
the rate for the individual item of work as described in the bills of quantities
will take paramount importance.
- The risks would be shared fairly between the Employer and the Contractor,
and the Contractor is allowed to have an overall control and planning in
carrying out his tendered Works.
- Several bills of quantities have to be prepared for the pricing of the
Contractor and the subsequent tender selection exercise.
- The Employer bears the risk that the quantities shown in the bills are not
accurate enough however large effort has been input during pre-tender
stage.
Re-measurement contract with schedules of rates contract:

- A re-measurement contract can be without bills of quantities but provide
schedule of rates. These rates are for unit quantity of work done.
- Traditional schedule of rate contract is commonly adopted in term contract
for maintenance works. The reasons being that at the time of tendering, the
Employer does not guarantee that a certain scope or amount of
maintenance work will be carried out within the contract period.
- The other feature of this kind of contract is that the rates are pre-fixed by
the Employer. All tenderers will price a percentage of adjustment to the
group of rates.
- If schedule of rate contract form is adopted for a capital works contract, the
Contractor would take the risk of the unknown quantities of the Works and
the Contractor has to cover this risk in his tender price.
- On the other hand, the Employer has the flexibility to not ordering all the
Works.
- For the Works programme, the Employer bears the risk with respect to the
timing and sequence in issuing the Works Orders (WOs).
13
- Unless the sequence and timing of issuing all WOs have been made
known to the Contractor in tendering stage, who could not draw up a
realistic and enforceable contract programme.
- The Engineer shall need to agree with the Contractor the time for
completion of each WO.
Re-measurement contract with modified schedules of rates contract:

- The traditional schedule of rates contract form is modified by incorporating
indicative quantities of Works and an agreed contract programme.
- These modification could avoid the undesirable results associated with
adopting traditional schedule of rates contract form for capital works
contract discussed above.
- With the provision of indicative quantities of the Works, the Contractor
needs not to take a high risk in respect of unknown quantities.
- In adopting this type of contract form, the programme would form a part of
the Contract, which is different from typical capital works contracts for Civil
Engineering Works adopted by the Government.
- Risk would shift to the Employer if there is any change in the timing and
sequence in issuing the WOs from the agreed contract programme like
issuing Variation Orders.
- The merit of this type of contract form is that the Employer has strict control
over the progress of the Works.
- However, both the Employer and the Contractor have to take unknown
contract risks inherent with such non-standard contract form, which is
subject to the test of time.
Pure lump sum contract:

- A single payment is made when the works are completed.
- The risks of actual cost and quantities rest solely with the Contractor.
- However, incentive is given to the contractor to avoid delays to the works.
- It is suitable for projects that are fully designed before tendering process,
and where completion of the works on time is valuable to the clients.
However, civil engineering contracts, especially for sewerage works,
involve a great deal of uncertainty. Changes to the design would lead to
claims from the contractor for extra time and payment
- Therefore such contract form usually can be found building contracts,
design and supply of mechanical and electrical plant/equipment and the
like where the quantities can be estimated with a high degree of certainty.
14
This situation obviously cannot be applied in civil engineering contracts.
Lump sum with bills of quantities contract:

- Lump sum contract substantiates its advantage of good financial
management regarding the certainty of final contract sum if the design work
is sufficiently completed before tender so that there is no necessity for
substantial post-contract design change.
- However, for sewerage projects, in particular for the proposed village
sewerage works, high degree of uncertainty was encountered during the
design stage with regard of ground conditions, underground utilities and
physical site constraint.
- The design of the sewerage system needs to be revised to suit the actual
site condition during the construction stage.
- As such, the advantage associated with lump sum contract diminishes if it
is adopted for the proposed sewerage works project.
Design and build contract:

- This is not a usual form of contract used in contracts for public sectors.
- The contractor is responsible for both design and construction of the
project
- Disadvantage of this kind of contract is that the client has to specify the
performance required.
Turkey and build-operate-transfer (BOT) contract:

- This contract form is very often used in mega projects when the employer
himself does not provide funds.
- The Contractor provides funds for the design, build, maintenance and in
the latter case, the running of the project for a limited time and the transfer
of technology including training of personnel, before the finished project is
delivered to the hands of the employer.
- The financial element of this contract form sometimes dictate their content,
e.g. the provision of funds, any guarantee of the Employer to the money
lenders, the mode of transfer of technology to the Employer, the charging
of levies of those people using or enjoying the benefit of the project, etc.
- Sometimes, government may have to legislate certain byelaws or
ordinances in order to provide a legal basis for the fund raising, the
charging of levies, the mode and mechanism of resuming land, and its
future operation, etc.
15
- In Hong Kong, we can find such arrangement in MTRC, KCRC projects,

cross harbour tunnels, or the running of landfills by private companies, etc.
- Apart from the funding aspect, a turnkey or BOT contract is just another
blend of design and build contract.
16. Why do we need standard forms of contract?

- The standardized contract forms has been drafted mainly by people
experienced in engineering and construction, and thus they are intended to
provide a basis for settling problems reasonably and fairly.
- The wording has been considered carefully to try to make sure that it is
clear and unambiguous.
- The standard forms of contract have been used in many projects which
should be known and understood by employers, engineers and contractors.
The duties of contractors, employers and engineers have been
standardized.
- The risks inherent in civil engineering works have been distributed fairly
among different parties.
17. Can the contractor’s deductions from total of the bill be applied to extra
work?
Adjustment to total of the bills:
- In re-measurement contract, a contractor can make an adjustment
(addition/deduction) to the grand summary of the bills of quantities as a
short way of revising all his rates proportionately.
Adjustment by means of a percentage:

- If the contractor inserted a percentage for the adjustment, such revision
should apply to the rates for all his work, including the additional works.
Adjustment by means of a fixed amount:

- If the contractor inserted a fixed amount for the adjustment, the concerned
adjustment should be restricted to the original work only.
- In this connection, no adjustment should be made for the rates as inserted
in the bills of quantities for the valuation of variation, presuming that the
item selected is appropriate.
18. Can you give me some examples for breach of contract?
16
Failure to comply with specification:

- Generally defects in compliance can be remedied, but wrong construction
or the destruction of materials, etc. can make it impossible for the works as
specified ever to be constructed.
- Failure to comply with the specification is likely to be a breach of warranty.
Delay in performance:
- Under common law time is taken to be “of the essence” of a contract unless
a contrary intention is clearly shown.
- If no date or period for completion has been explicitly stated, a reasonable
time will be inferred to be binding.
- Equitable considerations prevail and “specific performance” is required plus
the payment of damages for delay.
- Delays caused by an employer such as in giving access to the site, delivery
of drawings, nomination of nominated sub-contractors or in giving
instructions can be breaches by an employer.
- If completion is rendered impossible because of a fault of his employer
then a contractor will have a right to payment for the work actually done by
means of “quantum merit”.
Delay in payment:
- Interference by an employer in the issue by the Engineer of certificates or
delay in making payments would be breach.
- A Contractor is at liberty to treat this only as a breach of warranty and seek
damages in compensation.
Conduct of the parties:

- This covers a great variety of matters dealt with in the conditions of
contract, for instance if a contractor refuses to accept instructions, failure to
take care for safety or to obey regulations.
19. What is retention money?

- A percentage of payments will be retained by the Employer until a specified
period after taking over the works.
- The amount is then released if the contractor has completed his obligations
such as rectifying defected work.
- The potential advantage to the Employer is that a contractor should have
the incentive to complete his obligations.
17
- In some cases, the contractor may even realise that his resources can earn
more if used instead on work for other contracts. To anticipate this the
employer can have specified a larger percentage retention of payments
when inviting tenders, but at the risk that the tender prices will therefore be
higher to meet the greater costs and risks to the contractors.
- The contractor does not cease to be liable to the Employer or to other
parties for defects or their consequences by being paid the retention
money.
Q1 Will you allow the construction works to commence without the effect of
third party insurance?
Q2 Will the Contractor be entitled to EOT or payment for any disruption of

works due to utility undertakings?
Q3 Can the Employer rescind the contract for delay/poor workmanship/poor

safety performance?
18
Topic: Different Parties in Civil Engineering Contracts
1. Can you introduce different parties in a public works contract?

Employer:
- Pursuant to the General Conditions of Contract for Civil Engineering Works
(GCC) Clause 1(1), the “Employer” means the Hong Kong Special
Administrative Region Government.
- Usually, the Government departments are responsible for the award and
administration of the Contract would be the Employer of the Contract.
- Works group departments include Architectural Services Department, Civil
Engineering and Development Department, Drainage Services Department,
Water Supplies Department, Highways Department and Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department.
- The Employer should provide the Contractor the lands and other places in
which the Works are to be constructed for the purpose of the execution of
the Works.
- Throughout the progress of the Contract, the Employer should effect
payment to the Contractor.
- The Employer should have a consultancy agreement with the Engineer for
the Contract and a construction contract with the Contractor.
Engineer:
- When a Contract is entered between the Employer and the Contractor, an
Engineer is appointed by the Employer to administer the Contract.
- The “Engineer” is defined in GCC Clause 1(1) as “the person, company or
firm appointed from time to time by the Employer and notified in writing to
the Contractor to act as the Engineer for the purposes of the Contract.
- The person named or authorized may be described by name or as the
holder for the time being of a public office.
- For government contracts, Chief Engineer or above may be named as the
Engineer for the in-house projects, while Partner-in-charge in consultants’
firms will serve such role for projects undertaken by them.
- They are the Employer’s representatives and are responsible for preparing
the design and drawings for the Works and subsequent administration of
the Contracts.
- While the Engineer is employed by the Employer, and is bound to protect
the client’s interest, he is also required to act professionally in an impartial
role to make fair and reasonable decision.
1
- The role, functions, duties, powers/authority and limitations of the

designated “Engineer” in civil engineering contracts are specified in the
contract documents between the Employer and the Contractor.
- Specific rights and responsibilities of the Engineer, who is a consultancy
organisation, are detailed in the Consultancy Agreement between the Client
and Consultant.
- These functions and responsibilities include the design of the permanent
works, documentation of the design and preparation and issue of tender
documents.
- They would also include tender evaluation to select the Contractor, contract
management and site supervision.
- To avoid confusion of the design, it is useful to have same consultant
undertaking these functions.
- Contract management refers to the “running” of the construction contract –
once awarded to a Contractor and signed with the Client.
- The Engineer manages this Contract on behalf of the Employer, and is
usually empowered to make most decisions, except where substantial extra
costs or delays are involved.
- The roles and duties of the Engineer would therefore include: supervising
of the Works for both permanent and temporary; issuing instructions to the
Contractor; valuing Contractor’s work done; evaluating extensions of time
needed/claimed and liquidated damages; evaluating variations to the
Works; issue certificates (completion certificate, maintenance certificate
and payment certificates) of the Works; adjudication of dispute in the first
instance, etc.
- However, the role of the Engineer in adjudication dispute has been
questioned, since the Engineer’s staff may have been involved in the
dispute themselves.
- As representatives of the Employer and being paid by the Employer, it is
often asked how the Engineer could remain impartial.
- The main answer (counter-arguments to this) is based on the
professionalism of the Engineer and the standardized procedures that may
be used.
Engineer’s Representative:
- The definition of the Engineer’s Representative (ER) is given in GCC
Clause (1).
- He should be “any person or persons appointed from time to time by the
2
Engineer and notified in writing to the Contractor to perform the duties set
forth in Clause 2(2).
- The person appointed may be described by name or as the holder for the
time being of a public office.
- As stated in Clauses 2(2), the ER’s duties include three areas namely: (a)
to watch and inspect the Works: (b) to test and examine any material to be
used and workmanship; (c) to carry out such duties and exercise such
powers vested in the Engineer in accordance with the provisions of Clause
2(3).
- ER, usually, relates to work that require close attention no Site, day-to-day
discussion with the Contractor and on Site decision which are not practical
to refer to the Engineer.
- Generally, the duties of the ER in contract administration included:
checking setting out; inspecting the Works in general for quality control;
checking site and safety conditions; monitoring works progress against the
programme; supervising the testing and checking the compliances of
materials; issuing site instructions; arranging measurements of the Works;
organizing site meetings and compiling minutes; maintaining necessary site
records; assisting the Engineer in valuing variation orders and processing
interim payments, etc.
- The ER must clear about the extent of his power and should inform the
Engineer as soon as possible for any matters that require the Engineer’s
decision.
- He must keep the Employer informed of the current and anticipated works
progress and expenditure and should ensure that the Works are completed
satisfactorily within the specified time, budget and quality.
- The ER should possess a helpful and cooperative attitude towards the
Contractor and provide prompt reply to the Contractor.
- He should remind the Contractor immediately whenever he identifies or
foresees any problem.
Contractor:
- The “Contractor” means the person, firm or company whose Tender has
been accepted by the Employer and includes the Contractor’s personal
representatives, successors and permitted assigns.
- The Contractor is required to execute the Works or provide the services in
strict accordance with the provisions stipulated in the Contract.
- Contractor is required to meet stipulated criteria, such as experience, plant,
3
and finance, before they are permitted to tender.

- The Hong Kong SAR Government has devised a very comprehensive set
of rules governing the eligibility of tenderers for government contracts.
- They are Contractors in the appropriate Categories and Groups of the
Approved Contractors for Public Works.
- There are five categories of Contractors, namely, buildings, port works,
roads and drainage, site formation and waterworks.
- Contractors are also categorized into 3 Groups based on their financial
capability and past performance records in government contracts.
Sub-contractors:
- It is common for construction contractors to sub-let parts of the Works that
they have contracted to perform, e.g. different elements of the Works or
separate parts.
- In Hong Kong, it is also common for such sub-contractors to sub-let in turn
by trade, e.g. excavations, bar bending etc.
- The main contractor would have the obligations to organize works of their
sub-contractors to achieve the target performance as laid down by the main
contract.
- There are 2 types of sub-contractors, viz. domestic sub-contractors and
nominated sub-contractors.
- Domestic sub-contractors are chosen and appointed by the main contractor,
subject to any approval that may be required under the main contract.
- Nominated sub-contractors are nominated by the Employer for specific
items of the Works, e.g. lifts in buildings, electrical and mechanical
systems.
- The main contractor still has to co-ordinate works among nominated
sub-contractors
2. What are the particular duties and responsibilities of the Engineer towards
the Employer?
Design:
- The Engineer obliges to provide a design which is skilful, effective within
financial limits imposed by the Employer (client).
- There is an implied warranty by an engineer who undertakes design that it
will fit the purpose made known to him.
Examination of the site:
4
- The Engineer is not entitled to rely solely on information provided to him by

the Employer as to the nature of ground.
Estimate of project cost:

-
Recommending form of contract:
- An engineer has a responsibility for the appropriateness or deficiencies in
the conditions of contract he recommends for use.
Recommending contractors:
- The Engineer does not guarantee the capacity of a contractor but may
have a duty to make reasonable inquiries thereon if he, rather than the
Employer, is responsible directly or indirectly for selection of the contractor.
Preparation of bills of quantities and measurement:

- Reasonable accuracy is required, but mistakes will occur and are accepted.
Certification:
- The Engineer must exercise reasonable care and may be liable for
damages suffered due to negligence certification.
3. What are the particular duties and responsibilities of the Engineer towards
the Contractor?
Disclosure of information at tender stage:
- The Employer was found liable for a contractor’s damages resulting from
the Employer’s failure to disclose knowledge that his agent possessed at
the time of bidding.
Delivery of drawings and instructions:

- Drawings necessary for the execution of the Works are to be provided
within a reasonable time of the obligation arising.
- For original works the obligation arises at the date of contract, for variations
at the date they are ordered, but not necessarily in sufficient time for a
contractor to execute and complete the work in an economic and
expeditious manner and/or in sufficient time to prevent his being delayed in
such execution and completion.
- Reasonable time does not depend solely on the convenience and financial
interests of a contractor.
5
4. Who is responsible for the stability of temporary works?

GCC Clause 10:
- The Contractor shall execute the Works and provide, among other,
Temporary Works required for the execution of the Works which may be
specified in or inferred from the Contract.
GCC Clause 20(1):

- The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the adequate stability and
safety of all operations on the Site and all persons on the Site.
The Contractor’s responsibilities to the Employer:

- If Temporary Works which are not designed by the Engineer are
inadequate or defective, the Contractor must supplement or rectify them in
order to perform his contract by completing the permanent works.
- If damage to the permanent or temporary works does occur as a result of
such deficiencies, the Contractor are liable to such.
- In the process of achieving satisfactory temporary works the Contractor
may become entitled to extra payment, but the Engineer’s approval of
temporary works does not relieve the Contractor of liability specified in the
Contract.
The Engineer’s responsibilities to the Employer:

- The Engineer has a duty to ensure that the completed permanent works
will not be adversely affected by stresses due to the Contractor’s temporary
works, and that temporary works are in fact constructed in accordance with
the design.
- The Employer seeks works finished on time, not a right to damages against
the Contractor, and a serious failure of temporary works may delay
completion of the permanent works. In addition, even if he is entitled to an
indemnity from the Contractor, the Employer scarcely will be happy to have
injuries to life in the course of the Works being constructed for him. Actual
or threaten damage to neighbouring property may halt the permanent
works.
The Engineer’s responsibilities to the Contractor:

- The Engineer has no duty to the Contractor to detect or prevent faults in
temporary works.
6
- The Engineer appointed to protect the Employer, not the Contractor.
The Contractor’s responsibilities to workers and public:

- The Contractor clearly is liable to his employees and to third parties if he
breaks his duty of care in designing or constructing temporary works.
- The Contractor is also liable if he follows a design of the Engineer when he
knew or should as a competent and careful Contractor have known it was
faulty.
The Engineer’s responsibilities to workers and public:

- Generally speaking, the Engineer is not bound to look for defects in
temporary works.
- Nevertheless, if the Engineer, as a careful and competent engineer,
recognizes a danger of injury to the person or property of another, but does
not then take reasonable care to avoid the injury via some action which he
has power to take, it may be that he will be liable.
5. What is the duty of the Engineer’s Representative?

Engineer’s Representative:
7
Topic: General Conditions of Contract for Civil Engineering Contracts
Definitions and Interpretation

1. Definitions
1(1) Definitions of the words and expressions:
“Employer1”; “Contractor2”; “Engineer3”; and “Engineer’s Representative4”;
“Works5”; “Section6”; “Site7”; “Portion”; and “Temporary Works8”;
“Specialist Works9”; “Specialist Contractor10”; and “Nominated Sub-contractor11”;
“Contract”; “Tender”; “Specification”; and “Drawings”; and “Maintenance Period”
“Contract Sum12”; “Final Contract Sum”; “Contingency Sum13”; “Provisional Sum14”;
“Prime Cost Sum”; “Retention Money”; and “Cost15”;
“Constructional Plant16”; “General Holiday17”; and “Hong Kong”
1(2) Words importing singular only also include the plural and vice versa
1(3) The index and marginal notes of GCC, SCC and Specification are not taken into
consideration
1(4) (a) All payments shall be made in Hong Kong dollars

(b) No adjustment to the Final Contract Sum in respect of variation in exchange
rate
1(5) The Contract shall be governed by and construed in all respect according to the
laws for the time being18 in force in Hong Kong.
Engineer and Engineer’s Representative

2. Duties and powers of the Engineer and the Engineer’s representative
2(1) Duties and powers of the Engineer
(a) The Engineer shall carry out the duties and exercise the powers specified in
1
How about the Contract awarded before 1st July 1997?
2
One person only, include his successor
3
One person only. Any qualification? Can the Contractor objects to the appointment of the Engineer?
4
May be more than one person. Can the Contractor objects to the appointment of the ER?
5
Includes Temporary Works
6
No allowance for a separate time for commencement. SCC should be incorporated in such case.
7
Restricted to places provided by the Employer. Not include casting yard and the like outside Hong Kong.
8
Temporary work required for the construction, completion and maintenance of the works. Site Offices?
9
Any work separately identified in the Contract which is carried out by a Specialist Contractor
10
Employed by the Employer to carry out Specialist Works
11
Nominated by the Employer and employed by the Contractor. May simply a material supplier
12
Equal to Tender sum?
13
Sum for work or expenditure which cannot be foreseen at tendering stage
14
Sum for work or expenditure which cannot be quantified at tendering stage
15
Includes overhead on or off the Site and depreciation of Constructional Plant
16
Not include construction materials, contract vehicles, trucks, barges, etc..
17
Difference with Public Holiday?
18
What happen if they are changed?
1
or necessarily to be implied from the Contract.

(b) Before carrying out any such duty or exercising such power, the Engineer may
be required to obtain confirmation of no objection from the Employer to his
proposed action or otherwise to act in accordance with the Employer’s
direction. Such requirements shall be set out in the Appendix to Form of
Tender19.
(c) The Contractor’s rights shall not be prejudiced20 due to the failure on the
part of the Engineer.
(d) The Engineer shall have no power to amend the terms and conditions of the
Contract.
2(2) Duties of the ER: to watch and inspect the Works; to test and examine any
material to be used and workmanship employed by the Contractor; to carry out such
duties and exercise delegated by the Engineer in accordance with sub-clause (3)
of this Clause.
2(3) The Engineer may from time to time delegate to the ER any of the duties and
powers vested in him. Written instruction or approval given by the ER shall be
deemed to be given by the Engineer.
(a) Failure of the ER to disapprove any work/material shall not prejudice the power
of the Engineer to disapprove it.
(b) In case any decision of the ER is unsatisfactory to either the Contractor or the
Employer, such matter shall be referred to the Engineer for subsequent
decision.
2(4) The Contractor’s duties, responsibilities, obligations or liabilities imposed upon him
shall not be relieved by any act21 or omission by the Engineer or the ER.
Assignment and Sub-contracting

3. Assignment
3 The Contractor shall not assign 22 the Contract without the consent of the
Employer.
4. Sub-contracting
4(1) The Contractor shall not sub-contract the Works23. However, unless it is expressly
prohibited by the Contract, the Contractor may sub-contract a part of the Works in
19
For those which may commit the Employer to additional expenditure of a value estimated to exceed $0.3M (eg. VO). WBTC 20/2000.
20
In case the Engineer issues a VO with estimate exceeding $0.3M, is the VO valid?
21
What is act? May be right indeed?
22
Assignment is the transfer of the liability of the Contractor
2
respect of the provision of labour and materials
4(2) The Contractor may sub-contract a part of the Works in respect of provision of
Constructional Plant24 unless it is expressly prohibited by the Engineer.
4(3) The Engineer may order removal of any sub-contractor from the Site and/or the
Works if he considers it necessary.
4(4) The Contractor shall not be relieved from any liabilities or obligation by sub-
contracting, particularly for the provision of superintendence (Clause 17).
4(5) The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with full particulars of any sub-contractor
employed on the Works if it is required by the Engineer.
Contract Documents
5. Documents mutually explanatory
5(1) Unless any SCC provides to the contrary, the provisions of these GCC shall prevail
over those of any other documents forming part of the Contract.
5(2) The documents forming the Contract are deemed to be mutually explanatory of one
another. In case any ambiguities or discrepancies, it shall be explained and
clarified by the Engineer by issuing an instruction25 to the Contractor.
(a) For work which is shown on the Drawings or described in the Specification but
not measured in the BQ26, they shall be dealt with Clause 59.
(b) If such instruction involves any expense, the Engineer shall value the
expense in accordance with Clause 61 and shall certify in accordance with
Clause 79.
(c) If such instruction involves any saving, the Engineer shall value the saving
and deduct the same from the Contract accordingly.
6. Provision of Drawings and Specification

6(1) The Contractor shall be furnished27 with free of charge 2 copies of the Contract and
2 additional copies of the Drawings.
6(2) If requested by the Contractor, the Engineer shall provide the Contractor with further
copies of the Drawings with charges
23
Not permitted to sub-contract the whole Works? Or else?
24
Why is it different with the provision of labour and materials in sub-clause (1)?
25
Such instruction may have time and cost implication on the Contractor
26
Missing items
3
6(3) The Engineer may issue to the Contractor during the progress of the Works any
other Drawings and Specification28.
6(4) The Contractor may request the Engineer to provide other Drawings or
Specification29 that may be required for the execution of the Works.
6(5) The Contractor shall keep one copy of the Drawings on the Site for inspection
6(6) At completion of the Works, the Contractor shall return to the Engineer all Drawings
and other documents provided, other than the Contractor’s signed copy30.
7. Drawings provided by the Contractor for the Works

7(1) If the Contractor is required to submit any Drawings or documents31, such Drawings
and documents shall be submitted to the Engineer at a reasonable time32 before the
associated work is to be carried out. The Engineer shall give or refuse his approval
within a reasonable time33.
7(2) In case the Engineer is dissatisfied with the proposals set out, the Contractor shall
make such amendments at no additional expense to the Employer.
7(3) The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the type and number of copies of
such Drawings and documents within 14 days of the Engineer’s approval.
7(4) If it is found after the approval by the Engineer the details do not comply with the
terms and conditions of the Contract nor the Drawings and documents submitted
previously, the Contractor shall make such alterations or additions necessary to
remedy such non-compliance or non-agreement at his own expense.
7(5) No examination and approval by the Engineer shall absolve the Contractor from any
liability for the Contract.
8. Information not to be divulged

8(1) The Contractor shall not use or divulge any information provided by the Employer or
the Engineer in the Contract for other purposes.
27
Any definite date specified?
28
Such new/additional Drawings and Specification may be a variation or anything else which might have cost and time implication
29
What does that mean? Does it include any document not bound in the Contract, e.g. British Standards?
30
What is the signed copy?
31
Submissions include method statements, material submissions, temporary works design, etc..
32
Such time should be stated in the Specification
4
8(2) The Engineer and the Employer shall not use any information provided by the
Contractor for the purposes other than of the Contract or of carrying out any repair,
amendment, extension or other work connected with the Works.
9. Use of English language

9 The Contract and all other things in connection with the Contract in accordance with
Clause 7 shall be in English.
General Obligations
10. Extent of Contract
10 The Contractor shall execute the Works and provide all labour, materials,
Constructional Plant, Temporary Works, transport to and from the Site and
everything required for such execution which may be specified in or inferred from
the Contract.
11. Contractor to execute Articles of Agreement

11 The Contractor shall enter into and execute Articles of Agreement34 at the expense
of the Employer when called upon to do so.
12. Sureties or security

12 If the Contract so required, the Contractor shall either:
(a) obtain the guarantee of an insurance company or bank to be jointly and
severally bound together with him to the Employer in the sum stated in the
Form of Tender, or
(b) Deposit with the Director of Accounting Services as security.
When the certificate of completion is issued, the said guarantee or deposit sum shall
be released or repaid to the Contractor.
13. Inspection of the Site

13(1) The Contractor shall be deemed to have examined and inspected the Site and its
surroundings and to have satisfied himself the nature of the work and materials
necessary for the execution of the Works and to have obtained his own information
on all matters affecting his Tender and the execution of the Works.
13(2) The Contractor shall not claim for additional payment in respect of any
misunderstanding of the matters referred to in sub-clause (1) or incorrect or
33
No silence.
34
To add a further 6 years for the limitation period of action
5
insufficient information provided by the Employer or the failure of the Contractor to

obtain correct and sufficient information. The Contractor shall not be relieved from
any risk or obligation imposed on him.
14. Sufficiency of Tender

14 The Contractor shall be satisfied himself as to the correctness and sufficiency of his
Tender and the rates stated in the BQ shall cover all his risks, liabilities and
obligations set out or implied in the Contract.
15 Works to be to the satisfaction of the Engineer

15 The Contractor shall execute the Works in strict accordance with the Contract and
shall comply with and adhere strictly to the Engineer’s instruction, unless it is legally
or physically impossible.
16 Programme to be furnished
16(1) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a programme showing the sequence,
method and timing (including due allowance for Works carried out by Specialist
Contractor and utility undertakings) within 14 days of the acceptance of the Tender.
The Engineer may request the Contractor its proposed arrangement of the Works,
including the deployment of the Constructional Plant and Temporary Works.
16(2) The programme (including the subsequent revisions) and other associated
particulars submitted by the Contractor do not relieve the Contractor of any duty or
responsibility under the Contract.
17 Contractor’s superintendence
17(1) The Contractor shall give and provide all necessary superintendence.
17(2) The Contractor shall be at all time represented on the Site by a competent
authorized English-speaking agent approved by the Engineer. The agent shall be
constantly on Site and shall give his whole time to the superintendence of the
Works35.
17(3) The Engineer may withdraw his approval of the authorized agent at any time. Such
agent shall be removed forthwith and shall not be employed again on the Site in any
capacity36.
35
That means the agent is full time. Is there any database for the employment records for Site Agent as SO?
36
Can he be re-employ upon the written permission of the Engineer? Can he be employed for the Works, but not on the Site?
6
17(4) The authorized agent shall receive instructions from the Engineer and the ER on
behalf of the Contractor.
18 Contractor’s employees
18(1) The Contractor shall provide and employ on the Site37:
(a) technical personnel as are skilled and experienced in their respective trades
and sub-agent and foreman as are competent to give proper supervision to the
work.
(b) Skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour
18(2) The Engineer may require the Contractor to remove forthwith from the Works any
person employed by him. Such person shall not be employed again upon the Works
without written permission by the Engineer.
18(3) Any person removed from the Works shall be replaced by other as soon as possible.
19 Setting-out
19(1) The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting-out of the Works
and for the correctness of the position, level, dimensions and alignment of all parts
of the Works.
19(2) The Contractor shall rectified any error appeared in the position, level, dimensions
or alignment of any part of the Works at his own expense, unless such error is
based on incorrect data provided by the Engineer or the ER in which case the
rectification shall be treated as a VO (Clause 60).
19(3) The checking of any setting out or any line or level by the Engineer or the ER shall
not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for their correctness.
20 Safety and security of the Works

20(1) The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the adequate stability and safety of all
operations on the Site (except that by Specialist Contractor and utility undertaking)
and all persons on the Site.
20(2) The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary and required measures for
the protection of the Works or for the safety and convenience of the public or others.
20(3) The Contractor shall ensure the Site where work is carried out is sufficiently lighted.
37
Qualified tradesmen and intermediate tradesmen
7
20(4) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer proposals showing scheme for any road
opening or traffic diversion. Such schemes shall be implemented upon the approval
by the Engineer.
21 Care of the Works

21(1) Starting from the date for commencement of the Works notified by the Engineer
(Clause 47) until 28 days 28 days after the date of completion of the Works notified
by the Engineer (Clause 53) or until the date the Employer takes over the Works, if
earlier, the Contractor shall take full responsibility for the care of the Works (except
the stability and safety of the operations of Specialist Contractors and utility
undertakings.
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the care of any outstanding work
which is to be finished during the Maintenance Period until they are completed38.
21(2) In case of any damage, loss or injury not caused by the “excepted risks”, the
Contractor shall at his own expense and with all possible speed make good or pay
to the Employer the cost of making good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
21(3) If the damage, loss or injury arises from any of the “excepted risks” defined in
sub-clause (4), the Contractor shall repair and make good the same at the expense
of the Employer. Any sum payable shall be valued in accordance with Clause 60.
21(4) “Excepted risks”:

- outbreak of war (Hong Kong is actively engaged);
- invasion of Hong Kong;
- act of foreign terrorists in Hong Kong39;
- civil war
- riot, commotion or disorder in Hong Kong otherwise than amongst the
employees of the Contractor, any sub-contractor or Specialist Contractor
currently or formerly engaged on the Works or Specialist Works40;
- a cause due to the occupation by the Employer;
- direct consequence of the Engineer’s design of the Works;
- any neglect or default by the Engineer or the Employer; etc;
- ionization
22 Damage to persons and property
38
No provision of the 28 days.
39
How about local and mainland terrorists?
8
22(1) The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all losses and claims for injury
or damage to any person/property other than surface or damage to land or crops on
the Site41.
22(2) The Contractor shall make good or pay to the Employer the cost of making good for
any damage, loss or injury to any property of the Employer and shall recompense
the Employer in respect of any damage, loss or injury to any employee of the
Employer.
The Contractor’s liability of the above shall be reduced proportionately if the act or
neglect of the Engineer or the Employer have contributed to the damage, loss or
injury.
The Contractor is not deemed to be liable in case:
- such effect is the unavoidable result of the execution of the Works; or
- the right of the Employer to construct Works on any land42.
22(3) The indemnities given by the Contractor shall not be rendered ineffective or reduced
negligence43 or omission of the Employer/the Engineer/the ER in carrying out their
duties.
23 Design responsibility
23 The Contractor shall not be responsible for the design of the permanent work.
24 Interference with traffic and adjoining properties

24(1) Execution of the Works shall not interfere unnecessary or improperly with the public
or any access.
24(2) The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer in respect of all claims, demands, etc.
arising from such matters.
25 Remedy on failure to insure

25 If the Contractor fails to effect and keep in force any insurance, the Employer may
effect and keep any such insurance and shall be recoverable by the Employer from
the Contractor.
26 Accident or injury to workers

26 The Employer shall not be liable for any damages or compensation payable in
40
How about those employee of the Contractor engaged in another Contract, i.e. another Works?
41
Not includes the crops on the Site? How about those adjacent to the Site then?
42
Not the Site?
43
Seem contradict with (a) above. What is the difference between neglect and negligence?
9
respect of any accident or injury to any worker or other person employed by the
Contractor.
27 Contractor to give notice of injury

27 For any worker or other person employed on the Works suffering an personal injury,
the Contractor shall notify the Commissioner for Labour and report the matter to the
Engineer.
28 Patent rights and royalties

28 The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer from and against all claims for and on
account of infringement of any patent rights, design, etc. in respect of any
Constructional Plant, machine, work, method or material. The Contractor shall
also pay all tonnage and other royalties, etc.
If the Contractor shall incorporate any patented article, process or invention into
the permanent work, the Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Employer for any
such expense in respect of any infringement.
29 Giving of notices and payment of fees

29 The Contractor shall give all notice and pay all licences or other fees required to be
paid by any regulation in relation to the execution of the Works.
30 Compliance with enactments and regulations

30 The Contractor shall conform with all provisions of any enactment, regulations and
rules.
31 Notices to be written in English and Chinese

31 Any notice which the Contractor may have to exhibit to the public or his employee
shall be written in English and Chinese.
32 Site diary and labour returns

32(1) The ER shall record daily in the Engineer’s site diary information with regard to
labour, plant, materials, utilities, work carried out and instructions issued to the
Contractor and all other facts that may affect the progress or quality of the Works.
32(2) The authorized agent or representative of the Contractor shall sign the site diary
daily indicating his agreement to the information recorded and, if any, draw
reference to the points of disagreement.
32(3) The Contractor may be required to provide the information concerning labour,
10
materials, Constructional Plant and other such matters as ER may require.
33 Fossils
33 All fossils, coins, structures, etc. discovered on the Site shall be the absolute
property of the Employer. The Contractor shall prevent his worker from removing or
damaging such and shall immediately acquaint the Engineer or the ER of such
discovery and carry out at the expense of the Employer to dispose the same.
34 Facilities for other persons

34(1) The Contractor shall afford all reasonable facilities44 for any person who may be
carrying out any work on or adjacent to the Site not stated in the Contract but
required by the Employer, utility undertaking or other duly constituted authority.
34(2) In case the Contractor shall be requested by the Employer to:

(a) make available road for maintenance to45
(b) permit the use of any Constructional Plant on the Site by
(c) provide any other service to
any person as stated above, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor in respect of
such use or service.
35 Clearance of the Site on completion

35 As soon as practicable46 after the issue of the certificate of completion (Clause 53),
the Contractor shall clear away and remove from the Site all surplus materials and
rubbish and leave the Site in a clean and tidy condition.
36 Publication of photographs of the Site or the Works

36(1) The Contractor shall not publish or circulate photographs of the Site or of the Works
except with the written permission of the Employer47.
36(2) Such permission shall not exempt the Contractor from complying with any statutory
provision in regard to the taking and publication of photographs.
37 Offering Gratuities
37 If the Contractor shall be found to have offered any gratuity to the employee of the
Employer and the Engineer, the Employer may terminate forthwith the employment
of the Contractor.
44
How to classify what reasonable facilities are?
45
Why should it be paid?
46
No a definite time limit
47
Copyright
11
38 Site cleanliness
38 The Contractor shall keep the Site in a clean and hygienic condition.
Labour
39 Engagement of labour
39(1) The Contractor shall arrange for a sufficient and suitable supply of labour.
39(2) As far as practicable, all labour both skilled and unskilled shall be engaged in
Hong Kong.
40 Fair wages
40(1) The Contractor shall not pay less favorable than the general wages, hours and
conditions observed by other employers in the trade.
40(2) The Contractor shall in respect of all persons employed by him comply with the
conditions required by this Clause.
40(3) The Contractor shall be responsible for the observance of this Clause by
sub-contractors.
40(4) In case the Contractor fails in the payment of any money in respect of wages48 and
if a claim is filed in the Labour Department and proof thereof is furnished to the
Commissioner for Labour, the Employer may on behalf of the Contractor make
payment of such claim and any sums so paid shall be recoverable by the Employer
from the Contractor.
41 Passes
41(1) The Engineer may require the issue of passes for the admission of workers to
the Site.
41(2) The Engineer may require the Contractor to submit a list of names of all his workers
requiring passes.
41(3) Any pass so issued shall be returned at any time on the demand of the
Engineer.
Materials and Workmanship
48
How about the payment to suppliers and sub-contractors?
12
42 Quality of materials, workmanship and tests

42(1) All materials and workmanship shall comply with the requirements specified in the
Contract and to the satisfaction of the Engineer
42(2) The Contractor shall provide any necessary assistance and samples of material in
carrying out examination
42(3) The Contractor shall bear the expense of any examination which is specified in the
Contract
42(4) For examination not specified in the Contract, the Contractor shall bear the expense
if the results of such review that the materials/workmanship does not comply with
the requirements of the Contract, otherwise, valued with Clause 61
42(5) In case the results of any examination review that the materials/workmanship does
not comply with the requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall carry out
further/other tests at his own expense.
42(6) Sub-clause (4) and (5) apply to any series of tests
42(7) Tests carried out in the Employer’s laboratories shall be free of charge
43 Access to the Site and places of manufacture

43 The Engineer shall have access to the Site and places of manufacture. The Contract
shall render every assistance in providing such access
44 Examination of work before covering up

44(1) No work shall be covered up without the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall afford full opportunity for the Engineer to examine and measure any work
before covering up.
44(2) The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to the ER whenever such work is ready
for examination or measurement. The Engineer or the ER shall without
unreasonable delay carry out the examination or measurement.
45 Uncovering and making opening

45(1) As the Engineer may from time to time direct, the Contractor shall uncover any part
of the Works and reinstate and make good any such afterwards
13
45(2) If the work has complied with the requirements of Clause 44, the expense of
uncovering shall be valued with Clause 61. Otherwise, such cost shall be borne by
the Contractor49.
46 Removal of unsatisfactory material and work

46(1) The Engineer may order:
(a) removal from the Site any non-compliance materials
(b) substitution of proper and suitable material
(c) removal and re-execution any non-compliance work50
46(2) The Contractor shall bear the expense of uncovering, breaking up and removal any
non-compliance work and subsequently reinstating and making good of such
46(3) In case the rectification of the work or the replacement of the material involved the
removal and re-execution of the original permanent work, the Engineer may give a
variation in lieu of the removal and re-execution. If such VO involves expense in
excess of removal or re-execution, only such excess should be valued with Clause
61 and certified with Clause 79
46(4) For removal of materials provided by the Employer under sub-clause (1), the
Engineer shall ascertain the Cost51 incurred and certify with Clause 79.
Commencement, Completion and Delays

47 Commencement of the Works
47 The Contractor shall commence the Works on the date for commencement as
notified by the Engineer.
48 Possession of the Site

48(1) The Employer shall give to the Contractor possession of so much of the Site on the
date for commencement
48(2) If the Contractor has been involved in additional payment due to delay possession of
the Site, the Engineer shall value the Cost52 incurred with Clause 79
48(3) The Contractor shall bear all expense in connection with access to the Site
49
No matter the covered work complies or not, such uncovering shall be borne by the Contractor.
50
Such removal is ordered notwithstanding the previous examination, measurement, test or interim payment
51
Not Clause 61, but Cost
52
Cost again
14
49 Time for completion

49(1) The Works/Section of the Works shall be completed within the time(s) for completion
as stated in the Appendix to the Form of Tender
49(2) General Holidays shall be included in the time for completion
50 Extension of time for completion

50(1)(a) The Contractor shall notify to the Engineer of any delay within 28 days53 after the
cause
(b) The Contractor shall be fairly entitled to an EOT if the cause of delay is in the
opinion of the Engineer justifiable
(c) No EOT shall be granted to the Contractor if the cause of delay is not justified
50(2) The Engineer shall within a reasonable time determine, grant and notify the
Contractor of such extension. So do when no EOT would be granted. The
Contractor may request for a review for further EOT54
50(2A) For EOT granted after recovering of LD, the EOT granted shall be extended from the
previous extended period
50(3) The Engineer may request the Contractor to submit full and detailed particulars for
him to assessing the EOT
50(4) Whenever EOT granted, the Contractor shall revise the Clause 16 programme
50(5) Any EOT granted shall be deemed to be full compensation for any loss, except as
provided elsewhere in the Contract
50(6) “Black Rainstorm Warning” – issued by the Director of the Hong Kong Observatory
51 Setting-out
51(1) If the rate of the works progress is too slow, the Engineer shall inform the Contractor
in writing. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of such proposed action and
revise the Clause 16 programme accordingly.
53
Not a condition precedent
54
No reduction in this case. How about if no EOT was granted in the first instance?
15
51(2) The Engineer can instruct the Contractor to carry out the Works during any
hours
51(3) No additional payment shall be entitled to the Contractor with reference to this
Clause
52 Liquidated damages for delay

52(1) The Employer is entitled to recover from the Contractor liquidated damages if the
Contractor fails to complete the Works in time
52(2) The LD is calculated based on the rate prescribed in the Form of Tender. If any part
of the Works was certified completion before, such rate for LD may be reduced in
proportion55
52(3) If the Engineer subsequently grants an EOT to the Contractor after recovering LD,
the Employer shall reimburse to the Contractor the LD with interest
52(4) LD is not a penalty
53 Completion of the Works

53(1) If the Works has been substantially completed and any final tests have passed, the
Contractor may request the Engineer to issue a certificate of completion. For this,
the Engineer may:
(a) issue a certificate of completion if the Works were substantially completed and
the Maintenance Period commence
(b) instruction given to the Contractor specifying all the work that the Contractor
has to complete before the issue of the certificate of completion
53(2) Notwithstanding sub-clause (1), the Engineer may issue a certificate of completion
to the Contractor as long as in his opinion the Works were substantially completed
and any final tests have passed
53(3) The Contractor shall carry out any outstanding work as soon as practicable after the
issue of the certificate of completion
53(4) Sub-clause (1), (2) and (3) are also applicable to any Section of the Works
53(5)(a) The Engineer shall certified completion in respect of any part of the Works before
55
It is the Engineer’s responsibility to calculate such reduction
16
the completion of the Works
(b) The Engineer shall certified substantial completion in respect of substantial part of
the Works before the completion of the Works as requested by the Contractor56
(c) In case a certificate of completion was issued in respect of any part of the Works,
the Maintenance Period of such part shall commence
53(6) Any certificate of completion shall not be deemed to clarify completion of any ground
or surface requiring reinstatement
53(7) For the purpose of this Clause, the term “Works” does not include maintenance
work
Suspension of the Works

54 Suspension of the Works
54(1) Upon the order of the Engineer, the Contractor shall suspend the progress of any
part of the Works and properly protect and secure the Works
54(2) If the Contractor has been involved in additional expenditure due to the suspension,
the Engineer shall ascertain the Cost incurred on the Contractor and certify with
Clause 7157, unless the suspension is:
(a) provided in the Contract
(b) due to weather conditions
(c) due to default on the part of the Contractor
(d) necessary for safety reason
55 For suspension period longer than 90 days, the Contractor may request to proceed
with the Works. If there is no such permission granted by the Engineer, the
Contractor may treat the part of the Works suspended as omission under Clause 60
or an abandonment of the Contract by the Employer.58
Maintenance and Defects

56 Execution of work of repair
56(1) The Works shall be delivered up to the Employer after the expiry of the
Maintenance Period
56
Any difference with sub-clause (1). Why to repeat or what is the difference
57
To value the Cost incurred.
17
56(2) All maintenance work shall be carried out during the Maintenance Period or within
14 days after its expiry
56(3) For maintenance work due to the non-compliance work, it should be carried out by
the Contractor at his own expense. Otherwise, it should be a VO with Clause 60
56(4) In case the Contractor fails to carry out such maintenance work, it may be carried
out by the Employer and would be recovered from the Contractor.
57 Temporary reinstatement
57 If for the purpose of execution of the Works any highway have been broken into,
then
(a) if the permanent reinstatement is to be carried out by other, then the Contractor
is responsible for making good of the temporary reinstatement until it is taken
over by other or the end of the Maintenance Period. The Contractor shall
indemnify the Employer of all claims in relation to this.
(b) after the taking over by other, the Employer shall indemnify the Contractor of all
claims in relation to this
(c) when the authority has taken the possession of the Site, the responsibility of
the Contractor cease
58 Investigating defects
58(1) Before the issue of the maintenance certificate59 under Clause 80, the Contractor
shall investigate the cause of any defects under the directions of the Engineer
58(2) If the Contractor is liable for such defects, the expenses in carrying out the
investigation and remedial work shall be borne by the Contractor
58(3) If the Contractor is not liable for such defect, the Engineer shall value the such
investigation and remedial work under Clause 61.
Measurement, Variations, Valuations and Claims

59 Bills of Quantities and measurement
59(1) Measurements shall be carried out in accordance with the methods stated in the
Preamble to the BQ
59(2) Quantities set out in the BQ are estimated quantities only
58
How about if a suspension period longer than 90 days is required?
59
Why not the Maintenance Period?
18
59(3) The Engineer shall rectify any error in description and omitted items in BQ in
accordance with Clause 6060.
59(4)(a) The Engineer shall ascertain and determine the quantity executed by measurement
and valued at the rates set out in the BQ or other rates determined
(b) If the actual quantity of the Works executed is substantially greater or less than that
stated in the BQ and the rates for such items are considered unreasonable or
inapplicable, the Engineer shall determine an appropriate increase or decrease of
the rates.
59(5)(a) The Engineer shall inform the Contractor for any measurement and the Contractor
shall attend to assist the Engineer in making such measurement. Otherwise, the
measurement made by the Engineer shall be taken as correct.
(b) For some measurement which is based on records or drawings, the ER shall
prepare them month by month and the Contractor shall sign on it if agreed.
Otherwise, those records and drawings are taken to be correct.
(c) Even if the Contractor does not agree with the measurement, it shall be taken as
correct unless the Contractor has proved they are incorrect.
60 Variations
60(1) The Engineer shall order variation which is necessary for completion of the Works or
desirable for satisfactory completion and functioning
(a) additions, omissions, substitutions, …
(b) changes to any sequence, method and timing of construction sequence
(c) changes to the Site, entrance and exit
60(2) No variation shall be made by the Contractor without an written order by the
Engineer
61 Valuing variations
61(1) The Engineer shall determine the sum added or deducted as a result of an order
given by the Engineer:
(a) work omitted shall be valued with BQ rate
(b) work is the same or similar to the priced work shall be valued at BQ rate
60
Not those inserted by the Contractor.
19
(c) work is not the same or similar to the priced work shall be valued at BQ rate as
far as possible, or otherwise, agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor
In the opinion of the Engineer the rate contained in the Contract rendered
unreasonable or inapplicable then a new rate shall be agreed based on the Contract
rate.
61(2) The Engineer shall fix a rate if no agreement is reached
62 Daywork
62(1) The Engineer may order that a VO to be carried out on daywork basis61
62(2) The rates set out in the Contract shall be used.
62(3) The Contractor shall submit quotation, receipts and vouchers for the Engineer’s
approval
62(4) The Contractor shall submit to the ER details of the labour, materials and
Constructional Plant he have employed in carrying out the VO on daywork basis
62(5) At the end of each month, the Contractor shall deliver to the ER a priced statement
of the labour, materials and Constructional Plant used on a daywork basis
62(6) The Contractor shall inform the ER in advance that he proposes to carry out
daywork.
63 Disturbance to the progress of the Works

63 If the Contract shall apply for in writing additional payment for which cannot be
reimbursed elsewhere in the Contract for which the progress of the Works was
materially affected due to:
(a) not having received instructions from the Engineer in due time
(b) VO
(c) opening up for inspection under Clause 45 or testing of materials or
workmanship under Clause 42(1) unless they are not in accordance with the
Contract.
(d) delay caused by the person(s) engaged by the Employer
(e) late delivery of materials supplied by the Employer
then the Engineer shall ascertain the Cost incurred62.
61
For very minor work which cannot be valued with a BQ item
62
Cost again
20
64 Notice of claims
64(1) If the Contractor intends to claim a higher rate than that determined by the Engineer
pursuant to Clause 59(4)(b)63 or Clause 61(2)64 or Clause 84(4)(b), he shall notice
the Engineer within 28 days of such notification
64(2) If the Contractor intends to claim for additional payment under the any Clause other
than sub-clause (1), he shall again notice the Engineer within 28 days of the
happening of such and state the contractual provision he is based.
64(3) The Contractor shall keep such contemporary records and permit the Engineer and
the ER to inspect
64(4) As soon as possible after the notice to the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a
first interim account giving full and detailed particulars of the circumstances giving
rise to the claim
64(5) If the Contractor fails to comply with the provisions in sub-clauses (1) and (2), such
claims shall not be considered
64(6) If the Contractor fails to comply with the provisions in sub-clauses (3) and (4), such
claims shall be assessed based on the information available to the Engineer. The
Engineer may not consider the particulars of the claim received after 180 days from
the date of completion stated in the completion certificate
Prime Cost, Provisional and Contingency Sums

65 Use of Prime Cost, Provisional and Contingency Sums
65(1) The Prime Cost Sums, Provisional Sums or Contingency Sum65 shall only be used
upon the written instruction of the Engineer.
65(2) Where the Prime Cost Sum is included in the Contract and the Contractor is
instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall enter into a sub-contract with the
Nominated Sub-contract.
65(3) If there is any matter of design and specification in connection with any Prime Cost
Sum or Provisional Sum which shall be included in any nominated sub-contract, the
63
Actual quantities greater or less than that stated in BQ which render the item unsuitable or inappropriate
64
VO
65
Why do the Sum for Prime Cost and Provisional in plural.
21
obligation of the Contractor shall only be to the extent stated in this Clause.66
66 Varied form of sub-contract and objections to nomination

66(1) The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to enter into a sub-contract with a
Nominated Sub-contractor with a form different from the standard form referred
to in Clause 65(2). In which cases, the Contractor shall not bound to the
obligation which is inconsistent with that in the Contract, and the Engineer shall
ascertain the additional expenditure incurred on the Contractor due the different
form of sub-contract
66(2) The Contractor may raise objection to the Engineer’s instruction under Clause
65(2) within 14 days of such instruction with reasonable reason. In which case,
the Engineer shall
(a) nominate an alternative sub-contractor (Clauses 65 and 65 still apply)
(b) issue a VO under Clause 60
67 Accounting of Prime Cost Sums

67(1) Prime Cost Sums shall be deducted from the Contract Sum.
67(2) The sum included by the Contractor in the Contract for the attendance on a
Nominated Sub-contractor shall be fixed.67
68 Accounting of Provisional and Contingency Sums

68 Provisional Sums and the Contingency Sum shall be deducted from the Contract
Sum and are for sum added for work valued by the Engineer in accordance
with Clause 61.
69 Payments to Nominated Sub-contractors

69(1) The Contractor shall produce all quotations in connection with any Prime Cost
Sum, Provisional Sum or the Contingency Sum.
69(2) The Contractor shall pay to every Nominated Sub-contractor within 7 days of
payment made by the Employer.
69(3) (a) Before issuing the certificate under Clause 79, the Engineer shall require the
Contractor to provide proof that the payment to every Nominated Sub-contractor
has been made. Otherwise, the Contractor shall:
66
What is it talking about??
67
Is there any item in the BQ to be priced by the Contractor with regard to the Nominated Sub-contractor
22
(i) provide details of reasons

(ii) prove that he has so informed every nominated sub-contractor
(b) If the Contractor fails to do so, the Employer shall:

(i) pay to any Nominated Sub-contractor directly upon the certificate of the
Engineer, less retention money, and shall recoverable from the Contractor.
(ii) if it is expedient to do so, to pay to any Nominated Sub-contractor all payment
which becomes due, less retention money, and shall recover from the
Contractor.
(c) If the Contractor fails to make payment to any Nominated Sub-contractor of any
Retention Money, the Employer shall make the payment directly and recover
from the Contractor
(d) Nevertheless, the Employer is not liable to pay to any Nominated Sub-contractor
directly
70 Assignment of Nominated Sub-contractor’s obligation

70 If the works executed by a Nominated Sub-contractor would be carried out extend
the Maintenance Period under the Contract, the Contractor shall immediately
after the expiry of such assign the obligation for the unexpired duration to the Employer.
Constructional Plant, Temporary Buildings and Materials

71 Vesting of Constructional Plant and temporary buildings
71 All Constructional Plant and temporary buildings owned by the Contractor shall
become the property of the Employer. But the Contractor may remove such from the
Site:
- at any time unless prohibited by the Engineer
- termination of the Contract due to the default of the Employer under Clause
88(2)
- upon completion of the Works, subject to Clause 81 (determination of Contract)
72 Vesting of materials
72 All materials owned by the Contractor shall:
- not be removed without an instruction of the Engineer
- re-vest in the Contractor for any surplus materials upon the completion of the
Contract, subject to Clause 8168
68
How about the termination of the Contract due to the default of the Employer (Clause 88(2))
23
73 Removal of Constructional Plant, temporary buildings and materials

73(1) The Contractor shall remove all Constructional Plant, temporary buildings and
materials from the Site upon the issue of certificate of completion, except those
required to carry out the outstanding work (Clause 53).
73(2) If the Contractor fails to remove such things, the Employer shall:
(a) sell all these things which are owned by the Contractor; or
(b) return the Constructional Plant which is hired.
74 Hired and hire-purchase Constructional Plant

74 The Constructional Plant not owned by the Contractor shall not be brought onto the
Site without the consent of the Engineer. The Engineer may withhold the
consent unless the owner of such gives a notice to the Employer that:
(a) consent to assign the plant to the Employer in case of determination or
abandonment of the Contract before completion;
(b) permit the Employer to use the plant.
75 Employer’s expense in entering into hire or hire-purchase agreement

75 Any expense of the Employer under Clause 74 shall be recovered from the
Contractor.
76 Liability for loss or damage to Constructional Plant

76 Except the “excepted risks” stated in Clause 21, the Employer shall not be liable for
any damage to the Constructional Plant, temporary buildings or materials (Clauses
71, 72 and 74 refers)
77 Incorporation of certain Clauses in sub-contracts

77 Clauses 71 to 76 shall be incorporate in any sub-contract
Certificates and Payments

78 Contractor’s interim statements
78(1) The Contractor shall submit a statement at the end of each monthly period
showing:
(a) estimated final contract value of the work done
(b) estimated value of materials delivered to the Site
(c) all further estimated sums
78(2) The statement shall be supplied with number of copies and delivered to the
Engineer for checking and correction (Clause 79). The corrected copy would be
24
return to the Contractor.
79 Interim and final payments, Retention Money and interest

79(1) The Engineer shall check and certify the Contractor’s statement within 21 days
and the Employer shall pay to the Contractor within further 21 days, after
deducting the previous payment, based on the followings:
(a) estimated value of permanent work
(b) estimated value of Temporary Works or preliminary item for which a separate
item is provided in the BQ69
(c) estimated value of material (based on the BQ rate)
(d) sum for Nominated Sub-contractor
(e) any other estimated sum
Total certified sum shall be adjusted by the Engineer for:
(i) Retention Money
(ii) Fluctuation in the cost of labour and materials (Clause 89)
79(2) If the sum is less than the minimum payment stated in the Contract, the
Engineer may refuse to issue the certificate. However, the Engineer may issue a
certificate at any time for any sum.
79(3) The Engineer shall issue a certificate for payment of Retention Payment within
14 days of the maintenance certificate. The Employer shall pay such payment
within further 21 days.
79(4) (a) If the Employer shall fail to pay to the Contractor in accordance with this Clause,
the Employer shall pay to the Contractor one percent below the judgment debt
rate.
(b) In any circumstances, the Employer shall not be liable to pay to the Contractor at an
interest rate in excess of above rate.70
79(5) The Engineer shall have power to delete, correct or modify any sum previously
certified by him.
79(6) Within 90 days of the issue of the maintenance certificate, the Contractor shall
submit a statement of final account and relevant supporting documentations up to
the date of the maintenance certificate. The Engineer shall within 90 days after
69
How about Temporary Works not separately provided in BQ? Should it be classified as other estimated sum?
70
What does mean of “in excess”? More than or less than?
25
the receipt of such statement and documentations issue a final payment certificate.
Within further 21 days, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor of such balance,
vice versa.
79(7) In case the Contractor shall fail to submit the above statement within 90 days,
the Engineer shall issue a final payment certificate without reference to the
Contractor.
80 Maintenance certificate
80(1) The Engineer shall issue a maintenance certificate, by which the Contractor
have completed his obligation to execute the Works, for following condition:
- expiry of the MP
- completion of all outstanding work (Clause 53)
- making good all defects (Clause 56)
80(2) Other than maintenance certificate, no certificate shall be deemed to approve

71
any work. The maintenance certificate shall not be deemed to approve any
work which has not been carried out in accordance with the Contract.
80(3) The issue of any certificate shall not relieve any liability of both parties.
However, the Employer shall not be liable to the Contractor for anything in
connection with the execution of the Works except claims (Clause 50 or Clause 60)
Remedies and Powers

81 Determination of the Contractor’s employment
81(1) If the Contractor shall:
- become bankrupt
- go into liquidation
- assign the Contract without consent of the Employer
- have an execution levied on his goods
Or if the Engineer certify that the Contractor:
(a) has abandoned the Contract,
(b) fail to commence the Works (Clause 47)
(c) suspend the Works for 14 days after the Engineer’s notice to proceed
(d) fail to comply with an order given by the Engineer under Clause 4672
(e) fail to proceed with the Works with due diligence
(f) sub-contracted the Works
71
Does it mean that only the maintenance certificate is an approval of Contractor’s work?
72
Removal of unsatisfactory materials or workmanship
26
(g) has to the detriment of good workmanship

then the Employer may after a 7 days’ notice expel the Contractor and employ any
other contractor to carry out the Works and use the Constructional Plant,
temporary buildings and materials owned by the Contractor, or sell it.
81(2) The Engineer shall after such entry and expulsion by the Employer ascertain
and record:
(a) quantity of work completed
(b) quantity of unused or partially used materials and list of Constructional Plant
and temporary buildings
Clause 59 shall apply in measurement and agreement of records and drawings
81(3) By the notice referred to in sub-clause (1), the Contractor may be required to
assign any agreement for the supply of any materials for the purpose of this
Contract.
81(4) The Employer shall not be liable to pay to the Contractor any money on
account of the Contract until the expiry of the MP.73
81(5) The Contractor shall only be entitled to receive the sum certified by the
Engineer for the purposes of the sub-clause (4).
82 Work by person other than the Contractor

82(1) If the Contractor fail to carry out any work or refuse to comply with any
instruction or order, the Engineer may give a 14 days’ notice. If the Contractor fail,
the Employer may carry out the work by others and all additional expenditure
incurred to be recovered from the Contractor.
82(2) If for any accidents or failure occurring, the Contractor is unable to carry out the
remedial work, the Engineer shall authorize others to carry out the work and all
expenses shall be recovered from the Contractor if his is liable for the work.
83 Recovery of money due to the Employer

83(1) All damages (e.g. LD), costs, expenses, etc for which the Contractor is liable to
the Employer may be deducted by the Employer from monies under the
Contract (including Retention Money) and the Employer may recover any
balance from monies under any other contract between the Employer and the
Contractor.
73
What is the meaning of “on account”?
27
83(2) Similarly, all damages, etc for which the Contractor is liable to the Employer
under any other contract between them may be recovered from the monies due to the
Contract (including Retention Money).
Special Risks and Frustration

84 Special risks
84(1) The following issues are categorized as “special risks”:
(a) outbreak of war in any part of the world (the Works is financially and materially
affected);
(b) invasion of Hong Kong;
(c) civil war;
(d) riot;
(e) act of foreign terrorists
The Contractor shall use his best endeavours to complete the execution of the
Works
The Employer may at any time due to the occurrence of any special risk terminate
the Contract and such termination shall not prejudice to the claims of either
party.
84(2) For termination under sub-clause (1), the Contractor shall remove from the Site
all Constructional Plant, temporary buildings and surplus materials (include
the sub-contractor)
84(3) For termination under sub-clause (1), the Employer shall pay to the Contractor
all work executed and:
(a) sum payable in respect of preliminary items;
(b) Cost of materials reasonably ordered;
(c) any Cost reasonably incurred by the Contractor in the expectation of
completion of the Works.
84(4) For Contract shall be terminated with sub-clause (1) or not, the following shall
apply:
(a) The Contractor has no liability indemnify in respect of damage to the Works
(except under Clause 46) and to property of the Employer (except the
property of the Contractor under Clause 71 and 72) due to
consequence of the occurrence of any special risks.
The Employer in which case shall indemnify the Contractor against all such
liabilities and all claims in respect of thereto.
28
(b) If any Works or materials shall be destroyed or damaged due to the special
risks, the Contractor shall nevertheless be entitled to payment of these
and shall be recovered from the Employer the expense of making good such
damage. The value of such shall be agreed between the Engineer and the
Contractor. Failing to reach agreement, the Engineer shall fix the rate for
74
that.
(c) Destruction or damage caused by the explosion due to mine, bomb75, etc shall
be deemed to be a consequence of the special risks.
85 Frustration
85 If the Contract is frustrated76 whether by war or otherwise, the sum payable to the
Contractor shall be the same as Clause 84 in case the Contract is terminated
by such.
Settlement of Disputes
86 Settlement of disputes
86(1) If any dispute shall arises between the Employer and the Contractor whether during
the Works or after the completion and whether before or after the termination,
abandonment or breach of the Contract, it shall be referred to and settled by the Engineer.
Such decision shall be final unless either of them shall require that the matter be
referred to mediation or arbitration.
If the Engineer shall fail to make a decision within 28 days of the request or either
party shall be dissatisfied with the decision of the Engineer, either of them may within
28 days refer the matter to mediation.
86(2) If the matter cannot be resolved by mediation or either party does not wish to use
mediation, then either of them may refer the matter to arbitration within 90 days of:
(a) fail respond to a request of mediation77;
(b) refusal to mediate;
(c) failure of the mediation proceedings to produce a settlement;
(d) abandonment of the mediation;
(e) the Engineer fail to make a decision for a period of 90 days78 and subsequently
neither party requests mediation; and
74
If the Contractor does not agree with the rate set by the Engineer, he may submit a claim for a higher rate in accordance with Clause 64.
75
That mean the explosion of a bomb found on Site would be classified as consequence of special risks
76
No definition of “frustration” is provided in GCC.
77
What is the meaning of this statement?
78
Why 90 days, not the 28 days period stated in sub-clause (1)? Why different?
29
(f) receipt of the Engineer’s decision79 and subsequently neither party requests
mediation.
86(3) The arbitrator appointed shall have full power to open up, review and revise any
instruction, order, direction certificate or valuation by the Engineer (except under Clause
80
46(3)).
86(4) If the dispute is on the exercise of the Engineer’s powers under Clause 81(1)81, the
reference to the arbitrator may proceed82.
86(5) The Hong Kong International Arbitration Centre Domestic Arbitration Rules shall
apply.
86(6) The reference to arbitration under sub-clause (2) shall be a domestic arbitration.
Notices
87 Service of notices
87(1) Any notice to be given to the Contractor may be served (a) personally; (b) by
post; (c) by leaving at the Contractor’s last known place; or (d) by posting a copy
on the Site.
87(2) Any notice to be given to the Engineer may be served (a) by post or (b) by
leaving the notice at the Engineer’s office.
87(3) Any notice to the Employer may be served (a) by post or (b) by leaving the
notice at the appropriate management office of the Employer.
87(4) The notice may be served by facsimile if it is accepted.
Default of the Employer

88 Default of the Employer
88(1) If the Employer shall fail to pay to the Contractor with Clause 79 within 14 days,
the Contractor shall make a 14 days’ notice with reference to this Clause. If
the Employer shall fail to make the payment, the Contractor shall be entitled to
terminate the Contract.
79
What is the decision? Does it matter?
80
The remaining part of this sub-clause is not understandable.
81
It seems that no powers for the Engineer is specified in Clause 81(1).
82
What is the meaning of “reference to the arbitrator”?
30
88(2) If no notice pursuant to Clause 81(1) is given to the Contractor either before or
during the 14 days’ period, on the expiration of the 14 days’ notice period, the property
shall be re-vest to the Contractor.
88(3) Nothing in this Clause shall prejudice the right of the Contractor to exercise the
rights and remedies.
Fluctuations
89 Contract price fluctuations
89(1) The sum payable in any interim or final payment certificate certified by the
Engineer shall be adjusted if there shall be any changes in the Index Figures to those
items included in the “Schedule of Proportions”.
89(2) The net total adjustment shall be given effect to in determining the Final
Contract Sum.
89(3) For the purpose of this Clause:

(a) “Index Figure” – appropriate to sub-clause (1)
(b) “Base Index Figure” – applicable to the date 42 days prior to the date for the
return of tenders.
(c) “Current Index Figure” – to be applied in respect of any interim or final payment
and applicable to the date 42 days prior to:
(i) the due date of the completion of the Works, or
(ii) the date of completion of the Works (under Clause 53), or
(iii) the last day of the monthly period of the payment,
whichever is the earliest.
(d) The “effective Value” of the Works, except the first certificate, shall be the
difference between:
(i) the sum which is due to the Contractor before deducting retention and
previous payments on account, less the sum of Nominated
83
Sub-contractor and item based on actual cost or current prices ; and
(ii) the sum calculated in the last preceding interim payment certificate.
89(4) The adjustment shall be calculated by multiplying the Effective Value by a Price
Fluctuation Factor.
89(5) The “Schedule of Proportions” shall be the schedule submitted with the Tender,
irrespective of the actual constituents of the Works.
83
Daywork.
31
Height Restrictions
90 Airport height restrictions
90 The Contractor shall comply with all height restrictions with respect to the Hong
Kong Airport (Control of Obstructions) Ordinance, Cap. 301.
32
Topic: Civil Engineering Claims
1. What is claim?
Definition of claim:
- Claim denotes the process or action by which one party (the claimant)
asserts and proves to another party (the respondent) one or more of its
alleged entitlement.
Legal basis of claims:

- Under the Contract conditions themselves
- For breach of Contract, when the Contractor’s remedy will be damages
calculated in accordance with common law principles
- For breach of a duty arising at common law in tort. This is a general liability,
and in principle liability often depends on the defendant having, by act or
omission, acted in breach of a legal duty imposed on him by law, so
infringing a legal right vested in the claimant and causing him foreseeable
damage. Again, the remedy is normally an award of money damages as
compensation for the damage alone.
- On a quasi-contractual or restitutionary basis, often called a quantum merit
claim.
Claims in tort:
- Claims in tort do not rely on the existence of a contract between the parties.
- They depend on the relationship between the plaintiff and the defendant.
- Negligence is the most common type of claim in this area.
- The essential elements for such claims are existence of a duty of care;
breach of such a duty; such breach has caused damage to the injured
party; and the damage is not remote.
- The fundamental principle applied to the assessment of damages is that
the claimant should be fully compensated for his loss. He is entitled to be
restored to the position that he would have been in, had the tort not been
committed, in so far as this can be done by the payment of money.
Contractual claims:
- Contractual claims either arise from or are in connection with the execution
of a contract.
- For this reason, only parties to the contract will have right to claim. Such
claim usually involves the allegation by one party to the contract of the
1
failure of the other party to observe or to comply with certain terms and
conditions of the contract, which is commonly described as a breach of the
contract.
- The term in breach can be either an express term or an implied term.
- The claimant has to prove that a contract exists between the parties; one or
more of the terms and conditions of the contract have been breached;
damage has been suffered; and the damage is not too remote.
- The remedy is usually damages, which comes in the form of monetary
compensation. But equitable remedies may be awarded by the court in
suitable circumstances. Damages are awarded to the injured party so as to
put him, as far as money can, in the position he would have been had the
contract not been breached.
- As civil engineering works are complicated and there are so many
interacting activities during the course of construction, it is not expected
that all breach of contract terms will end up in litigation. In fact all standard
civil engineering conditions of contract provides for a mechanism to deal
with certain breaches of terms.
- A contractual claim in the context of a Government contract usually refers
to an allegation by the Contractor that a specific event has occurred and it
is entitled to the remedies provided for in the Contract. Such request can
be either for extension of time or for monetary compensation.
2. What is the role and functions of the Engineer in claims settlement?

General duties of the Engineer:
- The Engineer is not a party to the Contract. He is appointed by the
Employer to advise upon and control all technical aspects of the project
from inception to completion.
- He is also responsible to supervise the Contractor’s performance of the
Contract and to decide what payments shall be made.
- This necessarily involves valuing the work done, and deciding on variations
and omissions as the work proceeds.
- This means that the Engineer must form a view on the proper interpretation
of the Contract provisions, deciding what interim payments should be made
and settling the final account.
- The Engineer must bring an independent professional judgement to bear
when deciding certain questions and must act fairly and impartially as
between the Employer and the Contractor.
-
2
3. Why do we have an extension of time clause in conditions of contract?

Standard form civil engineering contracts:
- A specified time for completion for the Works (or for each Section of the
Works).
- A right for the Employer to deduct liquidated damages from the Contractor
in the event of failure to complete the Works (or any Section of the Works)
within the time for completion.
- An EOT provision which permits time for completion of the Works to be
extended where specified events occur.
Protection for the Employer:

- If the Employer causes delay and there is no express power to extend time
in the Contract, it is deemed to prevent the Contractor from completing the
Contract on time, which would give rises to the “time at large”.
- With the effects of time at large, the original definite time for completion is
no longer exists. The Contractor can complete the Works within a
reasonable time. The Employer’s right to liquidated damages becomes
unenforceable1. In this respect, the Employer has to substantiate his actual
loss due to the delay in completion of the Works2.
Protection for the Contractor:

- The EOT clause protects the Contractor from the delay caused by neutral
events, such as inclement weather. It shares part of the risk vested in the
Contractor.
4. What are the events specified in the Contract should the Contractor be
entitled for EOT?
- Inclement weather and/or its consequential effect
- Hoisting of tropical cyclone warning signal No. 8 or above
- Black Rainstorm Warning
- Engineer’s instructions under GCC Clause 5
- Variation Orders under GCC Clause 60
- Substantial increase in quantities of the Works not resulting from VO’s
- Delay possession of the Site by the Employer
- Disturbance of works progress by the Employer, the Engineer or a
1
The Employer in any cases has the right to pursue actual losses.
2
General damages
3
Specialist Contractor
- Suspension order from the Engineer under GCC Clause 54
- Prolonged disruption caused by utility undertakings or constituted authority
- Delay caused by the Nominated Sub-contractor
- Any special circumstances
5. How did you assess an EOT claim from the Contractor?

Basis of the claim:
- The basis on which the claim found is identified. The Engineer has a power
to grant EOT only if the cause of the delay falls on one or more of those
specific circumstances listed in GCC Clause 50(1)(b).
Identification of the delay:

- The alleged delayed activities should be checked to see if they fall on the
critical path.
- Reference should not only focus on the Contractor’s Works programme
which is not conclusive, but also the site diary, site progress chart, record
photos, and any other things which can show the actual works progress
and the Contractor’s readiness to the carry out the works as well as his
effort to minimize the delay.
- It should be checked to find out that if there is any concurrent event
causing the delay which may be the sole responsibility of the Contractor3.
Substantiation by the Contractor:

- The Engineer is, under GCC Clause 50, empowered to require the
Contractor to submit full and detailed particulars of the cause and extent of
the delay to the progress of the Works.
- If the Contractor fails to comply with such a requirement, the Engineer shall
consider the claim based on information already available.
Evaluation and notification of EOT granted:

- The number of the days granted should be evaluated based on all available
information, Contractor’s valid substantiation and other overlapping effects.
3
It might be a situation that there are concurrent delays and only one of which is outside the control of the Contractor. The case
may arise where the Contractor due to his own deficiencies is late in reaching a position to start some programmed activity, but in
fact could not have started the activity earlier even if he had been ready because of delay by the Engineer’ instructions or else. In
this case, the Contractor is not held up by “delay” outside his control, and it is immaterial that if his progress had been different
he would have been so held up. Therefore, the Contractor is only entitled to an EOT to the extent that the late instructions by the
Engineer past the date on which he is fact became ready for them. Of course, the Contractor will be entitled to an EOT if he can
show that he was in a position to be ready earlier for the instructions, but delayed his progress because of advance notice that
they would be late.
4
- The Engineer shall within a reasonable time determine, grant and notify to
the Contractor such EOT, in order not to give a misunderstanding to the
Contractor of an acceleration order.
Cost implication for an EOT granted:

- There is no direct relationship between the EOT granted and the monetary
compensation to the Contractor arising from a delay.
- In particular, granting an EOT does not immediately entitle the Contractor
to a pro rata addition to his preliminaries, or other payment for the delay.
- On the other hand, the fact that the Contractor does not need an EOT
because he is able to finish the Works within the time for completion,
despite a delay caused by the Employer, does not deprive the Contractor of
his right to compensation for that delay. The time for completion specified in
the Contract is a maximum time. There is no minimum time and the
Contractor is free to complete as early as he can.
6. Will you consider the Contactor’ EOT claim if he give such notice after the
“28 day” time bar as specified in GCC Clause 50?
Condition precedent:
- The requirement of notice from the Contractor set forth in the GCC Clause
50 is not a condition precedent to the operation of the clause since the
Engineer has an independent duty under the same clause to consider
whether any extension of time should be granted.
- If it was a condition precedent and no extension could be given without
application from the Contractor, there might be a risk in putting time at large
and the Employer would lose his right to claim liquidated damages for
delay.
Effect on late notification:

- In view of above, any EOT claim not complies with the “28 day” time bar
should also be considered.
- This merely postpones his entitlement to an extension of time because the
Engineer is bound to consider whether or not any extension of time is
merited even if the Contractor has made no claim at all.
7. Should an EOT be granted if the Works are obstructed by underground

utilities?
Existing utilities identified before submission of tender:
5
- According to GCC Clause 13(1), the Contractor shall be deemed to have

examined and inspected the Site and its surroundings and, inter alias, to
have obtained his own information on all matters affecting his Tender and
the execution of the Works.
- Information of underground utilities can be obtained from respective utility
undertakings.
- According to GCC Clause 16(1), the Contractor should make due
allowance in his Works programme for the works to be carried out by utility
undertakings.
- In this connection, the Contractor, in general, shall not be entitled to an
EOT due to an obstruction by the underground utility if the utility
undertakings can complete the works within a reasonable time4.
- According to GCC Clause 50(1)(b)(ix), however, if the utility undertakings
fail to commence or carry out in due time any works directly affecting the
execution of the Works, provided that the Contractor has taken all practical
steps to cause the utility undertakings to commence or to proceed with
such work, the Contractor’s alleged delay should be assessed and EOT
should be granted to the Contractor accordingly.
Existing utilities not identified before submission of tender:

- Sometimes existing underground utilities might not appear in the relevant
utility plans or could not be located on Site during pre-tender site visits such
that, by no way, a competent/experienced and reasonable contractor is
able to identify the existence of such services.
- In these cases, the Contractor might not have sufficient awareness for the
existence of such utilities, and make due allowance in his Works
programme.
- EOT shall be granted to the Contractor if his works progress is genuinely
disrupted by the concerned utilities5.
- For utilities of these kinds, the Engineer might consider to issue a VO to the
Contractor in order to minimize the time implication due to the
diversion/relocation works carried out by the relevant utility undertakings6.
Utilities placed after submission of tender:
4
Such “reasonable time” should make reference to the performance pledge/commitment of corresponding utility undertakings in
usual cases, unless it has been known to all parties that the concerned site condition is special and would render a more lengthy
disruption for carrying out the diversion/relocation of existing utility. Any similar work carried out in the proximity could also be
referred to.
5
Nevertheless, any disruption caused by a utility undertaking would not render the Contractor to have a monetary claim to the
Employer in accordance with GCC Clause 63(d).
6
According to CGG Clauses 50(1)(b)(iv) and 63(b), such VO might have both time and cost implications to the Contract.
6
- There might be some new utilities provided after the submission of tender
but before the commencement of the Works.
- In this respect, it has to consider that whether such utilities can be
foreseeable during the tendering stage. If the answer is affirmative, the
Contractor should be deemed to have known of such condition and such
EOT claim should be dealt with in similar nature as the existing utilities.
- If, on the other hand, such utilities are not known to the Contractor, EOT
should be granted to the Contractor if it is justifiable.
Utilities placed during the execution of the Works:

- According to GCC Clause 34(1), the Contractor shall facilitate the works
carried out by the utility undertakings on or adjacent to the Site.
- The Contractor should liaise with the respective utility undertakings and
coordinate for the works.
- According to GCC Clause 50(1)(b)(ix), EOT should be granted to the
Contractor if his works progress is substantially disrupted due to the default
on the side of the utility undertakings.
8. Will you grant an EOT to the Contractor for substantial increase in the
quantities of certain items of the works?
- According to GCC Clause 50(1)(b)(v), the Contractor shall be entitled to
EOT if there is a substantial increase in the quantities of the certain items
of the work which adversely affect the progress of the Works7.
9. Conversely, can you deduct the time for completion for substantial
decrease in the quantities of certain items of the works?
Power to deduct the time for completion:
- Under the Contract, the Engineer has no power to reduce the time for
completion when there are more omissions than extras.
- Even if there have been substantial omissions the Engineer must consider
only the original completion date in deciding whether to forfeit the Contract
for lack of due diligence and in calculating liquidated damages.
10. Will you consider the EOT claim by the Contractor if he is in culpable
delay?
Culpable delay:
7
If the changes in quantities of items of the Works render the original rates inapplicable, due to the revised construction method,
construction sequence, etc. the Contractor may request to re-rate for the particular items.
7
- The original or the previously extended time for completion has elapsed so
that the Contractor is liable to pay to the Employer liquidated damages.
EOT claim for causes occurred before the certified date of completion:
- The Contractor shall be entitled for EOT if the cause of delay occurred
before the certified date for completion.
EOT claim for causes occurred after the certified date of completion:
- If the event occurs in a period when the Contractor is in culpable delay, the
Engineer should take into consideration whether such event would have
been wholly avoided if the Contractor had not overrun the time for
completion or whether, if it would still occur, the consequence might be less
disruptive if the Contractor had not overrun.
- The Engineer should only grant such extension of time to which the
Contractor is considered as fairly entitled taking into account all
circumstances.
- For instance, delay due to inclement weather occurred when the Contractor
is in culpable delay, no EOT should be granted in the respect because
there should be no such delay if the Contractor could complete the Works
in time.
- However, if the delay is arisen from the execution of additional work due to
a previous variation order and the such work is carried out during the
concerned period, such amount of delay has to be assessed and the
Contractor should be fairly entitled to an EOT for this respect.
11. What are the consequences for an instruction issued by the Engineer?
Power to issue instructions:
- According to GCC Clause 5(2), the Engineer shall issue to the Contractor
instructions to clarify the ambiguity or discrepancies appear among the
Contract documents.
- If the Contractor makes a request for the instruction, the Engineer shall
respond within 14 days from the receipt of the request.
Time implication:
- According to GCC Clause 50(1)(b)(iii), the Contractor may be entitled to an
EOT due to an instruction issued by the Engineer under the Clause 5.
-
8
Cost implication:
- According to GCC Clause 5(2)(b), if such instructions shall involve the
Contractor in any expense arising from the ambiguity or discrepancies
which are by no means the Contractor can anticipate, the Engineer shall
value such expense and certify to the Contractor accordingly.
- According to GCC Clause 63(a), if the Contractor is likely to be involved in
expenditure for the late instructions issued by the Engineer which is proved
to affect materially the Works progress, the Engineer shall ascertain the
Cost8 incurred and certify to the Contractor accordingly.
12. Can the Contractor appeal for the EOT granted by the Engineer?
Contractor’s right to review for EOT granted:
- According to GCC Clause 50(2), the Contractor may request the Engineer
to make a review of the circumstances causing delay.
Review by the Engineer:

- Upon the receipt of the request by the Contractor, the Engineer shall
determine whether any further EOT shall be granted.
- In any case, review carried out by the Engineer should not render to any
reduction to the EOT granted because it would be unfair to the Contractor
who completed on the faith of the Engineer’s decisions but find himself
liable to liquidated damages due to the later reduction.
Dispute arising from the EOT assessment:

- Similar to other disputes, such issue should be referred to the Engineer in
the first instance.
- If no agreement is reached, the issue will be pushed up for mediation
and/or arbitration.
13. Are the general holidays excluded from the extended period?
14. Can the Contractor claim for monetary compensation for progress
disruption due to the delay in addition to EOT?
Neutral events:
- According to GCC Clause 50(5), the EOT granted by the Engineer to the
Contractor shall be deemed to be in full compensation and satisfaction for
8
Disruption/prolongation cost which is defined in GCC Clause 1(1) as expenditure reasonably incurred including overheads
whether on or off the Site and depreciation in value of Constructional Plant owned by the Contractor but excluding profit
9
any loss by the Contractor in respect of all neutral events such as

inclement weather, disruption by utility undertakings, substantial increase in
quantity of any work item, etc.
- The risks arising from such neutral events are shared between the
Employer and the Contractor.
Default of the Employer or the Engineer:

- For those events which involve the defaults by the Employer or the
Engineer, the Contractor is entitled to claim for EOT and money.
15. What is the basis in the Contract in respect of a monetary claim by the
Contractor?
GCC Clause 5:
- An instruction issued by the Engineer to clarify the ambiguities and
discrepancies found in the Contract documents.
- If compliance with such instructions shall involve the Contractor in any
expense which he did not and had no reason to anticipate, the Engineer
shall value such expense (or even saving) in accordance with GCC Clause
61.
GCC Clause 21:

- Making good the damage, loss or injury resulted from “excepted risks9” as
instructed by the Engineer.
GCC Clause 33:

- Disposal of fossils, articles of value, antiguity etc. discovered on the Site.
GCC Clause 34:

- Provision of facilities for other persons and contractors upon the request of
the Engineer.
GCC Clause 42:

- Examining, measuring or testing not required by the Contract but show that
the material and workmanship comply with the Contract requirements.
GCC Clause 45:
9
“Excepted risks” include outbreak of war, terrorist attack, riot, occupation by the Employer, direct consequence of the
Engineer’s design, default by the Engineer or the Employer and ionization.
10
- Instruction by the Engineer to uncover the work which has been covered up
or put out of view after compliance with the Contract requirements for
examination of the work before covering up.
GCC Clause 46:

- Removal of unsatisfactory material supplied by the Employer which is in
the opinion of the Engineer the Contractor could not have reasonably
ascertained beforehand.
GCC Clause 48:

- Delay possession of the Site by the Employer such that the Contractor
could not commence and proceed with the Works in accordance with his
Clause 16 works programme.
- The Engineer shall ascertain the Cost incurred upon the Contractor.
GCC Clause 54:

- Suspension order issued by the Engineer unless such suspension is
provided for in the Contract, for the sake of safety and quality of the Works,
for the default of the Contractor, or any reason necessary for the proper
execution of the Works excluding those arise from “excepted risks”.
GCC Clause 56:

- Repairing work carried out by the Contractor for the defects occurred
during the maintenance period which is in the opinion of the Engineer not
due to the Contractor’s fault.
GCC Clause 58:

- Instruction by the Engineer to carry out investigation for any defects and
remedial works taken prior to the issue of maintenance certificate10 for
which the Contractor is not so liable.
GCC Clause 59:

- Errors or omissions in the BQ or substantial changes in actual quality of the
work executed which render the original rate inapplicable.
GCC Clause 63:
10
Not being restricted during maintenance period only
11
- Disruption to works progress due to Engineer’s late instructions, variation

ordered (GCC Clause 60), uncovering work which is already covered (GCC
Clause 45), or delay caused by the Employer.
GCC Clause 79:

- The Employer shall pay to the Contractor interest upon any undue payment
by him.
16. What should be noted in assessing monetary claims by the Contractor?

Time limit for notification:
- For claim for higher rate, the claim should be lodged within 28 days of the
notification of the rate in question by the Engineer.
- For claim for additional payment, the claim should be lodged within 28 days
of the event in question becoming apparent.
Contractual provisions:
- The Contractor must state clearly in his claim on which contractual
provisions his claim is based.
Record keeping:
- The Contractor is obliged to keep records to support his claim and the
Engineer is entitled to require additional records.
Interim account:
- The Contractor should, as soon as reasonable, send to the Engineer a first
interim account of his claim.
Sanctions for monetary claim:

- The “28-day” time bar in GCC Clause 64 is a condition precedent. No
consideration should be made for any claim noticed after the time limit.
- Any particulars submitted after the expiry of a period of 180 days after
completion may not be considered.
17. What should be included in the Prolongation Cost?

Site overhead:
- Salaries and wages of non-productive staff, general labour, site services,
contractor’s construction plant, etc.
12
Head office overhead:

- One of the estimation methods is based on the original contract price and
time for completion, total company turnover and total head office
overheads.
Insurance premium and other levies:

- Contractor’s all risk insurance
- Employee’s compensation insurance
- Third party insurance
- CITA and PCFB levies
Time related preliminary items not subject to re-measurement:

- Environmental monitoring and mitigation measures
- Contract computer facilities for the Engineer
- Temporary accommodation for the Contractor
Financial charges:
- Financial charges for financing the prolongation cost.
- Prime rate is used for calculating the financial charges.
Sum to be deducted deducted:

- Site overhead which has been taken into account in the time related
preliminary items subject to re-measurement.
- Overheads generated from the variation orders causing the delay.
18. Is Contractor entitled to any claims due to the variation in site conditions?
GCC Clause 13(1):
- The Contractor shall be deemed to have examined and inspected the Site
and its surroundings and to have satisfied himself the nature of the work
and materials necessary for the execution of the Works and to have
obtained his own information on all matters affecting his Tender and the
execution of the Works.
GCC Clause 13(2):

- The Contractor shall not claim for additional payment in respect of any
misunderstanding of matters referred to in sub-clause (1) or incorrect or
insufficient information provided by the Employer or the failure of the
13
Contractor to obtain correct and sufficient information. The Contractor shall

not be relieved from any risk or obligation imposed on him.
Contractor’s pre-tender investigations:

- It is not possible to say precisely what investigations a prudent Contractor
should make prior to tender, to ensure that he covers all his obligations
under the above clauses, and that he is entitled to claim if the actual
conditions differ from those foreseen.
- In general, changes in the physical conditions after the date of tender are
to be disregarded. However, if such changes became known to the
Contractor at a time before tendering or even when he was free to
withdraw his tender, then by entering into the Contract he must be taken to
have waived his rights to claim for the changes.
- The Contractor has no right to claim merely on the grounds of a change in
conditions or circumstances after the date of his tender, and before
formation of the Contract, even if unknown to him, unless he has a claim
that there is a physical obstruction during construction when cannot be
foreseen during tendering stage by an experience Contractor.
Contractor’s remedies for misinformation:

- If the Contractor can show that in the Contract documents or before or at
the time the Contract was made, the Employer gave any definite
information about site conditions in a form or in circumstances which
implied particularly that the information might be accepted and acted on as
correct by the Contractor, then the Employer may be liable if the
information is not correct.
19. What is “Cost”?

GCC Clause 1(1):
- Cost means expenditure reasonably incurred including overheads whether
on or off the Site and depreciation in value of Constructional Plant owned
by the Contractor but excluding profit.
Additional cost due to extra work or delay:

- Extra work or delay may cause real additional overhead costs to the
Contractor11. Such cost may be clearly recoverable under the definition12,
11
Engaging extra supervisors on or off the Site to deal with the additional work, or employing the supervisor for a longer period.
12
In claiming for breach of Contract, such a claim is not cost incurred because of the delay, but is for loss of the opportunity to
earn money out of which to pay those costs.
14
presuming that provisions are provided in the Contract.
20. How to deal with the ambiguities and discrepancies in the Contract?
GCC Clause 5:
- Any ambiguities or discrepancies shall be explained and clarified by the
Engineer by issuing an instruction to the Contractor within 14 days from the
receipt of Contractor’s request.
- Such instruction may involve expenses or savings which shall be valued in
accordance with the Contract.
- For works not shown on Drawings or described in the Specification but not
measured in the BQ, they shall be dealt with as missing items.
Power of the Engineer to issue Site Instruction:

- The Engineer may act under this clause only if there is genuinely an
ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract. If the Contract documents are
clear they must usually be applied even if they produce a result which the
parties did not intend.
- The Engineer has no power to alter the terms and conditions of the
Contract.
Cost claim arising from the ambiguities and discrepancies:

- If the legally correct interpretation is that the work included in the instruction
is part of the original Contract work13 then the Contractor has no remedy
under this clause merely because he has been involved in Cost which by
reason of any such ambiguity or discrepancy the Contractor did not and
had reason not to anticipate, unless there is any delay or disruption
involved.
- However, if the legally correct interpretation is such that the instruction
requires the Contractor to carry out extra work not part of the original
contract works, then the instruction will amount to a variation order with a
right to valuation under Clause 61.
Responsibility to notify/resolve the ambiguities and discrepancies:

- The Engineer has a duty to resolve an ambiguity or discrepancy of his
motion whenever one comes to his attention, irrespective of any request by
the Contractor for an instruction.
- If the Contractor does not raise with the Engineer an ambiguity or
13
For example, works shown on one drawing but not on another will usually be part of the original contract work.
15
discrepancy of which he but not the Engineer has become aware, so that
delay or disruption is caused or aggravated, it is suggested that when the
matter eventually has to be resolved by an instruction it may not be
reasonable for the Engineer to award the Contractor any of extra cost
resulting from the Contractor’s default.
- The Contractor may even have a general duty to notify ambiguities in the
Contract documents of which he becomes or possibly should become
aware, with liability to the Employer or third parties for failure to do so. For
breach of that duty the Contractor may have to bear the Cost of remedial
works necessary because the ambiguity was not dealt with in time.
-
16
Topic: Instructions, Variation Orders and Supplementary Agreements
1. What need variation clause in the Contract?

Necessity for a Contract provision for variations:
- In a civil engineering works contract, the scope of the work and services
that a Contractor is required to carry out has usually specified on the
Drawings and Specifications.
- It is however very common civil engineering contracts for the needs for
changes in the nature or extent of work or services during construction.
- In the absence of an express term in the Contract, such variation can only
be effected by supplementary agreement between the parties which may
sometimes be undesirable, if not unachievable.
- A provision which allows variation of the work or services is therefore
essential.
Scope of legitimate variations:

- Any variation should be ordered in writing in accordance with GCC Clause
60.
- The Engineer’s power under this clause is not unlimited.
- The variation to be ordered shall be either necessary for the completion of
the Works1; or desirable for or to achieve the satisfactory completion and
functioning the Works2.
- Such variations may include:
- Additions, omissions, substitutions, alterations, changes in quality,
form, character, kind, position dimension, level or line;
- Changes to any sequence, method or timing of construction specified
in the Contract; and
- Changes to the Site or entrance to and exit from the Site.
2. How to prepare a VO?

Identify the need:
- Prior to the construction of the twin DN700 rising mains, several inspection
pits were dug to locate the alignment of the underground utilities.
- On checking, it was revealed that a 150mm diameter fresh water main was
identified to be in conflict with our proposed rising mains.
- A site meeting was convened by the Contractor to discuss with the Water
1
It is the Engineer’s duty to order the variation which is necessary for the completion of the Works.
2
The Engineer has discretion whether to order a variation or not.
1
Authority (WSD) about the potential diversion scheme of the water mains in
the presence of our site supervisory staff.
- At the meeting, we were informed by WSD that the diversion work for the
concerned 100m long fresh water main must be carried out in single
operation in order not to create disturbance to the consumer. The duration
of the diversion work would be about 2 months.
- In order not to delay the time for completion of the respective section of the
Works for the subsequent handing over to another project, we decided to
issue a variation order to our proposed rising mains so as to set back from
the water main.
Option formulation and its feasibility:

- To avoid the clashing with the water main, I worked out an option by
reducing the clearance between the rising mains.
- Details of chambers and thrust blocks were also revised to suit the
modifications.
- I checked with the Contractor to ensure the proposed modification would
be feasible from the construction point of view. I also discussed with the
design engineer and the maintenance authority to make sure that the
revised details are acceptable from design and operation/maintenance
point of view.
Cost estimation:
- I estimated the net value of the variation and checked if the estimate is
within the financial limits of the Engineer’s authority.
- In the case the estimated value of the VO exceeded the authority of the
Engineer, I would prepare substantiation to the Engineer for seeking the
approval from the Employer before ordering the variation.
- In addition, I also checked to ensure that the expected Final Contract Sum
after the variation would not exceed the original Contact Sum. Otherwise,
approval from appropriate officers must be sought.
Issue of variation:
- I then prepared the file note and sketches for the variation and kept them
together with the cost estimates, in the file to facilitate the future valuation.
3. How to value a VO?

GCC Clause 61:
2
- The valuation of all variations ordered under GCC Clause 60 shall be

carried out in accordance with the principles stated in GCC Clause 61.
- This is no requirement to value the variations or to have the rates agreed
before the variations are ordered.
- For this reason, it is perfectly legitimate for the Engineer to order a variation
before any discussion on rates has been conducted provided that the
variation in question satisfies the criteria described.
Principle for valuation:

- For omitted work, it should be valued as the rate set out in the Contract.
- For work which is the same or similar character and executed under the
same or similar conditions and circumstances to any item of work priced, it
should be valued at the rate set out in the Contract.
- For work which is not the same or similar character or not executed under
the same or similar conditions and circumstances to any item of work
priced, it should be valued at a rate based on the contract rate as far as
may be reasonable. Otherwise, an agreed rate between the Engineer and
the Contractor should be used instead.
- For any rate which is rendered unreasonable or inapplicable due to the
variation order may require a new rate agreed between the Engineer and
the Contractor.
- In case agreement is not reached, the Engineer shall fix the rate
reasonably and notify the Contractor accordingly.
- If the Contractor does not agree with the rate as fixed by the Engineer, he
may make a claim on this in accordance with GCC Clause 64.
Reasonableness for adopting contract rate in varied works:

- It is not unreasonable to apply rates as a basis for pricing varied work even
if the rates are mistaken or uneconomical. What is reasonable is to be
decided purely by reference to the nature of the original and varied work,
not extraneous considerations.
- The mere reason that a particular rate will result in a loss to the Contractor
is not a sufficient reason to depart from that rate.
- It is only in exceptional cases that the basis of valuation from the Contract
rates should be abandoned. The Engineer should investigate carefully and
be satisfied that he is seized of the full facts, before departing from the
particular contract rates.
- Where there is no rate or price which can provide as the basis of valuation,
3
a fair valuation is payable which normally means cost plus a reasonable

percentage for profit with a deduction for any proven inefficiency by the
Contractor. If there is proof of a general market rate for comparable work it
may be taken into consideration or applied completely.
4. Is there any implication to the Contract for omitted works?

GCC Clause 60:
- According to GCC Clause 60, the Engineer may order a variation to omit
the work in the original contract if such an order complies with the criteria
for a variation.
GCC Clause 61:

- According to GCC Clause 61, the Engineer should value the omitted work
based on the contract rate.
- A reduction in quantity due to an omission may make the plant originally
scheduled for a piece of work uneconomical, for which the Contractor may
be entitled to re-rating.
5. Is Contractor’s proposed work a variation?

Contractor’s proposal on particular work:
- It is not uncommon for the Contractor to suggest a change of materials or
of some other contract design even though it is the Engineer’s business.
- The Contractor may do so because a change will save the Contractor or
Employer or both time or money or will improve the Works.
- According to GCC Clause 23, the Contractor shall not be responsible for
the design of permanent work.
- According to GCC Clause 60, the Engineer shall order variation to the
works if it is either necessary for the completion of the works or desirable
for the satisfactory completion and proper functioning of the works.
Pitfalls of accepting Contractor’s proposal:

- The Contractor may claim extra payment for making the change.
- It may be found eventually that the changed design does not function
satisfactorily, resulting in extra cost of altering it or reverting it to the original
design.
- The changed design may cause collapse of or other loss or damage to the
4
Works.
- The changed design may cause injury to persons or damage to other
property.
- The Employer may disown the Engineer’s agreement to the change at a
late stage when the Contractor has already incurred expense in reliance on
the agreement.
- The Employer may claim compensation from the Engineer for
disimprovement in the Works, upon the grounds of professional negligence
in accepting the Contractor’s proposal or that the Engineer had no authority
to agree to it. Alternatively, the Employer may seek to recover from the
Engineer payments he has to make to the Contractor or third parties under
any of the above headings.
For proposals benefit both the Employer and the Contractor:

- The Contractor’s proposal may benefit the Employer by improving the
Works or by saving the Employer’s money or because the change will
reduce the time for completion of the Works.
- The change in this case may be found to be necessary for the completion
of the Works and desirable for the satisfactory completion and properly
functioning of the Works.
- The Engineer then has the right to order the change as a variation.
For proposals benefit the Contractor only:

- The Contractor’s proposal allows him to carry out the Works easier.
- Since the proposed changes are neither necessary nor desirable, the
Engineer has no duty to order a variation in this regard.
- If the Contractor’s proposal is accepted, the Engineer should add
specifically in his approval letter that the Contractor shall not be entitled to
additional payment and extension of time for changes which is not a
variation order, but a concession.
6. How to assess a star rate item?

Definition of star rate item:
- When work is ordered as a variation to a contract, it is sometimes
necessary to calculate an entirely new rate (a “star” rate) for BQ for that
contract or because the relative quantities of additional and original work
warrant a recalculation of the rate.
- In such cases, if the
5
Estimate based on contract rate:

- Suppose a manhole with depth between 3.5m and 4.5m would be
constructed under the variation order.
- In the BQ, there is an item for manhole with depth between 2.5m and 3.5m.
- For the purpose of the rate buildup, the rate for the concerned BQ item
should be extracted for concrete, reinforcement, formwork, excavation,
deposition and backfilling.
- The breakdown for BQ rate is then built up for the new rate for the new
manhole item.
Totally new rate:

- For item which cannot be found anywhere in the Contact, even for a similar
one, a totally new rate should be built up by adding the quotation with the
overhead and profit of the Contractor.
7. How to assess overhead and profit of the Contractor?
8. Can the Engineer order a variation during maintenance period?

- For all new public works contract, a SCC clause would be included to allow
the Engineer to issue variation order during the maintenance period for the
satisfactory completion and proper functioning of the outstanding Works.
9. When will we use a supplementary agreement instead of a variation order?

Power of the Engineer to vary works:
- According to GCC Clause 2(1)(d), the Engineer shall have no power to
amend the terms and conditions of the Contract nor to relieve the
Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.
- According to GCC Clause 60, the Engineer can only order a variation
which is necessary for the completion of the Works or is desirable for the
satisfactory completion and functioning of the Works.
10. Can the Contractor refuse to receive an order for variation?

- It is stated clearly in the Contract that the Engineer has the power to issue
variation order provided that the criteria in GCC Clause 60 are met.
- According to GCC Clause 15, the Contractor shall execute the Works in
6
accordance with the Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall
comply with and adhere strictly to the Engineer’s instructions on any matter
related to the Contract whether mentioned in the Contract or not, provided
that it is legally and physically possible.
Conditions to refuse a VO:

- The VO is not issued in accordance with GCC Clause 60.
- The varied works is either legally or physically possible.
7
Topic: Programme and Progress Monitoring
1. What are the requirements for the Contractor with respect to works
programme?
Contractor’s master programme at commencement of the Works:
- Pursuant to GCC Clause 16, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
programme, within 14 days of the acceptance of the Tender, showing
sequence, method and timing in which the Contractor proposes to carry out
the Works.
- The Engineer may request the Contractor to submit his arrangements for
carrying out the Works and the Constructional Plant and Temporary Works
which the Contractor intends to supply, use or construct.
- The programme should normally be in the form of a bar chart. Critical
activities and the critical path should be identified in the programme.
Three-month rolling programme:

- According to GS Clause 1.08(1), the Contractor shall submit within a
further 14 days a programme showing the detailed breakdown of the work
to be carried out in the first 3 months.
- In not less than 4 weeks before the commencement of each subsequent
3-monthly period, the Contractor shall submit a programme showing (1) the
work completed to date, (2) a detailed breakdown of the work to be carried
out in the next 3 months and (3) an updated outline for the remainder of the
work.
- The programme submitted shall be in the form of a bar chart showing the
earliest and latest start and finish dates for each activity, and the critical
path.
Revision of works programme:

- An EOT granted by the Engineer
- Progress is too slow
- Progress on critical activities is falling behind the original programme
- Unanticipated events renders the original programme unsuitable
2. How did the Engineer check the Contractor’s works programme?

Checking of works programme:
- When a programme is submitted by the Contractor, it should be
1
acknowledged, but not approval1.

- The Engineer should analyze and examine the programme to determine
whether the details (sequence, method and timing) shown on the
programme conform with the requirements of the Contract
- The programme should not be over-optimistic. Actual site condition should
be taken into account in the sequence, method and timing of the works.
Time should be allowed for application of relevant permits and utility
diversion.
- Information provided in the programme should be sufficient for the
management of the Contract. All works activities, including permanent
works, temporary works, testing, traffic/utility diversion, etc. should be
incorporated in the programme.
Comments on works programme:

- The Engineer has no right to enforce the Contractor to carry out the Works
in particular time and with specified methods unless they are specified in
the Contract
- If in the opinion of the Engineer the works programme is inadequate, he
should request the Contractor to explain the programme with justification.
- If the Engineer is not convinced of the Contractor’s justification or the
programme does not comply with certain Contract requirements, he should
inform the Contractor his dissatisfaction with the programme submitted and
request the Contractor to re-consider and revise the programme.
3. How did the Engineer monitor the Works progress?

- Closely site progress monitoring by daily site inspections and regular
progress meetings and other discussions with the Contractor to understand
the difficulties of the Contractor and to resolve any technical problems as
soon as possible before they are materialized.
- Master programme should be displayed on which the actual progress
should be marked.
- Compare the actual expenditure with the expected one.
- Contractor’s attention should be drawn immediately if slippage in progress
was identified.
4. What should the Engineer do if the works progress is not satisfactory?

- Once slippage in works progress is identified, discussions/meetings should
1
As it may be construed as relieving the Contractor’s responsibilities or duties under the Contract
2
be arranged with the Contractor to find out the causes of the delay.
- As soon as it is apparent that the progress of the Works is too slow to
ensure timely completion, the Engineer should inform the Contractor in
writing of the unsatisfactory progress under GCC Clause 51(1)2.
- The Contractor should be reminded of his obligation under GCC Clause
51(1) to inform the Engineer of actions he will take to expedite the
completion and to submit a revised programme.
- Close monitoring should continue and further warning letters to the
Contractor should be issued if progress has not improved.
- If slow progress continues despite repeated warnings from the Engineer,
the situation should be noted in Contractor’s Quarterly Performance Report
and take appropriate action which includes management action.
- The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment for
complying with any instruction given in accordance with GCC Clause 51(1).
5. What should the Engineer do if the works progress is persistently slow?

- The Engineer should hold a close discussion with the managerial staff of
the Contractor to understand what has happened.
- Be careful for the abandonment of the Works
2
Care should be taken not to give instructions that may be construed as an order to accelerate the work
3
Topic: Remedies for Breach of Contract
1. What is Liquidated Damages (LD)?

- LD is a sum agreed by the Employer and the Contractor in advance (at the
time of making the contract) as the amount to be paid by the Contractor as
damages if the Contractor breaches the Contract by failing to complete the
Works in time.
2. What is the significance of LD to the Employer and the Contractor?

To the Employer:
- The Employer is able to recover the pre-estimated amount of LD, if the
Contractor is late in completion due to his own fault.
- The Employer does not need to proof his actual loss due to the delay,
which may be extremely complex, difficult and expensive.
To the Contractor:
- The Contractor gets him known in advance what his exposure is in respect
of late completion.
- The Contractor can price their tender rate more precisely with due
consideration to the risk of delay.
3. What are the contractual provisions under which the Employer is vested
with the power of deduction of LD?
- Under GCC Clause 52, the Employer is entitled to recover from the
Contractor LD if the Contractor fails to complete the Works in time.
- Such date for completion should be the time stated in the Appendix to the
Form of Tender under GCC Clause 49 or any such extended time granted
by the Engineer under GCC Clause 50.
4. How to assess a genuine pre-estimate for LD?

- For PWP Contract, guidelines has been developed in relevant technical
circular [ETWBTC(W) No.4/2003 – Assessment of Liquidated Damages]
- Formula method is adopted
- 4 main components included in the formula:
- Loss of revenue or interest on the capital invested;
- Supervisory costs during the delayed period;
- Additional sum payable to the Contractor due to price fluctuation; and
- Any special damages specific to the particular project.
1
5. What is the difference between LD and penalty?

- LD is a genuine pre-estimate of the loss likely to arise from the anticipated
breach of late completion.
- A clause will be a penalty if the damages specified were extravagant and
unconscionable, judged in the light of the circumstances when the contract
was made, compared with the greatest amount of loss that could be
caused.
- If such sum is construed as a penalty, it will have no effect under the Law
and damages will be assessed by the courts by evaluating the actual loss
suffered by the injured party.
- As such, in assessing the LD at the time of preparing the tender, the
Engineer should make clear what might reasonably have expected to
happen.
6. What are the condition precedents for claiming LD?

- The LD clause must not be a penalty. The Employer has to ensure the
amount of the LD is a realistic and genuine pre-estimate of his likely loss
and is not to attempt to secure timely by the threat of imposition of a fine.
- There must be a definite completion date for the Works specified in the
Contract from which the LD can run.
- The Employer has to ensure that the Contract includes an EOT clause so
that the Contractor’s rights to extension of time is preserved.
- The Employer must have observed any relevant contractual procedures.
(e.g. Any EOT claimed by the Contractor has been considered by the
Engineer and it is in the opinion of the Engineer that the Contractor is not
entitled to any or any further extension)
- The Employer must not have waived its right to deduct LD.
7. Why do we need to set a minimum amount for LD?

- Under GCC Clause 52(2), the amount of LD is subject to proportional
reduction due to the completion or handling over of a part of the Works or
part of a Section in advance of the whole.
- However, such proportional reduction may not reflect the real effect of
delay.
- Some costs incurred on the Employer such as the special damages and
minimum supervisory staff costs cannot be reduced in such manner.
- It is thus necessary to incorporate in the Contract a SCC specifying the
minimum amount of LD.
2
Other points to note:

1. No time requirement is provided in GCC Clause 52 in respect to the imposition
of the deduction of LD for which the Employer should observe in enforcing this
Clause.
That means the Employer may recover from the Contractor LD as long as the
Works is not completed after the date of completion.
However, if the Employer do not draw the Contractor’s attention to his “intention”
to deduction of LD after an unreasonable time, would it be realized by the
Contractor that the Employer has waived his right to claim LD?
Reference:
1. Engineering Law and the ICE Contract (4th Edition), by Abrahamson
(P. 149-158, 427-428)
2. “The ins and outs of liquidated damages” – Hong Kong Engineer, May 2002
3
8. If the Employer “leads” the Contractor to believe that he does not require
the work to be finished by the completion date, and because of this the
Contractor does not give notice of claims for EOT or slow down the Works,
may the Employer later change his mind and claim LD from the original
completion date? (Waiver)
- In this case, the Contractor has given no “consideration” for the agreement
by the Employer to release him from the original date in the Contract, which
is essential for the court to enforce an agreement.
- However, the courts have developed the doctrine of waiver, which enable a
party to defend himself against an unfair change of attitude.
-
9.
4
2. Project Estimate
2.1 Accuracy of Project Estimate

- S for W’s concern about the persistent over-estimation of Pre-tender Estimates
against tender awarded and the unacceptable magnitude of the over-estimation
- Works departments are required to take measures to improve the accuracy of the
Pre-tender estimates and project estimates before calling for tenders and PWSC
submission.
2.2 CURE (Committee to Update and Review Estimate)

- Internal committee in DSD to examine the project estimates before submission of
the PWSC paper to Policy Bureau.
- CURE meeting is held regular. Divisions should plan their submissions and
inform the Secretary the proposed schedule accordingly.
2.3 Project Estimates

- Prepared in accordance with Section 5 of Chapter 4 of the PAH
- Pricing the BQ on contract basis using the latest contract rates or recent
quotations from prospective suppliers
- Estimates should be as fully detailed as the available information permits, and
shall use the most recent relevant prices updated in line with the appropriate Cost
Index or Tender Price Index (Civil Engineering Works Index – CEWI) for the
month or quarter in which the estimate is done, to ensure they are valid prices
which reflects current market conditions
- Estimates should be compiled to a constant price level and then converted to a
money-of-the-day (MOD)value by applying adjustment factors to the cash flow
- The project estimate should include, if appropriate:
(i) works contracts under the project (e.g. civil contract, E & M contract)
(ii) diversion of utilities
(iii) consultants fees and expenses with resident site staff costs
(iv) landscaping
(v) site safety and environmental measures, etc
- Adequate contingency based on the assessment of risks and uncertainties should
be allowed in accordance with WBTC No.22/93 – Estimating using Risk Analysis
- Recurrent cost estimates shall be prepared prior to seeking upgrading of a project
to Category A. It should be prepared in sufficient detail and manner to allow
assessment of the full financial implication of the project in the immediate and lng
term.
2.4 ERA (Estimating using Risk Analysis)
- Risk analysis is a formal decision-making technique that helps identify and
measure uncertainty
-
Topic: Completion of Contract
1. What is Liquidated Damages (LD)?

- LD is a sum agreed by the Employer and the Contractor in advance (at the
time of making the contract) as the amount to be paid by the pContractor
as damages if the Contractor breaches the Contract by failing to complete
the Works in time.

To the Employer:
- The Employer is able to recover the pre-estimated amount of LD, if the
Contractor is late in completion due to his own fault.
- The Employer does not need to proof his actual loss due to the delay,
which may be extremely complex, difficult and expensive.
To the Contractor:
- The Contractor gets him known in advance what his exposure is in respect
of late completion.
- The Contractor can price their tender rate more precisely with due
consideration to the risk of delay.
3. What are the contractual provisions under which the Employer is vested
with the power of deduction of LD?
- Under GCC Clause 52, the Employer is entitled to recover from the
Contractor LD if the Contractor fails to complete the Works in time.
- Such date for completion should be the time stated in the Appendix to the
Form of Tender under GCC Clause 49 or any such extended time granted
by the Engineer under GCC Clause 50.
4. How to assess a genuine pre-estimate for LD?

- For PWP Contract, guidelines has been developed in relevant technical
circular [ETWBTC(W) No.4/2003 – Assessment of Liquidated Damages]
- Formula method is adopted
- 4 main components included in the formula:
- Loss of revenue or interest on the capital invested;
- Supervisory costs during the delayed period;
- Additional sum payable to the Contractor due to price fluctuation; and
- Any special damages specific to the particular project.
1
5. What is the difference between LD and penalty?

- LD is a genuine pre-estimate of the loss likely to arise from the anticipated
breach of late completion.
- A clause will be a penalty if the damages specified were extravagant and
unconscionable, judged in the light of the circumstances when the contract
was made, compared with the greatest amount of loss that could be
caused.
- If such sum is construed as a penalty, it will have no effect under the Law
and damages will be assessed by the courts by evaluating the actual loss
suffered by the injured party.
- As such, in assessing the LD at the time of preparing the tender, the
Engineer should make clear what might reasonably have expected to
happen.
6. What are the condition precedents for claiming LD?

- The LD clause must not be a penalty. The Employer has to ensure the
amount of the LD is a realistic and genuine pre-estimate of his likely loss
and is not to attempt to secure timely by the threat of imposition of a fine.
- There must be a definite completion date for the Works specified in the
Contract from which the LD can run.
- The Employer has to ensure that the Contract includes an EOT clause so
that the Contractor’s rights to extension of time is preserved.
- The Employer must have observed any relevant contractual procedures.
(e.g. Any EOT claimed by the Contractor has been considered by the
Engineer and it is in the opinion of the Engineer that the Contractor is not
entitled to any or any further extension)
- The Employer must not have waived its right to deduct LD.
7. Why do we need to set a minimum amount for LD?

- Under GCC Clause 52(2), the amount of LD is subject to proportional
reduction due to the completion or handling over of a part of the Works or
part of a Section in advance of the whole.
- However, such proportional reduction may not reflect the real effect of
delay.
- Some costs incurred on the Employer such as the special damages and
minimum supervisory staff costs cannot be reduced in such manner.
- It is thus necessary to incorporate in the Contract a SCC specifying the
minimum amount of LD.
2
Other points to note:

1. No time requirement is provided in GCC Clause 52 in respect to the imposition
of the deduction of LD for which the Employer should observe in enforcing this
Clause.
That means the Employer may recover from the Contractor LD as long as the
Works is not completed after the date of completion.
However, if the Employer do not draw the Contractor’s attention to his “intention”
to deduction of LD after an unreasonable time, would it be realized by the
Contractor that the Employer has waived his right to claim LD?
Reference:
1. Engineering Law and the ICE Contract (4th Edition), by Abrahamson
(P. 149-158, 427-428)
2. “The ins and outs of liquidated damages” – Hong Kong Engineer, May 2002
3
8. If the Employer “leads” the Contractor to believe that he does not require
the work to be finished by the completion date, and because of this the
Contractor does not give notice of claims for EOT or slow down the Works,
may the Employer later change his mind and claim LD from the original
completion date? (Waiver)
- In this case, the Contractor has given no “consideration” for the agreement
by the Employer to release him from the original date in the Contract, which
is essential for the court to enforce an agreement.
- However, the courts have developed the doctrine of waiver, which enable a
party to defend himself against an unfair change of attitude.
-
9.
4
Topic: Public Works Programme and Project Planning
1. Overview of the Public Works Programme (PWP).

Initiation of a Project:
- The life of a project in PWP starts from a need which is a response to a
problem or an opportunity.
- Client Project Brief (CPB)
- made by the client department or Policy Bureau to explain the
rationale for a project and the commitment to it on which the
subsequent PPFS should be based.
- Preliminary Project Feasibility Study (PPFS)
- conducted by the works department
- to ascertain the viability, determine the scope, formulate an
implementation strategy, and prepare the project estimates
- completed PPFS report will be reviewed by the ETW Bureau and
relevant Policy Bureau who will recommend it for the approval of the
Finance Bureau subsequently
- on approval of the PPFS reports, the project will be in Category C of
the PWP automatically.
Upgrading of the Project:

- Successful inclusion of the project in the Resource Allocation Exercise
(RAE) will entitle it to Category B
- the works department is entitled to carry out further planning and
design on the project which has secure the Category B status
- when detailed design and working drawings are substantially
completed, the directors of the works departments will seek funding for
the project from the legislative through the presentation of the Public
Works Sub-committee (PWSC) paper
- The project will be upgrade to Category A subject to the approval of the
Finance Committee:
- at this stage, a contractor is selected and its name will be submitted to
the Central Tender Board (CTB)
- the works department can accept the tender and get construction
underway subject to the approval of the CTB
- when the project is completed, it is handed over to the relevant
departments and maintenance authorities for ongoing operation and
maintenance
1
Category D Project:
- For small scale projects costing not more than $15 million
- PPFS is not required under normal circumstances
Deletion of a Project from PWP:

- It has checked that no outstanding financial commitments for the project.
- Report to Secretary for the Financial Services and Treasury for deletion
2. Client Project Brief (CPB)

- To set out clearly what the client is looking for as the end product of a
preliminary project feasibility study
- Drafted by the client in a way that does not presume any prior knowledge of
the project on others.
- A typical CPB should includes the following:
- Description of Project
- Scope of Project
- Budget Costs
- Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance (designated project?)
- Economic Appraisal or Financial Viability Studies
- Programme for Completion
- Things that should not be done and things to be aware of
- Supporting documents
- Client’s representative
- Comments on draft brief and funding of study (PPFS)
- Signature and delegation of authority
3. Preliminary Project Feasibility Study (PPFS)

- A typical PPFS report should include the following:
- Project Promotion and Delivery Agents
- Project Description
- Project Justification
- Development / Construction Options and Constraints
- Capital Cost Estimates
- Recurrent Consequences
- Land Requirements
- Preliminary Environmental Review
- Project Programme
- Project Delivery Resources
2
4. Resources Allocation Exercise (RAE)
- Overseen by the Star Chamber which is a committee comprising the Chief
Secretary, the Financial Secretary, the Secretary for the Financial Services
and Treasury and the Secretary for the Civil Service.
- Category C projects subject to the nomination by the policy secretaries and
approval of the Star Chamber will be upgraded to Category B
- Fund will be earmarked in the RAE
- It provides for the planning of capital works expenditure on a 5-year basis
- Project data to be updated:
- project cost, cashflow, and the 5-year allocation
- start and completion dates
- forecast expenditure for the current year and the next year
- Points to note in preparing the RAE bids:
- the works completion date should be the forecast completion date for
the last contract
- the forecast expenditure for the next year should be conservative
- for Category B project, the project cost and the 5-year allocation
should be adequate for the project to be upgraded to Category A
5. Public Works Subcommittee (PWSC)

PWSC (Public Works Sub-Committee):
- When a project has achieved Category B status, the works department is
entitled to carried out further planning and design on it.
- When the detailed design and working drawings are substantially complete,
the director of the works department will seek funding for the project from
the legislature through the presentation of the PWSC paper.
- The Finance Committee’s approval upgrades the project to Category A
status.
- When a project has achieved Category A status, the works department can
put out the work to tender.
- Please note that only works falling within the scope of the project as set out
in the approved PWSC paper may be undertaken.
- To downgrade/delete the project from Category A or to change the scope of
the project, a PWSC paper, addressed to PWSC and copied to the Works
Bureau and other relevant policy bureau, is required.
- Where the approved project estimate of a Category A project requires an
increase, without a change in scope, a submission in the form of a PWSC
3
paper should be made by the works department to the Policy Secretary for
onward transmission to Finance Bureau.
- A Category D project which is of a revised estimated cost greater than
$15M, can be upgraded to Category A by submitting a PWSC paper for
PWSC to endorse.
PWSC Meeting
- Regular meetings of the PWSC are held. Submissions can be made at any
time by the Works Departments having regard to the timetable for PWSC
meetings to ensure adequate time is available for:
- completing the detailed design and tender documents to meet the
scheduled date of commencement of construction, and
- the vetting of submissions by departmental headquarters and the
Policy Bureau prior to submission to the Finance Bureau and then to
PWSC.
* The lead time required for the first draft submitted by the Policy Secretary
to reach the Finance Bureau is about 2 months in advance of the specified
PWSC meeting. Whilst the lead time for the finalized PWSC paper to arrive
at the Finance Bureau is about 1 month in advance of the meeting.
(Beware of clashing with the summer recess of Legislative Council!)
PWSC paper
- Submission should be in the form of a draft PWSC paper. The contents of
the paper must be concise and capable of being fully understood by the
layman in both English and Chinese.
- The structure of a draft PWSC paper is as follow:
- Heading – head, programme, project code and title
- Preamble – state what PWSC is asked to recommend to Finance
Committee
- Problem – identify the problem clearly
- Proposal – set out the propositions for Member’s consideration
- Project Scope and Nature
- Justification
- Financial Implications – include estimate in money-of-the-day (MOD)
- Public Consultation
- Environmental Implications
- Land Acquisition
- Background Information
4
- Urgency
- Site Plan
- Schedule of “Recurrent Consequences”
(Section 3.3 of Chapter 2, PAH)
* To expedite the delivery of the capital works programme, the Secretary for
the Treasury has authorized Policy Secretaries and Controlling Officers to
approve applications to initiate works-related tendering or works-related
consultant selection procedures before funding is secured, without
separate recourse to Finance Bureau.
(Financial Circular No. 7/2001)
6. Project Estimates
Accuracy of Project Estimate:
- S for W’s concern about the persistent over-estimation of Pre-tender
Estimates against tender awarded and the unacceptable magnitude of the
over-estimation
- Works departments are required to take measures to improve the accuracy
of the Pre-tender estimates and project estimates before calling for tenders
and PWSC submission.
CURE (Committee to Update and Review Estimate of DSD):

- Internal committee in DSD to examine the project estimates before
submission of the PWSC paper to Policy Bureau.
- CURE meeting is held regularly. Divisions should plan their submissions
and inform the Secretary the proposed schedule accordingly.
Project Estimates
- Prepared in accordance with Section 5 of Chapter 4 of the PAH
- Pricing the BQ on contract basis using the latest contract rates or recent
quotations from prospective suppliers
- Estimates should be as fully detailed as the available information permits,
-and shall use the most recent relevant prices updated in line with the
appropriate Cost Index or Tender Price Index (Civil Engineering Works
Index – CEWI) for the month or quarter in which the estimate is done, to
ensure they are valid prices which reflects current market conditions
- Estimates should be compiled to a constant price level and then converted
to a money-of-the-day (MOD)value by applying adjustment factors to the
5
cash flow
- The project estimate should include, if appropriate:
- works contracts under the project (e.g. civil contract, E & M contract)
- diversion of utilities
- consultants fees and expenses with resident site staff costs
- landscaping
- site safety and environmental measures, etc
- Adequate contingency based on the assessment of risks and uncertainties
should be allowed in accordance with WBTC No.22/93 – Estimating using
Risk Analysis
- Recurrent cost estimates shall be prepared prior to seeking upgrading of a
project to Category A. It should be prepared in sufficient detail and manner
to allow assessment of the full financial implication of the project in the
immediate and long term.
ERA (Estimating using Risk Analysis):

- Risk analysis is a formal decision-making technique that helps identify and
measure uncertainty
- Definition
- Base Estimate – work that is unlikely to change
- Average Risk Estimate – total of all Average Risk Estimate plus the
Base Estimate
- Fixed Risk Assessment – a risk which is incurred as a whole or not at
all – All or Nothing
- Variable Risk Assessment – risk relating to an event or feature which
can occur in varying degree
- Maximum Risk Allowance – estimated sum if a risk were to occur to its
full extent – for comparison with the Average Risk Allowance and not
added into the estimate build-up
- Average Risk Allowance – estimated sum of money which is assessed
as having a 50% probability being exceeded.
- The project team should use their experience and judgement to
decide the probability
- Main activities in ERA:
- identifying the significant risks
- assessing the probability and extent of those risks occurring
- establishing appropriate $value for the risks
(WBTC No. 22/93)
6
7
Study Group Discussion on Concrete 09 Sept 2002 Secretary : Leung Sai Ho
Normal Question
1. Why concrete is used?

This question is transformed into a question on the advantage and disadvantage of
concrete.
Advantage:
(a) Relatively maintenance free when compared with other material such as steel
(b) Readily Available
(c) Cheap
(d) Design well-established
(e) Easy to be mould into desired shape
(f) Make use of waste (e.g. PFA, recycled aggregate, etc)
(g) Relatively skill un-intensive
(h) Pre-cast unit is under well control
Disadvantage:
(a) Relatively low strength to weight ratio
(b) Time limit on application once mixed (or batching plant is required on site)
(c) Formwork required
(d) Curing required (Strength has to be developed)
(e) Cracks cannot be totally eliminated => visually impaired
2. How to decide the grade of concrete to be used in a design?

(a) For special design, e.g. marine, water-retaining, etc., has specific
requirements
(b) Balance between higher grade (smaller section) and cost
(c) Market available grading (tailor-made vs usual available)
(d) Special care / treatment (e.g. CSF, PFA)
(e) Exposure Condition e.g. BS8110 Part I Table 3.4
3. Cost of Concrete
Common range (by Franco): $500 to $700
Study Group agreed value $800 plus/minus $100
Basic cost from plant $400 to $600 (by Eva)
China = $300
4. Substitution of Concrete
Sewage : FRP (fiberglass reinforced plastic)
Structural : Steel
Marine : Timber
Non-structural : Brick
5. Common defects of Concrete and Preventive Action

Common Defects:
(a) Cracks: Thermal, Shrinkage, Flexural, Direct Tension, Plastic Settlement,
AAR, etc.
(b) Honeycombs / Voids
(c) Cold Joint
(d) Insufficient cover
(e) Segregation
Preventive Action
(a) Cracks
(1) Place sufficient reinforcement against cracking
(2) Well-graded aggregate
(3) Lower temperature
(4) Proper curing
(5) For AAR cracks, control Na-equivalent salt content in the mix
(b) Honeycombs / Voids
(1) Sufficient compaction: Poker vibrator / External vibrator for steel
formwork
(2) Reinforcement should not be congested
(c) Cold-joint
(1) Proper arrangement of Construction Joint
(2) Proper sequence in casting concrete
(d) Insufficient cover
(1) Sufficient spacer
(2) Frequent inspection
(e) Segregation
(1) Avoid over-compaction
(2) Well-graded aggregate
Side-tricked Question
1. What is the use of filter layer behind rubble-mount seawall?

Not for Drainage but for separation.
2. Why standard mix not commonly use?

Standard mix is too conservative.
3. Why kicker of Retaining Wall is at the point of greatest moment and shear?
Kicker at there is unavoidable.
Side-tricked information
Theoretical min. free water / cement ratio = 0.18

Practically achievable w / c ratio = 0.23
Usual w /c ratio design range = 0.3 to 0.65
Marine works w / c ratio = 0.38
High strength concrete = 60 to 100 MPa
Laboratory high strength concrete = 200 MPa
Usual grade of concrete = 30/20 or 40/20
Mass concrete/Blinding of water-retaining structure (BS8007 requirement) = 20/20
Blinding layer = 10/20
Marine / Prestress concrete = 45/20
Water-retaining structure = 35A/20 or 40/20
Common concrete plant: 嘉華, Pioneer, Ready-mix, 中國建設, Anderson
Questions for Experience Report
1. What are the consideration your have taken during the selection of foundation or
why you choose mini-pile?
• From the site investigation report, I noticed there was a weak soil strata near the ground
level, so I adopted a deep foundation for the footbridge. In addition, as identified in the
site inspection, the congested area on site limit the type of piling and mini-pile with small
area for installation seems to be more suitable. Of course, the structural adequacy of
mini-pile was verified by carrying out the structural analysis.
• (The bedrock (Grade III or better rock, with core recovery > 85%) found in the vicinity
area is around 35m below the ground level.)
2. What you know about mini-pile?
• Each mini-piles consist of 4 no. of 50mm diameter high yield reinforcement surrounded
by Grade 40 cement grout and contained in a permanent casing of about 240mm
diameter. The mini-pile was socketted into the rock and has a load carrying capacity of
about 1375kN.
• The structural capacity of a mini-pile is only derived from the steel bars because of
comparatively high stress in the steel bar and strain incompatibility. Therefore the
capacity contributed from the grout and steel casing (enhance correction protection) are
ignored. Also because of the high slenderness ratio of mini-pile, they cannot resist
lateral load by bending, but raking pile can be arranged to resist the horizontal load
instead.
• (difficult to control verticality in greater depth, say deeper than 50m in pile length, less
flexural strength than Socketted steel H-piles and cannot resist horizontal load by
bending.)
3. How to install mini-pile?
• Basically, a pilot drill bit and an eccentric seamer are used. When drilling the hole, the
Page 1
seamer swings out to ream the hole wide enough for the casing tube to slide down.
• When finding is reached, the seamer is returned by reversing rotation.
• 4 no. of 50mm diameter high yield bars are installed in the casing and then, a
non-shrink cement grout is filled into the steel casing to encase the steel bars.
• (Verticality by angle meter in different directions, inclination, and alignment of the
mini-piles are checked during installation. The tolerance for deviation from vertical was
1 in 100 and from specified position in plan was 75 mm)
4. How to check the structural adequacy of mini-pile?
• By solving components, I worked out the carrying load of each mini-pile under different
loading combination. Then, I checked the critical loading case against the loading
capacity of mini-piIe which is 1375kN. Following that, I checked the buckling load
capacity, and also to calculate the required bond length at interface between steel
reinforcement and grout as well as the grout pile and bed rock (design bond stress for
compression < 0.7MPa).
5. What are the site constraints you observed and how did you incorporate them in
your design?
• The proposed foundation was found located on the existing footpath and confined by
closed building structures such that the working space available for piling work is
limited.
• In addition, balconies were also found in the second floor of the adjacent buildings. It
means it will further restrict the headroom for piling works.
• Therefore I use mini-pile because it requires significantly less working space and
headroom.
6. Is there any alternative design?
Page 2
• Socketted steel H-piles are also the commonly used pile foundation. It is formed by
inserting steel H-piles in pre-bored holes sunk into the bedrock, and subsequently filling
the holes with cement grout. However, it requires relatively large working area for
installation, so mini-pile seems to be better to use in my case.
7. What is the construction sequence?
• First to construct the two columns on both sides of Mong Kok Road by cast-in-situ
method.
• Then erect the precast beam of transfer girder crossing Mong Road and supported by
two columns.
• The precast extension span was subsequently erected over Nathan Road.
• To deliver the precast units from the casting yard to the site, the transportation route
was also designed and police escort might be called for assistance.
• When the precast beam arrived on site, it will undergo post-tensioning and then lifted by
2 no. of mobile cranes to erect the beam in place.
• The major reason to stress the tendon on site is that the prestressing force might be
disturbed during transportation. Also because after erection of the beam, there will be
no working space for stressing operation, stressing the tendon before erection seems to
be the adequate solution.
8. What is the main consideration in constructing mini-pile?
• It is important to set up the survey beacons to monitor any settlement occurred to the
adjacent structures because the installation of mini-pile might affect the stability of these
existing structures.
9. What load combination you used?
• We have 5 load combinations to be considered in accordance with Loads for Highway
Page 3
Bridge BD37/01, but from my experience, the first 3 load combinations generally are the
critical load cases.
• LC1: combine dead load and live load
• LC2: take into account the wind load
• LC3: consider temperature effect
10. How you used the site investigation report?
• I can obtain the geotechnical information of the ground condition from the bored log
report. The information included groundwater level, soil properties and bedrock level
which can be used for the foundation design. Although the bored holes might not be
carried out at the exact location of foundations, but I can take use of the nearest bored
holes information and anticipate the ground profile for my use.
11. What code of practice you used for this footbridge design?
• Mainly to use BS5400 part 4 for the structural checking, e.g. checking the anchorage
length between the steel bar and grouting.
• Also I followed the recommendations in Structural Design Manual to suit the local
conditions, e.g. concrete cover and allowable crack width for pile cap.
12. How long will it take to construct the bridge?
• According to the work schedule, the whole footbridge is expected to be completed by 18
months.
13. Describe Mong Kok Area?
• Mong Kok is the centre of Kowloon and consists of high density of residential and
commercial buildings. Many people, including tourist, would like to go to this place to
shopping and having supper. However, because the buildings are so closed to each
Page 4
others, the road and street do not have sufficient capacity to absorb the increasing large
amount of vehicles and the pedestrian users. Therefore, in these few years, the HK
Governments has developed and planned many measures to alleviate this congestion.
For example, they restrict the vehicles to use some of the roads during peak time and
also has built the Mong Kok Footbridge System to divert the pedestrian from using the
at grade road and crossing the busy road.
14. Why do you choose footbridge but not subway as the solution in your Feasibility
Study?
Regarding the physical constraints
• The subway constructed in urban areas was found in conflict with many existing utilities
and utility diversion is time-consuming and costly.
• The alignment also conflicts with the box culvert and a large diameter drainage pipe,
and cause major problems in aligning the subways.
• Also, no additional space for the ventilation shaft on ground level for subway scheme.
From traffic point of view
• Relatively large excavation area would cause disruption and disturbance to the existing
traffic during construction. Although the other construction method like horizontal pipe
jacking can be used instead of conventional cut and cover method. However it is
expensive.
Cost
• More importantly, the construction cost for a subway is found much higher than
footbridge scheme, say more than a double. The operation cost of subway is also
higher because of provision of lighting and ventilation facility at all time.
At last
• The pedestrian subway might possible attract crimes and pose a threat to the
pedestrian at night time.
Page 5
15. What is the disadvantage to adopt the footbridge scheme?
• The footbridge may impose visual impacts on the surrounding environment, but
landscaping works can be carried out to improve the appearance, such as considering
to provide planters along the footbridge superstructure in the design stage.
16. What have you considered in the design of footbridge?
• The alignment of footbridge should meet the basic movement of the potential users
and considering the site constraints and the needs of access or connection with
existing buildings. Also the requirement of minimum headroom and minimum clear
width of walkway should be maintained. Determine the size of footbridge by
considering the future pedestrian flow. Although it is not detailed design, but the
structural form and construction method should also be taken into consideration for
both impact assessment and accurate cost estimation.
17. What did you do for the WDII?
• I was mainly responsible for designing the diversion routes of the cooling mains which
will be affected by the proposed development project.
18. What do you know about this project (WDII)?
• The aim of this project is to construct a Central-Wan-Chi Bypass to alleviate the traffic
congestion. This trunk road is a vehicular tunnel passing along the north shore of Hong
Kong Island and connect to the Eastern Link Corridor.
• Because the tunnel is adopted cut and cover construction method, permanent and
temporary reclamation lands are required to facilitate the works.
• As recommended in the feasibility study, it should be used sand fill as the filling
material and carried out deep compaction after deposition. More rapid consolidation for
sand fill to facilitate subsequent tunnel construction on the reclaimed land.
• I am only responsible for the design of cooling main and the reclamation works is
Page 6
carried out by the other team. However, what I know is that….
• There are many downsides caused by the a succession of reclamation activity along
the Victoria Harbour. First, many harbour enjoyment have been taken away, like no
more swimming, dragon boat racing or catching and eating fish in the pier. Similarly,
the marine wildlife also lost the natural coastline for their habitat and shallow feeding
areas. Regarding to water quality, gradual narrowing of the harbour from reclamation
has reduced the flushing action of tides while the sewerage flushing into the harbour
has increased. The result is poor water quality and limits the marine life. Also, during
dredging operation before the fill is deposited for reclamation, it will stir up the
contaminated mud on the seabed and release some of contaminant, like heavy metal,
into the water, and harm the wildlife and affect the food chain.
• When this project was proposed by the Government, strong objection was received
from the public because they don’t want to narrow the Victoria harbour any more by
further reclamation. Then having carrying out many public engagement exercise for
almost 2 years times, the size reclamation land has been reduced to minimum to
satisfy both public and development needs. Then the government appointed MCAL to
carry out the detailed design in 2008 and schedule to commence the project
implementation in mid of 2009.
• In planning, minimize the size of reclamation land if practical. Also, throughout the time
of dredging operation, mitigation measure should be provided to prevent the dredging
material flowing or drifting away from the site, like providing silt curtain.
Page 7
General Questions
1. Ambition and Purpose to be a Charter status?

• I would like to upgrade my personal status to a higher level in the engineering
field. By then, I enable to gain more achievement from assuming more
responsibilities in my professional career.
• ICE is an internationally recognized engineering institution which allows me to
have more opportunity to working as a professional engineer outside Hong Kong
after being chartered.
• I hope you feel my appreciation in civil engineering field and agreed that I can be
qualified to become a chartered engineer.
2. What are Professional Engineers?

• Professional Engineers enable to use their fundamental education and training
to apply the scientific method and outlook to analyze and solve the engineering
problems. Also, professional engineer should be intelligent enough and possess
the high level of technical and managerial competence to behave differently
from the other professional in the society.
• Civil Engineering is all about creating, improving and protecting the
environment in which we live. It provides the facilities for day-to-day life and for
transport and industry to go about its work.
3. What do you know about ICE?

• ICE, Institution of Civil Engineers was found in 1818 by a group of idealistic
young people, and the first charter was granted by King George IV in 1828. ICE
is a registered charity that strives to promote and progress the civil engineering.
He believes the civil engineers are at the heart of society, delivering sustainable
development through knowledge, skills, and professional expertise. Nowadays,
ICE represents near 80,000 professional civil engineers around the World.
• The current President is Jean Venabels.
• Our strategy: To be a leader in shaping the engineering profession. We aim to
do this by:
1. delivering products & services that are attractive, relevant & valued by
members and employers globally
2. raising the profile of civil engineers
3. maintaining high professional standards
4. providing an international source of skills & knowledge for tomorrow's
engineering
5. being broad & inclusive of all those engaged in civil engineering
6. influencing governments, industry & public debate
General Questions
7. partnering with relevant bodies
4. What is CPD and why we need it?

• Professional Engineer is an occupation requiring advanced education and
special skills. Therefore, in order to maintain the high quality and competence,
professionals have to keep continual development after graduation from
university. By attending the CPD, professionals are expected to increase their
ability to meet the changing needs of the society, and also to adopt new
technology.
• Two examples of your CPD

a. There are many seminar courses and conference held by different
organizations every month. I picked those seminars I feel interested in or
directly related to my career. For example, I attended a short seminar called
“effective defense against corruption”. I feel it was very useful for me as I was
still working on site and I should know more about the corruption. After the
seminar, I realized that if I can always maintain my professional ethics, the
potential chance to offend the Hong Kong Corruption Law can be minimized.
As far as I concern, corruption occurs when an individual abuses his authority
for personal gain at the expense of the others. Independent Commission
against Corruption department was established by HK government in 1974 to
ensure Hong Kong being as one of the cleanest city in the world.
(Also, the most interesting thing I learned from this seminar was that the
receipt of entertainment is acceptable under corruption Law.)
b. Fact-finding on Arbitration. After the seminar, I understood that the arbitration

is one of the dispute resolutions. It has the legally binding and there are few
advantages to adopt arbitration:
1. Private and confidential, it is suitable for someone who don’t want to lose
their reputation.
2. You can choose your own expertise to give comments.
3. Arbitration can be cheaper and has higher successful rates than litigation if
use it properly.
4. It only can be challenged in very exceptional circumstances, so it means
fewer delays.
5. Also if the loose side doesn’t pay the award, you can go to the court to
facilitate the payment.
General Questions
c. The symposium invited many speakers from different countries around the
world and they come to share their finding to achieve the sustainable and
safe water supply. Generally, there were 3 components that should be carried
out as the strategy to improve the water quality. First, taking demand control
and water conservation as the priority. Second, controlling pollution
resources, increase investment and development technologies for
wastewater treatment and remediation of the polluted water bodies. Third,
developing un-traditional water resources, like wastewater reclamation and
reuse and seawater use.
d. In this recent years, the public is raising their concern on the Hong Kong’s
cultural heritage because they saw many heritage buildings being destroyed
or removed by the development. Therefore Hong Kong government has
established the Conserve and Revitalize Hong Kong Heritage in 2007 to start
protecting the cultural heritage in Hong Kong. (Carry the heritage impact
assessment to evaluate the nominated heritage and work out a proposal for
conservation)
5. What is Code of Conduct?

• ICE members are bound by the Institution's Code of Professional Conduct,
ensuring that ICE members maintain the highest standards of ethics and
professionalism.
a. All members shall discharge their professional duties with integrity.

• I never received any benefit offered by the Contractor or sub-contractors, even
the red pocket and supper they provided in the Chinese New Year. Because I
believe it is an effective defense against the corruption.
b. All members shall only undertake work that they are competent to do.
• When I was working as an ARE on site, I would liaised closely with the design
office. While there is necessary to make change to the design, I would propose
to the design office and to seek their comments and approval. Because I
understood that the Engineer’s Representative cannot override the power of
the Engineer.
c. All members shall always look after the public interest, particularly in
relation to matters of health and safety, and in relation to well-being of future
generation.
General Questions
• Before the piling work for the Pier P1 and P2 were commenced, I realized that
the live traffic might be affected during the bored pile construction because the
excavated muddy materials might spread onto the carriageway causing
potential hazard to the road users. Therefore, I requested the Contractor to
provide tarpaulin sheeting to cover the working area alongside the
carriageway.
d. All members shall always make consideration on the environment and on

the sustainable management of natural resources.
• As I mentioned in my presentation, I carried out a visit to neighborhood:
including the Hoh Fuk Tong Primary School and the property management
team of Lung Mun Oasis on a regular basis. Especially before the examination
period of the primary school, I collected their exam schedule and forwarded it
to the Contractor, and to instruct the Contractor to avoid operate the noisily
mechanical plant near the primary school during that period, such as their
mobile crane.
e. All members shall develop their professional knowledge, skills and

competence on a continuing basis and shall give all responsible assistance
to further the education, training and continuing professional developments
of others.
• I attended seminar, conference and technical visit regularly under the training
programme.
f. All members shall:

• Notify the institution if convicted of a criminal offence;
• Notify the institution upon becoming bankrupt or disqualified as a company
director;
• Notify the institution of any significant breach of the rules of professional
conduct by another member.
6. Safety vs economic issues

• I would explain to my senior that the safety and environment are the fundamental
requirements which cannot be removed. Also, if these issues are ignored, the
potential hazards and public complaints may occur as the compensation. It is not
worth to take the risk. However, what we can choose is to achieve either high or
low standard of these issues. And I would suggest to achieve a minimum standard
of these requirement if the budget and time are not permitted.
General Questions
• I would talk to him to understand the standard and criteria that he used to accept.
Then, I will explain to him that the acceptance of the standard must be according
to Contract’s specification and the consequence of non standard quality would
also be emphasized.
7. Example of public complaints

• At one stage when I was working on Tuen Mun Road L18A Project, a public
enquiry regarding our construction works was reported from our employer CEDD.
Basically, the enquirer was taking a bus from Tuen Mun heading to his office at
Tsuen Wan. However, he was experienced a traffic jam on Wong Chu Road and
being late work as a result. He thought it was caused by our construction activity.
But after some investigation, I found that the traffic jam was caused by a traffic
accident. I then phoned up the enquirer to explain what the actual cause of the
traffic jam and as he requested I wrote a statement to his office to verify his reason
of being late work. After the enquirer fully satisfied our action to his enquiry I wrote
an email to CEDD with the action we done to close this file.
• Another public complaint was reported during my time in Tuen Mun Road L18A
Project. Part of our construction site, Tin Hau Road, in where the road
improvement work was carrying out to match with the new road bridge spanning
across Wong Chu Road. A pedestrian observed that there the existing paving was
removed and there were some water ponding. But there was no worker working in
the area. In respond, I phoned up the complainer and explained to him that the
construction work was seriously affected by the recent rainy weather and was
forced to stop. But I promised him the works will be resumed immediately as soon
as weather permitted.
8. Responsibilities of ER
Responsibility towards the Engineer
• ER should take great care in exercising his power delegated to him by the
Engineer. If he is in doubt with any problems arisen on site, he should present
these problems together with his opinion to the Engineer for further decision.
He must be clear about the extent of his power and should not go beyond it.
Responsibility towards the Contractor

• ER should possess a helpful and co-operative attitude towards the Contractor's
problems. If he identify or foresee any problem in the early stage, he should
remind the Contractor immediately. Also, when assessing the contractor’s
General Questions
claims or fixing new rates for variation orders, the ER must make a fair
judgement and recommendation to the Engineer.
Responsibility towards the Public

• ER should always look after the interest of the public. For example, he should
ensure that the Contractor’s activity does not cause any pollution problem.
Responsibility towards the Client
• ER should ensure the works was satisfactorily constructed and commissioned
on time and within budget. Also, when fixing new rates for variation orders with
the Contractor, the ER should be impartial to the Contractor as well as to the
Client to finalize the price.
9. Why you think you have sufficient experience to become professional

engineer?
• Yes I believe so because in this three years time I followed a systematic
scheme A training which was a tailor-made programme and was designed to
prepare me for a professional civil engineer based on a multi-discipline
approach. This formal training route allowed me to learn from the job from
both design office and construction site. In the meantime, I also attended
many forum, seminar, and technical visit to broaden my knowledge in civil
engineering field. So after I have completed the scheme A training, I have
confidence that I have the competence to become a professional engineer.
10. Where is funding come from?

• All funding for public work projects shall be approved by either District Board
or Legislative Council. Basically, if the contract sum is estimated over
HK$21M, it shall be initiated in Legislative Council and seek approval from
them.
Questions – Project Report (Contractual)
Variation Order (VO)
1. What is VO? Under what circumstances the Engineer should issue a VO?
• Variation Order is the order issued by the Engineer to the Contractor to make variations
to the Contract’s Works.
• It may include:
o additions, omissions, substitutions, alterations, changes in quality, form, character,
kind, position, dimension, level or line;
o changes to any sequence, method or timing of construction specified in the Contract;
and
o changes to the Site or entrance to and exit from the Site.
• Under GCC Clause 60, the Engineer shall order any variation to any part of the Works
that is necessary for the completion of the Works and shall have the power to order any
variation that for any other reason shall in his opinion be desirable for or to achieve the
satisfactory completion and functioning of the Works.
2. How to evaluate a VO (VVO)?+++

According to GCC Clause 61,
• The work in the variation shall be valued at the rates set out in the Contract.
• If no rates can be directly quoted in the BQ, the new rates shall be agreed between the
Engineer and the Contractor.
• If the Engineer and the Contractor fail to reach agreement on the rate, the Engineer shall
fix the rate in his opinion be reasonable.
3. What are the difference between SCC Clause 36 and GCC Clause 60?
• SCC Clause 36 added a sub-clause to GCC Clause 60 to allow the Engineer to issue
variation order during the maintenance period.
4. Would an VO lead to Contractor’s claims? What consideration should be made in

offering VO in order to prevent future claims by the Contractor?
• It depends on the situations when the VO was issued. If the VO leads to delay of
progress, the Contractor may claim for EOT and associated costs.
• So in order to avoid future claims, two considerations shall be made when preparing VO:
o First, avoid issuing VO which will affect the activities in the critical path.
o Second, if new rates are involved, the Engineer should agree the rate with the
Contractor before issuing VO
1
5. Do you think that it may constitute a variation order if you advise the contractor to
reschedule their working sequence?
• Yes. If we request the Contractor to revise the working sequence, it will constitute a VO.
• So, I am extremely careful when assessing the Contractor’s programme and method
statement to avoid making unnecessary instruction to change their working sequence.
6. Please describe a variation order you have issued and how you estimate the cost.
• I revised the alignment of the drainage to avoid clashing with the existing utilities.
• Additional manholes were added to the pipeline in order to change the alignment.
• The cost of this VO was estimated based on the rate under the relevant items given in BQ,
such as for additional manhole and precast concrete pipe.
• Because this involved changing of the original design, I proposed this VO to the Engineer
and sought his approval before issue of this VO.
7. What would you do for better budgetary control for VOs?

• The effect of all issued and proposed variation orders was estimated using the best
information available.
• If the variation work to be carried out has the rates given in the Bills of Quantities, then
these rates should be used.
• If the variation work is carried out with the new rates, estimation will be necessary if the
new rates are yet to be agreed.
8. How about Site Instruction (SI) in the Contract?

• We did not have SI in this Contract. So, to instruct the Contractor to carry out provisional
items included in the Contract or tasks which did not have details but are included in
preambles of the BQ items, we would issue the VO to the Contractor. However, to instruct
the Contractor to carry out minor work which is not easy to be quantified, like delivery of
some materials, daywork order can be used.
9. What is Daywork Order (DO)?

• According to GCC Clause 62(1), if the Engineer considers it is necessary or desirable to
execute the ordered works on a daywork basis., Daywork Order shall be used. Generally
speaking, it is used for the additional minor works which is not easy to be quantified.
• e.g. ask them to deliver some material
2
Extension of Time (EOT)

1. List all possible reasons for granting EOT.
• The possible reasons for granting EOT are the delay due to:
(1) inclement weather and/or its consequences adversely affecting the progress of the
Works; (i). (ii) and (iia)
(2) an instruction issued by the Engineer under Clause 5; (iii)
(3) a variation ordered under Clause 60; (iv)
(4) a substantial increase in the quantity of any item of work included in the Contract; (v)
(5) the Contractor not being given possession of the Site in accordance with the Contract
or is subsequently deprived of it by the Employer; (vi)
(6) a disturbance to the progress of the Works for which the Employer or the Engineer or a
Specialist Contractor is responsible; (vii)
(7) the Engineer suspending the Works in accordance with Clause 54 (not due to the
default of the Contractor); (viii)
(8) any utility undertaking failing to commence or to carry out in due time any work directly
affecting the execution of the Works, provided that the Contractor has taken all practical
steps to cause the utility undertaking or duly constituted authority to commence or to
proceed with such work; (ix)
(9) delay on the part of any Nominated Sub-contractor for any reason specified in
sub-clauses (b)(i) to (ix) of this Clause and which the Contractor has taken all
reasonable steps to avoid or reduce; (x)
(10) any special circumstance of any kind whatsoever. (xi)
2. How do you handle the claims submitted by the Contractor?

To assess the EOT as an example:
• Firstly, I checked whether the reasons of the EOT claims fall within the list stated in GCC
Clause 50 (e.g. inclement weather)
• If so, I would check the programme to see whether the activity being affected is in the
critical path.
• If it is not in the critical path, it means the impact claimed by the Contractor will not lead to
the delay of works completion. Then EOT will not be granted.
• If it is in the critical path, I would study the submitted evidence and information, and check
them against the site record, such as weather chart and site diary.
• If the information provided is true and sufficient, I would write to the Engineer with my
recommendation of the duration of EOT to be granted.
• If the information provided is not accurate or insufficient, I would request the Contractor to
submit further information to support their claims.
3
3. What is critical path?

• A critical path is the sequence of project network activities with the longest overall duration,
determining the shortest time possible to complete the project.
• Any delay of an activity on the critical path will directly affect the project completion date
(i.e. there is no float on the critical path).
• An additional parallel path through the network with the total durations shorter than the
critical path is called a sub-critical or non-critical path.
• The site progress being affected by the reasons of EOT claimed should be in the critical
path.
4. If the delay of work is caused by both the contractor’s own fault and other external
factors (says inclement weather or variation), should EOT be granted?
• Yes, EOT should be granted.
• But the duration of EOT to be granted should be equal to the exact amount of claims due
to the reasons allowed in the GCC.
• No matter how many reasons of EOT claims on that day, only one day of EOT is added to
the Contract period.
5. Should EOT be granted if the works are obstructed by existing utilities?

• It depends on the actual situation. According to SCC Clause 50,
• The Contractor may claim for EOT for any utility work if the he could not foresee the
problem based on the information available at the tender stage.
• Upon making verification by the Engineer, it is possible that EOT would be granted.
6. Do you think that the Contractor is entitled to EOT if the UUs fail to carry out the
works as scheduled?
• The Contractor may be entitled to EOT if the UUs fail to carry out the works as scheduled
provided that the Contractor have taken all practical steps to prompt the UUs to proceed
with the work in accordance with GCC 50.
7. Can the Contractor claim both EOT and cost on the same cause of delay?
• According to GCC Clause 50(5), except as provided elsewhere in the Contract, any
extension of time granted by the Engineer to the Contractor shall be deemed to be in full
compensation and satisfaction for any loss or injury sustained or sustainable by the
Contractor.
• Therefore, the Contractor may or may not claim for both EOT and cost on the same cause
of delay. It all depends on the cause of the delay.
4
8. If EOT is to be granted, what are the associated indirect costs to the client?
• Loss of revenue or interest on capital invested in the project,
• Cost for Resident Site Staff
• Additional sum payable to the Contractor due to fluctuations in cost of labour and plant
• Any special damages specific to the project e.g. causes delay to another project.
Liquidated Damages
1. What is liquidated damages? How did you assess the rate of the LD?
• Liquidated damage is an agreed sum to be paid by the Contractor if the Contractor
breaches the contract by failing to complete the work in time.
• The LD is calculated using the rate per day prescribed in the Form of Tender. The period
of LD to be calculated should be the number of days from the prescribed date of
completion or any extension until the certified completion date.
• (A provision for LD’s is enforceable if the amount fixed is a genuine pre-estimate, judged
at the time the contract is entered into, of the loss likely to arise from the anticipated
breach. The Employer does not need to prove actual damages but LD’s are not
enforceable if imposed as a penalty.)

1. LD provides certainty to the Employer to recover his lost in term of money if the Contractor
breaches the Contract by failing to complete the work in time because of poor performance.
2. During tender stage, LD also provides certainty to the Contractor to estimate and price the
risks based on the amount of LD set out in the Form of Tender.
3. What is the relationship between EOT and LD?

1. EOT extends the time of completion of the Works and provides the Contractor with relief
from LD.
2. Also EOT sets a new completion date beyond which the Employer retains the rights to
deduct LD.
Payment
1. Do you know what an S-curve is?
• Once the Contractor’s programme is known, a curve of forecast expenditure can be
plotted on the financial progress chart and it is called an S-curve.
• The actual expenditure can also be plotted on this chart to compare the current financial
status.
5
2. What are the possible reasons for actual expenditure lagging behind forecast
expenditure?
• Slow rate of progress
• Changes in Quantities: errors in the Bills of Quantities becoming apparent.
3. How do you carry out the measurement of works?

• As-built drawings – most of the works, e.g. concrete and formwork, etc.
• Site measurement – cable ducts
• Survey record – Initial survey for ground profile
4. How do you assess the payment for “material on site”?

• According to GCC Clause 79, the interim payment can include the estimated value of
materials (1) for the use in permanent work and (2) not being too early delivered to and (3)
being properly stored on the Site.
• Basically I assessed the value of the MOS based on the contractor’s submitted quotation
of the material cost and compare with the relevant BQ rate of permanent works that the
MOS is included. And I will assess the rate of the MOS by estimating a reasonable portion
of the relevant BQ rate which I consider as the material cost.
5. What are common causes for exceedance of final contract sum?

There are 4 common reasons for that:
(a) Changes in Quantities because of like,
This may be revealed by one or more of the following:
(i) measurement of completed work being sufficiently advanced to show
inaccuracies in original estimates;
(ii) ground conditions becoming more adverse or more favorable than
expected; and
(iii) errors or omissions in the Bills of Quantities becoming apparent.
(b) Contractual Claims
(c) Variation Orders
(d) Contract Price Fluctuations (CPF)
6. What is Contract Price Fluctuation (CPF)?

• We did not have CPF because of relatively short Contract period. However CPF may be
specified in some Contract.
• As the labour wage and material cost would vary with time in the market, GCC allows
fluctuation in the final contract sum due to this change. Under GCC Clause 89, the interim
and final payment certified by the Engineer shall be increased or decreased if there is any
6
change in the Index Figure published by Census and Statistics Department.
7. What is Retention Money?

• To protect the interest of the Government, the government departments may hold back a
certain sum as retention money in the interim payment.
• The amount of retention money is normally no more than 5% of the contract value.
• The retention money will not be released to the contractor until the Government is fully
satisfied with the supplies delivered or the service provided after completion of the
contract.
• RM Certificate should be issued within 14 days from the date of Maintenance Certificate,
and the Employer shall pay the money within 21 days of issue.
8. What is allocation warrant?

• When a government department requests another government department to carry out
particular works, the cost of these works is covered by an allocation warrant.
• For example in our project, CEDD issued an allocation warrant to HyD Lighting
Department requesting them to provide the street lighting along the new road.
9. Interim payment assessment

• Under the Contract requirement, the Contractor shall submit the IP to the Engineer at the
end of each month. It includes the estimated Contract sum of the work done up to the
reporting month, and included a priced list of MOS, and the estimated sum of VVO, and
Missing items. The Engineer has the obligation to value and certify the IP within 21 days of
receipt of IP application.
• In assessing the IP, I checked the application with our site record like material on site, site
progress and safety and environmental activities, etc in order to ensure the quantities they
claimed were in order and the worked to be paid were entered into the appropriate items
provided in the BQ. As such, the submitted IP was usually corrected by us and it was to be
certified based on the corrected quantities.
• (According to GCC Clause 88, the Contractor shall be entitled to terminate the Contract if
the Employer fails to pay any certified sum after 30 days of issue of certificate.)
Monetary Claims
1. What are the costs likely to be included in a prolongation cost claim? How to assess
the new rate?
(i) Head office overhead
(ii) Site office overhead
(iii) Cost escalation
7
(iv) Cost claims from subcontractors

(v) Depreciation on assets
(vi) Delayed release of retention money (finance charges)
(vii) Adjustment of levies
• There are 3 major items that may be involved for the new rate, they are….:
• For new rate of material, quotation from 3 different suppliers shall be submitted for
assessment.
• For labour and plants rate which are the standard rates to be made reference to HKCA
Schedules, and Government Building and Construction Projects.
• Other than that, for on-cost rate to the missing item, head office overhead (like the
average of company turnover for the last 3 years) and site office overhead shall be
submitted, and also allow a margin of 3% for the profit & risk.
• (According to GCC Clause 59, the Engineer shall render the rate if he considers it is
unreasonable or inapplicable.)
2. What site records are normally kept?

• Site diary, records of material testing, record photographs, weather record, progress chart,
site measurement book, and dayworks sheet.
• The site diary contained the detailed record of the progress of work, labour employed,
construction plants (working or idling), weather and site conditions which all may be used
for any future claims assessment, like EoT. (or for managerial decision and contract
administration)
3. What are the dispute resolutions in HK?

• In Hong Kong, many jurisdictions construction disputes are generally resolved by a court of
law through litigation if negotiation between two parties is failure. However two alternative
methods of dispute resolution are also commonly used, they are mediation and arbitration.
• Mediation is a confidential, voluntary, non-binding and private dispute resolution process in
which a neutral person (the mediator) helps the parties to reach a negotiated settlement.
• Arbitration is a judicial process which results in an award being issued by an arbitrator or
the tribunal. Arbitration awards are final and binding on the parties and can only be
challenged in very exceptional circumstance.
Programme and Progress
1. What is the significance of a programme?

• GCC Clause 16 requires the Contractor to submit a works programme at the
commencement of the Contract to clearly show the sequence, method and timing of all
major activities.
8
• This programme enables the Engineer to assess the whether their proposed sequence,
method and timing, conform to the Contract requirement.
• This programme is also used as the basis for the Engineer to monitor the progress of
works.
• 3 month rolling programme was submitted every monthly to show a detailed breakdown of
the works to be carried out in the following 3 months, together with the outline of reminding
works.
2. How do you carry out the checking of the Contractor’s proposed work programme?
• First, I would check whether the works sequence is logically arranged.
• For example, in the first issue of submitted programme, I spotted the crossroad span
construction was arranged before construction of Pier 2 was completed. Then I asked the
Contractor to revise their programme.
• Apart from this, I also check whether the duration of each activity is reasonable. For
instance, I asked the Contractor to justify how they could complete a pile cap within 3 days
in accordance with their submitted programme. Obviously it is not reasonable because
taking into account the excavation, soil compaction, laying concrete binding, formwork
erection, rebar fixing and concreting, 3 days are not enough to complete all.
3. What will you do if the Contractor submits an unrealistic programme?

• I would comment on the Contractor’s programme by highlighting the area which I found
unrealistic.
• Then I would request the Contractor to justify what methods of construction and resources
to be employed on the critical activities to achieve the programme.
• And subsequently request the Contractor to revise the programme and re-submit for our
further consideration.
4. What should be done by the Engineer if he considers the Contractor’s works

programme to be inadequate?
• If the Engineer considers the Contractor’s programme is inadequate, he shall write to the
Contractor in accordance to GCC Clause 16 requesting them to provide more information
and details.
5. How did you monitor the Contractor’s progress?

• I carried out site inspection and checked the site record regularly to monitor the progress
of works and compared the actual progress against the master programme & 3 months
rolling programme with particular attention paid to major critical activities.
• Apart from this, I also attended the progress meeting on a monthly basis to review the
9
progress of works together with the Contractor and the Engineer. Any problems associated
with the Contract works were also discussed with possible solutions.
6. How can you check whether adequate resources have been deployed by the
Contractor?
• I can check the record of labour and plants resources from the site diary.
• If the resources are found to be inconsistence with the progress and nature of the works,
the Contractor was asked to justify.
• For example, as the falsework erection for stage 2 and 3 of bridge deck construction were
carried out at the same time to catch up the delay of progress, then it was expected that
the number of workers employed should be more than for stage 1. However, as I noticed
that the labour resource did not increase, then I reminded the contractor to review the
labour resource and advise me how they can achieve the planned progress.
7. How can you determine whether there is serious delay? What will you do then?
• I can compare the progress of the works against the works programme to check whether
or not the Contractor have suffered from a serious delay. If the Contractor failed to
commence or complete a critical activity as scheduled, a serious delay is considered.
• Then I would report to my senior on this problem before I discuss and identify the reason
for slippage with the Contractor and requesting them to expedite the progress.
• If the situation does not improve, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor in accordance
with GCC Clause 51 requesting them to take the proposed steps and revise the
programme accordingly to expedite the progress
• However, this warning letter would be reflected in Quarterly Contractor’s Performance
Report.
• Finally, if there is still no improvement on the progress, the Contractor might be invited to
agree to voluntary suspension.
8. When should the programme be updated?

• The programme should be revised when EOT granted for the Works, progress is too slow
to ensure completion, progress on critical activities is behind the programme, and
programme is unsuitable due unforeseen event occur.
Risk Management
1. Unforeseen ground condition is common during construction, how can you do

better to minimize the cost and time implication as an ER?
• Identify the critical areas which are sensitive to adverse ground conditions, such as piled
foundation and retaining wall.
10
• Carry out site investigation early in the Contract to ascertain the soil parameters adopted
in the design.
• If unforeseen adverse ground condition arises, liaise with the designer as soon as
possible to seek the alternative design if necessary.
• Evaluate the different design options in respect of time and cost implication to the
Contract.
Staff Management
1. How do you manage the team of site supervisory staff?

• Discuss with the inspectorate staff and arrange their routine duties.
• Maintain communication with them, e.g. to have regular site staff meetings.
• And also identify their training needs, for example, I arranged the seminar for our land
surveyor to enhance his awareness of the new surveying equipment.
2. As the IOWs and WSs are very experienced, how do you manage them, especially,
when you have different views with them?
• I would listen to their views and reasoning patiently.
• If I found that they have sufficient grounds, I might follow their ideas.
• If I do not agree with them, I would explain to them why I have such decision.
• I think that the key point is to maintain effective communication with the site staff and to
solve problem in a cooperative manner.
3. Do you have subordinates working under you? How do you excise your leadership?
• An assistant inspector of works and a works supervisor.
• Apart from assigning some routine duties, I also discussed the site problems with them to
work out the solution together.
• For example, the inspector concerned that the rebar fixing at the end block are seems to
be too congested and not easy to compact the concrete. Honeycomb might be formed.
Then, what I do was firstly explained to him the purpose of those reinforcement. Without
affecting the original design, we finally decided to refine the lap arrangement of the close
link to release more space for concreting, to allow the aggregate to reach the bottom.
Tendering
1. What are composition of Tender Documents?+++

• Covering Letter
• Article of Agreement
• Form of Tender
11
• Conditions of Tender
• GCC and SCC
• Specification
• Tender Drawings
• Bills of Quantity
2. What are the methods of tendering?+++

• Open Tendering
• Selective Tendering
• Single and Restricted Tendering
• Prequlified Tendering
(A) Open Tendering

• All interested contractors/suppliers are free to submit their tenders.
• Including newly established contractor
• Advantages:
1. Chances of biases and favoritism can be reduced
2. Can get the lower tender price due to the keen competition
• Disadvantages:
1. Poor quality may be the drawback of low tender price.
2. An expensive to client on tender assessment
3. Cost of abortive tender will be reflected in the next tender
(B) Selective Tendering

• Only the contractors on the relevant approved lists will be invited to submit tender.
• Selected tenderers should be capable for completing the works
• Advantages:
1. Inexperience contractors have been screened out.
• Disadvantages:
1. Tenderers may submit an inflated price if they do not want the job for fear of losing
future opportunity.
2. Tenderers may get together and negotiate the price and take turn to submit the
“lowest price”
(C) Single and Restricted Tendering

• Only one or a limited number of contractors/suppliers are invited to submit tender.
• Used for special circumstance, e.g.
1. Works are urgently needed where open competitive tendering would seriously harm
12
the public interest

2. No response from open/selective tendering
3. The product/services can only be provided by particular supplier and no reasonable
alternative/substitute
• Advantages:
1. Shorter time for tender assessment.
• Disadvantages:
1. Additional effort shall be put to prevent tenderers from knowing that they are invited
on the single and restricted basis Otherwise, high tender price will be resulted
(D) Prequlified Tendering

• Tenders will only be invited from the list of prequalified contractors (similar to selective
tendering)
• To ensure the tenderers are financially and technically capable of undertaking a particular
project
• Applicable where
1. the cost of the tendering exercise is high or can be significantly reduced if tenderers
are prequalified
2. projects of an extremely complex nature
3. projects which call for a high level of co-ordination and technical expertise
4. non-standard form of contract, e.g. Build-Operate-Transfer (BOT)
• Advantages
1. To identify those contractors who are interested and capable of undertaking the
contract in advance
• Disadvantages
1. Not flexible in dealing with policy changes (e.g. unable to lower the fee of WHT to
ease the congestion problem in the other two cross harbour tunnels)
3. What are the tender evaluation methods adopted by the government? What are the
advantages and disadvantages?
Two methods of tender evaluation are introduced in this circular viz.:-
(a) Formula Approach
• The formula approach to tender evaluation will only take into account the tender
price (in 60%) and the tenderer’s past performance (in 40%).
• Normally, the tender with the highest overall score should be recommended for
acceptance, subject to the usual requirement that the department is satisfied that the
recommended tenderer is fully capable (including technically, commercially and financially)
of undertaking the contract.
13
• The performance rating means the performance rating held in the ETWB’s Contractors’
Performance Index System (CMIS)
(b) Marking Scheme

• There are occasions where the quality of service or product is a major
consideration, e.g. works contracts for high value or prestigious projects, works which
are sensitive or have a bearing on public safety or convenience, works which are of
unusual complexity or require a high level of co-ordination, technical expertise or unusual
technology or works which are subject to very tight programme schedules.
• Marking scheme approach is used instead of prequalification exercise unless it is a
mega-sized project.
• The respective weights for price and technical score are 60/40.
Formula Approach:
(a) Simple
(b) Short time required for tender assessment
(c) Taking into account the past performance of the tenderers
Marking Scheme Approach:
(a) More transparent and systematic approach to tender evaluation
(b) Putting more emphasize on the quality of tender
(c) Eliminating the time-consuming prequalification process
(d) More comprehensive assessment on the technical, commercial and financial
capacity
(e) Tailor-made marking scheme to suit the specific features of the contract.
Contract
1. What are the key differences between various types of contract? (e.g.
remeasurement, lump sum, cost reimbursement and design and build)
Remeasurement Type Contract with Bills of Quantities
It has two characteristics:
• First, the approximate quantities included in the contract are subject to final measurement
of completed work during the progress of the contract.
• Second, the approximate quantities provide a competitive base for the submission of
tenders, giving a fair indication of the ultimate cost and provide a base for the
measurement of variations.
• This type of Contract is usually found in many Government projects.
• Because it avoids great expense to prepare the firm quantities. It is exceptionally good for
government contract in which the quantities of works are uncertain at the time of tendering,
such as earthwork project.
14
• Also it allows the overlapping of design and tendering which is particularly useful for fast
track project.
• (It saves the effort of taking off by the tenderers.)
• At last, it is conventional type of contract, so contract documentation has been well
established.
• However the disadvantage is that if the bills are too approximate, the tenderers will tend to
speculate the final quantities during tendering.
Lump Sum Contract

• This type of contract provides the agreed contract sum in advance.
• It is used for minor works or projects with substantial part of the works are unlikely to
change in quantities. The value of….
• Such that the employer can save a lot of works for remeasurement at interims and
completion of contract.
• Also it provides certainty of final contract sum.
• However the disadvantage is that higher risk is involved due to unforeseen circumstances,
it is only suitable when the scope of work can be clearly defined.
• Also the design must be completed before tendering, and more time is required for
tendering as well.
Because SCC was added to modify GCC for this lump sum contract: One clause stated that the
quantities in BQ are firm except where described as provisional. Only the provisional quantities,
variation order, missing items and errors in firm quantities are remeasured. According to this
clause, it meant that if the error was discovered in the firm quantities, the quantities shall be
remeasured. For example, the BQ was originally agreed 3m3 of concrete binding to be used for
each pier pile cap. However by remeasurment, 4.5m3 was the real figure, so we adopted the
remeasured quantity in the payment.
Provisional Sum
A sum provided for the works or expenditure which has not be quantified or detailed at the time
the tender documents are issued.
Contingency Sum
A sum provided for the works or expenditure which cannot be foreseen at the time the tender
documents are issued.
Prime Cost Sum

It means the sum provided for works to be executed and for materials or services to be
provided by a nominated sub-contractors.
15
Schedule of Rate Contracts

Characteristics:
• This type of Contract is suitable for the quantity of works which cannot be quantified.
Basically, a schedule of rates is drawn up with all required items for the works and allows
the tenderer to insert the price or percentage against each item.
Application:
• This type of Contract is usually found in many maintenance or minor works and for
provision of services.
Disadvantages:
• The tenders might provide the rate that allow for uneconomic use of resources.
Design and Build Contract

Characteristics:
• The Contractor undertakes to design and construct the works.
Application:
• It is exceptionally good for fast track projects because.
Advantages:
• Single point responsibility
• Reduce communication needs, disputes and claims
• Aids fast tracking
• Economical from using contractor’s expertise and available resources.
Disadvantages:
• It is difficult to evaluate different bids or tenders as they are based on different designs.
• Possibility of designer’s cutting corners so it requires careful checking of the submitted
design and during construction to ensure the quality( and minimize subsequent
maintenance requirements and costs)
• And finally this type of contract is more difficult to supervise and control.
Build Operate and Transfer (BOT)

A BOT contract is a contract in which a company is willing to take up the construction of a
project under an agreed term with the promoter and to operate the facility as toll franchise for
an agreed period to recover their construction investment after which it will be handed over to
the promoter, usually the Government. BOT contract is most suitable for major infrastructure
project such as cross harbour tunnel or bridge, which can attract toll and is found financially
viable. (The companys bidding for this type of contract are usually in form of
design-and-construction companies in which the main contractor is the major shareholder. The
major financial resources come from the commercial bank loans and they employ a private
consultant to carry out the design works and a project management company for the works
16
supervision. However, the promoter’s interest is safeguarded by appointing an Independent

Checking Engineer for the supervision of design and construction works and also for progress
monitoring.) This contract form creates an incentive for the company to achieve cost effective
design and construction since the company is responsible for all these payments. However,
this contract is not flexible in dealing with policy change, e.g. unable to lower the toll for the
facility during operation.
2. Did you involve any preparation of contract documents in design office?

• I didn’t involved much in preparing contract documents in design office, however, I
developed most of my contractual knowledge when I was working on-site.
17
Questions – Project Report (Technical)
1. What is you involvement in this Contract?
My responsibility is mainly to assist the Resident Engineer to carry out part of his duties
in managing the Contract, including supervising the works, monitoring the Contractor’s
progress, checking Contractor’s submission and taking part in safety matters.
Examples:
• In suprvising the works – with the assistance of the site staff, I supervised closely
the earthwork and formwork erection, rebar fixing, concreting and prestressing
process.
• In monitoring the Contractor’s progress – I checked the contractor’s programme,

and attending progress meeting
• In checking submission – I checked the material submissions, temporary works

design and method statement
• In taking part in safety matters – I attended Site Safety Management Committee

(SSMC) Meeting and weekly safety walks, checking submissions, like safety plan,
temporary works design and the associated risk assessment.
2. What’s the hierarchy in your project?
This project was administered by the Engineer.
• The Engineer then delegated part of his powers stipulated in the Conditions of
Contract to the Engineer’s Representatives (ER) who is Resident Engineer
(RE).
• My post as an Assistant Resident Engineer (ARE) was to assist the ER in site

supervision and Contract administration. I was also assisted by other Resident
Site Staff (RSS):
• Inspectorate team including me, an ARE, an assistant inspector of works and a
work supervisor who was responsible for the material quality, workmanship and
site records.
• Land surveyor was responsible for site surveying works,
• Quantity surveyor was responsible for measurement works.
• Labour Relations Officer was to monitor and report any wage dispute between
the Contractor and their site staff.
• Geotechnical Engineer was required in the Contract to supervise the
geotechnical works, such as retaining wall and bored pile construction.
3. What are the responsibility and roles of ER and RE?
• The duties of the ER are set out in GCC. The duties are
o to watch and inspect the Works,
o to test and examine any material to be used and workmanship employed by
the Contractor
• The Engineer may delegate part of his powers to the Engineer’s Representative
which normally includes:
o Order variations up to certain financial limit ($100,000 for ER)
o Agree and keep site records with Contractor
o Carry out measurement for payment purposes
4. Any site problems (and how can you solved it)?
Supply of concrete
• Half way through the Contract period, the primary plant of concrete supply was
closed down and the concrete were then supplied by the agreed back up plants.
However those two back up plants were located far away from our construction
site and we envisaged that in the event of traffic jam, the delivery time of concrete
might be too long (>2.5hrs) and the concrete might be no longer workable.
Solution
• Having confirmed the situation, we advised the Contractor to add appropriate

amount of super plasticizer to the concrete mix before delivery from the backup
plant. Because we believe that it can allow the concrete to maintain their
workability longer for the travelling.
5. An inspectorate team has already been appointed to inspect the works done
by the Contractor, why are you also responsible for site inspection (e.g.
check reinforcement fixing)?
• From training point of view, this assignment allowed me to witness and
understand:
o how the designed works are actually constructed at site
o the site constraints and difficulties encountered, like congestion of rebar
fixing. (refine the details)
• These are valuable experiences which could not be obtained easily from the
training at the design office.
• These experiences make me consider constructability when I do the design.
6. As an engineer, what will you do when you find sub-standard quality in the
completed works, say, a defective manhole?
• I would request the Contractor to carry out the remedial works by verbal
instruction or issuing a Non Conformity Report.
• At the same time, I would also investigate the reason for this defective of works
and asked the Contractor to review their construction method and quality control
procedure to avoid reoccurrence.
Temporary Falseworks
1. What considerations have you taken in the checking of temporary works

submissions?
• To check whether the temporary work is applicable to the actual site conditions,
like whether the dimensions and levels will fit the proposed location because we
understand more about the actual site condition than the ICE.
• To check whether the ICE has certified the temporary works design.
• To check the obvious deficiencies such as design parameters and design
principle whether are reasonable and match with their design drawings
2. What are the main considerations in reviewing the method statements of

temporary works from the Contractor?
• Firstly, I will check whether the construction sequence is logically arranged and
achieved the function
• Secondly, I will check whether the contractor has included a risk assessment in
their submission.
• Then, I will study their risk assessment and see if any foreseeable risk has been
taken into account,
o e.g. detection of underground utilities before excavation
• Also, I will check whether the proposed method will bring adverse effect on the
adjacent structure
o e.g. ground treatment on falsework base plate.
3. What works shall be defined as temporary falseworks?

• The items of temporary falseworks to be checked are clearly described in the PS.
One example is the excavation trench exceeding 2m depth.
4. What are the duties of Contractor, ICE and ER in the design and
construction of temporary works?
Contractor:
• has to design and construct the temporary works
• and also to employ ICE to check the proposed temporary works

ICE
• has to check the structural adequacy of the temporary works design and issue
the Design Certificate if the design is found satisfactory
• he also has to check whether the temporary works are constructed in accordance
with the approved design and issue the Construction Certificate if the as-built
temporary works is found satisfactory
ER:
• Refer to above item 1. to ensure ICE has carried out his duties in certifying that
the temporary works have been safety and properly design.
• then to issue consent to the Contractor for commencement of works upon making
verification.
5. How the temporary working platform was erected and dismantled?

• First carried out TTA to close or narrow the traffic lanes to facilitate the falsework
erection.
• Then, the concrete blocks, Quad shore supports and bearing beams (305x305)
were erected along both side of Wong Chu Road.
• The crossroad beams (610x305) were erected during the night time closure. 3
number of crossroad beams were welded (butt weld to be fully examined) on site
to form a module and erected in place one by one by a 80 ton mobile crane.
• Once the crossroad beams were erected in place, they were welded onto bearing
beams and connected with some bracing members to enhance the stability of the
whole structure.
• Four night time closure were carried out in the weekend to minimize the traffic
disturbance.
• To dismantle the working platform, road closure during mid night was conducted.
• The weld connections between the crossroad beam and bearing beam as well as
the bracing members were cut by using oxy-acetylene set (flame cut).
• The crossroad beam was removed one by one using a crane lorry and then a (50
ton) hydraulic mobile crane was arranged to shift the crossroad beam to the site
area.
• Six consecutive night time closure were needed to remove all the crossroad beams
from Wong Chu Road. The carriageway was cleaned up and re-opened to traffic at
6am every morning.
• Finally, the Quad shore supports alongside Wong Chu Road were completely
removed during daytime.
Precaution:
• Provide personal safety equipment, like safety helmet, reflective jacket, and body
harness.
• Provide safe access and sufficient lantern to temporary working platform.
• Provide proper training for working at height.
6. If the temporary work failed, who would be responsible even although the
Contractor had followed strictly to the method statement to construct?
• According to GCC, the Contractor shall take full responsibility of the temporary
works. In principle, the Engineer should not be responsible for the failure provided
that he has ensured the ICE has carried out his duty to check and certify the
temporary works, and also the Engineer has counter checked the design
assumption and parameter used in the design to ensure the safety and stability of
temporary work.
Concrete
1. What tests are required for in-situ concrete? What are the procedures?
What are the acceptance criteria?
Test for Workability : Slump Test (sample taken from each batch)
• Procedures (in accordance with CS1):
o Basically a slump cone is placed on the ground.
o The fresh concrete is filled in three layers of equal depth and each layers are
tamped with 25 strokes by the tamping rod.
o The top layer of concrete is leveled to the top of the slump cone.
o The slump cone is then removed by raising it vertically, slowly and carefully.
o Immediately after the slump cone is removed, the slump shall be measured to
the nearest 5mm by determining the difference between the height of the
slump cone and the highest point of the concrete specimen. (True, shear &
collapse slump)
• Acceptance Criteria (in accordance with GS):
o The average slump value of the two specimens shall be within 25mm or 33%
of the approved slump value, whichever the greater.
Test for Strength: Cube Compressive Strength Test (sample taken from 10 batches)
• Procedures for Sample Preparation (in accordance with CS2):
o A 150mm x 150mm steel mould is placed on a horizontal surface,
o The fresh concrete is filled in the mould in layers of approximate 50mm deep.
o Each layers are compacted by at least 35 strokes using compacting bar.
o The top layer of concrete is leveled to the top of the mould with steel float.
o Normally after 24 hours, it can be demoulded and the specimen are then put in
the curing tank at temperature of 27C (+- 3) degree.
o The samples will then transported to public works laboratory for compression
test.
• Acceptance Criteria (in accordance with GS):
o The individual cube strength shall not be less the grade strength.
o The average of any four consecutive cube strength shall exceed the grade
strength by an appropriate amount:
3MPa for Grade 40 Concrete
And 5MPa otherwise
o The standard deviation of the last 40 cube strength shall not exceed 8MPa in
any case.
o (All four faces are cracked equally, with little damage to the faces in contact
with the platens)
2. If slump test was failed, will you allow Contractor to proceed concreting?
What should ER do if the Contractor insists to do so?
• If the slump test is failed, it may indicate that
• the wrong mix, or
• the sampling or testing was carried out incorrectly
• Therefore, if the result is just fail the requirement, I would allow the Contractor to
carry out the slump test again to see if the results are consistent.
• If the result is fail again, I would not allow the Contractor to use this batch of
concrete in the permanent works.
• If they insist on concreting, I would record the details of the event and ask the
Contractor to justify the quality of the permanent works is unaffected by testing.
• GCC Cl 42(5): “In the event that any test shows that the Contractor has failed to
comply with the requirements of the Contract or with the Engineer’s instructions in
respect of materials or workmanship, the Contractor shall propose and carry out at
his own expense further or any other tests as the Engineer may approve.”
• The investigations may be carried out by coring concrete from permanent work for
cube tests and visual inspection to proof the strength, integrity and durability
complies with the Contract requirement
• If the work is shown to comply with the requirements of the contract, we should
accept and pay for the work.
3. If the compressive strength test was failed, what will you do?
GCC Cl 42(5): “In the event that any test shows that the Contractor has failed to
comply with the requirements of the Contract or with the Engineer’s instructions in
respect of materials or workmanship, the Contractor shall propose and carry out at his
own expense further or any other tests as the Engineer may approve.”
If the compressive strength test is failed, I would request the Contract to core samples
from the hardened concrete to prove the integrity and strength of concrete.
Acceptance Criteria (in accordance with GS)
• the concrete core shall not show any honeycombing which may imply
inadequate compaction and/or lack of mortar.
• the average cube strength shall exceed 85% of the grade strength
• the individual cube strength shall exceed 75% of the grade strength
4. What would be the problems if the concrete is too dry? (wet?)

• If the concrete is too dry, it means it has a low slump, and it may be difficult to
place and compact satisfactorily.
• Voids might be formed easily inside the hardened concrete.
• Honeycomb might be formed in worse case.
• (If concrete is too wet, segaration will occurs and air void might be formed in the
harden concrete. In addition, the high w/c ratio would also reduce the concrete
strength.)
5. What is concrete binding?

• Binding is to provide clean dry surface for rebar fixing & formwork erection.
6. Have you checked the proposed mix of concrete? ***

• Trial mix, including Laboratory Mix Trial and Plant Trial, have been carried out
and the results are found satisfactory. The purpose of carrying out trial mix is to
obtain the test data on the designed concrete mix which are proposed to be
used.
• Laboratory Mix Trial :
o Is for changing in design mix
• Plant Trial:
o Is for different concrete plant
7. What is the use of PFA of concrete mix?

• Pulverized Fuel Ash

• A good replacement of cement without reducing concrete strength
• It is cheaper than cement
• Less heat will be generated, so less crack
• Improve the workability of concrete
8. What would affect the strength of concrete?

• W/C ratio
• Degree of compaction
• Curing
• Age of concrete
9. What is W/C ratio? How do W/C ratio related to strength of concrete?

• W/C ratio is the ratio of Water to Cement in terms of mass.
• Minimum W/C for hydration of Cement is about 0.23
• For W/C > 0.23, strength decrease when the ratio is increase
10. How many types of cracking of concrete? What are their causes?
• Flexural Crack
o Formed in harden concrete due to overloading / differential foundation
settlement.
• Early Thermal Crack
o Formed during hardening of concrete due to high temperature gradient
which caused differential thermal movement
• Shrinkage Crack
o Formed in hardened concrete due to restraint against drying shrinkage
• Plastic Crack
o Formed during placing of concrete due to plastic settlement / shrinkage of
fresh concrete
11. What are the significant of crack control?

Crack control is important because:
• it affect the appearance
• Secondly, the moisture and oxygen may ingress into the concrete easily through
the crack. It will make the reinforcement corrode at a faster rate. The durability
of the structure is reduced as a result
• Thirdly, water proof would be affected if there are cracks in concrete.
12. Please suggest ways to control surface cracks from design and
construction point of views?

• In the Design:
• We can reduce spacing of rebars
• Reduce the concrete cover
• Or increase the amount of reinforcement
• In Construction:
• Proper curing should be ensured
13. How to ensure adequate compaction of concrete (or quality of concreting)?

• *** Before concreting, discuss with the Contractor about the concreting method
and resources to be used for the concreting works.
• e.g. Spare equipment should be available in case of breakdown. ***
• Carry out slumps test to ensure workability of concrete.
• To reduce the heat generated from the hydration by ensuring the initial concrete
temperature is below 32oC.
• Closely supervise the works to ensure the compaction is carried out properly,
• Use suitable diameter of internal vibrator for compaction.
• Vibration should be applied continuously starting from placing the
concrete, until the expulsion of air has practically ceased.
• The vibrator should be inserted to the full depth of concrete placed and
should be withdrawn slowly.
• Contact between vibrator and rebars/formwork/other built-in component
should be avoided in order to prevent any undesirable displacement.
• The concrete shall be placed continuously to avoid formation of cold joint.
14. What is curing? Why is it important?

• Curing is a process to keep the concrete moist during the strength development
process.
• It is important because:
• Concrete develop the strength through continuous hydration of cement
paste.
• The hydration is a chemical reaction between the cement and water.
• Heat will be generated during hydration and lost by evaporation.
• So, curing is to retain and replenish the water during hydration and is
necessary for the strength development of concrete.
15. How to ensure good curing?

The aim of curing is to protect the concrete against harmful effect of weather, running
water and drying out:
There are four methods of curing:
• Method 1: A liquid curing compound can be applied to the concrete surface by a
low-pressure spray until a continuous visible covering is achieved.
• Method 2: The concrete surface can be covered with absorbent materials like
hessian and canvas which should be kept constantly wet.
• Method 3: The concrete surface shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting to

prevent the concrete surfaces becoming dry up.
• Method 4: Water curing can be carried out by spraying the concrete surface
continuously with cool water or by ponding immediately after the polyethylene
sheeting is removed.
16. What are sulphate and chloride attack and carbonation on concrete?
• Sulphate Attack:
• It causes expansion and disruption of concrete.
• Its effect can be reduced by using cement with low C3A content.
• Carbonation
• The alkaline condition of hydrated cement paste will be neutralized by the
carbonation.
• Without the protection from the alkaline condition, the steel reinforcement
will corrode easily if moisture and oxygen could ingress.
• The effect of carbonation can be reduced by using lower W/C ratio and
larger cover to reinforcement.
• Chloride Attack:
• Chloride ions in concrete will destroy the protective film of steel surface and
lead to corrosion.
• GS limits the choride ions content in concrete
0.35% by mass of cement for reinforced concrete
17. What are the remedial measures for honey combing / grout leakage &
spalling concrete?
• Chip off all loose concrete and remove all loose materials until a sound surface is
obtained.
• Clean the surface thoroughly to ensure the surface to be repaired is free from
dusts, oil and other surface contaminants.

• Grout the concerned area up to 5-10mm from the finished surface with non-shrink
grout of adequate strength.
• Cure the repaired area.
• Patch up the remaining part with cement mortar.
• Smooth out the surface with sand paper / sanding machine
18. How to prevent thermal crack for the mass concreting?

• In design, PFA or ggbfs can be partially (<25%, behave like surface retarder) used
to replace the cement.
• Before concreting, I also remind the Contractor that the temperature of concrete
shall be maintained below 32oC as specified in the Contract. For large concreting
process, like concreting for bridge deck, particularly when the ambient
temperature is high, I advised the Contractor to add icy water to concrete. In
addition, I would check the initial concrete temperature by taking reading with the
thermometer before the concreting was allowed to proceed.
19. What are the remedial measures if concrete leakage is found?

• If grout leakage was found during concreting, it shall be sealed up by filler
immediately.
• However, the precaution before concreting is to seal up the joints by foam of
compressible joint filler or strut and wailing.
20. How do you check formwork before concreting? What sort of precautions?
• Firstly, I would check the type of finish against the Working Drawings.
• Then, I arrange land surveyor to check the alignment and level of the formwork.
• Most importantly, I would ensure the temporary support of formwork has been
checked and certified by the ICE because the failure temporary support may pose
immediate danger to the workers.
21. What is the tolerance of formwork erection?

• According to the P.S. the tolerance of formwork shall be +/- 6mm
22. What is the contingency plan for concreting? ***

• 2 backup plants (Anderson Road and Tai Po)
• Spare pumps and pumping pipes
• Spare vibrator for compaction
23. How did you check the cover before concreting?
• During rebar fixing, the cover spacers and chair supports (scrap metal) were
mounted at the outermost reinforcement to separate off the reinforcement and the
formwork.
• As such, I checked whether these cover spacers are sufficient to maintain the
reinforcement in the right position, and I also used a measuring tape to check
whether the height of the cover spacers and chair supports do provide adequate
concrete cover.
24. What are the procedures of forming construction joints (CJ)?

• Surface retarder is applied by brush or spray after placing the concrete and
protect the applied surface with plastic cover sheet.
• Retarder can chemically delay the set of surface mortar which can be washed
off and expose the aggregate easily.
• After the concrete has sufficiently hardened, using high pressure water jet to
remove all the loose materials at the construction joint surface and expose the
aggregate of concrete.
• Before placing another batch of concrete, clean the joint and ensure the
surface is dry.
25. What would you do if raining during concreting?

• It depends on the how bad the weather is and the area to be exposed for
concreting.
• If there is only drizzle and the concreting work can be completed in a short
period of time, I would allow the concreting to proceed but need to provide
cover for the concreting area.
• However, if there is a heavy rain or still have a large area to be concreted, I
would instruct the Contractor to stop the concreting. At the same time, I would
advise the Contractor to use plywood to separate off the fresh concrete and
the remaining cleaned area, and also to use tarpaulin sheet to cover and
protect the fresh concrete from the rain. (affect w/s ratio)
• Before the concreting can be reumed when the weather is permitted, clean the
surface and ensure the surface is dry.
• (about 200m3 of concrete is required for each span)
Steel Reinforcement
1. What tests are required for reinforcement and their acceptance criteria?
• Testings will be conducted in accordance with CS2 to determine the
• Tensile strength
Individual sample > 0.93 x required characteristic strength

Mean Strength > characteristic strength +10MPa
• Bend Test
Rebar shall withstand 180o bend around former (with diameter of 3d)
Show no sign of cracks on visual examination
• Rebend test
Bend by 45o around former
boil the specimen for 30min
rebend it for at least 23o after cooling
the rebar shall not be broken into 2 parts.
2. How many class of reinforcement

• Class 1:
• Reinforcement from QA manufacturer and handled by QA stockist
• Lot traceable
• Class 2:
• Reinforcement from QA manufacturer and handled by QA stockist
• Not lot traceable
• Class 3:
• Reinforcement not from a QA manufacturer;
• Or not handled by QA stockist
3. How did you check the reinforcement fixing? What sort of precautions
• In checking the rebar fixing, I will check the bar size, bar spacing, lap length and
anchorage length of rebar, against the working drawings.
• Material submission – examine the mill certificate and test results.
• Arrange material test to determine the properties.
4. How do you ensure the spacing between every bars is correct?

• I would only check the bar spacing on a random basic.
• However, the total number of rebar on each face would be checked because I
believe if the total number of rebar is correct, the average spacing of the rebar
should be correct.
5. What is the effect of rusting in reinforcement?

• If the reinforcement is rust, bonding strength around rebar will be reduced.
• Hence, the rebar cannot develop sufficient tension to carry the design load from
the anchorage length.
6. How did you ensure all the rust of reinforcement are removed?
• When the rebars were delivered on site, they should be bent and fixed as soon as
available to shorten their exposure time to air, and hence to reduce the chance of
rusting.
• Secondly, all the fixed steel would be cleaned by high pressure water jet to
remove the rust.
• Finally, our staff would conduct inspection on the rebar conditions before
concreting to ensure that the rebars are in good condition.
Steelworks
1. What tests are required for structural steelworks?
• According to GS Clause 18,
• Tensile Test and Impact Test shall be carried out in accordance with BS4360.
• Tensile Test
• Is to determine the yield strength of the steel
• Impact Test
• Is to test the how brittle the product is at low temperature
2. Please descript the painting system? (System II, 10-20 years)

• First is the Pretreatment :
• Which is Etch Primer to provide adhesion between the steelwork surface
and subsequent coating
• Second layer is the Primer:
• Which is epoxy coating to protect steel against atmosphere exposure
• Next layer is the Undercoat:
• Which is epoxy coating with higher durability
• The final layer is Finish
• To give the required colour and texture.
Post-Tensioning
1. What is the test for prestress tendon? Submission particular?
• 1 sample was taken from the size of batch less than 50 tons. A sample comprised
of 15 specimens with 1.5m long and straight tendons taken from different tendon
coils.
• Each specimen of prestressing tendons shall be tested to determine the
characteristic breaking load, characteristic 0.1% proof load, elongation at
maximum load, diameter, cross-sectional area, unit mass and modulus of
elasticity.
• Also each specimen of prestressing wire shall be tested to determine the ductility.
• Details of prestressing tendon and apparatus, method of prestressing, calculated
theoretical extension, testing and calibration certificate, details of anti-bursting
reinforcement, corrosion protection and schedule format.
2. Why was the bridge prestressed?
• The prestress in concrete was achieved by straining the strands relative to the
concrete, causing tensile stresses in the strands to balance the compressive
stress in the concrete.
• It can improve the performance of the bridge by counter-acting the tensile stress in
the concrete in service.
• As a result, the depth and hence the dead weight of the bridge deck can be
reduced.
3. If stressing the tendon at one end, is the prestressing force equal to

stressing at both ends?
• Yes. Because we assume the tendon is in equilibrium. If a body is in equilibrium,

any part of the body is also in equilibrium, i.e. the internal force = external force.
4. Can you describe the prestressing process and the safety precautions?
Prestressing Process
• The tendon ducts were fixed along the webs from one end to another by mouting
to the reinforcement according to the tendon profile.
• Our supervision staff would then check the tendon profile to see if it was in
accordance with the working drawings.
• When the concrete of the span has reached 7 days old and attain a minimum cube
strength of 40Mpa, the strands were threaded into the ducts for stressing.
• The prestressing apparatus, such as hydraulic jack and loading gauge, were set
up.
• The prestressing force was applied to each tendon stage by stage in accordance
with the stressing order specified in the contract until the specified jacking force
was reached. (Double wedge system to lock off the stress).
• On each stage, extension and stressing force were recorded and will be compared
with the theoretical extension in later time.
• After that, the Contractor would cut the remaining tendons at the anchorage end
after we approved the stressing report.

• The stressing report was mainly to show the actual measured extension of each
tendon and I have to check whether the deviation between actual extension and
theoretical extension were within the allowable range. (<5% in average and <10%)
for each tendon.
• Finally, the tendon ducts were grouted for corrosion protection to the stressed
tendons.
Safety Precautions
• The hydraulic jack should have a valid testing certificate to show that it is in good
condition before put into use.
• The area behind the operating hydraulic jack should be properly fenced-off. ***
• The prestressing of tendons should follow the sequence shown on the working
drawing.
• And to close monitor the stressing operation to ensure the prestressing force does
not exceed the value specified on the drawing.
5. What would you do if the tendon is broken during stressing?
• Luckily I didn’t come across this accident, but I know what I should do if it is the
case. (if it is happen, the prestessing force in pressure showing on the loading
gauge would suddenly decrease)
• Then I would instruct the Contractor to stop the stressing operation immediately
and check if there is any injury & potential danger caused by the breaking tendon.
• Then, I would inform the ER about this event and discuss with the Engineer to
check the design whether it is safe to increase jacking force to the rest of the
tendons to compensate the lost because the jacking force normally is not allowed
to reach beyond 80% of the ultimate tensile strength of tendon.
• Therefore, the Engineer has to make considerations on the strain-stress
characteristic of the tendon and also the friction loss.
• (Friction loss, wobble, wedge draw-in, anchorage friction and relaxation)
6. Why measuring the extension can verify the jacking load? (Why stressing
the tendon on both end & why stressing the tendon at increment?)
• Because Hooks Law is applied. Within the elastic limit, the strain produced in a
body is directly proportional to the stress. Therefore we can compare the actual
tendon extension with the theoretical extension to monitor if there was any
abnormal condition taken place to the tendon during stressing, like breaking of wire
or tendon, or restriction of the tendon movement due to obstruction, etc. It is the

fact that the theoretical extension is hardly identical to the measured value
because of various factors, so there is a tolerance allowed for deviation between
the actual tendon extension and theoretical extension according to GS.
• When a tendon is being stressed, the stress of the tendon will decrease with
increasing distance from the anchorage and changing in alignment due to friction
between the duct and tendon. Therefore stressing the tendon on both ends was
designed to cater for this friction loss and allows the prestressing force to be
applied adequately to the structure as designed. Stressing on both ends or from
one end shall be determined by the Engineer in the design stage.
• Because we need to take the progressive reading for the actual tension tendon in
order to keep track on the tendon condition during stressing operation.
7. Could the hydraulic jack accommodate the completed stressing process?
• No because the hydraulic jack has its own limitation of extension. Therefore we
had to return the stroke back to the original position when it was reaching the
allowable length. During this process, the steel wedge installed at the anchorage
end would lock-off the prestressing force and only the other set of wedge installed
at the jacking end was released.
8. What protection will be given to prevent tendon corrosion?
• The tendons are protected by the grouting of the tendons (alkaline environment).
• Grouting of the tendons should be effective such that the duct is fully filled, and the
prestressing tendons are completely surrounded with grout without void formation.
• To achieve this, grout vents were installed at each anchorage, all the high and low
points along the tendon profile and grout was pumped into the duct with a
pressure below 0.5MPa. The grout vents were closed until the grout was
overflowing from the vent one by one. After the last grout vent has been closed,
the injection vent was closed under pressure for 5 minutes.
9. Describe grouting test, fiction test, bleeding and free expansion test, flow
cone test
• Trial prestressing beam – to test performance of proposed grout mix and grouting
procedure complies with the Contract requirement. The beams would be then cut
into a few of sections for visual inspection without sign of crack and void
formation.
• Friction test – to verify the assumed design parameter by checking the residual
force at dead end. The friction loss is determined by stressing the tendon at dead
end and plotting a graph of tendon forces against tendon extension. Then, find out
the intersection point of two best fit lines and compare the calculated tendon
forces at dead end and the measured values against the specified requirement
(within +10% & -5%).
• Bleeding and expansion test – grout is poured into a covered cylinder with a
diameter of 100mm, to a depth of 100mm and the amount of bleeding (<4%) and
free expansion (<10%) measured by a scale fixed to the outside of the cylinder.
• Flow cone test – to determine the flow cone efflux time of the grout.
TTA & Carriageway pavement
1. What is you involvement in supervising the construction of works? (new

road)
• I attended the Traffic Management Liaison Group Meeting.

• Also I checked the proposed Temporary Traffic Arrangement (TTA) scheme for
statutory and contract requirement, and for safety as well as nuisance
considerations.
2. Which government departments did you liaise with for the traffic diversion?
• I approached Transport department and Hong Police Force (RMO – Road

Management Office) to seek their Traffic advice and traffic notice.
• I also applied Excavation permit from HyD.
• And also circulate our TTA drawings to FSD for their comments and information.
3. What is purpose of TMLG Meeting?
• To ensure public road users safety, to minimize the impact on local traffic capacity,
and to maintain pedestrian accessibility throughout TTA implementation.
4. What are the precautions in constructing a flexible pavement (quality

control of bituminous materials)?
• Bituminous materials should not be laid during wet weather or when ponded water
is present.
• Bituminous wearing course material shall not be laid when the ambient air
temperature is too low.
• Surfaces on which bituminous materials are laid shall be clean and free from mud,
grit and other deleterious material.
• Bituminous materials shall comply with the temperature requirements in the GS
during laying and compaction. (130-165oC after mixing)
2 required tests for all paving materials
Bulk Sample
• Particle size distribution
• Bitumen content (not for SB)
Core Sample (not for SB)
• Air void content
• Compacted thickness
5. How do you check the Contractor’s proposed mix of bituminous material?
• Check for the material content against the requirements in the Contract.
• Check for valid testing certificate.
6. Laying & quality control of bituminous materials
1. According to HyD standard drawing: Sub-base > road base > base course >
wearing course
2. Use crushed aggregates for sub-base. (it can increase the interlocking between
aggregate particles. Important to check flakiness indices and water absorption of
aggregates)
3. Bitumen – to hold different parts of pavement together. Marshall Design Method

shall be adopted in mix design method for government project. The limits for
aggregate grading, bitumen content and the mixing temperature are specified.
4. Trial laying of the mix – 10 random core samples taken from trial area to
determine the void content after compaction.
5. Avoid to lay bitumen during wet weather and low ambient temperature –
temperature of mix fall quickly and difficult compact.
6. Laid by mechanical pavers as far as possible.
7. Important to control the compaction sequence and timing.
8. Three-wheeled steel wheel roller – without causing displacement or surface

cracking of uncompacted material.
9. > Smooth tyre pneumatic roller and then finished by steel roller. Hand held
vibrator is used around the edge or corner.
10. Removed of all tyre marks are the evidence of sufficient compaction.
11. A total of 10 cores of 150mm diameter randomly selected from paved area.
12. To test the air void content – high air void content would speed up
deteriorating process of the paving. However, if the air void content is too
low, it would weaken the aggregate interlocking and inter-fiction and
cause bleeding will reduce the surface friction.
Backfilling
1. What is the required for compaction of fill material?

• Fill material shall be compacted in layers to a stable condition as soon as
practicable after deposition in order to avoid settlement.
• The fill material shall be compacted to obtain a relative compaction of at least
95%.
• Moisture (water) content of the fill material is also to be tested to ensure the
optimum moisture content (max value of dry density) for proper compaction.
Therefore, earthwork should not be carried out during wet weather because it will
affect the moisture content of the soil.
2. How can you judge whether the soil is suitable for re-using?
• Carrying out laboratory testing to determine the soil properties
• Fill material should be tested to determine the liquid limit (<65%), plasticity index
(<35%), and particle size distributions (GS)
Waterworks
1. Describe the pressure test
• The length of each section to be tested is usually 400m along carriageway and
800m along footway.
• The water pipeline is tested to a water pressure of 1.50MPa.
• The pressure shall be adjusted to within the specified tolerances for the test
pressure at any time during the test period when the pressure falls outside the
specified tolerances.
• The water pressure is monitored during the test by means of a continuous

pressure recorder which was plotting a chart at the same time.
• The leakage of water from the pipeline shall be measured as the amount of water
required to maintain the specified test pressure in the pipeline; the amount of
water shall be determined from the fall in level of water in the pump feed tank.
Drainage works
1. Describe water test, air test, infiltration test and visual inspection
Water Test
(a) The pipeline was filled with water and kept filled for two hours to allow
absorption to take place.
(b) A test pressure of 1.2 m head of water was applied at the standpipe and
maintained for 30 minutes and topped up at 5 minute intervals during the test.
(d) The leakage of water from the pipeline shall be measured as the amount of
water was added to maintain the specified head of water.
Air Test
(a) Air shall be pumped into the pipeline until a test pressure of slightly more than
100 mm of water is registered on a U-tube manometer connected to the
pipeline. Five minutes shall be allowed for stabilisation of the air temperature,
and the air pressure shall then be adjusted to 100 mm of water.
(b) The pressure shall be read from the U-tube at the end of a five-minute period
without further pumping. The air pressure shall remain above 75mm head of
water at the end of the air test.
• Air is pumped into the pipeline while both ends of the pipe are properly
plugged. The air pressure is monitored by means of an U-tube
manometer and the pressure shall be maintained up to 5 minutes for the
test.
Visual Inspection
• The inside of the pipeline shall be inspected visually, and infiltration or

damage to pipes or joints shall be recorded.
2. Installation
1. Firstly, excavate the narrow trench with sheet piling for pipe installation.
Narrow trench – when backfilling, the shearing friction is acting upwards
along the trench wall, so the pipe takes up all the soil load within the trench
width. Wide trench – when backfilling, the shearing friction is acting

downward, so the pipe only takes up the soil load from the top of the pipe.
2. Pipelines shall be laid in an uphill direction with sockets facing uphill. This
is to prevent individual section of pipe slip down during construction.
3. Pipes which terminate at the inside face of structures shall be cut such that the
end of the pipe is flush with the face.
4. Aggregate for granular bedding shall be deposited in the trench in layers
not exceeding 150mm thick. Each layer shall be compacted using a plate
vibrator.
5. Holes shall be dug in the granular bed to prevent pipes resting on the sockets and
to allow the pipes to be jointed.
6. After the pipes have been jointed, aggregate shall be deposited in layers not
exceeding 150mm thick equally on both sides of the pipes to the specified level
for the complete width of the trench. Each layer shall be compacted using a plate
vibrator.
7. For typical granular bedding, the finer material shall be deposited until it
reaches the middle of the pipe and compacted to a relative compaction of
95%. The, the coarser material shall be deposited until it reaches the top
level of the pipe and compacted to a relative compaction of 95%. Finally, the
same material shall be deposited to a level 300mm above the crown of the
pipe and compacted by hand to a relative compaction of 85%.
Bored Pile
7. What is Bored Pile? How to construct Bored Pile?

Cast-in-situ bored piles are basically formed by boring a hole into the soil and filling it
with concrete.
1. Firstly, carrying out pre-drilling to ascertain the rock head level (Grade III or better
rock).
2. Drive the temporary steel casing into the soil at a continuous semi-rotary motion
by means of an oscillator.
3. A hammer grab excavated the soil within the casing and bolt joint the casing upon
additional lengths until it was reaching the rock head level.
4. Once the rock head level was reached, use reverse circulation drill (RCD) to form
the rock socket with air-lifting in operation to bring away the sediment into the
storage tank during the drilling.
5. Then install the pre-fabricated steel reinforcement cage into the bored hole.
6. Pour concrete into the bored hole by underwater tremie method while the
temporary casing was being withdrawing simultaneously. (About 6m height of
concrete has been poured, the shaft was withdrawn simultaneously by oscillator
so as to maintain a minimum head of at least 3m between the top of concrete and
the toe of the casing. This activity was carried out with great care because if the
bottom of the casing was lifting above the concrete, the water might surge into
the hole and weaken the concrete)
7. To check their integrity by means of acoustic method using a probe to lower it
down a pre-installed small-diameter iron tube in the pile. (The acoustic probe
transmitted ultrasonic pulses which passed through the pile concrete and were
picked up by receiver mounted in an adjacent iron tube in the same pile)
8. Finally, carrying out an interface core to check the condition of concrete/rock
interface at pile base through a pre-installed and relatively large diameter of iron
tube.
• Static load tests are not very effective in determining pile integrity while physical
coring can only examine a small portion of the cross-sectional area.
• Also, it is usually too costly and time-consuming to perform these tests for all the
piles in the contract.
• Non-destructive integrity testing has been used to augment these tests in
assessing structural integrity of piles.
• Provided that the limitations of integrity tests are understood and allowed for, they
provide a useful engineering tool for quality control.
Utility
1. What kinds of underground utilities you consider is dangerous?

• Gas Main
• High Voltage Electrical Cable
• High pressure Water Mains
2. What special precaution/procedures should be carried out for the works
near dangerous utilites?
• The alignment and profile of underground utilities should be detected first, e.g. by
digging some trial pits.
• The alignment of dangerous utilities should be fenced off with sufficient clearance
(says 600mm for gas mains)
• Warning signs should also be erected.
• If excavation works near dangerous utilities is necessary, the corresponding UU
should be consulted in advance.
• Hand-excavation shall be used instead of excavator near the alignment of the
utilities.
• If any damage to the utilities is found, it should be reported to corresponding UU
for remedial works.

• Vibration to existing utilities should be avoided.
• Drilling and boring near gas main should not be allowed as well.
3. How did you deal with uncharted utilities?

• When encountering uncharted utilities, basically, I have two options.
• The first one is to ask the UU to divert their service to facilitate our proposed
works.
• Another option is to modify our design, like changing the alignment of the pipeline,
to avoid the clashes.
• As utility diversion is always time-consuming which will cost delay to the progress
of the works, I would choose to modify our design provided that it does not
involve substantial additional cost to the Contract.
Method Statement
1. What method statements should we ask the Contractor to submit? What

will you do if the Contractor did not follow the method statement?
• Under the Contract requirement, the Contractor had to submit method statement
for our checking and comments to ensure the safety and quality of the Works.
• For example, like erection of temporary working platform and post-tensioning, etc
in my project.
• The Contractor has the freedom to choose the construction method to suit the
actual site conditions and to match with his own technical expertise and plant and
labour resources, unless the Contract has already specified the construction
method.
• If the construction method seems to cause immediate dangerous to the people or
damage to the existing structures, I would instruct the Contractor to stop the
works immediately.
• However, if it is necessary to carry out the alternative construction method on-site
and also be acceptable in term of safety, I would keep closely monitoring their
works throughout the construction process and give advice and instruction if
required.
Safety
1. What is your involvement in safety matters?

• Attending Site Safety & Environmental Management Committee (SSMC)
Meeting
• Attending weekly safety walks

• Checking submissions, like safety plan, temporary works design and also the risk
assessment attached in method statement.
2. In checking the Contractor’s submission, how can you ensure the safety of
the labours in addition to the stability of the temporary work?
• In checking the Contractor’s submission, I would go through the whole process
of the works and identify any potential hazards to the labours.
• If necessary, I would discuss with the Contractor if they could revise their
scheme to minimize the risk to the workers.
• Also, I would request the Contractor to include a risk assessment in their
submission to identify the potential risk and to propose risk mitigation measures.
• According to this risk assessment, I arranged our site staff to ensure the works
were executed in a safe manner.
3. What is risk assessment?

• The Contractor shall carry out, review and submit to the Engineer risk
assessments for works scheduled to start at least for the next two months.
• The works shall be broken down into jobs/tasks for hazard identification and
evaluation of the level of risk by competent persons.
• This is a document to contain the hazards identified, the likelihood and
consequence of the hazards occurring, the level of risk evaluated, the
proposed risk mitigation/control measures and the anticipated residual
risks, and the respective risk controller.
• Risk assessment should be incorporated into the Safety Plan or relevant
safety working procedures or method statements.
4. What kinds of safety measures were implemented at your site?

• Personal Protective Equipment
• Safety hamlet, safety shoes, reflective jacket for all
• gloves for rebar bender
• body harness for workers working at height where is over 2m high
• Colour Coding system for lifting gears, and it was checked by the competent
person regularly.
• Provide training to the workers, e.g. who are working at height and working in
confined space.
• Contractor had to carry out Safety Cycle to improve and promote the health and
safety condition of the site. They are referred to as the Daily Cycle, Weekly Cycle
and Monthly Cycle.

• Daily Cycle – Pre-work activity, safety inspection by Site Agent or Safety Officer.
• Weekly Cycle – Weekly safety walk attended by SA, SO, & ER’s nominated site
representative.
• Monthly Cycle – SSEC and SSEMC.
• Submission of safety related documents, like safety plan and risk assessments.
5. What is “Pay for Safety (and Environment) Scheme” PFSS?

• PFSS is a scheme initiated by Works Bureau for construction project with
contract sum greater than HK$20M.
• Under PFSS, a number of safety related items/activities will be pre-priced in the
BQ by the Engineer so as to prevent site safety fall into the area of competitive
tendering.
• if the Contractor satisfactorily provide those safety items or activities, he will be
paid at those pre-priced rates.
• The typical safety items include:
• Complete safety plan
• Update of safety plan
• Provide safety officer
• Provide safety training to the workers
• Attend SSEMC
• Attend weekly safety walk
• According to the Construction Site Safety Manual, the total sum of those safety
items shall be about 2% of the total contract sum.
6. What is “Safety Plan”? What is the content of it?

• A document setting out details of the Contractor’s safety management system
which will be implemented on the Site to ensure health and safety condition in the
execution of the Works.
• The Safety Plan includes:
• Contractor's safety management policy and commitment,
• Safety Organization
• detailed arrangements and procedures to achieve the best safety
performance e.g. emergency preparedness and safety promotion
• (part of the requirement under PFSS)
7. How to promote site safety in government projects?

Every PWP contract should aim to achieve zero fatal accidents.
• By Direct Method
(1) Safety Award Scheme, like “Considerate Contractor Award Scheme”
(2) Promotion and Publicity: These activities include to arrange seminars,
safety forums, thematic talks, roving exhibitions, TV and radio
programmes, advertisements.
(3) Pay for Safety Scheme: It motivates the contractors to implement
safety measures.
• By Indirect Method
(1) Mandatory Safety Management System: The Regulation provides a legal
framework for the implementation of safety management system to foster
self-regulation by duty holders.
(2) Tight up the Construction Sites (Safety) Regulations in late 2003: These
extend the duties imposed on the principal contractors to other contractors
and sub-contractors who have direct control over safety matters in respect of
their work activities.
(3) Set up regulatory actions against contractors with poor safety
performance: A contractor who has accumulated five or more
convictions of safety-related offences within six-month will be
debarred from tendering.
8. How to evaluate the safety performance of the Contractor?

• We have a Score Card System which is developed to provide further guidance
to the Reporting Officer for assessing the site safety performance of contractors.
• The Score Card provides a quantitative approach to assess the safety
performance.
• The items include:
(1) Provision and maintenance of plant
(2) Provision and maintenance of working environment
(3) Provision of information, instruction and training
(4) Provision and implementation of safe system of work
(5) Employment of safety officer/safety supervisor
(6) Site accident record
9. What will you do if the safety measures are not properly provided?
• I would request the Contractor and the safety officer to take immediate action to
rectify the problem.
• In some extreme cases, the Engineer might suspend the Works and the
Contractor would bear any additional expenditure caused by the suspension

order.
10. What is the accident rate at your site? What types of accidents had occurred?
Who would be responsible of it?
• As far as I know, one reportable accident occurred in this Contract. The accident
rate was 0.36 per 100,000 man-hours worked.
• The accident was that a mobile crane operator had experience a minor back pain
when he getting off the mobile crane.
• He asked to be taken to the hospital for further treatment and he claimed for sick
leave under labour insurance.
11. What are the commonest types of accident in PWP projects?

• There are five commonest types of accidents:
(1) slip, trip or fall on same level
(2) fall of persons from height
(3) struck by flying or falling object
(4) injury while lifting or carrying
(5) striking against fixed or stationary object
• Based on the investigation, some measures are recommended to carry out in
order to prevent the commonest types of accidents to happen:
(a) All manual handling operations should be carried out by two or more than
persons, and should always make use of lifting mechanical plants.
(b) Payment should not be made to contractors for the “Weekly Safety Walks”
under the “Pay for Safety Scheme” if the site cleanliness and tidiness are not
satisfactory and the contractor did not rectify the defects even requested by
the RSS.
(c) Supervision team shall check and ensure that all the working platforms for
working at height are safe for working, such as the installation of guardrail
and toe boards to prevent falling of person and objects.
12. What safety measures will be required for work at height?

• Guardrail and toe boards should be installed at working platform.
• Working platform should be inspected by the competent persons every 2 weeks.
• Workers should equip with safety belt if a safe working platform is not available.
13. What safety measures did you do for working over live traffic?
• Guardrail and toe boards were installed at working platform to prevent falling of
person and objects.

• We advised the workers to carry out a daily inspection on the temporary working
platform before end of work each day and tidy up the house keeping to ensure all
loose objects are properly secured against possible over-night strong wind.
• For example, plywood formwork may be blown away from the working platform
and hit the vehicles below and cause traffic accident.
14. What safety measures will be required for excavation?

• Alignment and profile of the existing underground utilities should be detected first.
• gas mains, high voltage cables once damages explosion loss of
human lives
• Digging trial pits for location the underground utilities
• If open cut, the slope of excavated trench should not exceed 45o
• Provide shoring if it is deeper than 2m.
• Safe access, such as temporary stair, should be provided for the excavated
trench.
• The excavated trench should be properly fence-off to prevent people from falling.
• Objects should not be placed at the edge of trench to minimize the risk of falling
object.
• Submerse water pump should be ready inside the trench in case of flooding.
15. What safety measures will be required for prestressing?

• No people should stand right behind the hydraulic jack during prestressing.
• Warning sign should be placed.
• Workers should wear goggle and gloves when cutting the strands.
16. What do you do if the Contractor or his staff ignore the safety requirement
and continue their malpractice in safety?
• If this happens, I will record down all the details, such as date, time, location and
type of malpractice. I will also take photographs if necessary, and report to my
senior.
• Then, I will request the Contractor and Safety Officer to take immediate action to
rectify the problem.
• At the same time, I will inform my inspectorate team to monitor the rectification
works.
• If the Contractor ignores the advice, I would draft a warning letter to the ER for his
issue to the Contractor.
• If they continue to ignore our advice, I will report the event to the Labour
Department. At the same time, I may consider to write to the Contractor in

accordance with GCC Clause 18, requesting the removal of the person who failed
to comply with safety requirement.
• However, I would not hesitate to call the Police to stop the Contractor in very
dangerous circumstances.
17. What is “Tool Box Talk”?

• Tool box talk is the daily safety cycle required under the Contract to improve and
promote health and safety of the site. Basically, the Contractor had to arrange the
pre-work activity including pre-work exercise and safety meeting, hazard
identification activity and pre-work safety checks for all their labour employed on
the site. It would normally spend about 20 to 30 minutes to carry out every
morning.
18. Explain more about the safety promotion?

• This was a voluntary safety promotion to be initiated by the Contractor himself.
Basically, the Contractor opened an amount for this activity and each selected
worker would receive a red pocket of about HK$500 which was funded by this
separated account. Generally speck, this award was only considered as a little
encourage for them.
Environmental
1. What should be measured under the EM&A Manual? What are the
acceptance criteria?
The Contractor had to submit the Environmental Report on a monthly basis and it
included the record of noise level and water quality in the reporting month.
NOISE
• Use a sound level meter to measure the Noise Level during 7am-7pm on
weekdays. The read was taken from 1m away from the NSR for 30 minutes, in 5
minutes interval and twice monthly.
• The limit of the equivalent sound level is 75dB.
Noise mitigation measures
• Locate noisy plant and activities as far from NSRs as is practical
• Replace noisy plant and processes by quieter alternatives if possible
• Schedule noisy activities, like avoid high level of construction noise during exam
period.
• Turn off or throttle down the idle plant.
Apply Construction Noise Permit from EPD to operate the noisy equipment after
7.00pm, like for concreting.
AIR
• To measure 1-hr TSP (Total Suspended Particulates) Level at the site boundary
and nearby sensitive receivers
• The Limit Level is 500 ug/m3
Dust Mitigation Measures
• The loaded dump truck should provide cover to…
• To frequently water the dusty areas, and use surplus concrete and bituminous
material from the permanent works to pave up the drive way & other open areas
• Good housekeeping
WATER
• Use portable instrument and sensor to measure Dissolved Oxygen (DO) and
Turbidity in vicinity drainage system.
• Collect water sample by cylinder of capacity more than 2 liters to measure the
Suspended Solid (SS)
• Limit Level:
• DO > 4mg/L
• SS < 130% of Control Station data on the same day
• Turbidity < 130% of Control data on the same day
• Water Discharge License
Apply water discharge license from EPD to discharge any effluent arising from
construction site through sedimentation tank.
• Surface runoff from construction site would be discharged into storm drain through
the sand trap, silt trap and sediment basins. Also, the earth bunds and sand bag
barriers were provided to properly direct the stormwater to the silt removal facility.
The deposited silt and grit was removed regularly to ensure that these facilities are
functioning properly at all times. In addition, earth surface protection, e.g. provide
adequate compaction & use tarpaulin sheeting to cover the slope, was carried out
to prevent erosion caused by the rainstorms.
• Sewerage from toilet and kitchens was discharged into a temporary storage tank
below the ground and the sewerage was pumped away by the desludger regularly.
• The wheel washing machine has a trough below for collecting the wastewater and
the recycled water was used for wheel washing. The deposited silt would be
removed from the trough regularly.
MOSQUITO BREEDING
• Mosquito can transmit diseases like West Nile Virus. To combat mosquitoes and
the public health hazards they present, stagnant water shall be removed once
they were found. In addition, we also requested the Contractor to spray the
anti-mosquito fog around the site every two week, and apply anti-mosquito sand in
the temporary water pond like wheel washing machine.
WASTE MANAGEMENT
• Sort the suitable excavated material or construction waste for reuse on site;
• Dispose the construction waste at public dump or landfill
• Identify and separate the chemical waste
• Identify and separate the general refuse
Good site practice includes:
• Daily collection of general refuse
• Regular maintenance and cleaning of waste storage areas;
• Storage of waste in suitable container
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION (C&D) MATERIAL

• Concrete, bricks and metals from site clearance and demolition of various
structures.
• Excess excavation soils from trenches for pipe laying and for structure
foundation.
• Vegetation and plant debris from tree felling
• Wood and timber from formwork and package
• Scrap metals from off-cuts, rebar, steel pipes and packaging
• Plastic and paper from pre-formed products and packaging
• C&D materials shall be separated into reusable items and materials to be
disposed, or reuse and recycling as appropriate.
• All C&D material should be sorted on-site to recover the reusable or
recyclable material. In addition, C&D materials mean both inert and
non-inert materials generated from construction and demolition activities.
The inert portion (chemically stable and will not decompose) include rock,
brick, bituminous material, concrete and soil, etc., and non-inert portion
comprises timber, vegetation and paper, etc.
• The Contractor applied for the Admission Ticket & Dumping License from
EPD for dumping at landfill.
CHEMICAL WASTE
They are oils, lubricants, paints and solvents. Oil and fuel bunkers should be bunded
to accommodate oils from accidental spillage. Oils, e.g. from power plant,
accumulated in oil spillage tray (interceptors) should be regularly removed to prevent
oils and grease from overflowing into the surface water drainage system. Chemical
waste should be disposed through a licensed waste collector.
GENERAL REFUSE
They are food wastes and packaging, waste paper and etc. Office wastes should be
reduced through recycling of paper. General refuse should be stored in enclosed bins
or compaction units separated from construction and chemical wastes.
2. What should be done if Action/Limit Level was exceeded?

• I would request the EO and Contractor to investigate the sources and causes of
the exceedance and determine the possible mitigations.
• Contractor should submit the proposal for remedial action to ER’s review and
implement the remedial action under the supervision of ER.
• ER should assess the effectiveness of the remedial action.
• If the situation did not improve, (the Contractor needs to resubmit the remedial
proposal. At the same time,) the ER may consider what portion of works is
responsible and instruct the Contract to stop that portion of works until the
exceedance is reduced.
3. Can you suggest some measures to tackle the waste problem, other than
construction waste, in Hong Kong?
• Other than construction waste, the municipal waste is the greatest threat to the
landfills.
• The strategy is also to adopt a 3R Model “Reduce”, “Reuse” and “Recycle”.
• However, to enable the waste producer to see the cost of waste generation and
according to polluters pay principle, a charging scheme for municipal waste
might be the solution to this problem.
• However, strong objection from the public is expected. Also, the high
administration cost is another hurdle. Therefore, the Government needs a
proper planning and a wider consultation before it can implement the new
charging scheme. The implementation of the charging scheme for construction
waste would be a valuable experience for the Government to plan the next step.
4. How are the trees and shrubs to be planted?
• Inspectorate staffs were carried out inspection to the proposed nursery to check
the trees and shrubs condition.
• Proposed soil mix and soil conditioner were taken to tests to determine the ph
value and organic carbon content, etc.

• Ideally planting shall take place during wet season, therefore the Contractor is
required to carry out planting in a period between April and August. Planting
schedule has to be submitted to ER’s approval.
5. How to control illegal dumping?

• As required in our Contract, the Contractor had to implement the Trip Ticket
System for delivering the C&D materials to disposal. Basically for each truckload
of C&D materials leaving the site, the truck driver must complete and sign a
standard form called Disposal Delivery Form. After the truck entered into the
government dumping area, the carrying materials would be checked by the
facility operator. If these material is considered comply with the acceptance
criteria, disposal of the materials will be permitted and the facility operator will
give the truck driver a transaction receipt and stamp the DDF. This record had to
be returned and kept by the ER. Therefore, we enable to keep track the
delivering C&D material offsite.
• Each loaded truck must provide a cover to the carrying material by means of
either mechanical cover or tarpaulin sheeting secured properly on top of it. The
allowable weight of loaded dump truck to driver on the public road is 24 ton.
6. What is “Environmental Management Plan”? What is the content of it?

• A document setting out details of the Contractor’s environmental management
system which will be implemented on the Site to minimize the environmental
impact in the execution of the Works.
• The EMP includes:
• Contractor's environmental management policy and commitment,
• Organization structure for EM
• Detailed arrangements and procedures to reduce environmental nuisance
and C&D materials arisen from the Works throughout the construction
period.
Sustainability
1. What is sustainability?
• Sustainability is an approach to a project where consideration is given to
environment and society as well as economic issues. It might be achieved by
utilizing the reusable energy, recycling the construction material, and reducing
the CO2 emission.
• For example, our Project was also incorporated sustainable design, there was
about 200m3 of the excavated soil stockpiled in the South Section before
developed. All of this soil was designed to be re-used for the backfilling work
behind the abutments. It is why the design involved a series of retaining walls on
both sides to form the elevated road rather than spanning the roadbridge all the
way from one side to the other side.
• Also, all constructional plant powered by diesel fuel must only be replenished
with Ultra Low Sulphur Diesels (ULSD) containing no more than 0.005% of
sulphur when working on the site.
2. As an engineer, how you promote sustainability?

• When I am working as a designer, I would carry out the sustainable design. For
example, to re-use the excavated material, like rock and soil. The rock can be
clashed into the aggregate which might be used for sub-base of carriageway and
drainage pipe bedding. For the suitable soil, it might be used for many backfilling
works, such as backfilling for abutment, retaining wall and pipe laying work.
However, it is also important to deliver the sustainable concept to the client and
keep the development more sustainable by minimizing the impact on the
environment and considering the future generation.
Other Issues
1. Any interfacing issue with other parties

• In the South Section of the Site, our new retaining wall only had 1m clearance
from the CLP fencing wall. However, once we knew CLP is going to re-construct
their fencing wall, we called a meeting with them.
• In order to facilitate our construction work for this retaining wall, such as erection
of formwork for wall stem, we liaised with CLP to obtain their work schedule and
agreed with them to allow our Contractor to construct the retaining wall CLP was
demolishing their existing fencing wall. By then, the Contractor could operate
their plant inside for construction.
2. Any financial issue involved in the design office?

• As a consultant, the consultative fee of a project is valued by the amount of
man-hour input to a project. In order to avoid overrun of the budget, it is important
to ensure the man hour input to be spent do not exceed the project value.
• Therefore, at the beginning of the project, like preparation of the feasibility study
report, I assisted my senior to work out how many hours of each person from our
design team to spend on this project each month. The pay of each person per day
was used as the basic unit for calculation.
3. Are there any alternative design?

• One alternative is that in the South Section of the Site, the retaining wall face
was specified to construct with precast concrete panel. However, having
considered the practicability of construction, we decided to adopt cast-in-situ
method.
Reason:
• Usually, the panel shall be installed from bottom to top, and to trim the last panel
at the top to flush with the other piece. However, we envisaged that it was not
easy to cut the piece of concrete panel nicely on site without damaging the panel.
• More importantly, if the cutting edge was damaged, the design did not have the
bend on the top of wall stem to hide these deficiencies from appearance view
point.
• Also, after I checked with the BQ, there would not incur any additional cost
because the BQ did not have item of precast panel. So we can still use and apply
the rate of formwork for this variation.
• After discussed with the Engineer, the alternative design was adopted, and an
VO was issued to the Contractor for this change.
4. What is Quality Management System and what system is your complying

to?
• Quality Management System is to control and direct an organization with regard
to quality. To achieve this object, we have a P-D-C-A Cycle. P is planning to
establish the objective, D is Do to implement the process, C is check to monitor
and measure the processes and A is action to take action to resolve NC.
• MCAL provides services and products in accordance with specification of ISO
9001:2000. Under the requirements of ISO9001:2000, the following documents
are necessary: Quality policy & objective, Quality Manual, Procedure as required
by the standard, Documents as needed to ensure effective planning, operating &
control of processes, and record.
• Quality control is defined in BS4778 and as the technique used to sustain the
quality of services and products.
• Quality assurance is defined in BS4778 and as all activities concerned with the
achievement of quality.
5. How the bridge was constructed in four stages but not a single stage?
• The crossroad span has to be constructed in a first place because the falsework
was erected over the live traffic and also the TTA, including narrowing and
closing the traffic lane was required to facilitate the falsework erection will cause
disturbance and disruption to the road users and might cause safety problem to
them. So the crossroad span should be completed and the carriageway should
be re-opened to normal traffic condition as soon as possible. However, the
spans 2, 3 & 4 located inside the work site had less priority to be completed and
construction stages was not strictly specified. (It was up to contractor to allocate
their resources provided that the progress of the works is on the track.)
Study Group Discussion on QA and QC16 Sept 2002
Normal Question
1. QC and QA
QC QA
- carry out inspection to the final product - process inspection to all procedures
- use in previous time, reactive - reach the pre-set quality requirement
- not controlling the product but only - avoid non-compliance with the pre-set
rejecting the defected ones quality requirement
- does not implies good quality
2. QA in Civil Engineering Design?

(a) The five process: checking; inspection; monitoring; testing; and approval.
(b) Programme
(c) Resources allocation
Side-tricked Question
1. What is the use of filter layer behind rubble-mount seawall?

Not for Drainage but for separation.
2. Why standard mix not commonly use?

Standard mix is too conservative.
3. Why kicker of Retaining Wall is at the point of greatest moment and shear?
Kicker at there is unavoidable.
Side-tricked information
1. TTA
Gazette Notice (Cap 374) - on Government Gazette
The gazette will be required if any addition, modification or cancellation of the
following are involved:
Designation of restricted or prohibited zones;
Imposition of speed limits;
Designation of taxi pick up and drop off points
1
Transport Department Notices (TDN) and Cap 370 Gazette Notice (on newspaper)
Road closures for more than 72 hours (as police has authority to close a road not
more than 72 hours)
Traffic Advice Bulletins - on TD website
Traffic rerouting /banning of turning movements;

Road closure lasting less than 72 hours
Lane closure for red and pink routes only. (Generally, one lane two way traffic on
district or local road is not required, but so the extent of impact is considered
significant, TA is required for District Office to inform the nearby residents)
Public transport issues including provision of bus to bus interchange, change of
servises and bus stops reorganization.
For Tai Lung's information,

under the streamlines procedure, (Alex may comment on it)
For internal government department (those has authority to erect signs and road
markings on road) , the traffic notice preparation need 21 days
For others, 4 weeks is required.
2. Why there is maintenance period? Is it good for the contractor?
- Maintenance period is normally the one-year period after granting substantial

completion.
- Substantial completion is granted when the product could provide the intended
functions.
- It is impractical and it takes a long time to provide a product absolutely free of
defects.
- It is good for the contractor because normally defects would occur and the
maintenance period provides the contractor an opportunity to fix such defects.
Otherwise, defects in the product would constitute a breach of contract.
3. Some contractual stuff….
About right of recourse:

- A contract is formed when the Letter of Intent is sign, seal and deliver
- A normal contract, the right of recourse ( 追索權) is 6 years
2
- For contract by deed, the right of recourse is 12 years
About EOT:
- The court doesn’t ‘buy’ if a claim is based on Clause 50(1)(b)(xi) any special
circumstance of any kind whatsoever.
- Cl. 50(5) “…deemed to be in full compensation …”. The client and the contractor
share the loss due to inclement weather with the former one the time, the latter
one the cost.
- When ordering VO, no EOT shall be given if there is flow time in the programme
=>flow in programme given to the client
About delay possession of site:

- if occur at the same time, delay possession of site and the contractor deemed not
ready to take over…
- the client shall write to the contractor claiming their inactivation in carrying out the
works...
About completion date:

- if a contract comprises Phase I and Phase II and the completion date of Phase II
is defined as either 30 weeks after completion of Phase I or a particular date.
The particular date shall come into effect.
4. Optimum Moisture Content

- since it’s too stringent to apply the 100% moisture content, the soil to be
compacted would be either in the drier side or the wetter side about the optimum
value.
- For road works, drier than MC, this provides better strength after compaction
- For dam construction, wetter than MC, this reduces permeability of the compacted
soil.
5. Site Investigation
About Triaxial Test
- normally, drained test would not be carried out (too time-consuming) unless water
flow implies great significance…
- back pressure is about 200-300 kPa (fully saturated)
About Sand Replacement Test

- Large apparatus for compacted depth between 150 mm and 250 mm and coarse
3
grains
- Small apparatus for compacted depth less than 150 mm and for fine to medium
grains
About obtaining Moisture Content

- 45o is sufficient, 105o is ordered for saprolitic soil (soil with organic water).
- Normally, 105o would provide a higher value of pore water due to SSD condition.
4
Quality control (QC): A management function whereby control of the quality of (a)
raw materials, assemblies, produced materiel, and components, (b) services related
to production, and (c) management, production, and inspection processes is
exercised for the purpose of preventing undetected production of defective materiel or
the rendering of faulty services.
Quality Control is defined as "the part of quality management focused on fulfilling

quality requirements."
Another definition of quality control descibes it as "the process relating to gathering
process data and analyzing the data to determine whether the process exhibits
nonrandom variation."
Quality Control often referrs to Inspection of finished products, meaning to check
whether they meet the desired Requirements and Specifications. But it is not limited to
inspecting products as it might also include detecting the cause for non-conformities
and not meeting the requirements documented in the specifications for the product.
In all production processes, the extent to which products meet quality specifications
must be monitored. In the most general terms, there are two "enemies" of product
quality: (1) deviations from target specifications, and (2) excessive variability around
target specifications. During the earlier stages of developing the production process,
designed experiments are often used to optimize these two quality characteristics
quality assurance (QA): 1. All actions taken to ensure that standards and
procedures are adhered to and that delivered products or services meet performance
requirements. (188) 2. The planned systematic activities necessary to ensure that a
component, module, or system conforms to established technical requirements. 3.
The policy, procedures, and systematic actions established in an enterprise for the
purpose of providing and maintaining a specified degree of confidence in data
integrity and accuracy throughout the lifecycle of the data, which includes input,
update, manipulation, and output.
The Definition of Quality Assurance
Page 1 | Page 2
The Role of Quality Assurance
1
Like most concepts to be defined, in any attempts to define Quality Assurance (QA), it
pays to consider that in light of what Quality Assurance does. A common thought is
that Quality Assurance is there to either "fix the defects" or "prevent the defects".
Those statements are true, as far as they go. However, QA does a lot more than just
these two statements. QA, if implemented correctly, provides the means by which
defects (in all types of products, both executable and non-executable) are proactively
mitigated as well as provides the means by which defects can be found after their
introduction - such as via robust and viable verification and validation procedures.
Fundamentally, QA is about change and process. It is about balancing methodology,

leadership, and technology. It is about taking into account human factors as well as
technological ones. The emphasis with assuring quality should be more on process
than the product because a stable, repeatable process is one in which quality can be
an emergent property. Quality Assurance can be treated, in some ways, as a science.
We can treat the products we are given, and the processes used to generate those
products (such as the standard development lifecycle) as theories. The theory is
supposed to explain a lot (i.e., work well in a given context). To show that the theory is
valid, we have to show not just that it works - but also show the flaws it might contain.
Find enough fatal flaws and the theory potentially crumbles. (By the same token, a
few flaws here and there may not crumble a theory - just show that it needs some
work.) But how do we show that the theory is valid? In other words, how do we find
those flaws? That is the role of the QA effort, which aims to be as proactive as
possible.
Again, you are dealing with change and process, usually together because the
change that is going to be implemented will generally manifest itself in a series of
processes that, taken together, serve as a type of methodology. It is the act of
delineating and establishing this overall quality methodology that I refer to as Quality
Engineering.
So Quality Assurance, with what was just said here, is meant to be a proactive means
of engineering quality into a product by concerning itself not just with the product, but
that which produces the product. Here "proactive means" refers to different processes
that, taken together, work well for the organization as a whole and that constitute a
contextual methodology.
That begins to get to the heart of the matter because QA is about the discovery of or
creation of underlying contextually relevant processes - not necessarily acting in
2
accordance with pre-existing processes without any thought as to their validity. By the
same logic, Quality Assurance is not simply there to sweep away all existing
processes under the assumption that they do not fit a new "master plan." The key
point is that it is a role of Quality Assurance to establish, or help establish, processes
if none exist or monitor processes that do exist. Along with that, if existing processes
are proven to be not effect, it is the role of Quality Assurance to advocate the removal
of those processes and the establishment of new ones. How much of all of this is
done depends on the role of QA within the organization and how proactive the quality
effort is as well as how focused it is. Essentially, Quality Assurance can either be
shaped by an organization or do some of the shaping of the organization. It can often
be a delicate balancing act. This balancing act is best done within a quality
framework.
The Quality Framework
The idea of a framework that balances QA's role within an organization can be
considered as a framework that defines, prioritizes, quantifies, and measures those
processes and techniques throughout the product lifecycle to permit early detection
and corrective actions of deficiencies that significantly reduce impact on cost and
schedules. There are many actions that can be considered within this context, such
as:
Implement/review/change processes and procedures.

Traind/educate on general quality issues.
Highlight any deficiencies to upper management.
To determine, document, and promote the use of established standard
methods and procedures and ensure full compliance to them during
product development.
To ensure end-user satisfaction results with the highest quality possible.
What these bullet points capture is the basic mantra of the quality effort: advocate,
argue, assert, defend, and escalate. This framework makes up the basis of the
methodology that will be employed in a quality initiative. It is the manner by which
quality is engineered into a product as much as is possible.
Defining Quality Assurance
We can look at the definition of Quality Assurance, as we did with quality, in a more
systemic viewpoint. Consider that we can say of Quality Assurance that it is a
systematic pattern of actions that attempts to assure that all software products
3
released are (a) stable, (b) perform as described in any product specification(s), and
(c) meet target customer/user needs and expectations. That is good as far as it goes
but that rough definition subsumes the process a little too much. Any definition of
Quality Assurance has to take into account that, at its base form, the act of assuring
quality manifests as a set of activities designed to evaluate the processes by which
products are developed or manufactured. Put differently, Quality Assurance is a
function that identifies, documents, and reviews for improvement the processes that
deliver products.
I have often defined Quality Assurance as such:
"A systematic pattern of actions that is constantly optimizing productivity,

communication, and value within an organization in order to achieve the aim of
measuring the attributes, properties, and characteristics of a product in the context of
the expectations and needs of customers and users of that product."
This also corresponds to my operational definition of quality itself. The key concept in
this definition is, in one sense, the product. However, the production of something
implies the existence of a process by which that something is produced. Thus, in
reality, it is this process that we are concerned with. The process will impart attributes,
properties, and characteristics to the product that it helps create. And that is what we
are measuring. We map the product to the process and realize that a faulty product
probably relates back to a faulty process. The role of QA is to assure that this process
(or set of processes) is documented, followed, reviewed, and improved. Once
processes are identified and functioning, then the role of QA also expands to
establishing measurements for the purpose of identifying process weaknesses, which
translate into product weaknesses. This starts to suggest a modification of my above
definition:
"A systematic pattern of actions that are constantly optimizing productivity,

communication, and value within an organization in order to provide confidence that
processes are established and continuously improved in order to produce products
that meet specifications and are fit-for-use within organizational and competitive
constraints."
With this definition, the "patterns of action" are policies and procedures and include
such things as facilitation, training, measurement, and analysis. The means by which
4
confidence is provided is by various quality measures put in place throughout the
lifecycle of the product.
5
Questions for DIA & SIA
1. What is DIA and what have you involved in the DIA? Any more assessment?
• The DIA provides a systematic approach in addressing drainage issue of the
project.
• The aim of DIA is to study the existing drainage capacity and proposed
mitigation measures to minimize the risk of flooding in the vicinity area due to
the proposed development.
• Actually, the completed impact assessment for the Section 16 Application
included other assessments like traffic impact, environmental impact and
water supply impact, etc, however, MCAL was only appointed to carry out the
assessments on drainage and sewerage areas. All the assessments were
then combined into a complete report before submitted to Planning
Department.
Design of Drainage (U-channel)

1. First, determine the u-channel alignment based on the development layout
and topography, and I design to construct the u-channel along the slope toe of
the development perimeter starting from high land to low land. And connect to
the nearest open channel for discharge. (300 thousand m2 of the site, drain pit
when change direction, sand trap before discharge, 40m interval, backdrop for
level >600mm, check gradient and invert level)
2. (Catchment area was determined by looking at the topographical peaks and
ridges which is a line separating the drainage water from surface runoff.)
3. (Then, making assumption to the surface characteristic of catchment, and also
assuming the Manning’s roughness coefficient of drainage pipes.)
4. In calculation, I identify the catchment and also calculate the catchment area.
5. Next, calculate the time of enter by Brandsby William Equation. It is the time
required for rainfall falling on the catchment to reach the design point.
6. Then, apply Manning’s Equation to work out the time of flow because this
Manning’s equation is generally used for design of open channel.
7. By then I can obtain the time of concentration by combining the time of enter
and time of flow.
8. Finally, calculate the runoff for 50 years rainfall return period by using Rational
Method, and check this value against the capacity of drainage pipe.
9. (Narrow trench is considered due to more conservative and required less
working space) (channel cover to prevent filled up by debris) (remind the
responsible maintenance party to remove the deposition regularly to prevent
flooding due to blockage of u-channel in the Maintenance Manual)
(Sustainability can be considered in drainage design by providing flow
attenuation, filtration to remove pollutant or by trying to integrate the drainage

facility into the environment setting to maintain the wildlife habits in the urban
areas., provide some planter along the path of surface runoff to attenuate the
flow and provide filtration)
What is Rational Method?

• The peak runoff is calculated in terms of catchment area, surface
characteristic of catchment, and rainfall intensity.
• However, the assumptions for Rational method is based on homogeneous
rainfall and the peak runoff is at equilibrium condition, therefore, the Rational
Method should not be used on the large catchment area, say larger than
1.5km2 for a single catchment.
• Also Rational Method is not applicable for the ground gradients vary greatly
within the catchment.
Do you know what is the alterative method to Rational Method?

• We can use Unit-Hydrograph Method because it is more accurate and would
not overestimate the runoff for large catchment.
• However the disadvantage is that the catchment is required an extensive
rainfall-runoff monitoring data to derive the Unit-Hydrograph.
What is the Manning’s Equation?

• It was originally developed for the design of open channel, but it is now widely
used to analyze the flow in both open channel and closed conduits. This
equation takes into account the hydraulic radius, slope gradient, and
Manning’s roughness coefficient.
Do you know what is “return period”?

• A return period is the average time period required for an event to occur.
• It is used as the basis to determine the design parameters, e.g. rainfall
intensity and sea level. (50 years for rural area whereas 200 years for urban
area because of more damage caused by the event of flooding.)
What is the material of the drainage pipe? Did you have a selection on
material?
• Precast concrete pipe because it is readily available in the market and they
have sufficient strength to resist the soil pressure.
2. What is SIA and what have you involved in the SIA?

• The SIA provides a systematic approach in addressing sewerage issue of the
project.
• The aim of SIA is to study the existing sewerage capacity and proposed
mitigation measures to minimize the impact due to the proposed development.
Design of Sewerage
1. First, determine the sewer alignment based on the development layout.
Basically, I arranged the sewerage pipe along the proposed street mainly for
the maintenance consideration. In order to minimize the traffic disturbance
when carrying out maintenance or repair, I also design to construct the sewer
and the associated manholes on one single traffic lane. And connect to the
nearest public sewerage manhole for discharge. (Terminal manhole with silt
trap).
2. In calculation, first to find out the Dry Weather Flow (is amount of sewerage in
dry season) for each flat and also the peaking factor from the Sewerage
Manual published by Drainage Services Department (DSD).
3. Then I multiply the weather flow to the total population to get the total dry
weather flow, and then multiply to the peaking factor to obtain the design flow.
4. (The peaking factor takes account for diurnal and seasonal fluctuation of
sewerage flow.)
5. Finally, apply the Colebrook-White Equation to work out the capacity and
check this value against the design flow.
6. (The design life for the proposed sewer is 40 years)
7. PVC lining was laid inside the pipe to protect the sewer from damaging by
hydrogen sulphate (H2S).
What is the Cole-brook White Equation?

• This equation can be applied to analyze a wide range of flow conditions and
it takes into account the gravitational acceleration, pipe diameter, gradient of
pipe, viscosity of water, and equivalent sand roughness.
• The equivalent sand roughness can be chosen from the table to take into
account the roughness value of the sewerage pipe due to the slime growth
on the pipe surface. (Manning’s equation used for designing open channel
has no such consideration.)
What are the velocity limits on flow of sewerage pipe? Why limits are
imposed?
• Max flow limit is 3m/s because the faster the sewerage flow, the faster the
pipe would be eroded. Also, if the gradient changes from steep to shallow,
there may be a problem of hydraulic jump because of the flow becoming
subcritical. Other than that, the inspection or maintenance with fast flowing
sewerage is also unsafe. (subcritical = yn > yc, if hydraulic jump occurs, the
flow transition is rapid and involves a large energy loss due to turbulence.
Then, the potential damage to the pipe associated with energy loss is
substantial.)
• Min flow limit is 1m/s to keep sewerage flowing, prevent siltation and grease
accumulation in the pipe.
Where will the sewage finally go?

• The sewerage will enter the public sewerage system and then go to Tuen
Mun Preliminary Treatment plant before discharge to the sea.
• Preliminary Treatment – includes screening, removal of grit and solid larger
than 6mm are removed from the sewage.
What is the legislation governed the quality of industrial effluent?

• The quality of effluent shall be complied with Water Pollution Control
Ordinance. All efficient discharged into the sewers, stormwater drains, river
course are subject to control, and the discharger should apply a discharge
license from EPD and comply with its term and conditions. For example, the
effluent standard for pH of sewage is 6-10, and allowable highest temperature
is 44oC.
What should be considered in designing the drainage pipe material?

• Determine the total design load due to the fill load, and consider narrow trench
condition because it is a conservative case when the pipe is being installed.
Superimpose load including concentrated traffic load and the water load in the
pipe should also be considered.
• Choose type of bedding.
• Select an appropriate strength of pipe.
Topic: Project Report
1. Description of Project
1.1 What is the background of your project?
1.2 What is SMP?
1.3 What is the effluent standard at Deep Bay Water Control Zone?
1.4 What is the scope of your Contract?
1.5 Who is the Engineer?
1.6 What are the powers and duties of the Engineer?
1.7 What are the powers and duties of the Engineer’s Representative?
2. Contract Administration
2.1 What is the significance of Contractor’s master works programme to the

Contractor?
2.2 What is the significance of Contractor’s master works programme to the

Engineer?
2.3 How do you check Contractor’s master works programme?
2.4 Did you accept or approval Contractor’s master works programme?
2.5 When will the Contractor need to revise the programme?
2.6 What is the purpose of the three-month rolling programme?
2.7 What is critical path?
2.8 Can the Contractor plan to complete the Works before the contractual
1
date for completion?
2.9 How can you monitor the progress of the Works?
2.10 What will you do if you identify slippage in works progress?
2.11 Why you allow the Contractor to claim for extension of time (EOT)?
2.12 Under what circumstances can the Contractor claim for EOT?
2.13 Will you grant EOT to the Contractor if there was no notification from
him?
2.14 What is the consequence for late assessment of EOT?
2.15 How can you determine whether the Contractor should be fairly entitled to
an EOT?
2.16 Will you grant EOT to the Contractor if he is in culpable delay?
2.17 Will you grant EOT to the Contractor if they are obstructed by
underground utilities?
2.18 What is liquated damages (LD)?
2.19 Can the Employer recover damages if there is no EOT clause in the
Contract?
2.20 What is variation order (VO)?
2.21 Why you order a variation to revise the alignment of rising mains, instead
of diverting the water main?
2.22 How you value the VO?
2.23 Will there be any monetary claim from the Contractor if the quantity for a
particular item in BQ is substantially increased?
2
2.24 Will you consider the Contractor’s monetary claim for late notification?
2.25 Why you have separate contracts for civil works and E&M works?
2.26 How you ensure the smooth coordination between civil works and E&M
works?
2.27 What is entrustment works?
2.28 What is the significance of keeping site record?
3. Site Supervision
3.1 What is the type of the foundation for your sewage pumping station?
3.2 Who is responsible for the design of temporary works?
3.3 Why you check the temporary works design?
3.4 What will you do if you notice that the actual construction sequence or
the erection of the temporary works deviates from the submissions?
3.5 How can you ensure the watertightness of the substructure of the sewage
pumping stations?
3.6 Why slump test is carried out?
3.7 Will you allow the Contractor to place the concrete which fails in slump
test?
3.8 Why trenchless method is adopted in the pipe laying works in your
Contract?
3.9 Why pipe jacking method is used in lieu of other trenchless methods?
3.10 Any contingency measures for the pipe jacking operation?
3
3.11 How can you supervise the open trench pipe laying works?
3.12 Any compliance testing to be carried out for the completed pipelines?
3.13 What are the difficulties in carrying out the pipe laying works?
3.14
4. Financial Issues
4.1 What is the purpose of interim payment (IP)?
4.2 How did you evaluate the IP?
4.3 What financial control measures have you adopted?
5. Safety Issues
5.1 What are the potential hazards in your project?
5.2 How can you ensure site safety?
5.3 Who is responsible for the site safety?
5.4 What is the purpose of the SSMC?
5.5 What is Safety Plan?
5.6 What will you do if you notice any unsafe act during the safety
inspection?
5.7 Why did you carry out site inspection?
6. Environmental Issues
4
6.1 What environmental monitoring measures are implemented in your

Contract?
6.2 Any environmental sensitive features adjacent to your Site?
7. Personal Management
7.1 Why personal management is required?
7.2 How can you improve the communication with site staff?
5
1. How to check the material proposals?
- To ensure the material proposed by the Contractor complies with the
requirements set out in the Contract, the Contractor is required to provide
submissions on their proposed materials before they are used on site.
- In my training in this contract, I have checked the Contractor’ material proposal
of the UPVC pipe for the use of weep holes on the embankment
- Firstly I checked the specifications of the materials to see whether they meet the
requirements as stipulated in GS and PS.
- I then focused on the details of the manufacturer’s literature including the
manufacturing process and jointing method.
- Afterwards, I studied the test certificate of the material endorsed by the
HOKLAS laboratory and the sample of the material
2. How to check the method statements?

- Before carrying out the construction work, the Contractor was required to submit
the corresponding method statement and risk assessment for our comments.
- What we need to check is to see whether the construction sequence and method
in order, the plant used is appropriate and any safety precaution should be
adopted during the work.
- No construction work should commence without the Engineer’s consent.
- In this Contract, the Contractor was required under the Contract to submit the
method statement regarding to the stay cable installation and stressing
- Although the method statement had been checked by an ICE, I also checked the
method statement to ensure the ICE has carried his duties properly and to see
whether there is superficial deficiency in the method statement
- In checking the method statement, I found that the cable stressing force
indicated did not agree with the design calculation. I urged the Contractor to
review that and make sure proper cable stressing equipment would be provided
- I also reminded the Contractor that the temporary works supporting the
footbridge should be removed gradually to avoid any sudden drop of the bridge,
which may bring the adverse effect on the bridge structure
- In addition, I also reminded the Contractor to monitor the cable force on each
cable at all times of the stressing operation so that any necessary re-stressing or
de-stressing of cables could be realized
3. How to check the temporary works?

- Contractor is responsible for the design and stability of all temporary works and
the Contractor is required to submit relevant information in advance before
erecting temporary works
- I have been involved in checking the temporary works for the vehicular
bridge/elevated portion of the footbridge.
- Actually, the checking of temporary works can be divided into 3 parts: design
scheme and calculations, method statement and construction
- In checking the design calculation of the temporary works, I would check the
assumption made, design principle, loading cases and perform arithmetic check
- As for the method statement, I would check whether methods and drawings are
clear and understandable, sequence of erection and dismantling, plant used,
details of the working platform and access route and also risk assessment
- Having checked the design calculations and method statements the Contractor
was allowed to erect the temporary work
- During the course of erection of the temporary works, I make sure that the
construction in line with the submitted proposal.
- For any discrepancy, I have drawn the Contractor’s attention and requested they
rectify it or provide further substantiation
- Loadings should not be applied on the temporary works unless it was checked by
the Engineer or the ICE, if any
4. How is the cable stay system installed and stressed?

- First of all, the RC component of the bridge has to be constructed first.
- The next step is to install the cable anchorages and the steel pylon head
- Once the concrete attained the 28-day strength, survey was conducted on the
horizontal alignment and the vertical profile of the bridge, as well as the top of
the pylon.
- After that the falsework was removed except the props provided at the
position at the proposed cable anchoring point.
- Survey was carried out again on the profile to check whether the changes in the
levels comparable to the results of the structural analysis carried out before
- Then, the strands would be installed and stressed one by one in stages
- After each cycle, survey should be carried out on the profile and the deflection
at the pylon top
- These procedure was repeated until all strands were installed.
- Having installed all the cables, checking would be carried out to see whether the
bridge has been lifted up from the props and check whether the desired profile
achieved.
- If no, re-stressing had to be carried out.
- If yes, the stressing operation is completed.
- Throughout the stressing operation, stressing loads would be jogged down by
our site supervisory staff for record.
- Having completed this step, the corrosion protection scheme was applied on the
stay cable systems
5. How to assess EOT?

- In accordance with GCC clause 50, the Contract may claim for an extension of
time for completion of the Works if the progress of the Works is affected by the
any cause listed in this GCC clause.
- In this contract, I have assessed an EOT claim in regard of the inclement
weather
- In examine the EOT claim, I first checked whether the claimed inclement
weather had occurred
- I also took into account the state of readiness of the Contractor and the effect of
the delay on the critical path for the Works
- The Contractor may be requested to submit further information to substantiate
the delay.
- Lastly, I considered that the Contractor should be fairly entitled to an EOT and so
4 days EOT had been granted to them for inclement weather and the
consequences
- After an EOT was granted, I requested the Contractor to review the master
programme accordingly
6. How to monitor the works progress?

- In accordance with GCC clause 16, the Contractor is requested to submit the
master works programme showing the sequence, method and timing in which
the Contractor propose to carry out the works
- In the programme, they should identify the critical path and the critical activities
- I would then check whether the works programme was sufficient and realistic.
- I checked whether all the construction activities were included in the programme
and see whether time allowed to carry out the works is realistic, were the
activities arranged in a logical sequence.
- If the Engineer is not convinced of the programme he may request the Contractor
to explain and provide justification
- If the Engineer is still not satisfied with the Contractor’s programme, he may
request the contractor to revise the programme
- Well, with the use of this programme, we may carry out the progress monitoring
- The actual works progress would be compared with the master programme
- In case it was found any slippage in the works progress, I discussed with the
Contractor in the meeting to see what causes the delay and see if there was any
method to overcome problem
- If the slow progress persists, I would inform the Contractor in writing of the
unsatisfactory progress and reminded him to take any necessary measures to
ensure timely completion of the Works
- If the slow progress continues after repeated warnings, the situation should be
noted in the Contractor’s Quarterly Performance Report
7. How to construct box culvert?

Settlement problem:
- The box culvert is constructed on a piece of newly reclaimed land.
- Before reclamation work, the underlying marine deposit has been dredged in
order to minimize the settlement problem.
- Also, movement joints are design between the bays of the box culvert to allow
some movement
Existing flow:
- Another problem in carrying out the construction works is to deal with the existing
flow the Gascoigne Road box culvert
- The Contractor has to design a temporary flow diversion scheme to divert the
existing flow.
- Sufficient pumps should be prepared and the capacity of the temporary pipeline
should not be less than the original box culvert
Dewatering problem:
- Since the site is close to the sea and thus the construction work is highly affected
by the tidal water effect.
- No matter how large effort was paid by the Contractor, they still fail to carry out
the dewatering work for the construction of box culvert
- They had tried putting many pumps, placing tremie concrete at the base, carrying
out chemical grouting to seal up the localized leakage
- However they approached the problem, they can’t resolve it.
- At last, they decided to change the design from cast insitu to precast one.
- They proposed to divide the original 12m long cast insitu box culvert into 6 nos.
of 2m long precast units.
- I raised that their proposal would not be accepted by DSD as the no. of joints
would largely increase, which give rises to maintenance problem
- In view of this, the contractor proposed, instead of cut the original box culvert
vertically, they divide it in a horizontal plane, and then the upper portion would be
cast insitu, and that no. of joints would be unchanged.
Topic: Fill Management
1. Why we have Waste Management Plan (WMP)?

- Government has been facing a serious problem with the management of
construction and demolition (C&D) material.
- Steps to take to avid and minimize the generation of C&D material, and
reuse and recycle the C&D material as far as possible
- To this end, WMP was introduced in 2001 to all PWP contracts
- The requirements are laid in the PS and BQ items are provided for the
plan.
2. What is the content of Waste Management Plan (WMP)?

Classification of C&D material:
- To classify and list the types and quantities of C&D material to be
generated
- Inert portion of C&D material – Public fill
- Non-inert portion of C&D material – C&D waste
Avoidance/Minimize of C&D material:

- Proposal to avoid/minimize the generation of C&D material
- Details include the programming of works, using metal formwork, reuse the
excavated material for filling, etc
Provision of sorting facilities:

- Identify an area on Site for sorting of C&D material according to the
classification
- This requirement may be relaxed if the space of the site is limited
Proposal for handling, recycling, reuse and return of C&D material:

- To avoid over-disposal of “useful” C&D material
Chemical waste:
- Proposed means of packaging, labeling, storage, transportation and
disposal
- Statutory regulations should be observed
Disposal refuse:
- Proposal for minimizing, storage and disposal of general refuse
1
Disposal of surplus C&D material:
- The disposal arrangement should follow the trip-ticket system
- The disposal outlet and means of transportation should be specified in the
proposal.
Site Cleanliness:
- Proposal for maintaining the site in a clean and tidy condition
3. How to monitor the implementation of WMP?

Monitoring and auditing the proposal:
- A monitoring and auditing proposal to be submitted by the Contractor
- The proposal should delineate how the WMP would be implemented
properly
- This proposal should also facilitate the Engineer to audit the Contractor’s
performance in implementing the WMP
Record keeping:
- Records such as photographs and measurement should be kept properly
and should be submitted to the Engineer on monthly basis
Report after completion of the Contract:

- A report should be prepared after the completion of the Contract to
summarize the quantities of C&D material estimated at the commencement
of the Contract, monthly statistics of C&D material generated and disposed
of, and reason for any significant difference between the above two
quantities
4. What are the responsibilities of the Marine Fill Committee (MFC)?

- To identify and manage the supply and demand of marine fill sources.
- To provide and manage disposal capacity for dredged/excavated sediment
(but DEP is responsible for issue of dumping permits)
- The Committee is chaired by DCE and the Secretariat is the CGE/Fill
Management Division of the GEO, CED
- The MFC Secretariat maintains a database on fill requirements and surplus
materials of civil engineering projects in Hong Kong
- The proponents of the projects should send to the MFC Secretariat details
of any fill requirements or disposal requirements
2
5. How does the MFC control the marine fill sources and sediment dredging?
Control of marine fill sources:
- The proponents of the works projects should keep the MFC Secretariat
informed of any proposals for the investigation and the use of marine fill
resources (marine sand fill)
- The use of marine borrow areas must be approved by the MFC.
Control of sediment dredging:

- Unnecessary dredging of sediment should be avoided.
- Large scale dredging of sediment and dredging of contaminated sediment
must be agreed with the MFC.
6. What are the responsibilities of the Public Fill Committee (PFC)?

- To implement measures to promote avoidance, minimization, re-use and
recycling of C&D material
- To oversees the management of public filling operations and circulates the
Public Filling Programme and designates the public filling facilities for
public works projects
- The Committee is chaired by DCE and the Secretariat is the CE/Port Works
Division of the CEO, CED.
- The PFC Secretariat should identify the sources of land-based fill (public
fill), maximize the use of public fill, provide public filling facilities and C&D
material sorting facilities (barging points), and formulate of strategy for the
reduction, recycling and re-use of C&D material.
- The PFC Secretariat should also forecast the generation of C&D material
and identify the fill demand for reclamation and site formation projects
7. How does the PFC control the land-based fill sources, provision and
control of public filling facilities?
Control of land-based fill sources:
- The development of land-borrow areas must be approved by the PFC.
- The proponents of the works projects should keep the PFC Secretariat
informed of any proposals for the investigation and the use of land-based
fill resources
Provision and control of public filling facilities:

- The PFC coordinates the provision and operation of public filling facilities
3
- It maintains an up-to-date database of public fill received and the public
filling capacity.
- Where the reclamation projects involved large amount of importation of fill,
the project proponents should consider the use of public fill
- The project proponents should keep the PFC informed of the proposed
C&D material management measures to be included in the PWSC paper.
8. Why dredging/excavation of sediment are not allowed?

Reasons for no dredging/excavation of sediment allowed:
- To minimize the quantities of material to be disposed of at sea
- In most cases, dredging of sediment is not necessary from technical point
of view
Dredging of sediment is allowed in the following cases:

- Emergency dredging for safety reasons
- For maintenance of the navigation channel
- For maintenance of drainage channel and watercourse
9. What measures are implemented to encourage the use of public fill at

public filling areas?
- The acceptance criteria of public fill is relaxed to accept oversized rocks
and a small amount of timber
- The Contractor managing the public filling operations is required to accept
wet soil
- Public fill barging points are operated to receive public fill
- A close liaison is kept with the construction industry to encourage
contractors to deliver the inert portion of C&D material to the public filling
areas
10. Can the project proponents refuse to use public fill?

General requirement:
- It has been stated in the WBTC (and is most likely with relevant provisions
provided in the Contract) that for proposed reclamation (including also for
surcharge mound or earth filling projects with imported fill requirements of
300,000 m3 or more, the project proponents should consider using public
fill.
Exempted circumstances:
4
- Shortfall in supply of public fill is anticipated
- Projects with stringent programmes (Disneyland)
- Contracts comprising complicated interfacing issues
- Insurmountable environmental impact
11. How to treat with wet soil in public fill?

Past practice:
- No condition of Public Dumping Licence contains criteria on the wetness of
the materials to be accepted at public filling areas.
- Wet soil is generally accepted for use below water level
- The use of wet soil above water level might be rejected as the quality of the
material may be unsuitable for achieving the specification for compaction
Problems arising:
- Acceptance criteria is vague
- Confrontation may arise between the truck drivers and dump supervisors
regarding rejecting wet soil.
Present practice:
- Contractual provisions are provided to accept the use of wet soil
- Wet soil can be directly used below water level
- For filling above water level, the wet soil should be mixed with other dried
soil to make it suitable for subsequent compaction
- Contractor should be deemed to take into account such expenses in BQ
rate
12. What should be noted for importation of sand from the PRC by barges?
Existing problems:
- Importation of sand from PRC by barges has increased dramatically
- These barges fail to comply with the regulations in either side
Regulation action:
- The source of the sand should be submitted
- The name and licence number of each barge to be engaged in transporting
the sand should be submitted
- Details of all permits and authorizations should be provided
13. What is recycled aggregates?
5
Background:
- Continuous generation of C&D material
- Less opportunity for reclamation projects to absorb the public fill
- To explore alternative outlet for inert portion of C&D materials
- To reduce pressure on public filling area and landfill site
- Use of recycled aggregate
Application:
- Grade 20 prescribed mix1 and Grade 25-35 designed mix concrete
- Road sub-base construction
- Granular materials for filters, drainage layer, etc.
- Concrete paving blocks (to make use the recycled fines – 5mm down)
- Rockfill replacement for seawall, infill to gabion walls
Major difference between virgin aggregate and recycled aggregate:

- 10% fine value for recycled aggregate is lower, but still comply with the
requirement for concrete production
- Water absorption of recycled aggregate is much higher than virgin
aggregate and varies a lot
14. What is trip-ticket system for disposal of C&D material?

Background:
- All public fill should be disposed of at designated public filling facilities and
all C&D waste at designated landfills.
- Trip-ticket system implemented to ensure the C&D material are disposed of
at the right place
Planning stage:
(Public fill)
- The project proponents should consult PFC whether public filling facilities
will be available for the disposal of public fill generated.
- The PFC should designate the public filling facilities and should advise on
any acceptance criteria
- Such criteria should be incorporated into the tender documents
(C&D waste)
1
Same as standard mix?
6
- Similar procedure for C&D waste except that in this case DEP should be
consulted instead of PFC
Public filling facilities:

- Public filling areas (reclamation sites)
- Public filling barging points
- Inert C&D materials recycling facilities
- Public fill stockpiling areas
Trip-ticket system:
- A standard disposal delivery form is provided to the Contractor for them to
fill in and present to the site supervisory staff for checking and stamping for
each and every vehicular trip
- The site supervisory staff would check to ensure that the public fill does not
mix with C&D waste and vice versa
- The Contractor should present the form to the operator of the designated
public filling facilities/landfills for checking and a second stamping prior to
the disposal of C&D material
- Public fill disposed of off site not more than 50,000m3
- Amount of C&D waste generated less than 50m3
15. What is the new policy in relation to management of C&D material?

Background:
- The construction industry generates about 14 million tonnes of C&D
material annually.
- Of this, there is about 12 million tonnes is inert C&D material
- Recent sentiment against setttlement
- Opportunities are limited to securing new reclamation projects, which is a
major outlet for these inert C&D material
- A shortfall in public filling capacity is anticipated
Responses:
- Drawing up a C&D material management plan (C&DMMP) to minimize
C&D material generation at design stage
- Vetting of the C&DMMP prior to upgrading of the project to Category A
- Providing the contractor with information from the C&DMMP in order to
7
facilitate him in preparing the WMP and to minimize C&D material
generation during construction
Exemption:
- Project generating C&D material less than 50,000m3; or
- Importing fill material less than 50,000m3
Ways to maximize the use of C&D material:

- Use of public fill in reclamation or earth-filling projects instead of
marine/river sand fill
- To maximizing filling or minimizing cutting in large-scale site formation
projects
- To crush the surplus rock for on-site or off-site use
- Maximize the reuse of inert C&D material on site
- Maximize the use of recycled aggregates
- Maximize the use of steel or aluminium formworks and falseworks
- Make provisions for on-site sorting
16. What is the strategy of management of C&D material?

Reduce generation of C&D materials:
- A Waste Reduction Task Force for the Construction Industries was formed
- Balance cut and fill
- Rehabilitation of old buildings instead of demolition
Reuse of soft inert C&D materials:

- 60% of C&D materials are soft (e.g. Mud, earth and soil), which cannot be
recycled
- Reused in reclamation or site formation
- Mismatch in programme of construction and demolition is experienced
- Fill banks set up to accommodate surplus materials temporarily
- Proper methods adopted in sorting out the reused portion from the mixed
C&D materials.
Recycling of inert C&D materials:

- Recycled aggregate
- Relieve the pressure to accommodate the C&D materials
- Provide alternative source of aggregate preparing for the closure of
quarries
8
- Environmental protection and sustainability
What is the role of Government in promoting the use of recycled

aggregate?
Lead to establish the markets:
- Conducting research and development to investigate the physical
properties of the recycled aggregate
- Setting up temporary recycling facilities (Tuen Mun Area 38)
- Allocating land for permanent recycling facilities
- Removing the obstacles which hinder the use of recycled aggregate
(reviewing the specification and building regulations)
- Exploring wider application of recycled C&D materials by trials
Problems encountered:
- Inertia and conservatism in adopting new types of material in the industry
- Lack of confidence in the use of new construction materials
- Lack of local experience
- Specifications, technical and practice notes not in place
- Uncertainties on the quality and steady supply of recycled aggregate
- Cheap supply of virgin aggregate from our neighbourhood areas
- No imposition of landfill charges and aggregate tax
Way forward:
- Implementing waste management plan in planning, design, construction
and maintenance stage
- Encouraging selective demolition and on-site sorting
- Reviewing and revising engineering specifications
- Setting up temporary recycling facilities
- Encourage the use of recycled C&D materials in public and private projects
- Facilitating the construction industry to set up more recycling facilities by
allocating suitable lands at strategic locations
- On-site recycling
- Collaboration with the construction industries
9
Topic: Earthworks
1. What is public fill?

- Public fill shall mean the inert material arising from construction and
demolition activities such as site clearance, excavation, construction,
refurbishment, renovation, demolition and roadworks.
- Public fill shall comprise material including stone, rock, masonry, brick,
concrete, soil and other inert material.
- There is no size limitation on the public fill, and a small amount of timber
may be mixed into the fill.
- The public fill may also consist of wet soil.
2. What is fill material other than public fill?

- Fill material shall consists of naturally occurring or processed material1
which can be compacted to form stable areas of fill.
- Fill material shall contain material with liquid limit below 65% and a
plasticity index below 35%
- Fill material shall not contain organic material, flammable material, metal or
rubber.
- Sulphate content of fill material shall not exceed the permissible limit as
they have corrosive effect on nearby concrete structures or metalwork.
-
3. What are the common types of fill materials?
Fine fill material:
- Particle size below 75mm
- For area of fill within 0.5m of a structure or utility
General fill material:

- Particle size generally below 75mm, but must not exceed 200mm
- Used to form the areas of fill unless otherwise stated
Special fill material:

- Particle size below 75mm, but may contains some particles below 63µm
- Liquid limit not exceeding 45% and plasticity index not exceeding 20% and
a coefficient of uniformity exceeding 50 (i.e. well-graded)
- Used as fill material around pipelines
1
Concrete or recycled aggregates
1
Granular fill material:
- Consists of clean, hard, durable material
- Particle size below 75mm and contains very small amount pf particles
below 600µm
Rock fill material:

- Grade 200 and Grade 400 (or any other Grade, of which the grading is
designated by the maximum particle size not being exceeded)
- Consists of pieces of hard, durable rock of which less than 30% by mass is
discoloured or decomposition.
- Upon to the approval of the Engineer, crushed rock or crushed concrete
may be used
Public fill:
- No size limitation
- Refer to Question No. 1 above
4. How to deal with soft spot?

Additional excavation:
- Additional excavation shall be carried out to remove unsuitable material,
and the resulting voids shall be filled
- General fill material, fine fill material or special fill material shall be used
- In case the soft spot is found below formations in rock, Grade 10 concrete
shall be used to fill the voids.
- Granular fill materials shall be deposited below standing water.
Stabilization:
- The soft spot can be stabilized in stead of excavated
- Rock fill material (Grade 400) shall be deposited on top of the unsuitable
material and compacted to form a stable formation.
5. What should be noted in deposition of fill materials?

General:
- Fill materials obtained from any excavation within the Site shall be
deposited as soon as practicable.
- Fill material shall be deposited in certain thickness subject to the type of
compaction method adopted
- Layers of fill material deposited shall be horizontal (except for any gradient
2
fall for surface drainage)
- Fill material shall not be deposited by end-tipping or any method which may
result in segregation or inadequate compaction of the fill material.
- Compaction due to the passage of any plant or vehicles shall be uniform.
Deposition for sloping surface:

- To form a sloping earthwork surface with gradient greater than 1 in 3 using
fill material other than rock fill material, it shall be overfilled first and then
cut back to the final surface after compaction2.
Deposition adjacent to structures or utilities:

- Using fine fill material for area within 0.5m of a structure or utility
- Fill material shall be deposited uniformly around the structure and utility
without causing disturbance or damage.
Deposition around pipelines:

- Special fill materials shall be used, unless otherwise stated.
- Fill material shall be deposited in layers of not exceeding 100mm up to
300mm above the top of the pipeline3.
Deposition of rock fill material:

- The final compacted thickness shall be within 1.5-2 times the nominal
Grade size of the rock fill material.
- The surface void of each layer shall be filled with rock fragments
6. What should be noted in compaction of fill materials?

General:
- Compaction shall be carried out in layers after deposition
- Deposition of fill material on a compacted layer shall not start until
permission is given.
- However, it is generally a practical problem that an unacceptable delay to
the progress may be resulted for awaiting the test results.
- As such, this requirement for permission may be reviewed.
Moisture content:
- The moisture content of fill material shall be at the optimum value during
compaction with tolerance +3%, to ensure the fill material is still capable of
2
Why it is required?
3
being compacted.
Compaction adjacent to structures or utilities:

- Fill material shall be compacted in such a manner that the structures and
utilities would not be disturbed or damaged.
Compaction around pipelines:

- Compaction shall be carried out by hand-rammers or manually operated
power equipment.
- At least 85% of relative compaction shall be obtained throughout for fill
material within 300mm above the top of the pipeline.
Compaction of rock fill material:

- No indication of relative compaction for rock fill
- At least 8 passes of a vibrating roller or equivalent shall be carried out
- The size of the vibratory rollers shall depend on the compacted thickness of
each layer.
- Similar approach for compaction of general fill material with a large portion
(i.e. <90% passing a 20mm BS test sieve) of coarse material.
Degree of compaction of fill material other than rock fill material:

- 90% relative compaction throughout
- 95% within 1.5m of earthworks final surface and formation
- 98% within 200mm of formation
- 85% for fill material around pipeline
- These value may be reviewed in light of the advice given in the
Geotechnical Manual for Slopes and Geoguide 1.
- Lower standard may be acceptable in flat or gentle slope and in areas
where there is a considerable time to settle before construction to start.
7. What kinds of tests should be carried out with respect to fill materials?
General:
- Particle size distribution, liquid limit, plasticity index, coefficient of
uniformity and sulphate content
- Each sample shall be tested to determine the particle size distribution
- Each sample of fill material other than rock fill material shall be tested to
determine the liquid limit and plasticity index
3
Any overfilling required for deposition of fill materials around pipeline as for utility? Which clause?
4
- Calculation of coefficient of uniformity (D60/D10) for special fill material
- For fill material to be deposited within 500mm of concrete structure or
metalwork, tests shall be carried out to determine sulphate content
- For any non-compliance, additional tests shall be carried out4.
Optimum moisture content and maximum dry density:

- Samples shall be tested before (at least 72 hours) and after (not more than
28 days) the fill material is deposited5.
- The consistency of test results shall be noted.
Moisture content:
- Samples shall be taken from each layer of fill.
- Additional samples shall be provided in case the moisture content of any
test sample differs from the optimum moisture content.
Relative compaction:
- Re-test shall be carried out for any non-compliance.
8. What is the primary aim of earthworks design?

- To minimize the quantity of materials to be imported and/or disposed of,
both for economic and environmental reasons.
- The Contract should not indicate the source the fill materials from which the
fill materials to be obtained unless there are technical reasons to use
specific materials in specific areas. (e.g. public fill)
4
Just carry out additional tests? How about if the re-tests are failed again?
5
What is the purpose to determine the optimum moisture content after deposition?
5
Topic: Piling Works
1. What general requirements for piling works are there?

Design of piling works:
- The Contractor shall be encouraged to submit an alternative design of piles
through a suitably worded PS clause.
- It is prudent as the overall cost of piling works depends very much on the
expertise of the Contractor and the availability of his plant.
Performance specification:
- Plan to show location of piles
- Schedule of loads to be carried by the piles
- Maximum allowable movements
- No working loadings of the piles shall be specified
2. What surface treatment is applied to steel piles?

Epoxy coatings:
- (To investigate)
- Suitable for marine piles
Bituminous coatings:
- (To investigate)
3. What is bentonite slurry?

- (To investigate)
4. What should be submitted in respect to piling works?

- (To investigate)
4. What is minipile?
5. What should be monitored during piling?

Noise level:
Vibration:
Ground movement:
- Ground settlement marker installed directly on the ground
1
- To assess NSF on piles
Groundwater level:
- Using piezometer and standpipe
- Important for caissons barrettes, bored piling works, etc
- Carried out on daily basis
6. What ground investigation should be carried out for piling works?
7. How to determine the founding levels of piles?

- Based on the rock decomposition grade (eg. SPT “N” value)
- Intensity of fracture
- Use of % core recovery
- may be misleading
- because it depends on the effectiveness of drilling technique
- to this end, type of coring should be specified
- To check the contact between the bored piles and the underlying rock at the
base by coring 1m below founding level.
8. What is the purpose of the preliminary piles?

- For use when the ground condition is unfamiliar
- To check the pile design
- Test load shall be < 2 x design load
9. Driven piles.
- Steel H section piles for driving through hard strata
10. Cast-in-situ concrete pile.

- Tremie concrete is used
- High workability and cohesion concrete shall be used (slump value of
150mm to 200mm)
11. How to inspect piling works?
12. Any tolerance for piling works?
13. What records should be kept for piling works?
2
14. What testing shall be carried out on piles?
Load tests:
- For pile design (preliminary pile test)
- For pile verification
- Bearing capacity may increase with time due to the dissipation of pore
water pressure.
- No. of tests required depends on the complexity of the geology of the site,
but in any case, as many as possible
Concrete cores:
Non-destructive tests:
Integrity tests:
- To test the soundness of the pile
- Not test the adequacy of the loading capacity
- For selection of piles for subsequent load tests
- 3 common types-
- sonic echo method
- vibration/transient dynamic method
- sonic logging
Bentonite slurry:
15. How to determine the settlement of piles by load test?
16. How to measure the set of driven piles?

- Energy transferred to the piles, i.e. performance of hammers
- Hydraulic hammer > diesel hammer
3
Topic: Steelwork
1. What submissions shall be provided for steelwork?

Steel:
- Manufacturer’s certificate
Workshop drawings:
- Steelwork and welds, and relevant welding procedure
Delivery of steelwork:
- Expected and actual arrival dates
- Name of carrier
Method of erection steelwork:

- Sequence and method of erection of steelwork
- Methods of lifting and handling the components
- Methods of preventing damage to protective coatings on steelwork during
handling
- Procedure for aligning, leveling and plumbing steelwork
- Sequence of casting concrete bonded to the steelwork
Welder certificates:
- Certificates endorsed by an inspecting authority
- The extent of approval of the welder shall be appropriate to the categories
of welds.
Welding procedures:
- Documentation endorsed by an inspecting authority to show that the
welding procedure has complied.
- Records of approval tests if procedure trials are required
Stud welding, flame cutting and shearing procedures:

- Procedure for stud welding, flame cutting and shearing processes
- Documentation endorsed by an inspecting authority to show that they has
complied.
- Records of approval tests if procedure trials are required.
Vent holes for galvanizing:
1
- Vent holes shall be hot-dip galvanizing hollow or box sections.
- Method of plugging vent holes submitted for considerations.
Method of non-destructive testing:

- Proposed method for carrying out non-destructive testing on welds
Inspecting authority and testing consultant:

- Proposed inspecting authority endorsing welder certificates and records of
approval tests for welding procedures
- Proposed testing consultant
Paint:
- Name of manufacturer
- Manufacturer’s product specifications, product range and technical
information.
Samples of materials:
- 150mm x 150mm x 6mm blast cleaned steel plate
- Samples of painted tin plates for each painting system.
- Samples of each type of nut, bolt, washer, stud and rivet.
2. Any trials to be carried out on steelwork?

Procedure trials for welding, flame cutting and shearing:
- The trials shall be carried out if the proposed welding procedure does not
comply with the requirements stated in the Contract.
Painting trials:
- The trial shall be carried out for each painting system which will be applied
to areas exceeding 100m2.
3. How to erect the steelwork?

Fixing of holding down bolts:
- Holding down bolts for steelwork shall be fixed firmly in such a manner that
it would not be displaced during concreting.
Erection of steelwork:
- Secure the steelwork in position by temporary supports and fastenings.
- Align the steelwork such that it is within the specified tolerance.
2
- Make sure the steelwork would be stable before the temporary supports
are removed.
- Permanent connections shall be made progressively with the removal of
the temporary supports and fastenings.
Bedding and grouting the base of steelwork:

- Upon the completion of erection of steelwork, the base shall be bedded or
grouted.
- The base shall be grouted up to the underside of the wedges and it shall be
left undisturbed after concreting.
- The remaining part of the base shall be concreted after the strength of the
grout has attained to a level to support the steelwork.
4. Any tolerance in construction of steelwork?

Fabrication:
- Tolerances stated in BS shall be complied
Fixing holding down bolts:

- The position of bolts shall be within 3mm of the specified position.
- The line of bolts shall not be tilted from the specified line by more than 1 in
40.
Erection of steelwork:
- The position and level of steelwork components shall be within 10mm of
the specified position or level.
5. What tests shall be carried out for steelwork?

Steel:
- Tensile test and impact test to BS 4360
- Quality grading not carried out by the manufacturer
Welds:
- Visual inspection for cracks, surface pores and joint fit-up
- After then, non-destructive testing shall be carried out for some welds
- For butt weld – ultrasonic examination or radiographic examination
- For fillet weld – liquid penetrant method or magnetic particle flaw detection
- If tests have been carried out at fabrication yard, 5% of welds shall be
inspected visually on arrival on the Site.
3
Stud shear connectors and rivets:
- 5% of welded stud shear connectors
- 5% of driven rivets
Fabrication tolerances:
- Rolled and built-up sections of steelwork
4
Topic: Bridgeworks
1. What should be used for waterproofing of bridge?

Prefabricated sheeting:
- Proprietary product
- Unaffected by UV
Bentonite panels:
- Permeability of less than 1x10-7 mm/sec
Bituminous paint:
- Cut-back bitumen
2. What is the procedure for installation of waterproofing system?

Preparation of concrete surface:
- Keep the surface clean, dry and free from voids, sharp protrusions,
projecting wires, etc, which may damage the waterproofing system.
- Cure the concrete surface for at least 7 days and then seal the surface with
one coat of primer, which shall be protected from contamination.
- It shall be ensured that the installation is undertaken by a Specialist
Contractor on the List of Approved Suppliers of Materials and Specialist
Contractors for Public Works.
Installation of prefabricated sheeting:

- Lay from the low points and drains towards high points.
- One sheet at a time
- Double layer shall be laid around pipes, posts, etc and edges shall be
sealed with a trowelled bead of mastic.
Installation of Bentonite panels:

- Not to be laid in water or during wet weather
- Seal the surface with bentonite joint seal before laying the panels
- Lay the polyethylene sheeting below and above the panels to prevent
prehydration.
Bituminous paint waterproofing system:

- Apply in two coats
1
3. What should be noted for design of bridge bearings?
Bridge bearing:
- Designed by the Contractor
- The bearing shall be easily replaceable
- The maximum bearing stress on bridge bearing shall not exceed 40% of
the specified grade strength of the concrete.
Fixing for bridge bearings:

- Bearings, except for elastomeric bearing, shall be fixed to the structure with
mechanical fixings.
- The friction between the bearing and the structure may resist the horizontal
forces provided that a factor of safety of at least 2 is applied.
4. What should be checked against the submission for bridge bearings?

- Details of the manufacturer
- Details of the bearings
- Design calculations
- Shop drawings, including reinforcement drawing for anti-bursting bars
- Certificate
- Details of fixings
- Details of protective coatings
- Methods of installation
- Programme of manufacture, testing and delivery
5. What is the procedure of installation of bridge bearings?

- The level of the structure shall be prepared to suit the installation of the
bearings
- The plinth on which the bearing will be installed shall be at least 25mm but
not exceed 40 mm.
- (To insert the method statement)
6. Any tolerance for installation of bridge bearings?

- The centerline of shall be within 3mm of the specified position.
- The level shall be within 5mm of the specified level.
- The inclination shall be within 1 in 200 of the specified inclination.
2
- The horizontal axis shall be within 0.005 radian of the specified alignment.
7. What testing shall be carried out for bridge bearings?

Friction test:
- For sliding (guided) bearing.
- To determine the coefficient of friction, fatness, bonding properties and
resistance to mechanical damage.
- The coefficient of friction shall not exceed 0.04.
- The bond to the backing plate shall be unaffected by the friction test.
- The PTFE shall be free from mechanical damage after testing,
Bridge bearings:
- Vertical load tests and horizontal load tests
- Test loads shall be serviceability limit state loads
8. What should be noted for design of movement joints?

Fabricated movement joints:
- The movement joints shall be capable of withstanding the loads (horizontal
and vertical) as specified in GS.
- The joints shall be capable of accommodating the movements and
rotations as stated in the Contract.
- The joints shall be watertight or shall be provided with a drainage layer
Fixing for fabricated movement joints:

- The diameter of holding down bolts and studs shall be at least 16mm.
- The fixing shall be compatible with the reinforcement in the underlying
concrete.
9. What should be checked against the submission for movement joints?

- Details of the manufacturer
- Details of the movement joints
- Design calculations and drawings
- Details of fixings
- Programme of manufacture, testing and delivery
3
10. What is the procedure of installation of fabricated movement joints?
- Holding down bolts shall be cast into the concrete for direct mounting of the
joints
- Joint component shall be free to move longitudinally relative to each other.
- When one side is being set, the other side shall be free from longitudinal
restraint.
11. Any tolerance for installation of fabricated movement joints?

- The surface of the joint shall be at least 1 to 3mm below surroundings.
4
Topic: Marine Works
1. What kinds of materials are used for marine works?

Fill material:
- Type 1, Type 2, rock fill or public fill
- Particle size distributions within the ranges stated in Table 6.1 and Table
21.1
- Type 1 (underwater fill material) shall consist of natural material extracted
from the sea bed or a river bed. (basically natural sand)
- Type 2 (underwater fill material) shall consist of material which has a
coefficient of uniformity exceeding 5 and a plasticity index not exceeding 12.
(basically decomposed granite or similar type of rock; clay content is limited
by the plasticity index)
- Grade 75 (rock fill material) shall be hard, durable rock which are free from
cracks, veins, discolouration and other evidence of decomposition.
- Grade 700 (rock fill material) shall be rock which are free from cracks,
veins and similar defects. (Pell-mell rubble)
Rock armour:
- 7 types of rock armour classified according to the maximum and minimum
mass of individual rock piece.
- Type 1 rock armour is the lightest while Type 7 is the heaviest.
- At least 50% in number of individual pieces shall be heavier than the mean
of the individual group
- Apart from the mass of the rock piece, there are other requirements for
rock armour to comply-
- Density, water absorption, aggregate impact value, ten percent fines
value, soundness and aggregate abrasion value
- Maximum size shall not greater than twice the minimum dimension
- Free from cracks, veins and similar defects
- Less than 20% in number of individual pieces shall be discoloured or
show sign of decomposition
- Rock armour shall be deposited piece by piece and shall not be deposited
by tipping, dumping or dropping.
- Individual rock pieces shall interlock and do not segregate
Facing stones:
- Used for seawalls and pitched slopes
1
- Hard, durable fresh granite, free from cracks, veins and similar defects.
- Uniform in shape, size and colour, roughly squared and hammer dressed.
- For facing stone used in vertical seawall, the width shall be >300mm
Bermstones:
- Used for seawalls and revetments
- Sound fresh rock, free from cracks, veins and similar defects.
- At least 1000 kg in mass and between 450mm and 750mm thick.
Levelling stones:
- Used for founding layers for marine structures
- Rock fill material (Grade 75)
(To advise for any other materials used)
2. What particulars shall be submitted in respect of the marine works?

General:
- Any licences, permits and correspondence required. The Contractor shall
obtain a valid dumping licence from EPD for disposal of dredged materials
at approved marine dumping grounds
- Details of methods for controlling marine traffic.
Dredging:
- Type and capacity of dredgers
- Methods of anchorage and positioning of dredgers
- Sequence and rate of working
- Arrangements for transportation and disposal of dredged material.
- (The Fill Management Committee shall be contacted for advice on suitable
locations for the disposal of dredged material)
Deposition of fill material:

- Details of Constructional Plant and transport
- Sources and properties of each type of fill materials
- Methods of deposition and compaction of fill material
- Methods of controlling the moisture content of fill material
3. What measures shall be adopted to handle fill materials?
2
- Fill material and dredged material shall not be stockpiled on the foreshore.
- (To advise for contaminated material, public fill)
4. What are the general requirements for marine works?

Marine works:
- The Contractor shall notify the Director of Marine in accordance with
Section 70 of the shipping and Port Control Regulations, Chapter 313.
- Before the Works to start, it should be checked that a Notice to Mariners or
a Marine Department Notice in respect of the concerned Works has been
issued.
- The Site for marine works shall be marked with flags, marker buoys and
lights.
- The marine traffic shall not be obstructed
- Temporary marine traffic arrangements and control shall be made with
approvals from the Director of Marine
- Temporary tide gauges shall be mounted at locations agreed by the
Engineer
- Work boats shall be provided
- Floating debris within the Site shall be collected and removed to prevent
from dispersing outside the Site.
Surveys for marine works:

- Echo sounders shall be used
- Initial survey and final survey shall be carried out before and after dredging
- The final survey for dredging may be taken as the initial survey for
deposition of fill material if it was carried out within 30 days .before the
deposition of fill materials
- The final survey for deposition of fill material shall be carried after
completion of first layers, intermediate layers, and final layers. -
5. What should be noted in carry out dredging?

- Samples shall be taken during dredging to determine the sand content
- Any sudden or significant change in the properties of dredged materials
shall be noted
- Dredged material shall be disposed of in the dumping ground stated in the
Contract.
6. What should be noted for deposition of fill material below +2.5mPD?
3
- The method of deposition shall depend on the post-constructional
behaviour of the reclamation.
- Fill material shall be deposited in a way that minimum lateral displacement
of the underlying material will be induced
- The methods and Constructional Plant used shall be such that segregation
of material does not result.
- Fill material shall not be deposited by end-tipping.
- Fill material for blanket layers and drainage layers shall be deposited
uniformly.
- The allowable thickness of each layer or sub-layer and the distance
between leading edges of the layers should be carefully checked to ensure
that the reclamation remains stable at all stages of construction.
Deposition of fill material in dredged trench:

- The first layer for seawall, revetments, etc. shall be deposited in good time.
- The dredged trench shall be free from silt and debris before deposition of
fill material starts.
Deposition of rock fill material adjacent to structures and utilities:

- Rock fill material deposited around utilities shall be hand packed.
- Rock fill material deposited directly on geotextile shall be deposited such
that the geotextile is not rupture.
7. What should be noted for construction of various marine structures?

Seawall blocks:
- Formwork shall be removed not less than 12 hours after completion of
concreting.
- Key holes in seawall blocks shall be kept clean.
Seawalls:
- Seawall blocks shall be constructed in layers between slip joints and shall
be set in close contact with each other.
- Such slip joints shall be straight and vertical and perpendicular to the face
of the seawall, and shall extend through the seawall to the foundation.
- Joint filler shall be fixed to the existing surface.
- The facing stones shall be washed thoroughly before placing.
- The channels in seawall blocks shall be filled with rock pieces
4
Bermstones:
- (To investigate)
8. What tolerances are provided for marine works?

Dredging:
- The final surface of dredging shall be within 300mm of specified surface

- Top surfaces of fill materials to receive levelling stones shall be <75mm
above, and <250mm below the specified surface.
- Top surfaces of leveling stones shall be within 25mm of the specified
surface for foundation of structures
- Other top surface shall be within 250mm of the specified surface.
Seawall blocks:
- The seawall blocks shall be deposited within 25mm of specified position.
- The gaps between adjacent blocks and successive layers shall < 20mm.
9. What testing shall be carried out for marine works?

Dredged material:
- One sample for each grid at 15m intervals at 2m depth intervals
- Standard soil mechanics tests, such as particle size distribution, plasticity
index and coefficient of uniformity.
- Checking of sand content of dredged material1.
Fill materials:
- To determine the particle size distribution, plasticity index and coefficient of
uniformity.
- If the results do not comply with the requirements, additional samples shall
be obtained.
- The batch shall be considered non-compliance for any non-compliance of
additional tests
Rock armour:
- Tests for the rock for rock armour shall include relative density, water
absorption, aggregate impact value, ten percent fines value, aggregate
1
Why to check the sand content?
5
abrasion value and soundness.
- Tests for rock armour shall include dropping test to the determine the
resistance to fracture.
6
S.G. on Environmental Issue
Prepared by: yee
1. Major environmental nuisance during operation:

odour / noise for Sewage Treatment Works
traffic noise for roads
if objection is received during public consultation, we either change the
design or incorporate some mitigation measures into the design such as
noise barrier, deodorizers etc.
2. Major nuisance during construction

dust – continuous monitoring is required
noise from general construction activities – apply for the Construction
Noise Permit if the works is required in restricted hour, that is between
7pm and 7am and any time on general holiday (Refer to TM for the
application procedure and requirement)
noise from piling – apply for the Noise Permit no matter when the piling
work is done (Refer to TM for the application procedure and requirement)
noise from plants and equipment – only the equipment complying with the
noise emission standards shall be allowed to be imported, manufactured or
supplied for use in Hong Kong. Every hand held percussive break and air
compressor shall be fitted with a Noise Emission Label before its usage.
(Refer to Noise Control (Hand Held Percussive Breakers) Regulation &
Noise Control (Air Compressors) Regulation)
complaints about the noise from construction work during daytime can be
lodged to EPD while during evening, night-time or on holiday, both the
police and EPD are responsible for dealing with complaints
3. Discussion on pipe laying

To achieve the designed invert level of the pipe at manholes,
a) cast the pipe when constructing the upstream and downstream
manholes and lay the pipe in between by coupling
b) leave a box-out at one manhole
As the fittings of DI pipe cannot be fabricated on site and has to be order
in advance, the contractor is requested to prepare a pipeline schedule
4. Discussion on concrete
Slump = 50mm / 75mm / 125mm to reflect the workability
With higher slump, less degree of compaction in a shorter duration is
required to fill up the void
The cost for concrete of higher slump is higher as it needs more admixture
For concrete pavement, slump = 30mm to prevent segregation
Same slump should be adopted in same structural member to have same
degree of shrinkage
CSF is required for the concrete used in water-retaining structure
Topic: Environmental Issues
1. What is pollution?
Definition:
- The literal meaning of “pollution” is simply “destroying the purity or
sanctity”.
- From scientific point of view, environmental pollution can be broadly
defined as the addition of materials or energy which adversely affects man
or his environment.
Causes of pollution:
- Modernization and rapid industrial development resulting from the growing
needs to improve the quality of live had dramatically brought about serious
pollution in the past decades.
- Environmental pollution is the by-product of increasing population and rapid
economic development.
Nature of pollution:
- Pollution is rarely a localized issue.
- Once produced, pollutants can be carried by natural agents such as wind
and water to distant areas.
- In this connection, pollution is a national issue but also an international
issue.
Control of environmental pollution:

- Formulation of government policies and regulations.
- Education and promotion to the public.
- Implementation of economic incentive measures.
- Incorporating green concept in land use planning and public works projects.
2. What are the beneficial effects for observing the regulations on the control
of pollution?
Improvement of environment and uphold of living standard:
- By regulating the release of pollutants into the environment, the natural
environment can be conserved.
- Pollution control can improve the public hygiene, reduce spreading of
disease, maintain a balanced ecosystem and preserve natural resources.
- These can improve our living standards and public health, and preserve the
1
natural resources for our next generations.

- Amenity areas can be protected for beneficial uses, thus enhancing the
living environment.
- Besides, tourism will stay prosperous, leading to increased revenue to the
society.
- A cleaner environment also means cleaner water sources. The cost of
water treatment may also be reduced.
Protection of ecosystem and preservation of agricultural environment:

- Pollution control also serve to protect the ecosystem and preserve
agriculture and fish farming business.
- There have been cases of heavy financial loss caused by eutrophication in
fishing grounds, which is in fact a disruption in the ecosystem by excessive
discharge of nutrients into water bodies.
- Disrupting the ecosystem may even cause extinction of some species and
lead to non-recoverable damage.
- If environmental regulations are drawn up and observed, such damage will
be minimized.
- In addition, the productivity of agriculture and fish farming will be better
guaranteed.
Enhancement of human health:

- With the implementation of pollution control regulations, many hazards to
human health can be reduced.
- Consequent to pollution control, sanitary conditions can also improve.
- By minimizing the contamination of water bodies, the occurrence of
epidemic will be much reduced, and the general health of people
enhanced.
- This in turn lowers the demand on medical services and increases the
productivity of the society.
- Noise is another hazard to human health. There is evidence that
irrecoverable damage to human beings can result from prolonged exposure
to excessive noise.
Advancement of technology development:

- The need of complying with the pollution control regulations promotes the
development of new technologies.
- New materials which are less polluting may be developed.
2
- Advanced technology to curb pollutant emission may evolve from the need
to comply with regulations.
- These new technologies will contribute to the long-term benefits of the
society at large.
Improvement of image of government and promoting international cooperation:

- The government’s image can be enhanced, both nationally and
internationally, through the implementation of pollution control regulations.
- The government’s relationship with other countries will become more
intimate through cooperation and collaboration on pollution control issue.
- The international agreement on the phasing out of chlorofluorocarbons to
protect the ozone layer is an example.
- In the course of cooperation, transfer of technology between countries is
also enhanced.
3. What are the adverse effects for observing the regulations on the control
of pollution?
Increase in cost of production:
- To comply with pollution control regulations which often aim at limiting the
amount of pollutants generation to an acceptable level, many industries
have to input additional resources in the manufacturing processes.
- Certain materials and processes currently in use may have to be replaced
by more expensive materials.
- Pollutants treatment facilities have to be installed.
- In the long run, industries will grow slower, as the capital and management
time spent on pollution control are both increased.
- As a result of increased production cost, competitiveness of products in
foreign markets may be affected. To larger enterprises which have always
been engaging in research and development on pollution control, the effect
may not be too significant. However, small factories with inadequate
funding for this will find themselves having to choose between importing
pollution control techniques, or being eliminated.
- Worst still, however, is that some industrialists may move their production
lines to developing countries with less stringent pollution regulations. This
defeats the original purpose of imposing regulations to control the emission
of pollutants.
Increase in demand on public expenditure:
3
- A considerable amount of resources is required if effective pollution control

is to be achieved.
- A lot if personnel is required for the planning of environmental policies,
formulation and enforcement of regulations, monitoring and assessment of
pollution levels, research and development, and promotion of
environmental consciousness of the public.
- Besides, the government has to provide technical support to industries to
help them comply with the regulations.
- These actions and services will increase the demand on public
expenditure.
- The expenditure on the infrastructure development will also increase as a
result of pollution control regulations.
- The government may have to implement projects environmental protection.
- Moreover, since public finance is limited, the increased expenditure in
pollution control may jeopardize the government’s commitment in other
sectors like education and housing.
4. How should the environmental impact of public works projects be

assessed?
In the past:
- Traditional public works projects were evaluated by technical feasibility
studies and cost-benefit analysis, which were concerned with technical and
financial viability.
- It was only needed to ensure that the project satisfied the minimum
statutory environmental protection requirements.
Changes in recent years:

- With the growing consciousness of public for environmental protection in
recent years, it becomes apparent that, owing to the typically mammoth
scale of such projects and their long construction time, a comprehensive
assessment of the environmental impacts of such projects is important
before the projects are implemented.
- If such impacts are not contemplated and mitigated at an early stage, the
expected benefits of the projects will be jeopardized through the creation of
new environmental problems or aggravation of existing ones.
Scope of environmental impacts:

- Environmental impacts of public works projects can generally be classified
4
into the following areas: air, water, noise, biological, cultural and
socioeconomic.
- Both the construction and operation stages of the projects should be
considered.
- For the latter stage, impacts should be predicted for both normal and
possible abnormal scenarios, and a risk analysis should be carried out to
assess the probability of such abnormal scenarios.
Environmental impact assessment:

- The objective of an environmental impact assessment (EIA) is to evaluate
the effects of a project on the surrounding environment.
- The assessment should follow a structured methodology, and should be a
systematic evaluation with four stages, namely, identification of
environmental impacts, establishment of environmental baseline,
assessment of impacts and proposal of mitigation measures.
Identification of environmental impacts:

- At the initial stage of the assessment, all potential impacts that are
expected to be generated by the project in both the construction and
operation stages should be identified.
- The potential sensitive receivers (e.g. hospital and schools) should be
identified in order that the scope of study is defined before further detailed
investigation is carried out.
- Impacts on physical environments (e.g. air and water pollution and noise
nuisance) are usually reflected from quantifiable physical and chemical
parameter 1 , which have the advantages of being measurable for
assessment and comparison.
- On contrary, impacts on the biological environment are mainly reflected on
flora and fauna and ecology in the area.
- For the cultural environment, impacts on archeological sites, tombs and
“fung shui” features are of concern.
- Socioeconomic impacts may include changes in land use pattern, visual
intrusion and traffic disruption.
Establishment of environmental baseline:

- A survey is carried out to establish the existing status of the environment
characteristics short-listed in the previous step.
1
For example, concentration of particulates in the air generated from the works
5
- Future variations in them in the absence of the project should be predicted,

so as to form the baseline for comparison2.
- To accomplish this, extensive modeling and studies may be required to
obtain an accurate prediction.
Assessment of impacts:
- The third step is assessing the severity of the environmental impacts
caused by the project.
- The assessment is more straightforward to assess impacts on the physical
environments (e.g. air or water pollution or noise nuisance) because the
impacts can be quantified.
- The amount of pollutants or noise generated were predicted and compared
with relevant standards.
- Impacts on the biological environment can sometimes be assessed
quantitatively in terms of the number of endangered flora and fauna
species. However, the effect of such impacts on the areal ecology may
require qualitative judgement.
- In addition, impacts on the cultural, economical or social environment also
require subjective judgement.
- As for the cultural environment, possible impacts include inundation,
destruction, disruption and disturbance to cultural features.
- Socioeconomic impacts are assessed from the nature and magnitude of
changes in socioeconomic factors short-listed in the first step.
Proposal of mitigation measures:

- If the potential impacts exceed the acceptable level and there is no other
better alternative options, appropriate measures will be required to mitigate
the environmental impacts of the proposed works3.
- Apart from providing the mitigatory measures, the engineer should consider
the need for a monitoring programme for checking the effectiveness of
these measures.
5. How can the merits of public works projects be evaluated?

Principle:
- After the inception of a public works project, the engineer should
2
Taking water pollution as an example, water samples should be taken in the project planning stage of the project for testing to
reveal the water quality in respect of each potential impact. The pollutant dispersion ability and assimilation capacity should be
assessed. Other data such as rainfall, wind, temperature and groundwater movement, which would have effects on the future
variations of water quality, should be collected for predicting such variations.
3
Noise barriers and planting zones are common examples of such measures.
6
investigate the viability of alternative schemes which not only satisfy the
functional performance and financial requirements but also ensure
environmental protection.
- The interference caused by the project can be short or long term such as
water pollution or change of living habits.
- Thus, there is an obvious need to strike a balance between the benefit of
the project to the community and the disadvantages to the nearby
residents.
- For evaluating the environmental impacts, although in most cases it is not
possible to quantify all environmental impacts, a qualitative approach is
highly desirable.
- Such an approach facilitates interpretation of results and decision making
by other parties.
- Nevertheless, it necessarily involves subjective judgement on the relative
importance of different impacts and the severity of the impacts.
General approach in option evaluation:

- A general approach is to assign a weight to each of environmental impacts
to reflect its importance and influence to the environment.
- Then for each option of scheme including the “no project” option, a rating is
determined for each impact to reflect its severity as caused by that option.
- The multiple of the weight assigned and the rating to the impact gives a
score for the corresponding impact.
- The sum of these scores for a particular option is a relative indication of its
potential environmental impact.
- The option with lowest score is regarded as the optimal option.
- For the purpose of selection process, the scores on environmental impact
potential should be taken into account in addition to the information from
technical feasibility studies and cost-benefit analysis.
- If the optimal option still brings about excessive environmental impact,
further modification to the option should be considered.
- In case such modification is not feasible, mitigatory measures may be
required.
Cost implication to overall project:

- In evaluating the overall merit of a project works project, it is very important
to include the costs arising from the environmental impacts.
- It is easier to assess the cost necessary to cover the tangible impacts but it
7
requires sound subjective judgement to assess the cost associated with

mitigation of intangible impacts such as visual intrusion or loss of amenity
facilities.
- In evaluating the merit of the project, the engineer should also estimate the
cost associated with the mitigatory measures, if any.
- Such cost can be quantified as capital and recurrent cost, taken into
account in the cost benefit appraisal of the project.
- The engineer has to be prudent and fair in this respect.
Public consultation:
- Before planning is finalized, the people who will be affected by the project
should be consulted at early stage to ensure public acceptance of the
project.
- The engineer can seek the view of public to a particular scheme by
conducting an opinion survey from local people.
- The public should be informed of the benefits and effects of the project,
including the potential environmental impacts.
- The optimization of an engineering solution is an iterative process which
requires the engineer to consult with the client and those affected, and to
revise and modify the scheme accordingly.
6. How can different environmental impacts be assessed?

Assessment of impacts on the air and water environment:
- To study the existing air and water quality as baseline control.
- To predict the types and quantities of pollutants from all the alternatives of a
project during both construction and operation stages.
- To compare the predicted quality with the relevant standards.
- To propose mitigation or control measures.
Assessment of impacts of noise:

- To identify the noise sensitive areas.
- To anticipate the noise levels during both the construction and operation
stages.
- To compare the superimposed noise level with the relevant standards.
Assessment of impacts on the biological environment:

- To identify flora and fauna in the biological environment.
- To pay particular attention to rare and endangered species.
8
- To assess the natural succession of the biological environment with the

impact of the project.
Assessment of impacts on cultural environment:

- To identify the known cultural features including archaeological sites, tombs
and “fung shui” features.
- To investigate the impact including the inundation, destruction, disruption
and disturbance by the project.
- To propose mitigation measures to minimize impacts or alternatives for
preserving the cultural features.
Assessment of impacts on socioeconomic environment:

- To assess the impact on land use pattern, transportation system, etc.
7. What is Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance (EIAO)?

Background:
- The EIAO (Cap.499) comes into operation on 1.4.1998.
- The ordinance is enforced by Director of Environmental Protection (DEP).
- To pre-empt environmental problems associated with the projects by
assessing the environmental impacts.
Contents:
- Designated projects under Schedule 2, unless exempted, must follow the
statutory EIA process and require Environmental Permit (EP).
- Designated projects under Schedule 3 require approved EIA reports but do
not require EP.
8. What is the purpose of EIAO?

- The objective of EIAO is to avoid, minimize and control the adverse impact
on the environment of designated projects through the application of the
environmental impact assessment process and the environmental permit
system4.
9. What are the designated projects under EIAO?

Definition of designated projects:
- Projects or proposal which may have an adverse impact on the
environment.
4
Projects which are not “designated projects” under schedules 2 and 2 of EIAO do not require EP.
9
- Such projects/proposal are listed in Schedules 2 and 3 of EIAO
Designated projects under Schedule 2:

- Part I for construction and operation
- Part II for decommissioning projects
Designated projects under Schedule 3:

- For feasibility study of development/redevelopment projects
Examples of designated projects:

- Reclamation works of about 12.5 hectare in size (>5 hectares)
- River training works in Sheung Shui which is less than 300m from Long
Valley.
- A sewage pumping station with an installed capacity of 6,800 m3 per day
which is less than 150m from a housing estate.
Example of non-designated projects:

- Construction of a footbridge to Lantau Link Visitor’s Centre which is remote
from the local residence or natural habitat.
10. What designated projects under Schedule 2 of EIAO can be exempted for
the application of EP?
Part I projects exempted under Section 9(2) of EIAO:
- Projects which have been authorized, approved or permitted before
1.4.1998 by relevant Ordinance or Regulations
- Planning permission under section 16 of Town Planning Ordinance (TPO)
- Building works under Building Ordinance (BO)
- Reclamation under Foreshore and Seabed (Reclamations) Ordinance
- Road works under Roads (Works, Use and Compensation) Ordinance
- New development under Country Parks Ordinance/Marine Parks
Ordinance
- Sewerage works under Water Pollution Control (Sewerage) Regulation
- Any construction or operation commenced before 1.4.1998
Part II projects exempted under Section 9(3) of EIAO:

- Demolition plan approved under Building Ordinance before 1.4.1998.
Material changes to exempted projects:
10
- Material changes to the exempted projects which result in an adverse

environmental impact (defined in Section 6.1 of the TM) require EP.
11. Can you describe briefly the statutory EIA process?

Preparation of project profile:
- Prepared by the project proponents according to the Technical
Memorandum (TM) on EIA process
- The project profile may cover more than one designated projects.
Application for an EIA study brief:

- The project proponent should submit the project profile to DEP for
application for an EIA study brief.
- DEP may request for further information if necessary.
- The applicant (i.e. the project proponent) should advertise in the
newspaper the availability of the project profile.
- The public and the Advisory Council on the Environment (ACE) may
comment on the project profile within 14 days after it has been advertised.
- DEP should prepare the study brief within 45 days of receiving the
application or further information, if any, taking into account the project
profile, comments from the public and ACE and the TM on EIA process5.
EIA study:
- The project proponents will prepare the EIA report based on the
requirements of the EIA study brief issued by DEP and the TM on EIA
process.
- When in the opinion of the DEP the EIA report has meet the above
requirements, the project proponents should advertise the availability of the
EIA report for public consultation.
- The public can comment on the report within 30 days6 and the ACE may
give its comment within 60 days
Approval of EIA report:

- The EIA report would be assessed by DEP according to the TM on EIA
process.
- Amendments may be required after the inspection period.
- If such amendments do not affect the validity of the assessment7 and the
5
Can a Project Profile be banned?
6
30-day inspection (consultation?) period appears too short for the general public to scrutinize the EIA report!
7
Who judge? DEP? Any involvement of ACE?
11
overall results and conclusions of the report, the DEP may approve the
report with conditions.
- Such approval should be issued within 30 days of the expiry of the public
inspection period8.
Application of EP:
- Upon the approval of the EIA report of a designated project under Schedule
2 of the EIAO, the project proponent may apply for an EP9.
- The DEP should grant/refuse an EP and determine the conditions to be
specified in the EP based on the conditions of the approved EIA report10
and the TM11.
12. What are your views on EIAO?

Ordinance for sustainable development:
- The introduction of the EIAO in 1998 reconciles the environmental and
socioeconomic considerations with respect to development and other
proposed actions.
- The ordinance requires the project proponent to carry out an EIA study to
assess the potential environmental impacts which will bring about by the
proposed projects and to suggest possible mitigation measures. Monitoring
and auditing programme will be implemented during the construction stage.
- Among all, the most important component of statutory EIA process is its
involvement of public consultation process.
Case of Lok Ma Chau Spur Line:

- The rejection of EIA report by DEP for the Lok Ma Chau Spur Line project
in 2000 revealed that the EPD guidance on the EIA process is too vague
and that there appears lacking in communication between the project
proponent and the authority.
- Under the EIAO, the EIA report should not be “rejected” by the EPD as it
should only be advertised for public’s scrutiny only when in the opinion of
the DEP the EIA report has meet the specified requirements.
- The requirements of EIAO appears to too rigid and the authority appears
lacking flexibility in implementing the ordinance.
- A separate ordinance on environmental conservation should be formulated
8
In case DEP refuse to approve the EIA report, the proponent may lodge an appeal to the EIA Appeal Board. Can public do so?
9
Any time limitation for the application of an EP? Or the EIA report has expiry time?
10
It appears that no further public consultation after the approval of EIA report and before issue of EP!
11
How come DEP refuse to grant an EP despite the approval of EIA report? Is the EIA report expired?
12
in order to make clear the location of the conservation sites.
Quality of EIA reports:

- Quality of EIA reports is also questionable.
- The reports are mainly prepared by the project consultants, the
involvement of our stakeholders are not included. Involvement of green
groups and other concern parties should be promoted in the preparation of
EIA reports so as to properly address the public’s concern and to eliminate
the subsequent objections.
- In addition, the independence of the EIA report is also questionable since
the EIA report is prepared by the consultant to primarily satisfy the
requirements of the project proponents.
Role of EPD:
- The role of EPD appears ambiguity. EPD has taken up the conflicting role
of being the EIAO administrator and the advisor for many government
departments.
Dispute resolution:
- As for the EIA process, there is no provision in EIAO for direct dialogue
between the project proponents and the opponents should dispute arises.
13. What happen to Sheung Shui to Lok Ma Chau Spur Line project?
Project background:
- The government commissioned KCRC to construct a new railway line
linking the existing East Rail system from Sheung Shui Station to a new
border crossing into the Mainland at Lok Ma Chau (the Spur Line) to relieve
the congestion at the present East Rail crossing to the Mainland at Lo Wu.
- A new three-storey station building with departure and arrival halls will have
a doubl-deck footbridge across the Shenzhen River to link with a new
Huanggang metro station on the Mainland side.
- The proposal is to build a double-track line at grade, on embankment,
through a cutting and on viaducts.
EIA process:
- In 23.12.1998, KCRC submitted to the Director a Project Profile with an
application for a study brief under section 5(1)(a) of the EAIO. The Project
Profile included information about the project, how and when it was to be
13
implemented together with its broad environmental implications.

- As required by section 5(2)(c), the Project Profile was advertised and the
Advisory Council on the Environment (ACE) was informed.
- The Direction of Environmental Protection (DEP) considered the comments
received from ACE and the public and finally provided the EIA Study Brief
to the KCRC on 10.2.1999 so that KCRC could undertake an
environmental impact assessment study.
- On 28.1.2000, KCRC submitted a report to DEP but the Director indicated
he wanted alternative alignments to be further investigated. After further
study, KCRC submitted the EIA report on 27.4.2000 for DEP’s approval.
- On 12.6.2000, DEP decided under section 6(3) that the report met the
requirements of the study brief and the TM and that it should be exhibited
for public inspection.
- In the public consultation period, DEP received 225 submissions from the
public each of which opposed the project.
- On 7.8.2000, ACE provided its comments to DEP.
- Having considered the comments from the public and ACE, and the
subsequent response from KCRC, DEP rejected the Report and refused to
grant a permit on 16.10.2000.
Reasons for rejection:

- The high ecological value and high diversity of birds in the area will be
affected by the project.
- The high direct environmental impact during the construction stage and the
likely residual impact from the lengthy construction phase having regard to
proposed mitigation measures which were unlikely to be effective or
practicable.
- In the light of comments from the public and ACE, the KCRC has not
proved the absence of other practicable and reasonable alternatives.
- The environmental impacts were likely to be prejudicial to the well-being of
the flora, fauna or ecosystem in the area affected.
Judgement of EIA Appeal Board:

- The KCRC appealed under section 17(1)(c)(v) of the EIAO as a person
aggrieved against two decisions of the DEP. In the first decision, the DEP
rejected the KCRC’s EIA report, and by his second decision, he rejected
the associated application for an environmental permit.
- Both appeals must be dismissed by the Board.
14
Re-submission:
- The KCRC put forward an alternative development scheme, which was
endorsed by the Hong Kong government at the end of 2001.
- The EIA report for the alternative development scheme was approved by
DEP with conditions on 11.3.2002.
- The alternative scheme will involve the construction of four kilometers of
tunnel with estimated additional costs around $2 billion in order to avoid the
ecological sensitive wetlands at Long Valley.
Lesson learnt:
- To prepare the Project Profile carefully
- To consult EPD on project issues and technical requirements as may be
appropriate.
- To ensure that the proposed environmental mitigation and design measures,
both on or off site, are analyzed as part of the EIA study and incorporated
into the EIA report.
- To ensure that all alternative means of achieving the purpose of the project
are explored and all practical attempts to avoid ecologically and
environmentally sensitive areas are made.
14. What is a Project Profile?

Purpose of a Project Profile:
- The first step to apply an EP
- To enable DEP to determine:-
- the scope of the environmental issues associated with a designated
project which shall be addressed in the EIA study;
- the technical and procedural requirements that the EIA Study shall
meet; and
- whether the applicant can proceed directly to apply for an EP
Contents of a Project Profile:

- Basic information of the project
- Outline of planning and implementation programme
- Possible impact on the environment
- Major elements of the surrounding environment
- Environmental protection measures to be incorporated in the design and
any further environmental implications
15
15. What is contained in an EIA study brief?

- Purposes and objectives of the EIA study
- Scope of environmental issues which shall be addressed
- Requirements that the EIA study shall need to fulfill
- Necessary procedural and reporting requirements
16. What should be contained in an EIA report?

General requirements:
- The contents of an EIA report shall fully meet the purposes and objectives
set out in the EIA study brief issued by DEP, and shall adequately address
all the issues set out in the EIA study brief.
Typical contents of an EIA report:

- Description of the project
- Environmental legislation, policies, plans, standards and criteria
- Description of the environment
- Description of assessment methodologies
- Identification of environmental impacts
- Prediction and evaluation of environmental impacts
- Mitigation of adverse environmental impacts
- Definition and evaluation of residual environmental impacts
- Environmental monitoring and audit
- Conclusions and recommendations
17. Can we apply directly for an EP?

Circumstances under which an EP can be applied directly:
- The project has been adequately assessed in an EIA report already placed
on the Register and the findings are still relevant
- The material changes to the exempted projects can meet the requirements
of the TM.
- The impact of the designated project is unlikely to be adverse and the
mitigation measures described in the project profile meet the requirements
of the TM.
Procedure of application for an EP directly:

- Similar to the application for an EIA brief which requires the submission of
a Project Profile.
16
18. What should be done if the responsibility of designated project changed?

- In case the responsibility of a designated project for which an EP has been
issued change, the person who takes up the responsibility should obtain an
EP (known as further EP).
- The DEP should issue the further EP if there is no material change to the
designated project covered by the issued EP within 30 days of the receipt
of the application.
19. What should be done if there is a need for variation of conditions of an

EP?
- The permit holder may apply for a variation of an EP if there is a need.
- A variation of the EP would be issued if in the opinion of the DEP there is
no need for an EIA report, if there is no material changes to the
environmental impacts of the project, within 30 days of the receipt of the
application.
- Nevertheless, an EIA report may be required if necessary.
20. Can we separate a “designated project” into contiguous projects?

- It has been stated in the EIAO that it is an offence to separate an originally
“designated project” to avoid the purposes of the Ordinance.
- If there is a genuine need to separate a designated project, application
should be served to the DEP for confirmation.
21. What is the Environmental Study Management Group (ESMG)?

- ESMG is not a mandatory requirement
- Upon the request of the applicant, the ESMG meetings should be
convened by the DEP during the EIA study for which relevant authorities
within the Government may be invited to attend.
- The discussions and liaisons at the meeting should be considered as an
administrative and advisory basis only which should not in any cases
absorb the responsibilities of the applicant.
22. Under what situations would it be considered as an offence to the EIAO

and what are the corresponding penalties?
Offences to the EIAO:
- A person who construct, operate and decommission a project without an
EP or contrary to the EP conditions is considered as committing an offence.
17
(Contractor)
- A person for whom the project is constructed, operated and
decommissioned and who permits the carrying out the projects without an
EP or contrary to the EP conditions is also liable subject to a due diligence
defence. (Client)
- It is also an offence for a person to separate contiguous projects.
Penalties for an offence:

- First offence – max. fine of $2M and imprisonment of 6 months
- Second offence – max. fine of $5M and imprisonment of 2 years
- Continuing offence – max. fine of $10,000 per day
- There are provisions in the EIAO that the DEP may issue orders to require
remedial works to be undertaken, to take direct action, and to recover cost
from those who are liable.
23. Can the applicant appeal to the decision made by DEP?

- The applicant12 may appeal by making a notice to the (EIA) Appeal Board
within 30 days of the receipt of the notice of the decision.
- The Appeal Board should be chaired by a District Judge, which may make
any alteration to the decisions made by DEP.
- The contents of the TM would not be called into question in an appeal.
24. Who would be the permit holder in public works contract?

- In public works project, the proponent department would be the permit
holder.
- It is also stated in the Particular Specification of the Contract that it is
unnecessary for the Contractor to apply for and hold an EP.
25. How to carry out environmental monitoring and audit during construction?
Before commencement of construction:
- An Environmental Management Team (the Team) shall be established
during construction stage, which shall not be an associated body of the
Contractor. (Employed by the Employer in the new contracts to ensure its
independence)
- The Team shall be led by a Environmental Manager (EM)
- The EM shall be responsible for the implementation of the environmental
monitoring and audit (EM&A) programme.
12
No provision in EIAO for the “appeal” made by the public!
18
- The Engineer shall be responsible for ensuring the incorporation and

implementation of mitigation measures recommended in the EIA report.
- Baseline monitoring on noise, air quality and water quality shall be
conducted at specified13 locations.
Environmental Monitoring and Audit (EM&A):

- The EM&A programme should be implemented as set out in the EM&A
manual of the EIA report.
- Samples and measurements for noise, air quality and water quality shall be
taken during the construction of the project.
- Baseline monitoring shall be conducted before the commencement of the
project
- Impact monitoring shall be conducted during the construction of the project.
- In case the specified criteria in the EM&A manual are exceeded, remedial
actions shall be carried out in accordance with the Event and Action Plan,
as set out in the EM&A manual.
- The monitoring records shall be included in the EM&A reports
- The Independent Environmental Checker (IEC) shall be employed by the
Employer who shall be empowered to audit the environmental performance
of construction
Environmental quality performance limits:

- Trigger level:-
- to provide an early warning of deteriorating environmental quality that
may exceed the action level.
- Action level:-
- the level beyond which there is an indication of a deteriorating ambient
environmental quality.
- appropriate remedial actions may be necessary to prevent the quality
from going beyond the limit level, which would be unacceptable.
- Limit level:-
- the level stipulated in relevant pollution control ordinances, the TM or
other standards.
- the level beyond which the works shall not proceed without
appropriate remedial action, including a critical review of plant and
work methods.
13
Who specify?
19
26. What are the duties of the Environmental Management Team?
27. What are the duties of the Independent Environment Checker?
28. Any environmental monitoring and mitigation measures required for

projects which do not require EIA reports?
29. What legislations in relating to the environmental should a Permit Holder

to observe?
- Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance (Cap. 499)
- Noise Control Ordinance (Cap. 400)
- Air Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap. 311)
- Water Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap. 358)
- Dumping at Sea Ordinance (Cap. 466)
- Waste Disposal Ordinance (Cap. 354)
30. As an engineer, how can you ensure that the designs are aesthetically
pleasing apart from at the same time satisfying the functional
requirements?
Structural form:
- The form of a structure is an essential factor of aesthetic.
- It must satisfy the users’ need, structurally safe, appropriate to the function
and situation of the structure.
- Failure to design an appropriate form may loose the public’s appreciation,
confuse the users and even reduce the practical value of the structure14.
Proportion:
- Proportion is defined as the scheme of dimensionless ratios that will
produce a desirable form or assembly of forms.
- Good proportion shall present a stable and simple appearance.
- A poorly proportioned structure leads to suggestions of structural deficiency,
imbalance or lack of stability15.
Harmonize with surroundings:

- A structure looks well if it can maintain harmony with the surrounding.
- There must be no discordant features and the form, rhythm and colour of
14
Bad example: a residential block in the form of a commercial building.
15
Bad example: a short span bridge with large structural depth will create an non-preferable bulky look.
20
the structure shall blend in the positive way with corresponding important
characteristics in the surroundings.
- Application of appropriate colours and avoid constructing a massive and
bulky structure to avoid visual intrusiveness can enhance the visual
qualities of the finished structure.
Long term appearance:

- Attractive structures shall remain during their lives.
- This can be achieved by using durable materials, suitable surface texture
and sensible detailing.
31. As an engineer, how can you ensure that the designs are environmentally
friendly apart from at the same time satisfying the functional
requirements?
Planning and feasibility study:
- For each alternative scheme, the environmental disturbances caused
should be examined and the cost assessed.
- Where necessary, environmental impact assessment (EIA) should be
carried out with the help of other professions.
- The final decision should not rely on cost only, but should also depend on a
number of factors including environmental effects both during construction
and in operation.
Design stage:
- The engineer should pay due regard to the construction method and
sequence of operation to reduce the short-term irritation to the local
environment.
- The engineer should also specify the necessities of maintaining
conservation and aesthetics of the surrounding.
- In drafting the contract documents, the engineer should lay down
specifications to cope with the environmental limitations so the procedures
and obligations of the contractor can be governed.
- Sometimes, proper publicity of the project during the design and
construction stage can promote the value and image of a project making
the community more willing to tolerate environmental disadvantages.
- Close liaison and good public relationship should be maintained among
various parties of the contract and the local residents.
21
Construction stage:
- The engineer should ensure that the specifications are strictly followed.
- The obligations of the contractor are fulfilled.
- The designer’s intentions are viable and practical.
- The unforeseen problems and hazards are properly deal with.
- The most environmentally sensitive areas should be identified and the
subsequent protective measures should be carried out in advance.
- Frequent meetings with the local authorities and residents should be
convened to allow them to understand the extent of environmental impacts.
- For the areas being polluted, the engineer should investigate the possible
cause of pollution and carry out the proper remedial ways to minimize the
conflict.
- The engineer should closely monitor the performance of the contractor
regarding the environmental measures. He should be ready to enforce the
contractual specifications and provisions to avoid unnecessary disturbance
to the public.
22
Topic: Site Safety
Topic: Site Safety
1. What is the significance of construction safety?

- Construction industry is a labour-intensive industry and is the source of the
largest number of industrial accidents.
- The occurrence of accidents associated with civil engineering works would
result in injuries, fatality and tremendous economic loss.
- Cost of accidents include compensation to workers, disruption of works
progress, damage of permanent works and plants, extra administration
time and cost, and higher insurance premium.
- Poor construction safety record could ruin the international image of Hong
Kong.
- Good safety working conditions can enhance the effectiveness and
efficiency of the work, as well as uplift the morale of the workers.
- As regards, the government takes a leading role to improve and promote
site safety by legislation and organizing safety promotion activities, and for
public works contracts, giving due considerations on safety in various
stages of the projects and incorporating contractual provisions in the
contracts.
- The success of site safety is attributed to the cooperation among the
employer, his professional advisors, the contractor and the frontline
workforce.
[The accident rates for Public Works Contract has dropped from 71.1 reportable
accidents per thousand workers per year in 1994 to 23.4 in year 2002, which is
far below the government’s target: 55]
2. Why the accident rate in construction industry is high?

Adverse working environment:
- Construction works inherently involve working in adverse conditions such
as congested working environment, confined space, underground,
underwater, using complicated and heavy machinery, working at
considerable heights, etc.
Safety culture in Hong Kong:

- In most construction projects, the employer has only limited resources both
in time and cost.
- Inadequate design considerations on safety aspects are provided in the
1
Topic: Site Safety
planning and design stages.

- Current tendering strategy renders the tenderers to cut corners to reduce
cost on provisions of site safety measures.
- Jobs are often carried out in unplanned manners.
- Workers’ awareness on site safety and health is low.
3. What are the policy and objectives of the Government in respect of site
safety?
Policy:
- To accomplish public works safely, efficiently and with due regard for the
environment.
- Safety considerations would be given in planning, design and construction
stages.
Objectives:
- Every PWP contract should aim at zero fatal accidents and zero dangerous
occurrences.
- Every PWP contract should aim at an accident frequency rate of less than
1.0 reportable accident per 100,000 man-hours worked1.
4. How can the Government achieve the objectives?

For whole construction industry:
- To secure the commitment of all parties involved by legislation (F&IUO,
OSHO, etc)
- To strengthen the effort in enforcing the statutory regulations and raise the
associated penalties
- To promote construction safety and health through various channels
- To provide advice to engineers and contractors on the safety requirements
in the design and the safety management system in construction site.
For public works:

- To incorporate contractual provisions requiring the contractor to provide a
safe and healthy environment (Safety Plan, PFSS, ISAS, SSC, etc)
- To select contractors who give proper consideration to construction safety.
- To arrange safety management training for site supervisory staff.
- To establish Site Safety Management Committee (SSMC) to monitor the
implementation of safety plans and other contractual obligations.
1
Why 100,000 man-hours?
2
Topic: Site Safety
- To build up a database for dangerous occurrences and accidents for

monitoring, analysis and formulation of measures on accidents prevention
- To review and update the PWP Construction Site Safety Manual to assist
works departments in the administration of construction safety matters for
PWP contracts.
5. What legislations you have come across in relation to construction

safety?
Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance (F&IUO) and its subsidiary
Regulations:
- It empowers the Commissioner for Labour to make and amend safety
regulations.
- This Ordinance does not bind the Government.
- Section 6A – Duties of the proprietor (i.e. the Contractor / Sub-contractor)
- Section 6B – Duties of individual employees
- The Labour Department is responsible for the enforcement of safety
legislation.
- The regulations cover the construction at underground and confined space,
works relating to excavation and scaffolding, lifting appliances and lifting
gear, electricity, noise at work, the requirements for safety officers and
safety supervisors, etc.
Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance (OSHO) and its subsidiary

Regulations:
- It extends the protection of safety and health under the F&IUO and its
subsidiary regulations to the non-industrial sector.
- It also binds the Government.
- Section 6 – Responsibilities of employers.
- Section 7 – Responsibilities of premise occupiers.
- Section 8 – Responsibilities of employers.
- Section 9-12 – Empower the Commissioner for Labour to issue
Improvement Notice and Suspension Notice to the employer or the
occupier concerned to take remedial actions or stop immediately any
activity at a workplace with an imminent risk of death or serious bodily
injury.
- Section 13 and 14 – Person responsible for workplace to report accidents
and dangerous occurrence.
3
Topic: Site Safety
Other relevant ordinances:

- Dangerous Goods Ordinance, Electricity Ordinance, Waste Disposal
Ordinance, Shipping and Port Control Ordinance, etc…
Enforcement of the Ordinance and Subsidiary Regulations:

- The Labour Department is responsible for the enforcement of safety
legislation on construction sites. Whereas the Marine Department is
responsible for marine construction safety matters.
6. What are the general duties of proprietors and employees on site safety
under lawful requirements?
Duties of proprietors (contractors/sub-contractors):
- To provide safe plant and maintain it in good condition
- To ensure safety use, handling, storage and transport of any substances
- To provide necessary information, instruction, training and supervision to
their employees
- To maintain the working areas and the access to such in safe condition
- To maintain the working environment in safe condition
Duties of employees:
- Every employee must be responsible for the safety and health of their own
and other. He should ensure that his acts or omissions at work will not put
the safety and health of himself or others at risk.
- They should understand the hazards in their workplace, and should follow
necessary safety rules and procedures.
7. What contractual provisions on construction safety are included in the

Contract?
Safety Plan:
- For works contract with estimated contract sums of $20M or above2.
- It sets out the details of the Contractor’s safety management system.
Provision of Safety Officer:

- Employment of full-time Safety Officer (SO) in works contracts in
accordance with the total no. of workers employed on the Works would be
specified in appropriate PS Clause
- At least 1 full-time SO to be provided for contracts with no. of worker
2
Contracts with contract sum less than $20M do not require Safety Plan.
4
Topic: Site Safety
exceeding 50 in lieu of 100 as required under the F&IU (SO & SS)
Regulations3.
- In the event that the total no. of workers is less than 50, only a part-time SO
is to be employed.
Pay for Safety Scheme (PFSS):

- All works contracts where Safety Plans are required shall be included in the
(PFSS). (i.e. contract sum exceeds $20M)
- Contracts with duration of 12 months or less shall not be included in
PFSS4.
Independent Safety Audit Scheme (ISAS):

- Contracts included in PFSS may be selected for inclusion in the ISAS
- Contracts selected should be with duration more than 12 months.
- (WBTC No. 5/96 and 32/99 refers)
[SCT, SCC, PS and Methods of Measurement associated with the above

requirements should be incorporated in the Contract documents.]
8. What is the role of employer in construction site safety?

Leading role:
- The employer initiates and finances a project. His keen support on the
attainment of construction safety will have a positive effect on other
participants in the project.
- He should accord high priority to safety and direct his professional advisors
towards the importance of it.
- He should also insist to provide a clear definition of liability for safety in the
contract documents so as to give all parties concerned of their
responsibilities.
- He should check that adequate insurance has been obtained to cover the
site staff and the third party prior to the commencement of the contract.
Financial motivation:
- Some employers tend to cut back budgets on safety provision but it usually
results in a higher accident rate which will incur additional cost in
compensation and remedial works, and hence the delay to overall works
3
More stringent requirements in PWP.
4
Why contracts with contract period less than 12 months do not require PPFS? How about contracts with contract sum more
than S20M and thus require Safety Plan but with contract period less than 12 months? It seems have contradiction!
5
Topic: Site Safety
progress.
- The employer should realize that expenses on site safety measures are
essential, and provide financial incentive in the project such as establishing
the monetary fund/award for site safety.
Time frame for construction:

- The employer should allow adequate time for construction.
- It is very often that if the programme is unreasonably tight, many safety
aspects of the works will be overlooked.
9. What is the role of design engineer in construction site safety?

General duty:
- The engineer should identify the potential area of hazards and make
appropriate provisions in the design and contract documents.
Design methods:
- The structure should be designed in accordance with well-established
design codes which are applicable to local situations so as to sustain the
expected loads and deformation during construction with appropriate safety
margin.
- Additional requirements form the employer towards safety aspects should
be incorporated in the design.
- Designer should collect the information concerning the site conditions and
then sketch out essential construction details/constraints/limitations, etc.
- Designer should realize the importance of the presentation of his design
calculations and the drawings. Design ideas normally need to be
communicated for construction, and confusion must be minimized so as to
avoid costly or dangerous errors due to misunderstanding.
- Designer should seek comments and carry out cross checking to avoid
careless mistakes
Site investigation:
- Designer should collect the information concerning the site conditions and
then sketch out essential construction details/constraints/limitations, etc.
Choice of alternatives:
- All alternatives should be considered and the option adopted should have
6
Topic: Site Safety
low risk in safety aspects during construction.
Land acquisition:
- Sufficient land spaces should be obtained to allow sufficient works for
working and material stockpiling.
Contract documents:
- The design engineer should incorporate appropriate provisions in the works
contracts.
- The engineer may impose limitations on the sequence of works and draw
contractor’s attention towards the potentially dangerous operation.
- Clauses related to the use of safety equipment and the adoption of safety
working methods can be included.
- BQ items pertaining to the improvement of site safety should be
incorporated to provide an incentive for the contractor to implement safety
measures, as he knows that the expenditure can be recovered in the
payment.
- In some cases, the tenderers would be required to submit with their tenders
a copy of method statements or temporary works design for evaluation. In
the pre-tender meeting, the engineer should brief the tenderers the safety
requirements of the contract so that they could take these into account
when pricing the tenders.
- Where necessary, the engineer may include safety as one of the criteria in
the pre-qualification exercise for large civil engineering project.
10. What is the role of design engineer in safety during service period and
subsequent decommissioning?
General duty:
The engineer should identify the potential area of hazards and make
appropriate.
Structurally safe:
- The structure should be designed in accordance with well-established
design codes so as to sustain the expected loads and deformation during
construction, service and demolition with sufficient safety margins.
Operationally safe:
- The safety requirements for operation and maintenance must be
7
Topic: Site Safety
considered in the design of the general arrangement of the structure.

- Designer should circulate the relevant information to concerned parties for
their valuable comments, and incorporate them in the design accordingly.
- The safety requirements for routine operation and maintenance include
provision of access manholes, access ladders, staircases, lifting beams,
drain pipes, handrails, safety chain, etc.
- A detailed operation and maintenance manual should be prepared for the
permanent structures.
Decommissioning:
- Consideration should also be paid for decommissioning of the structures.
- For structures which involve complicated structural arrangements and
adopted prestressed concrete technique, decommissioning of such will
inevitably involve a considerable amount of risks.
- An outlined demolition manual should be prepared in which the safe
demolition procedures are detailed and the contractor’s attention.
- He should also ensure that the as-built drawings are prepared by the site
staff and should keep such record properly for future retrieval.
11. What is the role of resident engineer in construction site safety?

RE’s duties:
- The resident engineer (RE) is appointed by the employer, and is
responsible to him to ensure the works are executed in accordance with
the provisions of the contract.
- RE takes a role to ensure the contractor has taken necessary measures in
all site operations in order to safeguard the employer’s interests.
- He owes a duty of care to all site personnel and the public at large.
- RE helps to promote site safety on site and assist in coordinating different
parties on site.
Commencement of contract:
- RE should make sure that the contractor has procured an insurance policy
with respect to the their employees and the third party.
- RE should ensure the contractor has submitted the statement of the safety
management system (or safety plan).
- Risk assessments should be carried out for all site operations, and
precautionary measures should be suggested.
- RE should check that the site agent is competent to discharge his duty on
8
Topic: Site Safety
site.
- He should ensure that a Safety Officer ahs been employed on site before
allowing the construction works to be commenced.
Temporary works design:

- According to the past experience, the majority of accidents happen on site
are related to the failure of temporary works.
- Although the contractor is the designer of the temporary works, the
engineer is responsible for examining whether it is properly designed and
safe to avoid damage to the permanent works, hazard to site personnel
and the public.
- He should check thoroughly the contractor’s method statements and
design calculations.
- During erection of such temporary works, RE should ensure that the works
are constructed in accordance with the approved design.
Site staff training:

- RE is responsible to secure the commitment of their staff in ensuring site
safety.
- Training should be provided for the site supervisory staff so as to equip
them with sufficient knowledge in site safety aspects.
Site safety inspections:

- Site safety inspection should be carried out regularly to identify any unsafe
acts on site.
- Any unsafe practice identified should be made known to the site agent and
safety officer.
- Warning letters should be issued for serious incidents and repeated
non-compliance. He may also report the situation to the authority for their
necessary action.
- Under critical circumstances, a RE should exercise his power to suspend
the works until any unsafe practices are rectified.
- He may also issue an order to remove individuals off site if such actions are
warranted to ensure safety.
Site safety management:

- The RE should ensure the participation of contractor’s managerial staff in
site safety issues.
9
Topic: Site Safety
- He should check site safety coordination meetings are arranged regularly

between the main contractor and his sub-contractors.
Report of accidents:
- RE should prepare accident reports for serious and fatal accidents and
consider implementing measures to prevent recurrence.
- To compile site accident statistics and report contractors’ construction site
safety performance
12. What is the role of contractor in construction site safety?

General liability:
- It is the general liability of contractor under the works contract to comply
with all statutory and contractual requirements on construction safety and
ensure the safety of all personnel working on the site and the public
adjacent to the site.
- Contractor plays a significant role in preventing site accidents through good
planning of the construction works and site management.
Site safety management:

- The contractor is required to prepare and submit statements on their
policies relating to construction safety.
- He should establish a platform to deliver the message on site safety to the
lower hierarchy such as sub-contractor and the workers.
- Safety Officer and Safety Supervisors should be employed to regulate the
site safety practice. Adequate safety inspections will be carried out.
- He should procure an insurance policy with respect to the their employees
and the third party.
Programming of works:
- The contractor should plan the works programme carefully and realistically
to ensure the works are arranged in a smooth path.
- Both an over-realistic programme and a poorly prepared programme might
result in progress delay and hence the workforce will be overloaded with
extra work in order to recap the progress.
Construction methods:
- In most cases, a large degree of freedom is given to the contractor under
the contract on the choice of construction methods.
10
Topic: Site Safety
- The contractor should not simply look for cheapest construction method by
sacrificing the safety and health of the site personnel.
- Risk assessments should be carried out on all site operations.
Precautionary measures should be suggested.
Safety promotion and training:

- The contractor should also provide appropriate safety promotion and
training to their site staff.
Report of site accident and rectification of unsafe practice:

- The contractor is responsible to report and investigate dangerous
occurrences and accidents.
- He should also take prompt remedial actions to rectify any defects
identified in safety inspections, Inspection Report, Improvement Notices
and Suspension Notices issued by LD.
13. What is the role of workers in construction site safety?

General liability:
- Every employee must be responsible for the safety and health of their own
and other. He should ensure that his acts or omissions at work will not put
the safety and health of himself or others at risk.
Misconception of workers in general:

- Despite the fact that workers are usually the victims of accidents on
construction sites, they have always displayed an apathetic attitude
towards site safety.
- They always have a misconception that they are experienced enough to
avoid accidents.
Safety practice of workers:

- As a good practice, workers should consult to their supervisors on
potentially dangerous areas on construction site and working methods.
- They should keep the working places tidy and clean in order to minimize
the occurrence of accidents.
- They should not operate any plant or equipment which they are not familiar
with.
- They must use personal protective equipment provided for them such as
safety helmets and safety belts.
11
Topic: Site Safety
14. What is the significance of safety training?

General:
- Safety training is important to all persons involved in construction work so
that they can possess adequate safety knowledge and have a high degree
of safety awareness. These benefit themselves in giving due safety
considerations in planning and design stages of the projects, identifying
and avoiding unsafe acts/conditions, and asking for rectification.
For the Contractor:

- It is the general duties of the Contractor under the law (FIUO & OSHO) to
provide such training to all persons employed by them on sites.
- The Contractor should ensure that their staff have completed the “Labour
Department Recognised Green Card (LDRGC or Green Card)” which is the
mandatory requirement under FIUO.
- The skilled workers of specified trade under the Contract should have
attended the relevant “Trade Specific Advanced Safety Training Course for
Construction Workers (Silver Card Course)”.
- “Site specific induction training” should be carried out within two working
days of any such employee commencing working on the site. Such training
should be delivered by SO in an approved format. Refresher should be
carried out at intervals of 6 months depending on the amount of changes to
the site condition.
- “Tool box talks” should be provided at a frequency of one talk per worker
every two weeks. The Contractor must ensure that the topic of every talk
given to a worker is relevant to his trade and the works that he will perform,
and a worker shall attend no more than one talk on the same topic in any
two-month period.
For the Engineer:

- It is important that the Engineer’s site staff familiarize themselves with
safety requirements and safe working methods before they are discharging
their duties in site supervisory with regard to construction safety.
- Adequate safety training and continuing safety education should be
provided.
- Professional staff and inspectorate staff should take the safety
management training whereas the site supervisory staff should take the
course for site safety supervisor.
12
Topic: Site Safety
15. What are the functions of SSMC?

- To monitor the adequacy and implementation of the Safety Plan.
- To review accident statistics and identify probable causes of accidents so
as to recommend preventive measures.
- To promote safety publicity and training.
- To conduct safety inspection.
- To review and monitor follow up actions against unsafe practices and
conditions identified.
- To study safety audit reports, if any, received and review action plan
prepared by the Contractor.
[The composition of SSMC should include the Engineer or his representatives

and the Contractor’s representatives at senior management, site agent, safety
offices and safety supervisors]
16. What are the functions of SSC?

- To enhance the safety management of the contractors and sub-contractors
- To increase the involvement and commitment of their employees
- To ensure the proper implementation of the Safety Plan
- To review and monitor the effectiveness of safety measures and
recommend improvement
- To discuss hazards associated with site operations and necessary safety
precautions
- To coordinate interface safety measures of all sub-contractors, utility
undertakers, etc.
- To review the accident statistics and recommend preventive measures
- To provide a forum for management level and working level to discuss
construction safety matters
- To study safety audit reports, if any, received and review action plan
[SSC is chaired by the site agent and includes contractor’s representatives at

senior management level, Safety Officer, Safety Supervisor, Safety
Representatives and the Engineer’s representatives]
17. What are the responsibilities of a Safety Officer and a Safety Supervisor?
Statutory requirements:
- It is under FIUR that one registered Safety Officer should be employed in
13
Topic: Site Safety
construction site on full time basis when the total number of persons 5
employed is more than 100.
- In addition, one Safety Supervisor should be employed in construction site
when the total number of persons employed is more than 20. He should not
be required to carry out other work.
Contractual requirements:
- One part-time SO if total persons working on site is less than 50.
- One full time SO should be employed if the total number of persons
employed exceeds 50, more stringent than statutory requirements.
- More SO should be employed if the total number of persons employed
more than 200.
- Each SO can serve no more than three contracts on part-time basis
concurrently.
- No construction can be commenced without the appointment of the
required number of SO.
- At least one SS should be employed on site no matter how many persons
are working on site.
- The number of SS should be increased by one for every additional 50
workers.
- Each sub-contractor of the first tier engaging 20 persons should employ at
least one SS.
- The foreman or ganger of each labour team should be appointed by the
Contractor as the Safety Representatives.
Duties of Safety Officer:

- To advise the contractor safety measures to be taken
- To inspect the work place to identify potential hazards and reporting the
findings with recommendations for contractor’s rectification
- To investigate accidents and dangerous occurrences with
recommendations
- To advise the Contractor of any remedial works to be carried out in the
interest of safety and health
- To assist in the supervision of Safety Supervisor
- To prepare and submit monthly safety reports to the contractor
- To supervise and monitor the implementation of the Safety Plan
- To ensure all persons working on site are comply with the Safety Plan
5
Persons, not workers, so the managerial staff should be counted.
14
Topic: Site Safety
- To maintain a safety diary

- To carry out weekly site inspection with the Engineer
- To investigate prepare detailed reports on dangerous occurrences and
serious accidents
- To prepare training programme and maintain training records
- To coordinate with sub-contractors/other contractors on preparation of
specific method statements including risk assessments
- To keep and maintain a record of all examination and test certificates
- To prepare monthly safety reports for consideration at SSMC meeting
- To attend meetings of SSC and SSMC
- To carry out internal safety audits
Duties of Safety Supervisor:

- To assist the SO in carrying out his duties
- To supervise the observance by the workers of the safety standards
- To advise the Contractor or the SO as to the observance by the workers
- To promote safe execution of work in the construction site
- To prepare and submit weekly safety reports to the Contractor or SO
- To carry out safety inspections at least daily and complete checklist
- To attend meetings of SSC and SSMC
- To conduct tool box talks if he has completed courses on safety training
techniques
Duties of Safety Representative:

- To ensure the directives on safety and health matters from the Contractor,
SO and SS are duly carried out
- To ensure safety practices are adopted by the workers
- To ensure the use of personal protective clothing and equipment by the
workers at all time
18. What should be done if an unsafe practice is identified in a safety

inspection?
- All unsafe practices or conditions identified must be drawn to the
Contractor’s Safety Officer or Site Agent as soon as possible
- Such matters should be duly recorded in the site diary and the Contractor
is required to rectify the unsafe condition in good time.
- Payment for weekly safety walk should only be made after the Contractor
has completed all the follow-up actions within the agreed completion dates.
15
Topic: Site Safety
- If the unsafe practice persists after repeated notifications, the Engineer

should report the matter to the Labour Department for their immediate
action
- If such unsafe practice possesses a definite risk to life, the Engineer should
instruct the Contractor to suspend the relevant part of the Works.
- Such non-compliance should be duly reflected in the Quarterly Report on
Contractor’s Performance and appropriate regulating action should be
carried out if necessary.
19. What should be done if an accident or dangerous occurrence occurs on

the site?
Definitions of accidents and dangerous occurrences:
- Accidents are in connection with casualty which involve death, serious
bodily injury or incapacity of person.
- Dangerous occurrences are defined as bursting of mechanical equipment,
collapse of lifting appliances, explosion or fire causing structural damage,
electricity short circuit, collapse of structure, overturning of machinery, etc.
Report of accidents or dangerous occurrences:

- The Contractor should call 999 immediately.
- The Contractor must report to the Engineer of any accident or dangerous
occurrence immediately.
- In case an accident occurs involving death or serious bodily injury or
dangerous occurrence, the Contractor should notify the Labour Department
within 24 hours.
- The Contractor must report to the Labour Department for any incapacity for
more than 3 days within 14 days on a Form 2 as in F&IUR.
- The Contractor must deliver a written preliminary report to the Engineer
within 24 hours.
- The Contractor must report all fatal accidents within 24 hours to the police
station.
- The Contractor must report to the Labour Department for any incapacity for
more than 3 days within 14 days on a Form 2 as in F&IUR.
Report of notifiable accidents:

- If an accident is classified as a notifiable accidents, the Engineer should
report the accident within 30 minutes to Departmental Safety Adviser and
the Secretariat Press Office
16
Topic: Site Safety
- The Engineer should prepare a Preliminary Report to Departmental Safety

Adviser and the Secretariat Press Office within 24 hours
- The Engineer should prepare a comprehensive written report within 7
working days.
Accident investigation:
- Dangerous occurrences and accidents which result in death, serious injury
or serious damage must be investigated immediately.
- Investigation for near misses and minor accidents should be carried out as
soon as possible.
20. What should be done if an emergency event occurs on the site?

List of emergency events:
- An accident which results in death or serious injury
- A fire breaking out which requires rescue crews from FSD to effect control
- A flood that causes or threatens life on site
- Leakage of dangerous goods or chemicals
- Any other accidents/incidents which creates a dangerous situation
Contractor’s responsibility:
- The Contractor should formulate an emergency procedures and the
organization of rescue teams to deal with emergency situations.
- Drills should be arranged regularly to test the efficiency in mobilizing the
necessary personnel and equipment.
Warning of tropical cyclone:

- All hoardings, temporary structures, plant should be properly secured.
- All workers working underground should be alert.
- All drains should be cleared and the necessary flood precautions taken.
- All emergency equipment is primed, tested and ready for use
- Workers are evacuated from remote sites
- A full Emergency Gang will remain on duty throughout the tropical cyclone.
The team should take all reasonable measures to minimize the damage
resulting from collapse, flooding or other site emergencies.
- The site should be inspected after a tropical cyclone so that any damages
to scaffolds, temporary works, electrical installations, cranes etc. are
identified and made good.
17
Topic: Site Safety
21. Why is it necessary to develop PFSS?

Provision motivation to Contractor:
- Normally, construction site safety is a general obligation of the Contractor
and the Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the tender for the cost of
meeting the obligations.
- However, as the sum payable for carrying out safety measures cannot be
identified, any failure of the Contractor to implement such measures cannot
be valued easily.
- The Contractor may even “cut corner” on site safety when money is tight.
- The objective of PFSS is to remove site safety from the realm of
competitive tendering.
- Payment will continue to be made throughout the construction period even
if the Contractor is in culpable delay.
- The “Safety Audit” item is paid quarterly and is subject to the outcome of
the audit.
- The Engineer should ensure the Contractor has demonstrated compliance
with the specifications for corresponding items before certify any payment
in respect of the items in the Bill of Site Safety.
- The value of safety items should be excluded from the estimated contract
sum for the purpose of assessing Liquidated Damages.
- There should not be any reduction in safety payments for sectional
completion of the Works.
Preparation of Bills of Quantities:

- Each BQ item for site safety should be pre-priced on the basis of a total
possible payment to the Contractor of approximately 2% of the estimated
Contract Sum/total estimated expenditure, not including the Contingency
Sum or any sum for the payment of fluctuations.
- The 2% guidance is based on advice from the construction industry, and is
supported by a study carried out by HKPU.
- However, such price should be realistic even if this means exceeding the
2% guidance. This is likely to be inevitably in lower value contracts.
- The rates for provision of safety training are fixed but the quantities can be
adjusted.
22. What is Safety Plan?

Function of a Safety Plan:
- Safety Plan is a document to be prepared by the Contractor as required
18
Topic: Site Safety
under the Contract to set out the details of the safety management system
(14 key elements) that the Contractor will implement on Site, and the
measures and information required by the Contractor to ensure safety and
health in the execution of the Works.
- Safety Plan forms the basis for the Contractor’s site safety management.
- Safety Officer should be responsible for supervising and monitoring the
implementation of Safety Plan and should ensure that all persons working
on site comply with the Safety Plan.
- Site Safety Committee should be set up to enhance their safety
management of the Contractor and its sub-contractors and to ensure the
proper implementation of the Safety Plan.
- Site Safety Management Committee is established to monitor the adequacy
and implementation of the Safety Plan through the participation of the
Engineer and the Contractor’s senior managerial staff.
Contractual requirements for submission of Safety Plan:

- As specified in the Special Conditions of Tender, all tenderers must submit
with their Tenders6 an “Outlined Safety Plan” which shall contain a list of
the safety and health hazards and sufficient information to demonstrate the
tenderers’ proposals for achieving effective and efficient health and safety
procedure.
- As specified in the Special Conditions of Contract, the Contractor is
required within 14 days of the date of acceptance of the Tender submit to
the Engineer a “draft Safety Plan” which describes the potential major
hazards connected with the Site and the Works and the outlined proposals
for controlling such hazards. The Engineer may require the Contractor to
remedy the deficiency in the draft Safety Plan if he thinks so.
- According to the Special Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall review,
update and revise the Safety Plan monthly taking into account comments
made by the Engineer and any other parties, and update the risk
assessments for the work activities scheduled for the coming two months.
14 key elements of a safety management system:

- 1) Safety policy:-
- Policy statement setting out the management’s approach and
commitment to communicate, implement and maintain site safety and
health
6
Is there any consideration for the “Outlined Safety Plan” in the tender selection process?
19
Topic: Site Safety
- 2) Safety organisation:-
- Safety organisation structure and the manpower resources to
implement the management’s commitments
- Appointment of Safety Officer, Safety Supervisor and First Aider7
- 3) Safety and health training:-

- Procedures established to ensure all staff is given proper training.
- 4) Safety rules and regulations:-

- Arrangements for safety rules and regulations, both statutory and
contractual, to ensure their proper implementation and enforcement
- Arrangements for method statements and permit-to-work systems to
be implemented for high risk activities8
- 5) Safety committees:-
- Detail relating to the safety committees
- 6) Safety and health inspections:-

- Arrangements to establish procedures for identification, recording and
reporting hazardous conditions and their rectification
- Inspection of the excavation, scaffolding, abrasive wheels, confined
space, lifting appliance, electrical works, etc requires the relevant
competent person.
- 7) Job hazard analysis:-

- Arrangements for identification of potential hazards and carrying out
risk assessment for the development of safe working procedures and
method statements
- 8) Personal protective equipment:-

- Procedures for identification and selection of suitable personal
protective equipment (PPE)
- In general, PPE should include safety helmet, safety footwear, eye
protection, hearing protection, respiratory protection, safety belt,
7
In accordance with Construction Sites (Safety) Regulation, one first aider should be employed when the total number of
workers is between 30 and 100. When total number of workers exceeds 100, at least two first aiders should be provided. The first
aider may carry out other duties on site.
8
It is the responsibility of the Safety Officer to identify which areas of the Site should be included in Permit-to-Work system.
20
Topic: Site Safety
gloves and reflective jackets.
- 9) Accident/incident investigation:-
- Procedures for the prompt reporting, recording and investigation of
accidents/incidents including dangerous occurrences
- 10) Emergency preparedness:-

- Arrangements for establishment of procedures to deal with emergency
situations
- An Emergency Team should be set up
- 11) Safety promotion:-

- Methods of promoting and maintaining safety awareness and
developing a safety and health culture amongst all persons on the Site
- Bulletin board, suggestion box, promotion activities, newsletter, etc
- 12) Health assurance programme:-

- Arrangements for medical examinations of workers exposed to health
hazards
- Arrangements for identification, assessment, regular monitoring of
health hazards and the reduction of exposure through technological
and administrative control measures
- Provision of sanitary facilities
- 13) Evaluation, selection and control of sub-contractor:-

- Arrangements for the evaluation, selection and control of
sub-contractors
- 14) Process control programme:-

- Formulation of policy on the review of accident control and hazards
elimination measures during the conception and design stage, the
setting of parameters for processes and materials to take into account
of any changes in the Site conditions and the development of a
regular monitoring mechanism.
- Arrangements and means for effective implementation of accident
control and hazards elimination measures described in Safety Plan to
ensure safety and health in the execution of the work processes.
21
Topic: Site Safety
23. What is Independent Safety Audit Scheme (ISAS)?

Background:
- Another safety initiatives, other than PFSS, introduced by the former Works
Bureau to encourage public works contractors to set up more efficient
safety management systems and to enhance the standard of safety
performance of contractors.
- At present, only the selected contracts would be included in the scheme.
Contents of ISAS:
- Under the ISAS, safety audits are carried out against the Contractor's
safety management system as set out in the Safety Plan and its
implementation on site by an Accredited Safety Auditor on a quarterly
basis.
- If the Safety Auditor observes any hazardous situation that constitutes an
"imminent danger", the Contractor shall rectify the situation immediately.
- After the safety audit, the Safety Auditor shall prepare the audit report in
which the Safety Auditor shall give any comments on the Contractor’s
safety management system and the implementation of the safety plan. He
shall also put a score for the audit.
- Payment for “Safety Audit” would only be made if the scores for Part I
concerning the Safety Management ystem (element 1 – 13 of Safety Plan)
and Part II concerning implementation of Safety Plan (element 14 of such)
are above 70. For a dissatisfactory scores, that is either scores below 60,
the Contractor shall be given an “Adverse” quarterly performance report.
- To maintain the independent characteristics of the auditors, the Contractor
shall choose one ASA from 3 nominees proposed by the Engineer.
24. How can you ensure site safety conditions on Site?

Self-preparedness:
- To take part in ensuring site safety, I first made myself familiar with both
statutory and contractual requirements on site safety, and made reference
to the Construction Site Safety Manual and the Construction Site Safety
Handbook.
- I then studied the details of the Works under the Contract, and highlighted
the special characteristics of the Works and inherent hazards on the Site.
- I also discussed with the Contractor’s site safety personnel in order to
establish a close working relationship.
22
Topic: Site Safety
Safety Plan:
- Setting out the details of the Contractor’s safety management system (14
elements) that he will implement on the Site to ensure safety and health in
the execution of the Works.
- The tenderer shall submit with the Tender an “Outline Safety Plan” which
shall contain a list of the safety and health hazards and sufficient
information to demonstrate the tenderer’s proposals for achieving effective
and efficient health and safety procedure. (SCT, without payment)
- The Contractor shall within 14 days of the date of acceptance of the Tender
submit the “draft Safety Plan” that describes the potential major hazards
connected with the Site and the Works and the outline proposals for
controlling such hazards. (SCC, with items in BQ for draft Safety Plan and
the complete Safety Plan).
- The Contractor shall review, update and revise the Safety Plan taking into
account comments made by the Engineer and any other parties, and
update the risk assessment for the work scheduled for next 2 months (SCC,
with items in BQ for updating of Safety Plan).
Appointment of Safety Officer:

- The Contractor shall employ Safety Officer in the Contract who shall be
solely directed towards safety and health matters
- The Safety Officer shall carry out safety inspections, prepare safety reports,
supervise and monitoring implementation of the Safety Plan, carry out
safety audits, etc… (PS, with item in BQ for providing Safety Officer)
- The Contractor shall not commence any construction work on the Site
without the appointment of the Safety Officer.
Site Safety Committee (SSC):

- SSC, chaired by the Contractor’s Site Agent, is responsible for ensuring the
implementation of the Safety Plan, reviewing and monitoring the
effectiveness of the safety and health measures taken and seeking the
cooperation and commitment of staff at all levels, including the
management level and work level. (PS, with item in BQ for attending SSC)
Site Safety Management Committee (SSMC):

- SSMC, established by the Engineer, shall monitor the adequacy of the
Safety Plan and ensure its implementation on Site by the Contractor, and to
enhance communication between the Engineer and the Contractor on
23
Topic: Site Safety
safety and health matters. (PS, with item in BQ for attending SSMC)
Site safety inspections and follow up actions:

- Safety walks or safety inspections should be conducted regularly and
jointly by the Contractor’s Safety Officer and Site Agent and the Engineer’s
site staff to inspect the Site checking the safety and health conditions are
being maintained on the Site. (PS, with item in BQ for weekly safety walk)
- Safety walk should also be conducted by the SSMC member before the
meeting. (PS, absorbed in BQ item for attending SSMC)
- Safety inspection can be carried out by the Engineer’s site staff at any time.
- Whenever unsafe practice is identified during the safety walk or safety
inspections, the Contractor shall rectify the deficiencies as soon as
possible.
- If no improvement on repeated notification by the Engineer in respect of the
non-compliance, the Engineer may deduct payment with regard to “Site
Safety” in relevant items. (e.g. SSC, SSMC, Safety walk, etc…)
- If the situation persists, the Engineer should raise the matter to the Labour
Department for their subsequent action. Nevertheless, if in the opinion of
the Engineer that such deficiency may be a risk of life, he may suspend the
corresponding part of the Works in accordance with GCC Clause 54.
- The Contractor’s performance should be duly reflected in his Quarterly
Performance Report.
Safety audit:
- Some contracts may be selected for inclusion of Independent Safety Audit
Scheme (ISAS).
- Under the ISAS, safety audits are carried out against the Contractor's
safety management system as set out in the Safety Plan and its
implementation on site by an accredited safety auditor on a quarterly basis.
- If the Safety Auditor observes any hazardous situation that constitutes an
"imminent danger", the Contractor shall rectify the situation immediately.
- After the safety audit, the Safety Auditor shall prepare the audit report in
which the Safety Auditor shall give any comments on the Contractor’s
safety management system and the implementation of the safety plan. He
shall also put a score for the audit.
- Payment for “Safety Audit” would only be made if the score is above a
specified level. For a dissatisfactory score, the Contractor shall be given an
“Adverse” quarterly performance report.
24
Topic: Site Safety
25. What is Site Safety Cycle (SSC)?

Background:
- Site Safety Cycle (SSC) is a new member to PFSS (but, actually, some
activities of the SSC has been included in the original PFSS, e.g. weekly
safety walk, SSMC meeting, etc As such, SSC can be considered as a
“collective pronoun” for all activities in PFSS.
- With the successful results from the introduction of SSC in several pilot
contracts in 2000, the ETWB has decided to extend the implementation of
SSC to all capital works contracts that are included in PFSS.
Content:
- Daily Cycle-
- Pre-work Exercise and Safety (PES) meeting
- Hazard Identification Activity (HIA) meeting
- Pre-work Safety Checks
- safety inspection, supervision by Site Agents or his representatives
- safety co-ordinating meeting
- daily cleaning and tidying up of the Site
[The first 3 items are collectively referred to as “Pre-work Activities”]
- Weekly Cycle-
- Weekly safety walk and co-ordinating meeting
- Weekly overall cleaning and tidying up of the Site
- Monthly Cycle-
- SSMC meeting and SSC meeting
[To promote SSC, a safety bulletin board shall be erected and a hard-paved
area shall be provided for holding of Pre-work Activities.]
Administration:
- The SSC is implemented as a part of the PFSS.
- Payment shall be made to Contractors under the PFSS for persons
attended the Pre-work Activities in one day.
- Payment shall also be paid for the safety bulletin board.
- For those activities which have been covered in elsewhere would not be
paid under SSC (e.g. hard-paving absorbed in Contractor’s
accommodation)
26. What are permissible voltages for the equipment used on construction
25
Topic: Site Safety
sites?
Heavy equipment:
- Most heavy equipment such as hoist, tower cranes etc may be of voltage in
excess of 110 with an earth leakage circuit breaker installed and in proper
function.
Portable and hand-held tools:

- All portable, hand-held tools and temporary site lighting should be operated
at a voltage of 110V or less.
Works under confined space and damped environment:

- All portable, hand-held tools and temporary site lighting should be operated
at a voltage of 25V of less.
27. What is colour coding of lifting gear?

Colour coding:
- Under the Contract, all slings, shackles and such-like equipment should be
checked, certified and painted with the appropriate colour for the respective
month.
- All personnel should be advised of the colour code for that month. Only the
equipment with the correct colour code should be used.
- As such, colour coding of lifting gear is a mean of communication to advise
the personnel using the lifting equipment of the performance of such.
Responsibility of checking, certifying and painting the code:

- In accordance with the FIUR, every lifting appliance should be thoroughly
examined by a competent examiner at least once in the preceding 12
months. A certificate should be obtained from the competent examiner after
the examination.
- Every lifting appliance should be inspected periodically within the preceding
7 days by a competent person, and endorsed with an approved form.
- Safety Officer should paint the equipment with the correct colour code after
checking the relevant certificates at the last day of each month.
28. Please highlight your contribution in checking Contractor’s temporary

works.
Liability of temporary works design:
- The Contractor is responsible for the design and stability of all temporary
26
Topic: Site Safety
works which is the legal requirements to ensure safety of a workplace.
Design of the temporary works:

- The Contractor shall prepare and submit for the Engineer’s checking
drawings and specifications specifying the following:
- framing;
- construction details (especially for connections);
- methods of erection;
- sequence of erection;
- standard of materials and workmanship;
- method statement for dismantling;
- access and egress for workmen
- The ER is required to examine the Contractor’s design details concerning
the design, erection, use and removal of the temporary works and shall
satisfy himself that it contains no obvious deficiency:
(Design scheme and calculations)
- to ensure the framing of structural members and details of
construction should be justified in accordance with recognized
engineering principles to meet the loads to which the falsework may
be subjected
- to ensure site conditions and standard of workmanship achievable has
been realized
- to ensure the structural steel members are of good conditions (as
some damage is expected after repeated use)
- to ensure adequate provision of lacing and bracing to prevent the
falsework from buckling or sway
- to ensure the robustness and stability of the falsework so that it is not
susceptible to effects of impacts or vibrations
- to ensure all props are adequately supported without risk of undue
displacement during the lifetime of the falsework – baseplates should
be connected to the feet of the props
- to ensure the ground supporting the falsework are treated to enhance
even setting of the distribution members and to ensure that the
allowable bearing capacity of the ground will not be exceeded (e.g.
placing a concrete plinth)
(Method statement)
- to ensure the methods and the drawings are clear and understandable
- to ensure the method statements have included:
27
Topic: Site Safety
- details of the methods in each stage of erection/dismantling

- sequence of erection/dismantling
- plant and equipment to be used
- details of working platforms and access routes
- details of anchorage
- risk assessment and safety measures
- to ensure the proposed methods do not have a detrimental effect on
the permanent works
(Construction stage)
- to ensure a supervisor is appointed to supervise the construction
- to ensure the construction in line with the drawings and specifications
submitted
- any alterations to the design should be submitted by the Contractor
again and checked by the Engineer
(Using stage)
- to ensure the loading, either the magnitude or the pattern, assumed in
the design calculation is not exceeded or varied.
- in case any undue movement notified, the works under construction
should be suspended and investigation should be carried out
(Dismantling stage)
- the dismantling of the falsework should not be overlooked
- bracing members or other key structural members should be identified
before dismantling which should be removed as late as possible to
avoid collapsing.
- In some cases, the requirements of independent checking of temporary
works should be considered in which cases the responsibilities of checking
the design, erection and use of the falsework rested on the ICE.
- The ER in such cases should satisfy himself that the ICE has carried out
his duties with reasonable skill and care in certifying that the temporary
works have been properly and safely designed.
- No work should be commenced until the ER have issued his consent in
writing upon making such verification.
29. What are the common hazards and precautionary actions on construction
site?
a) Roadworks:
- Wear high visibility garments wit retro-reflective markings
- Signing, guarding and lighting to the Code of Practice’s requirement
28
Topic: Site Safety
b) Transport and mobile plant:

Potential hazards-
- People being run over, struck or crushed by vehicles moving forward or
backward
- Collision between vehicles
- Collision of vehicles with fixed objects such as scaffolding and falsework
- Vehicles falling into excavations and down embankment
- Falling from vehicles
- Materials falls from vehicles
Safety Precautions-
- Segregation of vehicles and pedestrians
- Segregation of vehicles from fixed objects by the use of barriers, signing
- Provision of clearly signed and indicated routes, safe parking areas,
adequate width
- Haul roads crossing public roads controlled by traffic lights, signs and
fish-eye mirror
- Use of banksman and reversing alarm for dealing with reversing
- Limiting the speed of vehicles and construction plant
- Regular maintenance of site road surfaces by grading, or repair of pot
holes
- Providing stop blocks at edge of excavation
- Providing goal-posts underneath overhead obstruction, e.g. power cables
- Proper maintenance of vehicles and construction plant
c) Trench Work:
Potential hazards-
- Damage to underground utilities
- Collapse of trench
- People falling into the trench
- Workers struck by falling objects, mechanical plant or materials being lifted
- Inadequate means of access
- Vehicles falling into trench
- Sudden rise in water level (for works carried out in existing streamcourse or
stormwater channels)
Safety precautions-
29
Topic: Site Safety
- Determine positions of underground utilities before works commence

- Erect shoring of approved design for trench deeper than 1.2m
- Provide sufficient number and adequate means of access
- Mark and support all exposed utilities properly
- Provide sufficient number and adequate guarding, toe-board and signing
- Do not allow plant and materials to be placed at trench edge
- Ensure that the trench is examined and certified by a competent person
weekly (Form 4 under Construction Sites (Safety) Regulations)
d) Working at Height:
Potential hazards-
- Falling from height
- Struck by falling objects
- Collapse of scaffolding, working platform
Safety Precautions-
(Prevention from falls)
- Provision, use and maintenance of
- working platform (to be closely boarded)
- guardrails (top & mid), toe-board (200mm high)
- coverings for openings
- gangways and runs (400mm/650mm wide)
- safety nets and safety belts (if the provision of the above is
impracticable)
(Construction, maintenance, inspection and examination)
- So designed and constructed that it does not collapse, overturn or move
accidentally
- Use of sound materials of sufficient strength
- Erected by trained workmen (formal training + 3 years’ experience) under
the supervision of a competent person (formal training + 10 years’
experience)
- For scaffold > 15m in height, to be designed and approved by a
professional engineer
- Competent person to inspect scaffold on a bi-weekly basis (Form 5 under
Construction Sites (Safety) Regulations) or after substantial alteration
(Ladders)
- Secure at top or bottom, also against sideways movement
- The 4:1 rule
30
Topic: Site Safety
- Extends at least 1.1m above the landing place

- Separate methods of lifting materials and tools
e) Confined Spaces:
Definition-
- A confined space means a space in which there may be deficiency or
enrichment in oxygen or there may contain toxic or flammable gases or
fumes
Potential hazards-
- Suffocation – lack of oxygen
- Toxic atmosphere – e.g. carbon monoxide, hydrogen sulphide
- Flammable atmosphere – e.g. methane, petrol vapour, town gas
- In-rush of mud or water
- Explosion
- Rise in body temperature
Safety Precautions-
- Risk assessment shall be carried out by a competent person (gas detection,
looking out for possibility of ingress of hazardous gases, sludge or other
deposits that are liable to give off hazardous gases, in-rush of water or
mud)
- Implement all safety precaution as recommended in the risk assessment
report
- Only certified workers can enter a confined space
- Provide sufficient ventilation
- A person is stationed outside the confined space for maintaining
communication with the workers inside
- Workers cannot stay in the confined spaces longer than that permitted
- Provision of safety equipment
- approved breathing apparatus
- intrinsic safe lamp or torch
- safety harness and lifeline
- a stretcher and resuscitation equipment
- audio/visual alarm
- first aid facilities
- safety helmet/bump cap
31
Topic: Site Safety
f) Electricity:
Potential hazards-
- Electric shock or fire and explosion which are resulted from damaged
insulation, inadequate earthing, inadequate overcurrent protection,
accidental contact with live cables or improper connectors
Safety Precautions-
- Regular inspection and test by Registered Electrical Worker (REW)
- Use of double insulation equipment
- All hand-held electrical equipment shall be of 110V or 50V in confined or
damp area
- All connection shall be of waterproofing type
- All electrical system shall be earthed, and fitted with circuit breakers, fuse
and residual current devices (RCD)
- Protect all electric cables
g) Work with lifting appliances and lifting gear:

Potential hazards-
- Collapse and overturning of lifting appliances
- Failure of lifting gear
- Struck by lifting appliances and/or loads while being lifted
- Falling of loads
Safety precautions-
- Only competent operator shall be allowed to operate lifting appliances
- Every lifting appliance shall be marked with the safe working load and fitted
with automatic load indicator
- Erection, repairing and maintenance shall be done by competent persons
- Outriggers shall be fully extended and properly supported while lifting loads
- An unobstructed passageway of 600mm wide or more shall be maintained
between the slewing or other moving parts of lifting appliances and the
guardrails, fences or other fixtures
- Loads being lifted or lowered by lifting appliances shall be securely
suspended and supported
- Use closely meshed/guarded receptacles for raising/lowering bricks, stones,
etc
- All lifting gear shall be marked with safe working load and colour coded
- No one shall be allowed to stand below lifted load
32
Topic: Site Safety
- All lifting appliances and lifting gear shall be tested, examined and
inspected in accordance with the requirement under the F&IU (Lifting
Appliances and Lifting Gear) Regulations
h) Gas and Electric Arc Welding:

Potential hazards-
- Fire and explosion
- Burns (skin and eye)
- Heat stress
- Respiratory disease/poisoning
Safety precautions-
(Gas welding)
- Cylinder to be kept upright
- Do not store more than 2 sets of cylinders at the workplace
- Cylinders should be kept in purpose built trolleys equipped with fire
extinguishers
- Flashback arrestor should be fitted to the cylinders
- Avoid hoses from trailing for a long distance
- Hoses should be regularly inspected for cuts, scratches, cracks, burnt or
worn patches
- Drain all gases that may be detained in the hoses after work
- Provide local ventilation
- Wear suitable personal protective equipment such as gloves, screen,
protective clothing
(Electric arc welding)
- No welding shall be carried on wet floor, in humid condition or in rainy
weather
- Always keep the hands and body dry
- Equipment and workpiece shall be properly earthed
- Electrode holder shall be fully insulated
- Welding current must be returned from the workpiece to the welding set
- Switch off the welding set when it is not in use
- All input and output terminals shall be protected against accidental contact
- Wear suitable personal protective equipment such as gloves, screen and
protective clothing
30. What are the potential hazards identified on your construction sites?
33
Topic: Site Safety
River training works:

- Excavation with contaminated mud
- Piling works for pipe bridge
- Risk of drowning for working at the river embankment
Footbridge construction:
- Temporary works erection and dismantling
- Works at height for the construction of bridge pylon
- Cable stressing
- Works inside the steel pylon head which is a confined space
Reclamation work:
- Risk of drowning for working in barges
- Deep excavation for the construction of box culvert
Sewerage construction work:

- Deep excavation for construction of pipelines and sewage pumping stations
- Risk of drowning during water tightness test for sewage pumping stations
- Working at heights for the construction of superstructures of the sewage
pumping stations
- Erection and removal of temporary works for sewage pumping stations
- Working alongside the carriageways
- Trench works adjacent to congested power cables
34
Draft – Secretary: LEUNG Sai-ho
Study Group 24 June 2002 – RE Duties
Definition
1. RE (Resident Engineer) = ER (Engineer’s Representative) – appointed by the
Engineer - notified to the Contractor via a delegation letter, which list out the
power (duties) delegated to the ER [G.C.C. Clause 2(3)] - to represent the
Engineer in various aspects when negotiating/communicating with the Contractor
2. Duties – Job generated from one’s rank or position held
Why RE is necessary?
The Engineer, as depicted in the General Conditions of Contract and as named in the
Article of Agreement, are usually senior member in government or a consultant firm, is
impractical to present at all time on site.
General Definition of ER’s Duties

1. To watch and inspect the Works
2. To test and examine any material to be used and workmanship employed by the
Contractor in connection with the Works
3. To exercise powers vested in the Engineer which may be delegated to him by the
Engineer
In addition to the above, ER has tortious duties (responsibilities towards Public, Client
& Contractor), such as safety supervision, environmental control, etc. which is not
explicitly defined in the Contract.
ER’s Duties in different aspects

1. Technical
(a) material approval and testing
(b) workmanship inspection
(c) checking of Contractor’s methodology of construction (method statement)
(d) modification of design to suit site condition
2. Financial and Contractual

(a) certifying interim payment
(b) studying the programme of works
(c) monitoring the progress of works
(d) keeping intact site records (drawings, correspondences, minutes, etc.)
(e) issuing V.O., preparing V.V.O, EOT, support documents for claims –
depending on the powers delegated
3. Administrative and Coordinative

(a) leading and supervising site staff
(b) facilitating the negotiation between Contractors and other parties such as
Utility Undertakings
Topic: Sustainable Development
1. What is sustainable development?

Definition of sustainable development:
- In 1983, the United Nations organized the World Commission on
Environment and Development (WCED).
- Four years later (i.e. 1987), its landmark report - “Our Common Future”,
was published. One of the principle topics focused on by the United
Nations’ Brundtland Commission Reports in 1987 was sustainable
development.
- The wide definition of “sustainable development” endorsed by the WCED is
that “sustainable development is the development that meets the needs of
the present generation without compromising the ability of future
generations to meet their own needs”.
Objective of sustainable development:

- The objective of sustainable development is to balance social, economic
and environmental needs for both present and future generations,
simultaneously achieving a vibrant economy, social progress and better
environmental quality locally, nationally and internationally.
- As the concept of the sustainable development can be adopted to different
aspects of our lives, the success of sustainable development relies on the
concerted efforts of the government and the public.
Government’s policy towards “Sustainable Development”:

- In Hong Kong, the Chief Executive made it clear in his 1999 Policy Address
that the government is endeavouring to build Hong Kong into a world-class
city and to make Hong Kong a clean, comfortable and pleasant home.
- All these require a fundamental change of mindset to bring about full
integration of the needs of the economic and social development with that
to conserve the environment.
2. Why do we need sustainable development?

Current situation:
- Development enhances economic growth and improves the quality of
human life.
- The continuous increase in human population and the need for better living
standard have accelerated the progress of development.
1
- However, every activity we pursue to meet our daily needs creates

pressure on the environment.
- In producing and consuming goods and services, we use up natural
resources and create emissions, effluent and wastes.
- These have resulted in resource depletion, extinction of endangered
species and various kinds of pollutions.
- As such, the environment is in a deteriorating state in which our future
generation can hardly sustain their development.
Advancement of sustainable development:

- Environmental problems are interlocking crisis which affect the Earth as a
whole.
- People are coming to realize that they should acquire a better
understanding on the potential risk of disaster to the environment
associated with development.
- This evokes the concept of sustainable development.
- Sustainable development is not a totally new concept. It is the latest
expression of a long-standing ethic involving people’s relationship with the
environment, and the current generation’s responsibilities to future
generations.
3. What are the attitudes of general public towards sustainable

development?
People’s general attitudes:
- Different people have different attitudes towards sustainable development
as they have different perception of the proper relationship between
technology and society.
- Some people tend to see science as not providing the final solutions to the
problems, but rather as a tool to displace the problems to someone else,
someplace else or sometime in the future.
- People are shortsighted and controversially adhere to economically exploit
the environment for the benefit of the mankind instead of to conserve and
protect the environment for the next generations.
- Businessmen are reluctant to pay for the cost of environmental protection
who believe that it will eventually reduce the competitive power of their
development.
Situations at developed countries:
2
- Most people identify that we have serious environmental problems such as

global warming, worsening air and water quality, waste management, etc.
- The governments of developed countries have been taking an active role in
mitigating the conditions.
- However, some people seems to mainly rely on the government to handle
the environmental problems, and do not realize the importance of individual
effort in the environmental conservation issues.
Situations at developing countries:

- In general, the education level of the people in developing countries is low
as compared with that in developed countries. People in developing
countries may not have any knowledge about environmental protection.
Most of them believe that the damages to the environment are of minor and
will be recovered some day.
- Most local governments are struggling with severe financial burdens.
- Living quality at developing countries is generally low.
- In this connection, the concept of the need to replenish resources for their
next generations remains to be a lower priority in comparison to economic
development.
4. How to change public’s attitudes towards sustainable development?

Need to change people’s attitudes:
- Sustainable development is a global topic, and its success is crucial to the
living of our future generations.
- Every person in the world is utilizing the resources in the planet, and is
therefore bearing a responsibility to the conservation of the environment.
- The success of sustainable development relies on the concerted efforts of
the government and the public.
- People’s shortsighted economical consideration should be corrected.
People should get used to balancing the impacts of their acts in respect of
economy, society and environment to their future generations.
- In this connection, the public’s awareness of sustainable development is
the first key to the success.
Education for revolution of culture:

- The social conscious and moral responsibility of individuals on
environmental damage should be changed in order to move towards
sustainability.
3
- Government’s initiatives in developing a political consensus of a shared

vision and goals for a sustainable future are necessary.
- Education can serve as an effective way to develop the public’s global
thinking and enhance their understanding on sustainable development.
Funding should be reserved for environmental education to increase public
awareness on their contributions to reduce pollution.
- The effect of environmental education should be paid right from the
curriculum and extra-curriculum activities of schools instill the youngster
with the concept of sustainable development in their early stage of life in
which their acceptability to new things is stronger.
Restructure of economic system:

- To rectify people’s shortsightedness on economical consideration with
respect to environmental problems, the government should bring the cost
of pollution into the open.
- People who benefits from the use of the environment will ultimately have to
pay for the cost of it in full.
- Such cost should not be hidden. Instead, it should be made visible in the
form of pollution tax or the like such that people will realize their
responsibility to the conservation of environment.
- The “polluter pays principle” currently implemented on sewage services
emphasizes that the higher the quantity and the heavier the pollutant level
of wastewater discharge, the more the premise owners have to pay for its
treatment. As such people will find incentive to strike a balance among
economy, society and environment leading to sustainable development.
Government’s policy:
- The government can also take economic measures to alter the behaviour
of consumers and produce into a sustainable manner. One of the
measures is to promote the use of environmentally friendly products, such
as the use of low-sulphur diesel and LPG. Reduction in taxation can also
be applied to make the products more competitive. In view of cost
effectiveness, more drivers will opt for these alternatives.
- The government should support the environmental industry such as
recycling industry by providing land and financial subsidize. Recycling
helps to minimize depletion of natural resources.
Public consultation:
4
- Participation of local residents should be strengthened in the society’s

decision-making process.
- Getting public’s involvement and acceptance is also a mean to facilitate the
subsequent implementation of policy and measures.
- A step has been put forward in recent years by introducing an
environmental impact assessment to major development projects.
- It is important that the interest groups’ voices are heard and that their
arguments are considered and discussed.
Enhancement of communication:
- An effective communication to deliver the message of environmental
protection is crucial to the success of the sustainability.
- Non-governmental organization (NGO), such as green groups, professional
bodies and academic institutions play a critical role in advancing education
for sustainability development through research, training, talks and
exhibitions.
- In addition to convening national conferences and seminars on education
for sustainability, professional organizations disseminate information on
topics pertaining to the environment and distribute educational publications,
newsletters, curriculum guides, and creating teaching aids.
5. What is the role of government towards sustainable development?

Leader of the play:
- A city’s sustainability relies on the individual’s involvement.
- Government is the only party has adequate authorities and resources to
achieve it.
- Government should take the lead to direct the whole community towards
sustainability development.
Promotion and education:

- Public’s awareness on sustainable development can be aroused through
difference kinds of promotion activities.
- Education in schools instills the youngster with the concept of sustainable
development in their early stage of life in which their acceptability to new
things is stronger.
Legislation and enforcement:

- Environmental policy and ordinance should be formulated to implement
5
environmental protection in various origins of pollution.
Economic incentives:
- The government can also take economic measures to alter the behaviour
of consumers and produce into a sustainable manner.
- One of the measures is to promote the use of environmentally friendly
products by providing tax concession.
- Financial support and land allocation should be made to the environmental
industries.
- Polluter pays principle or other similar pollution tax is enforced.
Coordination:
- Often, pollution problems are not local, but territorial and regional. The
government should closely liaise with our neighbours, such as Guangdong
Province on the environmental issues.
- Officials in environmental protection should attend international conference
so as to learn from other countries’ experience.
Integration of the concept of sustainable development in planning:

- Being the chief architect of the territory, the government has the
responsibility to take into account the consideration of sustainability in the
planning of the future development of the future.
Encouraging public’s participation:

- Public’s participation should be strengthened in all policy making processes
which involve the beneficial of whole community.
6. What are been done by HKSAR government towards sustainable

development?
The 1999 Policy Address – “Making Hong Kong an Ideal Home”:
- The Chief Executive emphasized the importance of the community, the
business sector and the Government working in partnership to embrace the
principles into practice.
- A Council for Sustainable Development was set up to provide expert advice
to the government and to keep the public regularly informed about its work.
It would also encourage the community to put the concept of sustainable
development into practice.
- A $100M grant was made to support community initiatives on sustainable
6
development especially in educational programmes for citizens and

students to develop a strong awareness of sustainability.
- All bureaux were required to carry out sustainability assessments of major
policy proposals.
- A Sustainable Development Units (SDU) was established to monitor these
assessments and to provide analysis and support to the Council.
Sustainability assessment:
- All bureaux and departments are required to carry out sustainability
assessments of new strategic initiatives or major programmes which may
bring about noticeable or persistent implications on the economic,
environmental and social conditions of Hong Kong.
- With effect from April 2002, the above sustainability assessment findings or
results of their proposals must be included in their submissions to the
Executive Council (ExCo).
- The sustainability assessment should be conducted at the early planning
stage of a proposal. It should help scope out cross-sectoral issues and
sensitive areas that require special attention or joint departmental
examination at an early stage.
Guiding principles in sustainability assessment:

- Economy - Hong Kong should achieve a competitive and prosperous
market-based economy which provides the resources to meet the needs
and aspirations of the population, both now and in the future.
- Health and hygiene - Hong Kong should provide a living and working
environment and pursue policies which promote and protect the physical
and mental health and safety of the people of Hong Kong.
- Natural resources - Hong Kong should promote the sustainable use of
natural resources to minimize its ecological footprint through improving
consumption efficiency, minimizing the use of non-renewable resources
and re-using, recycling waste and recovering energy from wastes.
- Society and social infrastructure - Hong Kong should foster a stable,
equitable, ethical and progressive society and enable present and future
individuals to contribute to and fulfill their potential by providing universal
access to adequate and appropriate educational opportunity and social
infrastructure.
- Biodiversity - To maintain the biodiversity of Hong Kong and to minimize
any threat which consumption in Hong Kong may have on biodiversity
7
elsewhere.
- Leisure and cultural vibrancy - Protect and enhance the vibrancy of Hong
Kong’s recreational opportunities, leisure activities, cultural diversity,
archaeological, historical and architectural assets.
- Environmental quality - Hong Kong should be pro-active in avoiding
environmental problems for present and future generations, seek to find
opportunities to enhance environmental quality, and minimize the unwanted
side effects, locally, nationally and internationally, of development and
inefficiencies such as air, noise and water pollution or land contamination.
- Mobility - Hong Kong should provide safe, accessible, efficient and clean
transport systems and pedestrian facilities along with an efficient transport
network for the movement of goods and facilitation of services for the
community.
Sustainability indicators:
- For the purpose of sustainability assessment, the guiding principles are
represented and measured by some quantifiable indicators.
7. How can engineers equip themselves for sustainable development?

Changing role of engineers:
- Engineers are the leaders of the interdisciplinary teams involved in the
decision-making process itself and as agents for change.
- In this connection, engineers must become the “facilitators of sustainable
development”.
Preparation of engineers for the change:

- Cultivate a broader understanding of political, economic, technical and
social issues and processes related to sustainable development.
- Acquire the skills, knowledge and information to facilitate a sustainable
future.
- Develop the tools required to achieve sustainable integration of the
environment and development, together with other scientists and
practitioners.
- Develop economic approaches that recognize natural resources and our
environment as capital assets.
- Move beyond his disciplines to evaluate alternatives and to effect policy
changes towards sustainable development.
- Develop project teams with other design professionals, economists, and
8
social, environmental and physical scientists to arrive at ecologically

sustainable solutions.
- Adopt and apply an integrated systems approach where the relationships
of the parts to the whole are considered.
- Work collaboratively with other trade and professional organizations that
are focused on this issue to minimize duplication and bring the greatest
resources to bear on advancing sustainability.
8. What are the conflicts between the public’s aspiration for a civilized life
and the maintenance of natural environment?
Public’s aspiration for a civilized life:
- The consequence of scientific development and engineering technology
has led people to demand for higher standard of living.
- It is the rapid economic growth that civil engineering projects are called for
to cope with such a demand.
- Infrastructure is a physical asset of a society. An efficient infrastructure is of
great economic importance both to industry and individuals in providing
reliable energy supplies, transport, communication, water supplies, sewage
treatment and disposal as well as waste disposal.
- To sustain the civilized life, civil engineers are expected to provide their
technical know-how to design and build the structural fabric of civilization.
Impacts of civil engineering works on the natural environment:

- Due to extensive nature of the projects, their effects on the natural
environment may be significant and these have brought about a number of
social and environmental problems.
- In the past, civil engineers directed “the great sources of power in nature
for the use and convenience of man”, and the environment was as much
associated with the standard of living as with the natural world. They were
not well aware of the importance of the impact of the environment when
implementing civil engineering projects.
- Without a proper control system of such projects, undesirable effects may
be produced such as noise, air and water pollution, acid rain, greenhouse
effect as well as resource depletion.
- For instance, lands with ecological importance are resumed for the
construction of large highways projects or new town development. Air,
noise or water pollution generated by construction projects can destroy the
natural beauty of the scene nearby and caused nuisance to the nearby
9
residents.
- Unless a balance is maintained between the development of the
community and preservation of the environment, the potential economic
and social benefits may be outweighed by cost associated with
environmental damage.
9. How does an engineer take part in resolving the conflict of public’s

aspiration for a civilized life and the maintenance of natural environment?
Planning and design:
- A well-planned and designed project is essential in minimizing the conflicts
with the natural environment.
- During the early stage of a project, civil engineers should take into account
the possible undesirable environment effects in the selection of the site1.
- A structured environmental impact assessment should be carried out under
the EIAO to select the most viable scheme based on the social, economical
as well as the environmental factors, in order to obtain the environmental
permit for the commencement of the works.
- Relevant ordinances controlling water, air and noise pollutions should be
taken into consideration during the planning stage of a project.
- At the detailed design stage, the adopted design should satisfy not only the
functional requirements but also the requirements for environmental
protection.
- For instance, a sewage pumping station, being part of the sewerage, aims
at reducing the pollution of the sewage will bring along with environmental
nuisance such as odour problems, noise pollution and visual impacts to the
nearby environment. The designers should make use of appropriate
structures such as enclosed concrete strucutures and/or deodourization
units to house the treatment units which will generate a high level of noise
and odour. Pleasant landscaping works should be provided to blend it with
the surrounding natural environment.
- Adequate public consultations of the project during the design stage can
promote the value of the construction, hence making the nearby population
more willing to accept the environmental impacts generated during the
construction.
- A close liaison and good relationship between the various parties of a
project and the public can help to reduce the objections to the
implementation of the project and ensure that the end-product satisfy the
1
For instance, alignment deign of highway, minimizing land resumption.
10
need of the public.
Implementation and operation stages:

- Construction stage directly interferes with the natural environment and
cause most noticeable impacts to the public.
- The engineers should ensure all environmental mitigation measures
derived in the design stages are implemented properly and should monitor
the effectiveness of such measures.
- Necessary adaptive measures should also be made in due course to cater
for the unexpected activities which will cause threat to the environment
during construction.
- Successful mitigation measures can effectively improve the image of
construction projects.
- In addition, a proper monitoring and audit scheme should be derived to
continuously assess the environmental effects of the project throughout its
service life.
- Any operational problems should be identified and remedied as soon as
possible.
10. Can you give me some examples for sustainable development?

Traffic congestion:
- In view of the traffic congestion, people might try to build more roads.
- However, we know that the origin of the problem is the ever-increasing and
the more scatterly distributed population.
- Due to the limited land spaces, it is not possible building more roads to
meet the need of the blooming population.
- Another concern on expansion of highway network is the unbearably poor
road-side air pollution.
- Constructing more roads to deal with the problem of traffic congestion is
not sustainable as we cannot use it every time when we face the same
problem.
- More sustainable solution may be switching people to railway, better
land-use planning, population control, etc.
Construction waste disposal charging scheme:

- In 2002, over 7 million tones of waste being disposed of in our three
landfills.
- Only 45% of which are municipal solid waste while other 48% are
11
construction waste. Since the waste volume continues to grow, the landfills
are filling up much faster than expected, and are projected to last only 4 to
7 years.
- Disposal of waste at landfills is free of charge which is undesirable and
encourages indiscriminate disposal of waste at landfills.
- As such, to be in line with the “polluter pays principle”, landfill charging is
an essential component of our waste management strategy as it provides
an economic incentive for waste producers to reduce waste and to carry
out sorting to facilitate reuse/recycling of waste, thereby helping to slow
down the depletion of limited landfill capacity as well as wastage of
resources.
11. Can you tell me how did your project plan and design for sustainable
development?
River training project at Sheung Shui and Fanling:
- Sheung Shui and Fanling are located in a flood prone area in North New
Territories.
- In the recent decades, changes in land use and rapid urban development
in the original flood plain has increased the surface runoff
- However, the flow capacity of the existing natural river channel is
decreased due to the illegal land filling and blockage by the refuse and
agricultural waste.
- In addition, Hong Kong has experience high and remarkable extreme
rainfall in recent years.
- All these contributed to the need of having a flood control measures to
protect the low-lying areas at North District.
- The existing natural rivercourses in Sheung Shui and Fanling are narrow,
shallow and meandering.
- To this end, river training works was implemented to widen, deepen and
straighten the rivercourses so as to increase their flow capacity.
- In view that the nearby areas are ecological sensitive areas, alignment of
the river was so designed such that, apart from satisfying the functional
requirements, the impact to those areas would be minimum.
- A tight environmental monitoring and auditing programme was
implemented during construction.
- Contaminated mud excavated must be disposed of at the designated
location.
12
Footbridge project at Tsing Yi:

- In conjunction with the opening of Lantau Link in 1997, the Lantau Link
Visitors Centre has also started operation
- In the past, visitors to the centre used the public car park when they
arrived.
- They then walked across a slip road to get to the centre and the viewing
platform on the opposite side, using the at-grade crossing
- The slip road would be connected to the Tsing Yi North Coastal Road, and
the road would be subject to high speed traffic.
- For the sake of visitors’ safety, it was considered necessary to replace the
at-grade crossing by a footbridge.
- The location of the footbridge is a popular scenic spot for local visitors and
tourists, and the footbridge is the only access for them to the visitors centre
and the viewing platform. In order to give a better impression to the local
visitors and tourists and to tie in with the setting, an innovative and
prestigious scheme was adopted. To this end, a cable-stayed design was
selected which is in harmony with the surrounding environment.
Sewerage project at Outlying Islands:

- At present, the sewage generated in Outlying Islands is only partially
treated by private facilities (like septic tanks) and is then discharged into
the sea.
- This has caused pollution in the Southern Waters of Hong Kong.
- In view of this, the EPD had commissioned the “Outlying Islands Sewerage
Master Plan Study” and proposed the “Outlying Islands Sewerage Projects”
to alleviate the pollution problem
- The implementation of these projects will provide the outlying islands with
the public sewers, sewage treatment and disposal facilities.
- Extensive discussions with the villagers were arranged in the design stage
on the background of the project and the alignment design of the sewer
networks.
- UPVC pipes were chosen to be the material for the sewers in order to
facilitate construction within narrow alleys and to minimize the construction
time and hence the nuisance caused to the public.
Sewerage project at Sai Kung:

- In 1989, a consultancy study was commissioned by EPD to carry out the
“Port Shelter Sewerage Master Plan Study” to recommend measures for
13
implementation to reduce water pollution at Port Shelter, Sai Kung.

- The proposed sewage conveyance system is one among many sewerage
projects recommended under SMP.
- It is essential in conveying the sewage collected from developments in Sai
Kung Planning Area 4 and its upstream areas to the Sai Kung Sewage
Treatment Works for treatment and disposal.
- In accordance with the approved Sai Kung Town North Planning Area 4
Layout Plan, the planned developments include hotel, school and
recreational, residential and commercial developments.
- The upstream areas are mainly village type development.
- Sai Kung promenade is a famous spot in Hong Kong for seafood, and
attracts many foreign tourists. The project aims at improving the water
quality in Port Shelter and enhancing the image of Hong Kong.
- The programming of the project had been tied in with other construction
projects which would be carried out in proximity so as to minimize the
accumulated nuisance to the adjacent residents and business.
Reclamation project at West Kowloon:

- The scope of this contract covered the remaining part of the reclamation
works of the West Kowloon Reclamation (WKR), which aimed at providing
12.7 hectares of land in southern area of WKR for the future development.
- Public fill, i.e. the inert part of the construction waste, is used as the fill
material which is an important outlet for it.
- Drained method is adopted to minimize the dredging of contaminated
marine mud, and the subsequent disposal of the dredged materials.
- The project also comprised the construction of wave absorbing seawall
aiming at reducing the wave reflected from the seawall while providing
facilities for berthing.
Sewerage project at Yuen Long South:

- In 1992, the Yuen Long and Kam Tin Sewerage Master Plan was
developed out of a review and performance assessment of existing
sewerage systems in the areas and consideration of appropriate
mechanisms for serving the outlying areas to the major urban centres of
Yuen Long, Tin Shui Wai and the TM/YL corridor.
- The effluent would receive at least preliminary treatment in the form of
screening and grit removal prior to discharge. Consideration should be
given to upgrading to primary treatment in the future.
14
- Constructing a new system rather than upgrading the existing sewerage is

because most people were now living along the Castle Peak Road and
upgrading of the existing sewerage system would cause nuisance to the
public during construction and operation stage. In stead, construction of
trnk sewer along the Yuen Long Highway would cause less nuisance to the
public as there were only low density residential area nearby. Besides,
since there is no proper sewerage existed in the southern part of Yuen
Long, this arrangement can help to facilitate the future development and
provide systematic sewerage in that area.
- Since the proposed sewage pumping stations were situated within the
scheduled areas, more stringent requirements (e.g. deeper toe-in in rock
layer) were set for pipe foundation. Raft foundation is adopted for the
sewage pumping station from economical point of view.
- Trenchless sewer laying method is adopted to avoid undue impacts to
traffic and public during the sewer construction across the Yuen Long
Highway and Yuen Long nullah.
12. What is the sustainable development strategy for Hong Kong?

Process for formulating the sustainable strategy for Hong Kong:
- Pilot areas:- three policy areas are chosen for the initial stage of
formulating the sustainable development strategy.
- Preparation of a document to invite responses:- the government has set up
three support groups with each group works independently on the chapter
relevant to its pilot area.
- Directly involving the wider community:- exhibitions, hearings and seminars
are arranged to raise awareness of the public and to provide a platform for
stakeholders to meet and discuss the issue involved.
- Reporting:- the support groups will collect and assess the response of the
public and will advise the government on the way forward for the pilot areas
from the sustainable development point of view.
- The government to act:- Having taken into consideration of the supporting
groups’ advice, the government will publish a strategy document outlying
the measures that it will propose in order to move towards sustainable
outcomes in the relevant pilot areas.
Three pilot areas:

- Solid waste management
- Renewable energy
15
- Urban living space
16
Topic: Excavation Supporting Systems
1. What are the common types of excavation supporting systems?

Objective of excavation supporting system:
- To provide stable lateral supports to the ground in order that the execution
work can be carried out in a safe manner.
Common types of excavation supporting systems:

- Sheet pile wall, soldier pile wall, diaphragm wall, caisson wall and grouted
pile wall
- Cantilevered wall, strutted wall and tied-back wall (according to the types
of support provided)
2. What are the pros and cons of sheet pile walls?

Pros:
- Conventional method which has been widely adopted in Hong Kong
Cons:
- It is difficult to drive sheet pile walls through soils with SPT “N” value >50
- Obstruction may be encountered during sheet pile driving1.
- Seepage through the interlocks of sheet piles
- Settlement of adjacent ground resulted from driving of sheet piles in loose
sand or extraction of sheet piles from cohesive soils2.
3. What should be noted for design and construction of sheet pile walls?
Design:
- Sufficient safety margin should be incorporated in the design of the sheet
pile walls to cope with the deviations during construction
- Allowance should be provided for deflection, deterioration and corrosion
- Review the design in case differences between the designer’s assumptions
and actual site condition are identified
Construction:
- Sufficient site supervision during the shoring installation
- Regular site inspection during construction
- Monitoring should be provided for sensitive excavation work
1
Obstructions may include corestones, boulders, old foundations, seawalls, etc.
2
Soil may be removed with sheet piles during pile extraction
1
4. What are the pros and cons of soldier pile walls?
Pros:
-
Cons:
-
2
1. Foundation Options for Buildings
1.1. Shallow Foundation

This type of foundation is considered as the cheapest and the simplest construction
method. This type of foundation will subject the long term settlement, including the
overall and differential settlement which is complied with the operational and end
user requirements. Long term maintenance cost for the non-structural elements
repairing should also be allowed for the development.
For a building found on a shallow foundation, a preliminary estimation showed that

the total settlement will be in excess of 300mm in 50 years design life that is
considered not being acceptable. Pre-loading to stimulate the future building load
can be considered to reduce the building foundation settlement. This process can be
accelerated by installation of band drain and shall require about 8 months with
surcharge mound. The surcharging time can further be reduced to 4 months with
higher surcharge mound. Nevertheless, the surcharging period shall subject to the
actual ground performance and the monitoring results.
In view of the late site possession, tight construction programme and uncertainty of
the performance of the ground, it is not recommended to adopt shallow foundation
for the building structures.
1.2. Piled Foundation

The settlement effect on the building structures can be eliminated by supporting the
structures on piled foundation down to a solid ground. Several common methods of
piled foundation can be considered. Based on the existing available information, the
priority for the selection of pile types for the development shall be as following:
1) Driven H-pile
2) Socket H-pile
3) Large Diameter Bored Pile
4) Mini-pile
5) Non-percussive cast-in-situ Pile
The pros and cons of the above pile types shall be discussed in the following
sections.
1.2.1. Driven H-pile
Driven H-pile shall be installed down to the stratum with SPT-N value in the range of
180 and 200. The pile size shall be 305x305x180kg/m or 305x305x223kg/m. The
pile length for this site shall be about 50m. The advantages and disadvantages of
this method are summarized as below:
Advantages Disadvantages
• Provide rigid support to building • Require pre-boring through the
• Fast constructed boulder and to eliminate the vibration
• Less expensive if required
• Not require pre- and post-drilling • Not efficient to resist tensile load
• Material wastage for deep pile cut-off
below basement
• Require static load testing
• Generate noise and vibration problem
1.2.2. Socket H-pile
H-pile shall be installed down to and socket into the bedrock. The pile size shall be
305x305x180kg/m installed inside a pre-drillhole of diameter 550mm. The pile length
in this site shall be about 55m but subjected to the actual bedrock profile. The
advantages and disadvantages of this method are summarized as below:
• Provide rigid support to building • Require pre- and post-drilling to verify
• Higher compressive and tensile the bedrock
capacity • Pile length varies with the bedrock
• Capable to overcome underground profile, especially for sloping
obstruction rockhead
• Generate minimal amount of • Require static load testing
vibration problem • Difficult for construction to deep
• Require light working plant and bedrock and not practical for the
limited work area depth grater than 55m
1.2.3. Large Diameter Bored Pile

The large diameter bored pile can be in the range of diameter of 1.2m to 2.5m. This
is an end bearing pile and found on bedrock stratum with Grade III or better rock.
The advantages and disadvantages of this method are summarized as below:
• Provide rigid support to building • Require pre- and post-drilling to verify
• Capable to overcome underground the bedrock and rock/concrete
obstruction interface respectively
• Large pile capacity • Pile length varies with the bedrock
• Efficient to resist vertical, lateral and profile, especially for sloping
tensile load rockhead
• Generate minimal amount of • Require heavy construction plant
vibration problem • Expensive and long construction time
1.2.4. Mini-Pile
The mini-pile shall have pre-drilling through the soil stratum and socket in bedrock.
The diameter of the mini-pile shall be about 190mm. The pile length shall be about
50m to 55m. The advantages and disadvantages of this method are summarized as
below:
• Provide rigid support to building • Inefficient to resist large vertical load
• Fast constructed • Require pre- and post-drilling to verify
• Capable to overcome underground the bedrock
obstruction • Pile length varies with the bedrock
• Efficient to resist tensile load profile, especially for sloping
• Generate minimal amount of rockhead
vibration problem • Require large pile cap or raking pile
to resist lateral load
• Require static load testing
1.2.5. Non-percussive Cast-in-situ Pile

This type of pile can be in the range of 500mm to 610mm diameter and formed by
the auger excavation. The advantages and disadvantages of this method are
summarized as below:
• Provide rigid support to building • Special arrangement for disposal of
• Generate minimal amount of marine clay during construction
vibration and noise problem • Require large pile cap
• Require light construction plant • Require static load testing
• Pile length cannot deeper than 30m
• Not easy to overcome underground
obstruction1
The optimal foundation system shall depend on the ground investigation results,
financial, programme and availability of the market.
Minipiles
Minipiles generally have a diameter of between 100 mm and 250 mm.
Reinforcement bars are provided in the piles.
Construction can be carried out typically to about 60 m depth or more, although

vertically control will become more difficult at greater depths. Minipiles are usually
formed by small drilling rigs with the use of down-the-hole hammers or rotary
percussive drills. They can be used for sites with difficult access or limited
headroom and for underpinning. In general, they can overcome large or
numerous obstructions in the ground.
Given the small diameter and high slenderness ratio of minipiles, the load is
resisted largely by skin friction. Where minipiles are installed in soil, the working
load is usually less than 700 kN but can be in excess of 1,000 kN if post grouting
is undertaken using tube-a-manchette. In the case of minipiles forming rock
sockets, the capacity may be limited by the prescribed permissible structural
stresses, which may be up to about 1,350 kN.
(Section 3.5.3, Pile Design and Construction)
In Hong Kong, the allowable structural capacity of a minipiles has generally been
assessed conservatively by ignoring the contribution of the grout even under
compression. The allowable stress of the steel will be that given by local structural
codes or building regulations. (Section 5.12.5,
Pile Design and Construction)
Where minipiles are employed, the combined resistance of the pile cap and the
piles may be used to take the horizontal loading.
Pre-drilling
For minipiles, pre-drilling at location in close proximity of the piles should be made.
The number of pre-drilled boreholes required should be such that the pile tip of
every such pile should be within 5 metres from a pre-drilled hole. The pre-drilling
should be sung into the rock mass for at least 5 m below the rock head of the
specified grade or the designed length of the rock socket of the nearest pile,
whichever is deeper.
1
Post Construction Proof Drilling
For minipiles, there would be practical problem for core-drilling at the
concrete/rock interface. To verify the rockhead profile and hence assess the
adequacy of the socketted length for these types of piles, some additional proof
drill holes should be sunk into the rock mass and down to at least 5 m below the
as-built top level of the rock socket of the nearest pile or to the as-built bottom
level of the rock socket of the nearest pile, which ever is deeper. The number of
post-installation boreholes should be at least 2 for sites with 100 piles or less; or 1
% of the number of piles for sites with more than 100 piles (any fraction of a
borehole so calculated should be construed as one additional borehole).
Design of Minipiles
In the design of minipiles, the following principles should be adopted:
1. The structural capacity of a minipiles should be derived solely from the steel
bars. Because of the comparatively high stress in the steel bars and strain
incompatibility, contribution from the grout and steel casing should be ignored.
The allowable stresses of steel bars should be in accordance with the Code
of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete;
2. For minipiles socketted into rock, the foundation capacity should be derived
from the frictional resistance at the interface between grout and rock. The
rock socket should be formed in grade III or better rocks, with core recovery
greater than 85%. The design bond strength between rock and grout for
compression should not exceed 0.7 MPa.
3. For minipiles relying on soil friction, testing on trial pile is normally required to
be carried out to verify the design assumptions;
4. Minipiles should not be designed to resist lateral load by bending in view of
their limited bending capacity. When lateral loads are to be resisted by the
pile cap, the lateral displacement should be restricted to a magnitude which
can be tolerated by the minipiles; and
5. The allowable buckling capacity of the minipiles should be checked. In
assessing the buckling capacity of the piles, lateral restraints from the grout,
steel casing if permanent and the surrounding soil may be allowed.
2
Construction of Minipiles
In the construction of minipiles, the following should be considered:
1. Steel casing should be provided to support the pre-drilled hole within the soil
strata and if necessary in the fractured rock, during construction;
2. Permanent steel casing should be provided to enhance corrosion protection;
3. A non-shrink cement grout with a minimum characteristic compressive
strength of 30 MPa at 28 days should be used for encasing the steel bars;
4. Verticality, inclination and alignment of minipiles should be checked during
installation, to verify any deign assumption on eccentric moments induced in
the piles.
Proof Tests
Refer to PNAP 66
3
Piling
Piling Construction
Casing
Steel Casing is sunk into the ground and the soil is excavated from inside it. Casings
are in 6m to 8m lengths joined to reach the required depth. (The diameter of cast in-
situ piles shall be at least 97% of the specified diameter). The joints are secured by
welding and the security of the joints is important; joints are subjected to high
stresses and a failure can cause serious difficulties.
For land piling, either hydraulic oscillators or rotators is used for sinking the casing.
A ring, capable of adjustment over a limit range, grips the casing and forces it down
with a semi-rotary action (oscillators) or a complete rotary action (rotators) imparted
by hydraulic rams. Both of them need a secure anchorage to take the reaction from
the rams.
For marine piling, a special hydraulic vibrator is used for sinking the casing. It is in
the form of a clamp that is fixed to the top of the casing and the casing is advanced
by means of an up and down vibrating action. Hydraulic oscillators or rotators are
not used because a substantial provision in terms of design and space is required for
the temporary platforms used in marine bored pile construction. A larger platform for
the oscillators or rotators on the platform should be provided and a larger design
force due to the reaction from the rams should be considered in the temporary
platform design.
Throughout the casing pitching process, the offset and verticality of the casing will be
checked at regular intervals. (Deviation from specified position in plan measured at
cut off level: 75mm (land) & 150mm (marine, GS) & 75mm (marine, PS) ; Deviation
from vertical: 1 in 75 (land, GS) & 1 in 150 (land, PS) & 1 in 25 (marine, GS) & 1 in
150 (marine, PS)).
Excavation
The excavation is carried under water so that a positive pile head can be maintained
to ensure stability of the pile bore. Pumping of water from an excavation shall not be
permitted unless the casing has been placed into a stable stratum which prevents
massive inflow of water into the excavation. Pumping of water may also have a
detrimental effect on the surrounding soil or adjacent property.
Generally, excavation of materials is by hammer grab supplemented by chisels to
break up hard material at the initial stage of excavation. To speed up the operation,
Reverse Circulation Drilling method (RCD) will be employed. A drilling rig will be
securely attached to the top of the casing, either by hydraulic clamps or special joints
to provide the necessary reactions for torque and downcrowd. A large diameter drill
bit, attached to a heavy-duty drill tube, is rotated by means of a power swivel located
on the top of the rig. The cutting will be airlifted and conveyed to the hopper barge.
Water will be returned to the pile shaft to maintain a positive water head. As drilling
continues, additional drill tubes will be connected until required level is reached.
(Note: Piles shall not be excavated within 6m (centre to centre) of other piles which
have been cast for less than 24 hours or which may contain workable or unset
concrete or other piles which has been excavated but not yet cast with concrete. )
Airlifting and Founding Material Verification

When the founding level is reached and approved, (rock sample will be collected
when the founding level is reached. This will then be verified against the bore log)
the pile base will be cleaned using a standard airlifting method with a positive head of
water (by pumping of water in) inside the casing. In case when the RCD rig is used
to form the socket, airlifting may be carried out using drill rig. Clean out is considered
to be completed when a traverse of the airlift pipe over the bottom of the pile base
produces negligible debris in the water pumped to the surface.
Page 1 of 2
Piling
Reinforcement
For reinforcement, it is prefabricated reinforcement cages fitted with spacers to
ensure that the cage is correctly orientated and positioned within the pile. For marine
piles, all reinforcement is epoxy-coated.
Works prior to Concreting

After placing of reinforcement cages, the bases of excavation shall be cleaned again
by airlifting. (Note: a 150mm mild steel pipe will be placed inside the casing which
stop at about 100mm above the pile base, a rubber hose pipe, with its end connect to
the pump, will be placed inside the mild steel pipe. Water and debris will be
discharge out through the mild steel pipe.) This procedure is considered essential to
prevent the accumulation of silt and other material at the base of the excavation to
form a soft toe. Cleaning-out may be considered complete when a traverse of the
pump over the bottom of the pile excavation produces negligible debris in suspension
in the groundwater pumped to the surface. Concreting work will then be carried out
as soon as possible after the approval of the bottom condition.
Concreting
The hopper and the pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight throughout. A
sliding plug or barrier shall be placed in the pipe to prevent direct contact between
the first charge of concrete in the pipe of the tremie and the water. The pipe shall at
all times be immersed in the wet concrete which was previously been placed and
shall not withdrawn from the concrete until completion of concreteing. At all times a
sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained inside the pipe to ensure that the
pressure from the concrete is always greater than that from the water.
The internal diameter of the pipe of the tremie shall not be less than 150mm for
concrete made with 20mm aggregate. The 150mm mild steel tube used in airlifting
will be used for this purpose. The bottom of the tremie pipe will be kept immersed in
the concrete to a depth of 2.0 to 3.0m to maintain a seal and the pipes is lifted in
stages as pouring proceeds. In case the casing is temporary, it will be extracted
when the concrete of the pile is hardened. Concrete should be placed to a minimum
of 1.0 to 1.5m above the required cut-off level for the pile. Pile heads shall be
trimmed to the cut-off levels shown in the drawings within a tolerance of 15mm. Only
hand-held pneumatic breaker will be employed to ensure that the concrete at or
below the cut-off levels would not be damaged by the trimming operation.
Records of piling works

For concrete works:
• Concrete mix
• Volume of concrete supplied
• Level of concrete in the pile shaft
The results should be plotted in a graph showing the theoretical volume/actual
volume and the depth of the concrete placed.
Safety Aspect in Pile Construction
Comparison between Land and Marine Piles
Page 2 of 2
Potential Problem of Bored Pile
Defects Possible cause of defect Precautionary measures

Obstructions Insufficient ground investigation 1. With reverse-circulation drills or down-the-hole tools, the
presence of obstructions can generally be overcome
relatively easily.
2. The use of the airlift technique as a means of flushing is an
alternative way to remove the obstructions However, it may
cause server disturb to the adjacent ground
3. For major obstructions, a possible option will be to remove
the soils around the obstruction by grabbing or airlifting and
to place lean mix concrete to encase the obstruction to
facilitate subsequent drilling by reverse-circulation drills.
Verticality of Pile Poor workmanship 1. The position of pile bores should be checked as piles
significantly out of position may necessitate a reassessment
of the pile cap carrying capacity. Non-verticality of a pile bore
will induce additional bending and may necessitate extra
reinforcement if it is seriously in error. It is common practice
in Hong Kong to routinely check the verticality of the casing to
ensure acceptable verticality of the pile bore.
Slope Rockhead The installation of temporary casings 1. The use of weak mass concrete to plug the gap between the
to obtain a seal in rock may be fraught casing and the rock surface followed by further drilling into
with difficulties where the rock surface rock after the concrete has hardened.
is sloping.
Local reduction in 1. Insufficient confinement of 1. Problem may sometimes be alleviated by careful slow
diameter of concrete in cohesive soils with extraction of the temporary casing
shaft of bored piles very low shear strength
Necking 2. Use of permanent casing
2. Overbreak in unstable strata – 3. It is important to ensure that there is a sufficient excess
Overbreak arises where there are hydraulic head within the casing against base blowing and to
local collapses of the walls of the prevent shaft instability where excavation proceeds below the
bore resulting in cavities. These casing.
cavities, particularly if they are
water filled or slurry-filled and
concealed behind a temporary
casing, pose a potential risk of
contamination of the concrete
when the casing is extracted.
Soil or rock debris at 1. Deposition of soils that remain 1. Removal of soils in suspension by air-lifting
base of piles in suspension after airlifting 2. Concrete shaft with minimum delay
2. Dislodgement of small blocks 3. Prevent bend up bar at pile toe.
of soil or rock material from 4. Further cores should be taken to verify the effectiveness of
sides of bore, sometimes remedial grouting in each pile
caused by delay in concreting
the shaft
3. Collapse of rock fragment from
rock socket
Collapse of 1. Inadequate design or 1. Proper design of cage which should be sufficiently rigid and
reinforcement cage construction capable of withstanding normal site handling
2. of cage
Excessive bleeding Concrete mix with a high 1. A high-slump, self-compacting mix is necessary in order to
of water from the watercement ratio ensure that the concrete flows between the reinforcement
exposed surface at bars and fills the entire cross section of the bore. Concrete
top of pile with low workability is a major cause of defects. To minimise
segregation, honeycombing and bleeding resulting from high
water content, the use of a plasticizer additive may be
beneficial.
2. In bored pile construction, the radial effective stress in soil
may be significantly reduced, such as in the pile section
bored under water and ahead of casing. For such cases, the
concrete pressure plays a pivotal role in restoring the radial
effective stress, and the slump of concrete and the time
during which concrete remains fluid will control the shaft
resistance that can be achieved.
3. For piles where concreting is carried out in an unlined bore
free of water and with ample room for free movement of
aggregates between bars, a typical concrete slump of 100 to
150 mm will generally be acceptable. Where concrete is
placed by tremie, a minimum slump of about 150 mm or 175
mm should be adopted.
Quality of Concrete Poor Workmanship 1. The concreted level should be such that when the
concrete with laitance is cut down to the cut-off (or
trimmed) level, the concrete will be homogeneous and
sound. Where the specified cut-off level is low and at
depth below ground surface, it may be difficult to
achieve the least length of concrete to be trimmed
consistent with minimising wastage and the time
involved in cutting down. In the case of concrete being
placed under bentonite, the top portion of the concrete
column may be particularly prone to intermixing with the
bentonite cake scoured off the side of the bore.
Therefore, a minimum concreting level is usually taken
as at least 1m above the required cut-off level.
Selection Criteria of Foundation System
Description
Ground Conditions 1. In soft ground, such as marine mud or organic soils, cast-in-place piles can suffer necking unless care is
taken when extracting the temporary casing. Machine-dug piles with permanent casings can be used to
alleviate problems of squeezing.
2. The depth of the founding stratum can dictate the feasibility of certain pile types. Advance estimates of
the depth at which a driven pile is likely to reach a satisfactory 'set' are usually made from a rule-of-
thumb which relies on SPT results. For the common practice in Hong Kong, the preliminary pile length of
driven H pile is at about SPT = 200.
Load Nature 1. Pile selection should take into account the nature and magnitude of the imposed loads. In
circumstances where individual spacing between driven piles could result in the problem of 'pile
saturation', i.e. piles are arranged in minimum spacing, the use of large-diameter replacement piles may
need to be considered.
2. In the case of large lateral loads (e.g. tall buildings), piles with a high moment of resistance (i.e. steel H
with head strengthening) may have to be adopted.
Environmental 1. The construction of piles can have damaging or disturbing effects on surrounding structures
Constraints and environs. These should be minimised by the use of appropriate pile type and construction
methods. Construction activities, including percussive piling, are subject to the provisions of the
Noise Control Ordinance (HKSARG, 1997). Percussive piling is banned within the restricted
hours, i.e. from 7 p.m. to 7 a.m. on weekdays and whole day on Sundays and public holidays. It
is only allowed in other times on weekdays provided that the generated noise level at the
sensitive receivers does not exceed the acceptance noise level by 10 dB(A) (EPD, 1997).
2. Installation of displacement piles will result in heave and lateral displacement of the ground,
particularly in compact fine-grained sandy silts and clayey soils (Malone, 1990), and may affect
adjacent structures or piles already installed.
Site Constraints 1. Apart from mini-piles, all other piles require the use of large piling rigs. The machine for jacking piles
carries heavy weights. These may require substantial temporary works for sloping ground and sites with
difficult access. Headroom may be restricted by legislation (e.g. sites near airports) or physical
obstructions such as overhead services. In such case, large crane-mounted equipment may not be
appropriate.
Safety 1. Notwithstanding the safety risks and hazards involved in pile construction, it should be noted that most
of these can be minimized provided that they are fully recognized at the design stage. Accidents
involving collapse or overturning of the piling rigs, which can be caused by overloading, swinging loads,
incorrect operation, wind gusts or working on soft or steeply sloping ground, can result in casualties.
Cost & Programme 1. The design engineer frequently has a choice between a numbers of technically feasible piling options for
a given site. The overall cost of the respective options will be a significant consideration. The scale of the
works is a pertinent factor in that high mobilisation costs of large equipment may not be cost effective for
small-scale jobs. The availability of plant can also affect the cost of the works.
Topic: Earthworks
1. What is public fill?

- Public fill shall mean the inert material arising from construction and
demolition activities such as site clearance, excavation, construction,
refurbishment, renovation, demolition and roadworks.
- Public fill shall comprise material including stone, rock, masonry, brick,
concrete, soil and other inert material.
- There is no size limitation on the public fill, and a small amount of timber
may be mixed into the fill.
- The public fill may also consist of wet soil.
2. What is fill material other than public fill?

- Fill material shall consists of naturally occurring or processed material1
which can be compacted to form stable areas of fill.
- Fill material shall contain material with liquid limit below 65% and a
plasticity index below 35%
- Fill material shall not contain organic material, flammable material, metal
or rubber.
- Sulphate content of fill material shall not exceed the permissible limit as
they have corrosive effect on nearby concrete structures or metalwork.
-
3. What are the common types of fill materials?
Fine fill material:
- Particle size below 75mm
- For area of fill within 0.5m of a structure or utility
General fill material:

- Particle size generally below 75mm, but must not exceed 200mm
- Used to form the areas of fill unless otherwise stated
Special fill material:

- Particle size below 75mm, but may contains some particles below 63µm
- Liquid limit not exceeding 45% and plasticity index not exceeding 20% and
a coefficient of uniformity exceeding 50 (i.e. well-graded)
- Used as fill material around pipelines
1
Concrete or recycled aggregates
1
Granular fill material:
- Consists of clean, hard, durable material
- Particle size below 75mm and contains very small amount pf particles
below 600µm
Rock fill material:

- Grade 200 and Grade 400 (or any other Grade, of which the grading is
designated by the maximum particle size not being exceeded)
- Consists of pieces of hard, durable rock of which less than 30% by mass is
discoloured or decomposition.
- Upon to the approval of the Engineer, crushed rock or crushed concrete may
be used
Public fill:
- No size limitation
- Refer to Question No. 1 above
4. How to deal with soft spot?

Additional excavation:
- Additional excavation shall be carried out to remove unsuitable material,
and the resulting voids shall be filled
- General fill material, fine fill material or special fill material shall be used
- In case the soft spot is found below formations in rock, Grade 10 concrete
shall be used to fill the voids.
- Granular fill materials shall be deposited below standing water.
Stabilization:
- The soft spot can be stabilized in stead of excavated
- Rock fill material (Grade 400) shall be deposited on top of the unsuitable
material and compacted to form a stable formation.
5. What should be noted in deposition of fill materials?

General:
- Fill materials obtained from any excavation within the Site shall be
deposited as soon as practicable.
- Fill material shall be deposited in certain thickness subject to the type of
compaction method adopted
- Layers of fill material deposited shall be horizontal (except for any gradient
2
fall for surface drainage)
- Fill material shall not be deposited by end-tipping or any method which
may result in segregation or inadequate compaction of the fill material.
- Compaction due to the passage of any plant or vehicles shall be uniform.
Deposition for sloping surface:

- To form a sloping earthwork surface with gradient greater than 1 in 3 using
fill material other than rock fill material, it shall be overfilled first and then
cut back to the final surface after compaction2.
Deposition adjacent to structures or utilities:

- Using fine fill material for area within 0.5m of a structure or utility
- Fill material shall be deposited uniformly around the structure and utility
without causing disturbance or damage.
Deposition around pipelines:

300mm above the top of the pipeline3.
Deposition of rock fill material:

- The final compacted thickness shall be within 1.5-2 times the nominal
Grade size of the rock fill material.
- The surface void of each layer shall be filled with rock fragments
6. What should be noted in compaction of fill materials?

General:
- Compaction shall be carried out in layers after deposition
- Deposition of fill material on a compacted layer shall not start until
permission is given.
- However, it is generally a practical problem that an unacceptable delay to
the progress may be resulted for awaiting the test results.
- As such, this requirement for permission may be reviewed.
Moisture content:
- The moisture content of fill material shall be at the optimum value during
compaction with tolerance +3%, to ensure the fill material is still capable of
2
Why it is required?
3
being compacted.
Compaction adjacent to structures or utilities:

- Fill material shall be compacted in such a manner that the structures and
utilities would not be disturbed or damaged.
Compaction around pipelines:

- Compaction shall be carried out by hand-rammers or manually operated
power equipment.
Compaction of rock fill material:

- No indication of relative compaction for rock fill
- At least 8 passes of a vibrating roller or equivalent shall be carried out
- The size of the vibratory rollers shall depend on the compacted thickness of
each layer.
- Similar approach for compaction of general fill material with a large portion
(i.e. <90% passing a 20mm BS test sieve) of coarse material.
Degree of compaction of fill material other than rock fill material:

- 90% relative compaction throughout
- 95% within 1.5m of earthworks final surface and formation
- 98% within 200mm of formation
- 85% for fill material around pipeline
- These value may be reviewed in light of the advice given in the
Geotechnical Manual for Slopes and Geoguide 1.
- Lower standard may be acceptable in flat or gentle slope and in areas where
there is a considerable time to settle before construction to start.
7. What kinds of tests should be carried out with respect to fill materials?
General:
- Particle size distribution, liquid limit, plasticity index, coefficient of
uniformity and sulphate content
- Each sample shall be tested to determine the particle size distribution
- Each sample of fill material other than rock fill material shall be tested to
determine the liquid limit and plasticity index
3
Any overfilling required for deposition of fill materials around pipeline as for utility? Which clause?
4
- Calculation of coefficient of uniformity (D60/D10) for special fill material
- For fill material to be deposited within 500mm of concrete structure or
metalwork, tests shall be carried out to determine sulphate content
- For any non-compliance, additional tests shall be carried out4.
Optimum moisture content and maximum dry density:

- Samples shall be tested before (at least 72 hours) and after (not more than
28 days) the fill material is deposited5.
- The consistency of test results shall be noted.
Moisture content:
- Additional samples shall be provided in case the moisture content of any
test sample differs from the optimum moisture content.
Relative compaction:
- Re-test shall be carried out for any non-compliance.
8. What is the primary aim of earthworks design?

- To minimize the quantity of materials to be imported and/or disposed of,
both for economic and environmental reasons.
- The Contract should not indicate the source the fill materials from which the
fill materials to be obtained unless there are technical reasons to use specific
materials in specific areas. (e.g. public fill)
4
Just carry out additional tests? How about if the re-tests are failed again?
5
What is the purpose to determine the optimum moisture content after deposition?
5
Topic: Formwork
1. What types of finishes for concrete are there?

Formed finishes:
- Finish of concrete surface produced by the use of formwork
Unformed finishes:
- Finish of concrete surface produced without formwork and by working the
concrete surface before the concrete has hardened.
Treated finishes:
- Finish of the concrete surface produced by a treatment applied to a formed
or unformed finish.
Fabric reinforcement:
- UPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with relevant British Standard
according to the nature of water to be conveyed and the location of the
pipe.
2. How to ensure the desirable concrete finishes can be achieved?

Submission of particulars and samples:
- For class F4, F5, U5 and T finishes, and any other types of finishes as
required by the Engineer, particulars shall be submitted.
- Particulars to be submitted include formwork drawings, method statement,
samples, manufacturer’s literature, programme and other details.
- Checking on the submitted particulars to check whether the proposed
formwork materials and construction method acceptable
Design calculation and method statement:

- The formwork shall be so designed that the position and shape of the
formwork can be maintained after concreting.
- Inclined concrete surface with 15° or more to the horizontal shall be formed
by formwork
Trial panels:
- For class F4, F5, U5 and T finishes, a trial panel shall be constructed to
demonstrate that the proposed materials, mix design, methods of
production and method of construction, including curing and removal of
1
formwork, will produce the desired finish1.
- The size of the trial panel shall be not less than 2m x 2m x 300mm thick,
and shall contain reinforcement representative of the most congested
reinforcement which will be in the permanent work.
- It shall also incorporate formwork ties and components, joints, chamfers,
splays, rebates and other features.
- In case the trial panel fail to produce the specified finishes, particulars of
the proposed changes shall be resubmitted, and further trial panels shall be
constructed until the specified finish is produced in the trial panel.
Construction:
- The formwork shall be clean and free of projecting nails
- Joints between formwork shall be sealed to prevent grout loss
- The formwork ties and components shall not touch the reinforcement
- Chamfers shall be provided for all external angles of 90° or less
- Curved concrete surfaces shall be produced by a series of flats
- Release agent shall be applied after the formwork has been erected and
before the steel reinforcement fixing2.
- Polystyrene shall not be used as void formers and box-outs.
Dismantling:
- Requirements in relation to minimum times for loosening or removing
falsework and formwork shall be observed.
- Nevertheless, the falsework and formwork of the concrete element in
flexural can be removed as long as the strength concrete has attained to a
specified level.
- No disturbance or damage shall be imposed on the formwork during
dismantling of formwork.
- Props may be temporarily removed to allow the removal of soffit formwork.
Such prop shall be replaced as soon as the formwork has been removed.
Inspection:
- Inspection to the concrete finishes shall be carried out as soon as the
formwork has been removed and before filling of any holes left by formwork
ties and components
- The concrete finishes shall have the characteristics as specified in GS.
- It may also be compared with the finish of the trial panel.
1
No need for other types of finishes?
2
3. What are the considerations in selecting the type of concrete finishes?
- Appearance
- Hydraulic performance for drainage works
- Surfaces to receive paint, tiles, screed, etc.
- It is uneconomic to specify a higher grade of finishing then is justified
- It is very difficult to achieve a high degree of consistency of texture and
colour
- Paints used shall offer protection against carbonation, chloride ingress, etc.
2
Which clause in GS requires that application of formwork release agent? (Other than F4, F5 and T1 finishes)
3
Topic: Steel Reinforcement
1. What are types of steel reinforcements commonly used?

Class 1 bar reinforcement:
- Reinforcement from quality assured manufacturers, handled by a QA
Stockist and retaining manufacturer’s lot traceability.

- Reinforcement from quality assured manufacturers, handled by a QA
Stockist but without retaining manufacturer’s lot traceability.

- Reinforcement other than Class 1 and Class 2 reinforcement.
- UPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with relevant British Standard
according to the nature of water to be conveyed and the location of the
pipe.
2. What are the protection coating applied to the steel reinforcement?

Epoxy coatings:
- Where exposure conditions are particularly severe and where the design
life requirement would be difficult to meet with ordinary steel.
Galvanized coatings:
- Where exposure is fairly severe
- To have smaller cover than normal in very thin section
3. What submissions have you checked in respect of steel reinforcement?

Before delivery of steel reinforcement:
- For bar reinforcement, a certificate from the quality assured stockist in
accordance to CS2 and a copy of the manufacturer’s third party certificate.
- For fabric reinforcement, a certificate from the manufacturer showing the
details of the manufacturer and that the reinforcement complies with the
requirements stated in the Contract.
Upon delivery of steel reinforcement:

- For bar reinforcement, a test report containing the details with reference to
1
CS2 shall be submitted
Before bending of reinforcement starts:

- Bar bending schedule complying with BS4466 (superseded recently)
4. What should be noted in respect of steel reinforcement?

Handling and storage:
- Reinforcement shall be supported on level ground and not be contaminated
- No reinforcement shall be stored on or adjacent to concrete surfaces which
form part of the permanent work.
Cutting and bending:

- Reinforcement shall be cut and bent in accordance with BS4466 to the
specified shapes and dimensions.
- Grade 460 steel reinforcement shall not be rebent or straightened after
bending
Fixing:
- Reinforcement shall not start until testing has been completed.
- Reinforcement shall be fixed rigidly in position and secured against
displacement, particular with respect to concreting, and shall be in
accordance with the Drawings in terms of bar sizes, spacings, shapes,
locations, lap position and length, covers, etc.
- Laps and joints shall be made at the specified location and by the specified
method only.
- Sufficient cover spacers, chairs, supports and other spacers shall be
provided
- Reinforcement shall not be welded.
5. What testing shall be carried out on steel reinforcement?

Bar reinforcement:
- To determine the yield stress, elongation, tensile strength, bending and
rebending properties and unit mass.
- The batch shall be considered as non-compliance if the requirements of
characteristic strength cannot be met.
- For any non-compliance in results of any test for elongation, tensile
strength, bending, rebending, unit mass, additional samples shall be
provided for additional tests. The whole batch shall be considered as
2
non-compliance if the results of any additional tests still fail to comply the
contract requirements.
- To determine the above properties as bar reinforcement, as well as the
weld shear strength.
- The batch shall be considered as non-compliance if the yield stress is less
than 93% of the specified characteristic strength
- If the yield stress lies between 93% and 100% of the specified
characteristic strength, additional samples shall be provided for additional
tests, and the whole batch shall be considered as non-compliance if the
results of any additional tests shows that the yield stress is less than 93%
of the specified characteristic strength.
- Similar to bar reinforcement, for any non-compliance in results of any test
for elongation, tensile strength, bending, rebending, unit mass, additional
samples shall be provided for additional tests. The whole batch shall be
considered as non-compliance if the results of any additional tests still fail
to comply the contract requirements.
3
Topic: Concrete
1. What is the difference of standard mix concrete and designed mix

concrete?
General:
- Concrete shall be a designed mix concrete designed by the Contractor
unless permitted by the Engineer.
Standard mix concrete:

- Concrete mix proportion stated in GS1 to be used by the Contractor as
standard mix concrete2.
- The grade strength available includes 10, 20, 25 and 30.
- Rarely used, less economic
Designed mix concrete:

- Concrete mix designed by the Contractor to achieve the specified grade
strength and workability.
- Compliance with the grade strength shall be ascertained with the provisions
stated in GS.
2. What is the use of recycled water in mixing concrete?

Recycled water:
- Basically, water for mixing concrete and for curing concrete shall be clean
fresh water taken from the public supply.
- It is now also accepted that recycled water may be used for mixing
concrete of grade strength less than 35MPa.
Quality control of recycled water:

- Recycled water used for mixing concrete shall have density less than
1010kg/m3, comparable setting time with control mix using fresh water, and
shall only contain acceptable amount of chemical.
3. What are the general requirements for concrete mix (designed mix)?
- Designed mix shall be used
- Minimum slump shall be 75mm
- The properties of different constituents (cement, PFA, aggregates, water
and admixtures) in a concrete mix shall comply with relevant BS.
1
Sufficient information? No W/C ratio? How to ensure grade strength can be achieved?
1
- The maximum chloride content (percentage relationship between chloride
ion and cementitious content shall not be exceeded
- Minimum cementitious content for concrete mix (Grade 20 or above) with
20mm nominal maximum aggregate size is stated in GS3.
- PFA used shall not exceed 35% of total cementitious content for normal
concrete4.
4. What kind of quality control is adopted in concrete?

- Chloride ion content shall be kept to minimum.
- So, marine sand will not be acceptable for any reinforced concrete
5. What is no-fines concrete?

Concrete mix:
- Nominal maximum aggregate size is 20mm,
- <15% by mass shall be retained on a 20mm BS test sieve,
- <10% by mass pass a 10mm BS test sieve.
- A/C ratio shall be within 10-15
- Not necessary to specify a strength for no-fines concrete
Usage:
- The compacted concrete shall have an open texture such that water is
allowed to flow through the hardened concrete.
- No-fines concrete shall be compacted using a minimum amount of punning.
5. What particulars shall be checked for a concrete mix?

Materials:
- For cement, PFA and aggregate, a certificate of not older than 6 months
shall be submitted
- For admixtures and curing compound, manufacturer’s details and method
of application, etc, as well as the certificate shall be submitted.
- For recycled water, the results of test which is required in the Contract shall
be submitted.
Concrete mix:
- Grading of aggregates, and mix proportion with due consideration for minor
variations in grading, silt content, etc.
2
What is the purpose of standard mix concrete?
3
How about concrete mix outside this area?
4
What does “normal concrete” mean?
2
- Workability before and after the addition of superplasticiser, if any
- Method of placing concrete (by pump, by gravity, etc)
- Method of controlling the concrete temperature
- Any test or trial mix data available for the designed mix concrete
- Any test data available for the designed mix concrete produced by the
proposed plant(s)5
- If the above test records are not available, Laboratory Mix Trials and/or
Plant Trials shall be carried out.
6. What is ready-mixed concrete?
7. What is the purpose of mix trials for concrete?

Objectives:
- To verify that the specified grade strength of a designed mix can be
achieved by the proposed mix proportion (Laboratory Mix Trial)
- To verify that the designed mix with the proposed mix proportion can be
produced by the proposed concrete plant (Plant Trial)
Exempted conditions:
- Trial mixes are not required for designed mix concrete of Grade 20 of
below.
- If similar6 test records are available, no trials are required
Plant Trials:
- Using the proposed plant(s) and mix designs and constituents
- Slump tests and cube compressive tests shall be carried out7.
- Either the slump values or the compressive strength of the test cubes shall
be of acceptable values and all lie within a specified range.
Laboratory Mix Trials:

- Made in the Contractor’s laboratory using the proposed mix designs and
constituents
- Slump tests and cube compressive tests shall be carried out8.
- Either the slump values or the compressive strength of the test cubes shall
be of acceptable values and all lie within a specified range.
5
No need to submit particular in connection with the proposed mixing plant?
6
Same Grade, similar constituents, same plant(s).
7
Total 9 nos. slump tests and 18 nos. cubes
3
Non-compliance of mix trial:
- If any test on workability or compressive strength of plant trial or laboratory
trial concrete does not comply with the specified requirements, changes
shall be made to the concrete mix and further trials shall be carried out.
8. What should be noted in respect of placing concrete?

General:
- No concreting shall be carried out without the permission of the Engineer.
- Concrete shall be placed and compact within 2.5 hours of the introduction
of cement to the concrete mix
- Trunking or chutes shall be used to place concrete with a height more than
2.7m.
- Fresh concrete shall not be placed against concrete which has been in
position for >30 minutes.
Tremie concrete:
- Tremies used shall be watertight.
- The lower end of the tremie shall be kept immersed in the concrete to a
depth of at least 1m
- Self-compacting, free-flowing and cohesive
Pumping concrete:
- Pipelines shall be lubricated by passing cement grout or concrete through
th pipeline before the concrete is pumped.
- The initial discharge of pumped concrete shall not be placed in the
permanent work.
9. What should be noted in respect of compacting concrete?

- Concrete shall be compacted by internal vibrators of suitable size.
- Vibrators shall be used until the expulsion of air has practically ceased, and
to avoid segregation.
- Concrete shall not be vibrated if it has been in position for > 30 minutes
- No-fines concrete shall be compacted using a minimum amount of punning.
- Not all concrete is pumpable and the grading and quantity of the fine
aggregate are particularly important and the mix must be designed for
pumping.
8
Total 6 nos. slump tests and 18 nos. cubes
4
10. How to carry out curing of concrete?
Methods of curing:
- Apply liquid curing compound
- Cover the concrete surface with Hessian
- Cover the concrete surface with polyethylene sheeting
- For unformed surfaces, the concrete shall be cured until it has hardened
sufficiently.
Requirements for concrete curing:

- For unformed concrete surfaces, curing shall be applied after the concrete
has been compacted and finished
- For formed concrete surfaces, curing shall be applied after the formwork
has been removed.
- Polyethylene sheeting used shall have a nominal thickness of 0.125mm.
- The minimum periods for the protection methods stated in GS shall be
observed9.
11. What testing shall be carried out on concrete?

Materials:
- Cement, PFA, aggregate, admixture, curing compound, recycled water
- Types and methods of testing to be carried out shall be referred to GS.
Workability:
- Slump test shall be carried out in accordance with CS1.
- One sample per each batch and two specimens for each samples.
- The average slump value (from two specimens) shall be within 25mm or
33% of the approved slump value, whichever is greater.
- Slump test is a good indication of the consistency of concrete
- Slump test is carried out before superplasticiser is added to ensure no
excessive water is added.
- Too high slump – not used, excessive water? or wrong mix?
- Too low slump – difficult to place and compact, too long time in truck mixer
Compressive strength:
- Frequency of compressive test shall be accordance with GS.
- Samples taken from elements of superstructure shall be 10 times more
9
Does this protection mean the curing only?
5
than foundation elements.
- Additional samples to obtain compressive strength at ages other than 28
days may be provided upon the request of the Contractor or the Engineer.
- One sample per each specified quantity of concrete and two 150mm test
cubes for each samples10.
- The cubes shall be made and store in accordance with CS1.
- The average cube strength shall be considered as the results of the
sample11.
- Any test result shall not be less than the grade strength by appropriate
amount as stated in GS (2 or 3 MPa)12.
- The average of any 4 consecutive test results13 shall exceed the grade
strength by an appropriate amount as stated in GS (2 to 5 MPa).
- In case more than 40 test results are available, a more stringent
requireemtn shall be applied that the standard deviation does not exceed 8
MPa. If such limit of deviation is exceeded, the concrete quality shall be
investigated.
- Concrete cores or other tests shall be carried out in case the requirements
for compressive strength do not comply.
- 7 day cubes may be prepared on request of the Engineer or the Contractor,
but no contractual significance
- Too large of standard deviation indicates a poor quality control
Hardened concrete:
- Such tests (core tests) shall be instructed by the Engineer in case the
results of the concrete not complying with the specified requirements.
- Specimen of concrete cores shall be inspected for any sign of segregation
and shall be tested to determine the compressive strength.
- The average estimated equivalent cube strength shall be at least 85% of
the specified grade strength.
Precast units:
- Load tests to determine the deflection and recovery of the precast unit and
the resistance to cracking of each prestressed unit.
12. What should be noted in choosing materials for filling joints in concrete?
10
The 150mm test cube has been changed to 100mm test cube.
11
If two cube strength differ for more than 15%, the higher shall be used as the cube strength but it
shall not be used as any one of the 4 consecutive cubes.
12
Individual cube strength may be less than the grade strength.
13
Any two consecutive test results shall be within 14 days.
6
Joint filler:
- Firm, compressible, single thickness, non-rotting filler, and non-absorbent
for water retaining structure14.
Joint sealant:
- Suitable to the climatic conditions of Hong Kong.
- Grey in colour for exposed conditions.
- Materials used shall be as stated in GS.
Bond breaker tape:

- A proprietary type recommended by the joint sealant manufacturer.
Bearing strip for sliding joint:

- The strip shall be resistant to all weather conditions and chemicals
- It shall be capable of withstanding a specified vertical load and shall have a
maximum coefficient of friction of 0.3 under a constant shear force.
Waterstops:
- A proprietary product approved by the Engineer.
*Design life of a RC structure:

- The time before repairs become uneconomic
- Insufficient cover has been provided:
- poor mix design, poor workmanship
- inadequate fixed re-bar
- insufficient no. of cover spacers
- inadequate compaction
- poor detailing (heavily congested re-bar)
*Concrete in marine structure:

- In massive structures, of unusual high strength should be carefully
considered
*Use of waterstop:
- Only be specified where absolutely necessary
- Difficult to fix, make concreting difficult and resulting to poor compacted
concrete.
14
Testing is required in GS. Are they duly carried out? Any exception made by the Engineer?
7
Recycled aggregates
Background:
- Continuous generation of C&D material
- Less opportunity for reclamation projects to absorb the public fill
- To explore alternative outlet for inert portion of C&D materials
- To reduce pressure on public filling area and landfill site
- Use of recycled aggregate
Application:
- Grade 20 prescribed mix1 and Grade 25-35 designed mix concrete
- Road sub-base construction
- Use in earthworks, drainage and marine works
Trip-ticket system for disposal of C&D material:

Background:
- All public fill should be disposed of at designated public filling facilities and all
C&D waste at designated landfills.
- Trip-ticket system implemented to ensure the C&D material are disposed of at
the right place
Planning stage:
(Public fill)
- The project proponents should consult PFC whether public filling facilities will be
available for the disposal of public fill generated.
- The PFC should designate the public filling facilities and should advise on any
acceptance criteria
- Such criteria should be incorporated into the tender documents
(C&D waste)
- Similar procedure for C&D waste except that in this case DEP should be
consulted instead of PFC
Public filling facilities:

- Public filling areas (reclamation sites)
- Public filling barging points
- Inert C&D materials recycling facilities
- Public fill stockpiling areas
1
Same as standard mix?
Trip-ticket system:
- A standard disposal delivery form is provided to the Contractor for them to fill in
and present to the site supervisory staff for checking and stamping for each and
every vehicular trip
- The site supervisory staff would check to ensure that the public fill does not mix
with C&D waste and vice versa
- The Contractor should present the form to the operator of the designated public
filling facilities/landfills for checking and a second stamping prior to the disposal
of C&D material
- Public fill disposed of off site not more than 50,000m3
- Amount of C&D waste generated less than 50m3
Management of C&D material:

Background:
- The construction industry generates about 14 million tonnes of C&D material
annually.
- Of this, there is about 12 million tonnes is inert C&D material
- Opportunities are limited to securing new reclamation projects, which is a major
outlet for these inert C&D material
- A shortfall in public filling capacity is anticipated
Responses:
- Drawing up a C&D material management plan (C&DMMP) to minimize C&D
material generation at design stage
- Vetting of the C&DMMP prior to upgrading of the project to Category A
- Providing the contractor with information from the C&DMMP in order to facilitate
him in preparing the WMP and to minimize C&D material generation during
construction
Exemption:
- Project generating C&D material less than 50,000m3; or
- Importing fill material less than 50,000m3
Ways to maximize the use of C&D material:

- Use of public fill in reclamation or earth-filling projects instead of marine/river
sand fill
- To maximizing filling or minimizing cutting in large-scale site formation projects
- To crush the surplus rock for on-site or off-site use
- Maximize the reuse of inert C&D material on site
- Maximize the use of recycled aggregates
- Maximize the use of steel or aluminium formworks and falseworks
- Make provisions for on-site sorting
Questions:
1. Is public fill or recycled aggregates free of charge?
2. Can a contractor sell the C&D material to other instead of dumping it at those
designated areas (as the C&D material become the property of the contractor
when it is removed from the site)?
Topic: Pipe Laying
Topic: Pipe Laying
1. What materials are commonly used for drainage pipe?

Precast concrete (PC) pipe:
- Precast concrete pipes can be either plain concrete or reinforced concrete1.
- Material standard:- BS 5911.
- Size available:- DN150 to DN3000, all readily available locally
- Standard length:- 0.45m to 5m (for DN600 or above, <3m)
- Normal working pressure:- atmospheric pressure2
- Strength:- strong, high resistance to external load and impact load
- Jointing methods:- flexible spigot and socket joints with rubber gasket ring,
and flexible rebate joints (for large diameter pipes > DN1500)
- Resistance corrosion:- generally resistance to attack by seawater but is
subject to corrosion attack in acidic and septic sewage conditions, and in
high sulphate environments.
- Corrosion protective measures:- internal PVC lining to be provide for the
use as sewers3.
- Unit cost:- (To be checked!!!)
- Unit Weight:- heavy and requires mechanical plant for handling and jointing
- Application:- widely used in gravity sewers (DN600 – DN2100)4
Vitrified clay (VC) pipe:

- Vitrified clay pipes can be either glazed type or normal chemical resistant
type5.
- Material standard:- BS EN 295.
- Size available:- DN150 to DN1200, (DN150 to DN700 are readily available
locally)
- Standard length:- 0.6m to 3m
- Normal working pressure:- atmospheric pressure6
- Strength:- high structural strength and good impact resistance7
- Jointing methods:- flexible mechanical joints
- Resistance to corrosion:- resistance to attack by acidic and alkalis, hydrogen
sulphide, erosion and scour
- Corrosion protective measures:- no particular protection measures to be
1
Large pipe size requires reinforced?
2
Precast concrete cannot be used as rising mains
3
The pipe must be sufficiently large for the lining to be applied. (how large should it be?)
4
For size <DN600, use VC pipe, for size >DN2100, box culvert may be used.
5
What are the differences?
6
VC concrete cannot be used as rising mains
7
Compressive strength = 100 to 200 MPa
1
Topic: Pipe Laying
used as pipe itself is corrosion resistance

- Unit cost:- (To check!!!)
- Unit Weight:- heavy and requires mechanical plant for handling and
jointing8
- Application:- widely used in small to medium size gravity sewers
Mild steel (MS) pipe:

- Material standard:- BS534, BS3600, and BS 2601
- Size available:- DN60 to DN2200 and is readily available locally
- Standard length:- 8m & 9m
- Normal working pressure:- 9 to 15 bars
- Strength:- mechanically very strong with high strength/weight ratio and
high impact resistance
- Jointing methods:- welded sleeve joints and butt welded joints; flexible
connections with slip-on type couplings; flanged joint or stepped coupling
- Resistance to corrosion:- subject to attack of acidic environment and
corrosive soils; and septic sewage
- Corrosion protective measures:- lining of epoxy or bituminous materials
- Unit weight:- heavy and requires mechanical plant for handling and jointing
- Application:- widely used in pressure sewers and mains, stream and bridge
crossings, submarine pipelines and outfalls.
- It can be fabricated either on or off site to allow flexibility in planning the
locations of various features like washouts, inspection tees, etc. in the
congested locations
Ductile iron (DI) pipe:

- Ductile iron is also known as “spheroidal graphite iron” which is the
replacement of cast iron.
- Material standard:- formerly BS 4772, now BS EN 595 (for potable water)
and BS EN 598 (for sewage)
- Size available:- DN80 to DN1600 and must be imported from overseas
- Standard length:- 5.5m (up to DN800) and 8m (over DN800) for flexible
joints, whereas 5m and 6m for flanged joints
- Normal working pressure:- 16 to 40 bars for pipes and 16 bars for flanges
- Strength:- mechanically very strong with high impact resistance and good
ductility and toughness.
8
DN200 – 37kg/m; DN300 – 72kg/m; DN400 – 136kg/m; DN500 – 174kg/m; DN600 – 230kg/m
2
Topic: Pipe Laying
- Jointing methods:- flexible push-in joints which capable of withstanding an

angular deflection of about 4°, and allowing a minimum withdrawal of
38mm when there is no deflection of the joint; flanged joins; flexible
mechanical joints (collars) and slip-on type coupling
- Resistance to corrosion:- subject to attack of acidic environment and
corrosive soils; and septic sewage, but is resistance superior to cast iron
- Corrosion protective measures:- sewer pipes should be lined internally with
high alumina cement mortar and coated externally with epoxy coating9,
whereas fittings should be lined with epoxy coating both internally and
externally.
- Application:- widely used in sewers and pressure mains with various types
of fittings available to facilitate the design and construction; built in pipes
shall have puddle flanges welded on
Cast iron (CI) pipe:

- Cast iron pipe is no longer used and is replaced by ductile iron pipes
- Material standard:- BS 473; BS 416; BS 1211
- Size available:- DN50 to DN225 and availability has to be checked as most
manufacturers switch to ductile iron pipes
- Standard length:- 1.83m to 5.5m for flexible joints, whereas 4 for flanged
joints
- Normal working pressure:- 6 to 12 bars
- Strength:- brittle and subject to damage during handling and laying
- Jointing methods:- flexible spigot and socket joints with rubber gasket rings;
flexible mechanical joints; flanged joints
- Resistance to corrosion:- more corrosion resistant than mild steel, but less
than ductile iron
- Corrosion protective measures:- any?
- Application:- mainly used in surface water drains, non-pressure pipes for
rainwater.
Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipe:

- Material standard:- For gravity sewers, DN110 to DN630 – BS 4660 and BS
9
The exact coating to apply should refer to the latest BS EN 598.
3
Topic: Pipe Laying
5481; whereas for pressure pipes, DN10 to DN610 – BS 3505 and BS 3506.
Different nature of water to be conveyed and the location of the pipe should
refer to different BS.
- Size available:- DN10 to DN630 and available locally and imported from
overseas
- Standard length:- 6m, 9m, and 12m
- Normal working pressure:- atmospheric pressure or 9 to 12 bars
- Strength:- lower structural strength and impact resistance, susceptible to
damage due to impact, point loading, must be carefully bedded and
backfilled to prevent damage by sharp objects; embrittlement with age
- Jointing methods:- flexible spigot and socket joints with rubber gasket
/elastomeric rings; flexible mechanical joints; sleeve type joints; rigid
solvent welded joints10
- Resistance to corrosion:- high resistant to corrosion
- Corrosion protective measures:- not necessary for any protective measures
- Unit weight:- light, flexible and easy to handle and joint
- Application:- mainly used in gravity sewer and low-pressure mains.
- UPVC pipes are not suitable for installations under direct sunlight.
Medium/High density polyethylene (MDPE/HDPE) pipe:

- Material standard:- BS 3284; BS6437; BS 6572; BS 6730
- Size available:- DN16 to DN500 and must be imported from overseas
- Standard length:- 10 to 12m
- Normal working pressure:- 2.5 to 10 bars
- Strength:- generally low structural strength which varies with time and
temperature11, susceptible to damage due to impact, point loading, must be
carefully bedded and backfilled to prevent damage by sharp objects
- Jointing methods:- butt or sleeve welded joints; mechanical joints which are
specially designed compression joints
- Resistance to corrosion:- high resistant to corrosion
- Corrosion protective measures:- not necessary for any protective measures
- Unit weight:- light, flexible and easy to handle and joint
- Application:- mainly used in small diameter submarine outfalls12
10
Solvent welded joint is generally more economical if flexibility movements are not required. Pipes and fittings above ground
shall have solvent welded spigot and socket joints as no movement is expected.
11
PE pipes will deteriorate in strength when exposed under prolonged sunlight
12
Why not UPVC? Are they interchangeable in term of applications?
4
Topic: Pipe Laying
Asbestos cement pipe:

- Use of asbestos cement pipes for both new works and maintenance works
has been discontinued.
- For maintenance purposes, damaged asbestos cement pipes should be
replaced by ductile iron pipes.
Galvanised steel pipe:

- Unlined galvanized steel pipes are no longer used for new works because
they are prone to both internal and external corrosion which will lead to
discolouration problems.
2. Can you briefly describe the procedure of laying and bedding pipes?
Excavation:
- Excavation shall not commence until the nature, location and size of
existing utilities which may be affected by the excavation have been
ascertained.
- Trench width of the trenches shall not exceed the effective trench width as
stated in the GS. (Because the structural design of underground pipes is
normally based on narrow trench conditions. The Contractor’s proposal for
wider trench widths should not be rejected without checking the structural
strength, and a higher strength pipe may be used to allow a wider trench
width.)
- A trench that is too narrow makes it difficult to compact the bedding zone
properly. A trench that is too wide increases the laying costs and loading on
the pipe
- Length of trench to be excavated shall depend on ground conditions, trench
support system, pipe lengths, traffic conditions and the effect on adjacent
properties.
Bedding pipes:
- Surfaces on which pipes for drainage works will be laid shall be cleaned
and objects which may damage the pipes shall be removed before pipes are
laid.
- It is important to ensure that the soil around the base of the pipe is not loose
which might be arising from the trenching. The loosened soil should be
well-compacted mechanically.
5
Topic: Pipe Laying
- Soft clay should be removed and replaced by non-cohesive soil13.

- The bottom of trenches on which pipes will be laid directly shall be shaped
to support the pipes uniformly along the length of the barrel. Between the
trench bottom and the pipe, a bedding angle of at least 90° must be realized
with materials that can be compacted.
- Holes shall be dug to prevent pipes resting on the sockets and to allow the
pipes to be jointed.
Laying pipes:
- The Engineer shall be allowed to inspect trenches, bedding, pipes, joints,
fittings and valves.
- The Contractor shall inspect pipes, joints, fittings and valves, including
internal and external coatings, immediately before and after pipelaying.
- Valves shall be inspected to ensure that they are in working order and are
capable of being fully opened and closed.
- Deleterious material shall be removed and damage shall be repaired
immediately before and after pipelaying.
- The inside of pipelines shall be kept clean and free from water, dirt, stones,
debris and deleterious material.
- Except when pipes are being jointed, the open ends of pipelines shall be
sealed with a wooden plug or stopper or by other methods.
- Measures shall be taken to prevent flotation of pipes.
- Pipelaying, testing and backfilling shall follow as closely as practicable on
excavation of the trench.
- Pipelines shall be laid in an uphill direction with sockets facing uphill.
- Pipe shall be laid in such a manner that water will not pond in locations
with zero or shallow gradients and such that the pipes will comply with
specified tolerances14.
Backfilling:
300mm above the top of the pipeline.
13
Soft clay may swell when in contact with ground water, and will subsequently cause settlement of the pipeline
14
How to achieve this? By installing the lowest portion as late as possible?
6
Topic: Pipe Laying
3. What are the common types of pipe joints?

Flanged joints:
- Application:- used for DI pipes, CI pipes and MS pipes
- Mechanism:- clamping the sealing rubber by means of bolts tightening
- Axial movement:- not allowed
- Angular deflection:- not allowed
- Benefits:- suitable for use wherever rigidity, strength, and joint tightness
required; used for above ground pipelines; for installation and removal of
valves and fittings; for connecting pipes with different materials.
- To ensure the bolt holes are correctly oriented before the bolts are tightened.
- The correct size of bolts and nuts shall be used.
- Bolt threads shall be lubricated and bolts shall be tightened using the correct
size of spanner.
- Bolts shall be tightened in diametrically opposite pairs working around the
bolt circle until all bolts are tightened to the torque recommended by the
manufacturer.
- Bolt holes shall be oriented symmetrically about the vertical diameter with
no bolt holes on the vertical diameter15.
- Elastomeric joint rings shall be the correct size and shall not protrude into
the bore of the pipe. The rings shall be temporarily fixed to the face of the
flange using a minimum amount of adhesive of a type recommended by the
manufacturer.
- Jointing compound or paste shall not be used for this purpose.
- Orientation of bolts holes is important as it will affect the orientation of
fittings, like valves, along the pipeline.
Flexible collar joints:

- The elastomeric joint rings shall be placed in position inside the grooves of
the sleeve.
- Smear the pipe ends with lubricant over a distance of at least 100 mm.
- The sleeve shall be placed on the end of the laid pipe and then pushed home
to the location mark on the pipe.
- The pipe to be jointed shall be placed in the sleeve and pushed home to the
location mark on the pipe16.
Flexible O-ring type spigot and socket joints:
15
Why? To avoid fixing a bolt at the lowest point?
16
What is the typical size (length) of the sleeve? And is the location marks mentioned are the same?
7
Topic: Pipe Laying
- Application:- used for PC pipes and VC pipes

- Mechanism:- smear the elastomeric joint ring with lubricant and place the
ring in position on the spigot end. The spigot shall be inserted into the
socket of the laid pipe and pushed home, causing the rubber gasket rings to
roll and or slide and be compressed sufficiently to effect a seal.
- Axial movement:- 10 to 25mm without deflection
- Angular deflection:- 0.5° to 3°
- Benefits:- jointing is easy and tight which reduces time for construction and
permissible movement and deflection allows the pipes to compensate for
ground movement, thermal expansion and contraction
Flexible O-ring type Tyton joints:

- Application:- used for DI pipes, CI pipes and UPVC pipes.
- Mechanism:- smear the elastomeric joint ring with lubricant and place the
ring in position on the spigot end. The spigot shall be inserted into the
socket or sleeve, causing the rubber gasket rings to roll and or slide and be
compressed sufficiently to effect a seal.
- Angular deflection:- 2° to 5°
- Benefits:- jointing is easy and tight which reduces time for construction for
pipes of smaller size and permissible movement and deflection allows the
pipes to compensate for ground movement, thermal expansion and
contraction
Flexible type mechanical joints:

- Application:- used for DI pipes and CI pipes
- Mechanism:- similar to Tyton type except that the gasket is clamped in
place by means of a gland ring bolted or screwed to the socket
- Benefits:- jointing requires skillful personnel; for construction for high
pressure pipes of large size and permissible movement and deflection
allows the pipes to compensate for ground movement, thermal expansion
and contraction
Detachable joints:
- Application:- used for DI pipes, MS pipes, UPVC pipes and concrete pipes
- Mechanism:- the gasket ring is clamped in place by means of a bolted gland
8
Topic: Pipe Laying
ring
- Benefits:- allow jointing pipes made of different materials and permissible
movement and deflection allows the pipes to compensate for ground
movement, thermal expansion and contraction
- A detachable joint comprises two flanges, the elastomeric joint rings and the
central collar.
- All these components shall be placed over the ends of the pipes before the
pipes are placed to the required line and level.
Flange adapters:
- Application:- used for DI pipes, MS pipes and UPVC pipes
- Mechanism:- a flanged collar joint with gaskets clamped by bolts tightening
at flange end and by a bolted gland ring at other end
- Angular deflection:- 0.5° to 3°
- Benefits:- allow forming a detachable flange onto the plain ended DI pipe or
steel pipe, on the downstream side of the valve and fittings to facilitate the
maintenance work, and permissible movement and deflection allows the
pipes to compensate for ground movement, thermal expansion and
contraction
- Placing the flange adapter on the plain end before the bolts are tightened.
Solvent welded joints:

- Made by applying solvent cement to the pipes to be jointed and pushed the
pipes home.
Welded joints:
- Application:- used for steel pipes and HDPE pipes.
- Mechanism:- it involves the fusion jointing of pipe materials.
- Axial movement:- not allowed
- Angular deflection:- not allowed
- Benefits:- the pipe can be jointed to desirable bends to suit the actual site
conditions
- Jointing at site must be checking carefully
4. How to protect the pipe joints?
9
Topic: Pipe Laying
- The flanged joints, slip-on type couplings and flange adapors shall be
cleaned to remove all moisture, dust, oil, grease and deleterious material.
- The joint shall be coated with primer.
- Mastic filler shall be applied to any imperfection to ensure that a smooth
surface is available for the application of anticorrosion tape17.
- At least two layers anticorrosion tape shall be applied to the joint.
- For fresh water mains, petroleum type anticorrosion tapes should be
provided for steel joints and bituminous anticorrosion tapes for steel pipes.
5. What is thrust block?

- Thrust blocks shall be used to resist forces at bends, branches and stopends
in pressure pipelines for drainage works.
- Concrete for thrust block shall be Grade 20 as stated in GS.
- The bearing face and other faces shall be cast against undisturbed ground.
- Excavation required for the block beyond the trench width shall be carried
out after the pipe or fitting has been jointed18.
6. What precautionary actions should be taken in handling pipe materials?

Unloading:
- Pipes are to be checked on unloading. Possible damage must be reported on
the delivery note.
- Use lifting belts instead of chain or ropes which may damage the pipes
- The lifting belts must be placed outside around the pallets and outside the
base timber
- Steer the pallets manually to prevent them from colliding with anything
- Do not move the pallets on the truck with the aid of levers or crowbars
- Do not allow the pipes to be impacted by any hard object19
Storage:
- Do not put the pallets down on to hard ground with a bang
- Put the pallets down only on ground that is sufficiently hard to prevent the
base timber sinking into it
- Leave sufficient space between individual pallets
- To avoid damage to the sealing elements, store individual pipes only on a
wooden base.
- Store fittings standing upright on their sockets
17
Is anticorrosion tape used for joint protection only?
18
Why is it necessary?
19
Crane hook, chain, etc.
10
Topic: Pipe Laying
- Avoid stacking pipes in areas where long grass may grow as this grass can
catch fire in dry seasons
Transportation to the pipe trench:

- Transport individual pipes with belts
- Preferably transport the complete pallets to the point of laying before
opening them. Most pallets can be split up in two or three smaller pallets
- Put down the parcel on flat ground so that the pipes do not slip when the
securing bands are cut
- Never transport individual pipes in the excavator shovel
- Avoid stacking pipes next the trench opening to prevent the pipes falling
into the trench.
7. What types of pipe bedding can be used?

Granular bed:
- Aggregates for granular bed shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 150
mm thick and each layer shall be compacted using a plate vibrator.
- Holes shall be dug to prevent pipes resting on the sockets and allow the
pipes to be jointed.
- The pipes shall be laid directly on the granular bed and temporary supports
shall not be used.
- Granular bed shall be Type A material as specified in the Contract and shall
consist of hard, clean, crushed slag, gravel, crushed rock, crushed concrete
or crushed inert demolition material having a grading within the required
limits.
- Aggregates for granular bed shall have the required compaction fraction.
- Small size aggregates are not preferred in soft fine grained soils or where
the formation may be soften by wet conditions.
Concrete bed, haunch and surround:

- Polyethylene sheeting or a blinding layer shall be placed depends on ground
condition on the trench bottom before concreting.
- Pipes shall be supported at the required level by precast concrete blocks.
- One support shall be placed adjacent to each end and the spacing between
supports shall not exceed 3 m.
- Compressible sheeting shall be placed between the pipes and supports.
- Flexible joints shall be formed in concrete bed, haunch and surround at
flexible joints in pipelines.
11
Topic: Pipe Laying
- Pipes for drainage work which are 1m or less below the surface of a
carriageway shall be protected with Grade 20 concrete surround20.
Fill material surround:

- Fill material21 around the pipes shall be special fill material and shall be
deposited in layers not exceeding 100 mm thick to a level 300 mm above
the top of the pipe.
- Fill material shall be compacted by hand-rammers or manually operated
power equipment.
- Fill material within 300 mm above the top of the pipe shall be compacted to
obtain a relative compaction of at least 85% throughout.
8. Any tolerance in laying pipelines?

Gravity pipelines:
- The horizontal alignment of the pipelines shall be within 20 mm of the
specified line22.
- The invert level of the pipeline shall be within 6 mm of the specified invert
level and shall be such that there is no backfall at any point.
Pressure pipelines:
- The line of the pipeline shall be within 50 mm of the specified line.
- The invert level of the pipeline shall be within 20 mm of the specified invert
level.
9. What should be cautious in pipe connections?

Connections to structures:
- The joints between the pipes and structures shall be watertight.
- Protective coatings shall be removed over the length to be built in.
- Pipe collars and sockets shall not be built in to structures.
- Two flexible joints shall be provided in pipelines adjacent to the outside
faces of structures to cater for differential settlement and lateral
displacement.
Connections to pipes:
- To select the proper fittings which are compatible for both materials (collar)
20
Concrete surround is not always beneficial to the pipes. In the event that ground settlement has induced sufficiently stress to
open up the welded joints or flexible joints, the surrounding concrete will become an obstacle to repair operation.
21
Is the fill material to be applied to both granular bed and concrete bed?
22
Actually, there is no prescribed alignment in the Contract, so the referenced alignment should be instructed by the Engineer on
site taking into account the site conditions, but often it is only a mutual agreed one between the contractor and the engineer.
12
Topic: Pipe Laying
10. What should be cautious for abandonment of pipes or manholes?

For top of a pipe or the bottom of a manhole is 1m or less below ground:
- The pipe/manhole shall be removed and disposed.
- The void shall be filled with foam concrete, granular fill material or special
fill material23.
For top of a pipe or the bottom of a manhole is more than 1m below ground:
- The pipe/manhole shall be filled with foam concrete or special grout.
For both cases:

- Manholes shall be demolished to 1 m below finished ground level
- Foam concrete used shall be composed of OPC/PPFAC, fine aggregate,
water, admixtures for accelerating or retarding the setting time and foam to
reduce the density and to produce a flowing itself levelling material.
- Foam concrete shall be filled by pumping or by gravity.
- The lowest point shall be sealed with concrete, bricks or else and filling
shall start from the lowest point.
11. When should be the pipelines cleaned?

- After the pipeline has been tested
- After the Temporary Works required for testing have been removed
- After parts of the pipeline removed for testing have been reconnected
- Not more than 7 days before the pipeline is handed over
12. What kind of inspection would be carried out for pipelines?

CCTV:
- This method covers the internal inspection of pipelines by means of closed
circuit television.
- A CCTV colour camera shall be moved through the pipeline
- The video recording system shall be operated during the complete
inspection to provide a continuous record of the inspection and information
on the monitor screen.
Other inspection:
- The cleanliness, bore, linearity and joints of pipelines of 450mm diameter
or less shall be checked by pulling a mandrel through the completed
23
What is special fill material?
13
Topic: Pipe Laying
pipeline after cleaning24.

- The mandrel shall be 750 mm long and 12 mm less in diameter than the
nominal diameter of the pipe.
13. What kinds of tests should be carried out with respect to drainage works?
Pipes:
- Tests of pipes and fittings according to the relevant British Standard.
- In case the results of any test do not comply with the BS requirements,
additional samples shall be provided for re-test.
- Any non-compliance in the results of re-test shall render the whole batch of
material as non-compliance.
Aggregates for granular bed:

- Tests shall be carried out on the aggregates to determine the particle size
distribution and the ten percent fines value, and the compaction fraction
value.
- Requirements25 set forth in the GS26.
Precast concrete units for manholes, chambers and gullies:

- Each sample of precast concrete units shall be tested in accordance with the
relevant BS.
- In case the results of any test do not comply with the BS requirements,
additional samples shall be provided for re-test.
- Any non-compliance in the results of re-test shall render the whole batch of
material as non-compliance.
Manhole covers, gully gratings and kerb overflow weirs:

- Tests shall be carried on these accessories with respect to weight and
loading capacity with the method of testing stated in the GS.
- They shall withstand the test load without fracture or cracking.
Gravity pipelines for drainage works:

- Testing shall be carried out on completed gravity pipelines in respect of
watertightness and infiltration in strict accordance with the frequency,
methods and compliance criteria specified in the GS.
24
How about for pipes larger than 450mm diameter? Why swabbing is not required for sewers?
25
Or BS 812:Part 103? To clarify.
26
No non-compliance criteria is provided in the GS. Why?
14
Topic: Pipe Laying
Pressure pipelines for drainage works:

- Testing shall be carried out on completed pressure pipelines in respect of
watertightness under a testing pressure.
14. Please delineate the testing on gravity pipelines?

Testing carried out on sewers:
- Water/air test 27 (for pipe size <900) or visual inspection (>900) after
jointing the pipes and placing the bedding, and before placing of haunch or
surround and depositing or compacting the fill material, and
- Water/air test after placing the haunch and surround, or depositing and
compacting the fill material, and
- Infiltration test not more than 7 days before handing over
Testing carried out on surface drainage:

- Infiltration test is not required
- Only one testing is required28 for either conditions and should be carried
out in the similar sense as the sewers.
Water test:
- The pipeline shall be cleaned and then sealed at both ends.
- The pipes may be strutted to prevent movement.
- Water shall be filled into the pipeline through the lower end and shall be
kept for 2 hours for absorption to take place.
- Apply and maintain a constant head of water for 30 minutes29.
- The applied head should be 1.2m above pipe soffit at the high end and less
than 6m above invert of the low end. If this is necessary, the test should be
carried out in stages. Anyway, the testing pressure should be related to the
possible maximum level of ground water above the sewer.
- During the test, water shall be re-filled regularly for any drop in water head.
- Such amount of water added shall be taken as the water leaked out.
- This amount of water leaked out shall be less than the permitted leakage of
water calculated from the equation stated in GS.
- (CHECKED!!)
- In addition, there shall be no discernable water leakage during the test.
27
The choice of whether air test or water test to be employed is left to the Contractor. Air test is quicker and easier but unable to
locate the fault area readily.
28
Less stringent for surface drainage.
29
Overall testing time for water test is 2.5 hours, i.e. 150 minutes.
15
Topic: Pipe Laying
Factors affecting water test:

- Porous or cracked pipes
- Damaged, faulty or improperly assembled pipe joints
- Defective plugs
- Pipes or plugs moving
Air test:
- The pipeline is cleaned and sealed as mentioned above.
- Air shall be pumped into the pipeline until a pressure of 100mm of water in
a U-tube manometer is developed and shall be kept for 5 minutes for
stabilization of air temperature.
- Adjust the air pressure to 100mm of water and the test shall start.
- No further pumping shall be carried out during testing and pressure change
shall be read from the manometer at the end of the 5-minute testing
period30.
- The air pressure shall remain 75 mm head of water at the end of the test.
- Both water and air tests shall be carried out on the completed pipeline
between structures.
Factors affecting air test:

- Temperature changes of the air in the pipe due to direct sunshine or cold
wind acting on the pipe barrel31.
- Dryness of the pipe wall
- Leakage plugs or other apparatus
Visual inspection:
- The inside of the pipeline shall be inspected visually, and infiltration or
damages shall be recorded.
- Any trace of infiltration or dislocated joint rings or damage to the pipe
identified shall render the pipeline non-compliance. Remedial work shall be
carried out and the pipeline shall be re-tested, as other cases of
non-compliances.
Infiltration test:
- The infiltration test shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant BS.
- The test shall be carried out on the complete pipeline between structures,
30
Overall testing time for air test is 10 minutes.
31
A change in 1°C may result in change in air pressure of 38mm water gauge.
16
Topic: Pipe Laying
including manholes and etc. within the pipeline system.
15. Please delineate the testing on pressure pipelines?

Testing carried on pressure pipelines:
- On the complete pipeline, unless the specified test pressure would otherwise
be exceeded, after jointing the pipes and placing the bedding, and before
placing of haunch or surround and depositing or compacting fill material,
and
- On the complete pipeline after placing the haunch and surround, or
depositing and compacting the fill material.
Testing procedure:
- The pipeline shall be cleaned and then sealed with blank flanges and
secured with temporary concrete blocks
- Water shall be filled into the pipeline and all air shall be removed to prevent
water hammer.
- The water pressure shall be increased to testing pressure and kept for 2
hours for absorption.
- The pressure shall then be increased by pumping water into the pipeline
until the specified testing pressure is attained at the lowest part of the
pipeline.
- The pressure shall be kept constant for at least 1 hour32.
- At the end of the 1 hour period, the pressure shall be increased to the
specified test pressure, and the pumps and water supply shall be
disconnected.
- The pipeline is then left for 1 hour test period and no water shall be added
into the pipeline.
- At the end of the test period, the pressure inside the pipe shall be recorded.
- Reconnect the pumps and water supply points and increase the pressure to
the testing pressure.
- Draw off the water from the pipeline until the pressure dropped to that at the
end of the test33.
- The amount of water drawn off shall be considered as the water leaked out.
- The water leaked out shall not be greater than the permitted leakage as
calculated from the equation stated in GS.
- In case of any non-compliance, the Contractor shall investigate the reason
32
What is the purpose of this 1 hour period?
33
Why measure the water drawn off in stead of water added?
17
Topic: Pipe Laying
and carry out remedial work, and re-test accordingly.
Testing pressure:
- The testing pressure shall be 1.5 times the maximum working pressure in
the pipeline, or
- The maximum working pressure plus 5 bars, or
- The maximum working pressure plus surge pressure, whichever is smallest.
16. How to ensure the pipe material provided by the Contractor is suitable?
Material submission for approval:
- To ensure the right things are submitted
- To ensure the product comply with the contract requirements by checking
manufacturers’ literature. In any cases, the Contractor shall allow the
Engineer to inspect the manufacturing process.
(e.g. supplier, stock availability, lead time for procurement, past job
references, recommended construction methods, etc.)
- To ensure certificates with regard to each pipe material, size, type, etc have
been submitted showing that the material complies with the contract
requirements.
(e.g. angular deflection, pressure rating, straightness, watertightness at joint)
On delivery of the materials:

- To ensure the correct materials have been delivered.
- To ensure the certificates have been provided for each batch of the material
delivered to the Site.
- Samples shall be selected for testing for each batch of materials. The
sampling methods and testing frequency shall be referred to the contract
requirements.
- Any material which does not comply with the contract requirements shall be
rejected.
- It should be noted that any material delivered to the Site must not be
removed unless instruction is given by the Engineer.
- To ensure the materials are transported, handled and stored properly.
18
Topic: Trenchless Pipe Construction Method
1. Why use trenchless pipe installation methods?

Worldwide trend:
- It is a worldwide trend today to adopt the tunnelling method rather than the
open trench method for constructing large pipelines.
- This is true especially in urban areas where the open trench method causes
disruption to traffic and affects normal operations of existing underground
utilities and services.
- Such public nuisances are intolerable to the people, even for public works
construction which will surely result in a better living to them.
Practice in Hong Kong:

- In Hong Kong, trenchless pipe installation methods bring a lot of
convenience.
- There is an extensive network of utilities laid under the road, open trench
pipe laying method appears very difficult.
- Prolonged disruption to traffic and public is unavoidable in case utility
diversion has to be carried out.
2. Can you describe briefly different types of trenchless pipe installation methods
other than pipe jacking adopted in Hong Kong?
Pipe ramming:
- Pipe ramming makes use of pneumatically powered impact tool
- Pipe to be installed is placed at a designed degree on the platform in an
excavated entry pit and aligned with the desired installation path.
- Specially designed adaptors allow the impact tool to be locked into the back
of the pipe
- Once the first piece of pipe completely rammed into the ground, the tool is
removed to allow a second piece of pipe to be welded in place.
- The process continues until all pipes are installed.
- Pipe ramming can be classified into two system, viz. soil displacement
system and pipe pushing system with soil removal.
- Soil displacement system is operated by compressed air. A soil displacement
hammer drives itself through the soil while towing PVC or PE pipes. This
system only targets for small pipe size as limited by the soil compaction.
- Pipe pushing system with soil removal arrangement allow the large size
open-ended pipe can be rammed through the ground from a start to an exit
1
pit. Accumulating spoil inside the pipe is partially removed during the
ramming process and totally removed after the bore completed. As soil is
not compacted or totally displaced but excavated by the system, minimum
ground cover is possible. System suitable for most soil types but excluding
solid rock formations. Little risk of ground surface subsidence or creation of
voids whilst using the technique.
Horizontal directional drilling (HDD):

- A pilot hole drilled at a prescribed angle from horizontal by a jet bit/cutting
head attached to the leading end of a pilot drill string.
- Drill path is monitored by electronic package near the cutting head, which
detects the relation of the drill string to the earth’s magnetic field and its
inclination.
- After completing the pilot hole, the hole must be enlarged to a suitable
diameter for the product pipeline.
- For example, if the pipeline to be installed is 450mm diameter, the hole may
be enlarged to 600mm in diameter or larger.
- The reamer is attached to the drill string on the bank opposite to drilling rig
and pulled back into the pilot hole.
- Bentonite slurry pumped into the enlarged hole to maintain the integrity of
the hole and to finish out cuttings.
- Once the drilled hole is enlarged, the product pipeline can be pulled through
it.
- Pipeline is prefabricated on the bank opposite the drilling rig.
- A reamer is attached to the drill string, and then connected to the pipeline
pullhead via a swivel.
- The swivel prevents any translation of the reamer’s rotation into the drilled
hole
3. What is pipe jacking?

History of pipe jacking
- Pipe jacking is one type of sophisticated micro-tunnelling technique
originally developed for placing concrete pipes under railways tracks,
highways and rivers.
- Nowadays, as pipe jacking technology has greatly advanced to
accommodate larger pipe sizes and longer jacking lengths, the method has
become a cost-effective alternative to the conventional open trench method
when it is desirable to keep surface disturbance to a minimum, especially in
2
densely populated urban areas. Public nuisances such as noise pollution,

traffic disruption, ground settlement etc. caused by open trench method can
therefore be avoided.
Basic mechanism of pipe jacking:

- Pipe jacking is the technique of installing pipelines by hydraulic jacking a
pipe string, including a tunnelling shield in front, from a launching shaft to
a reception shaft or an outfall.
- The tunnelling shield either contains electrical and mechanical equipment
inside for carrying out the excavation work, or is used to accommodate
workers to carry out the excavation work manually (called a hand shield or
open-manual shield).
- At the start of pipe jacking operation, the pipe string consists of the
tunnelling shield only.
- Jacking pipes are added one after another to the end of the pipe string as the
preceding pipe/shield advance.
- This procedure is repeated until the pipe string reaches the reception shaft of
the outfall.
Micro-tunnelling:
- Micro-tunnelling is pipe jacking of small-sized non-man-entry pipelines
using steerable remote-controlled mechanical tunnelling shields.
- There is no rigid size limit, but pipelines of size less than 900 to 1000mm
are normally considered to be not suitable for man-entry.
Mechanised tunnelling shields:

- Mechanised tunnelling shields have many different designs.
- The most common design consists of a circular rotating cutting wheel with a
number of tools such as knife and teeth, cutting disc, rotating pick, ripper
and/or cutting edge.
- The cutting tools can reach all parts of the excavation face with every
revolution of the cutting wheel (a full-face shield)
- Some shields are for hard rock excavation (e.g. those with rock cutting discs)
while others are for softer ground.
- Full-face cutting wheels may have a small amount of overcut, i.e. the
diameter of the tunnel is slightly larger than the external diameter of the
pipes.
- Other mechanised shields may have a backacter or roadheader (with a
3
rotaing cutting head) extending from a suspended boom (arm) to carry out
excavation.
- The excavation tool may be able to reach the full face of the excavation or
just part of it.
- Most mechanised shields contain independent steering jacks to adjust the
vertical or horizontal direction of advance of the shield and to
advance/retrieve the cutting wheel.
Hand shields and open-faced mechanised shields:

- The face of the excavation is not supported.
- This is acceptable if the ground is firm.
- However for soft ground or water bearing ground, shields which provide
support to the excavation face should be employed.
- Support can be accomplished by applying pressured slurry (bentonite-based
or polymer-based) or compressed air to the excavation chamber, or by earth
pressure balance method of muck removal (used in ground with cohesive
soil; the amount of muck removal at the excavation chamber is restricted to
keep the soil level sufficiently high to maintain support)
Circulation system for excavated material:

- The excavation material is transported back to the launch shaft for disposal
by pumped slurry circulated along pipelines; or screw conveyor together
with either muck wagon on rails or pumping along pipeline after addition of
liquid.
- If slurry pipe is used to transport the muck, a stone crusher is usually
provided behind the cutting wheel to crush down rock fragments or other
hard materials.
- After pumping, the slurry is passed through a slurry separation plant to
remove the excavated materials by sedimentation, centrifugal forces, etc.
The cleaned slurry is recycled after reconditioning by addition of chemicals.
Jacking pipes:
- The jacking pipes are launched by hydraulic jacks in the launch shaft.
- They have uniform cross-section throughout the length including the joints.
- Jacking pipes for sewage/stormwater conveyance can be made of precast
concrete, ductile iron, vitrified clay, glass reinforced plastic (GRP) or other
materials.
- The pipes should be designed to withstand the maximum jacking load to be
4
applied throughout the drive.

- The required jacking force depends on the friction between the pipe and the
surrounding soil and the point resistance exerted on full-face cutting wheels.
- For long lengths of drive, the jacking load may exceed the allowable load of
the pipes. In such case, intermediate jacks can be introduced in the middle
of the pipeline, or injecting lubricant to the outside of the pipes.
Control of alignment of jacking pipe:

- The line and level of the shield is checked either by normal survey method
or by a laser theodolite in the launch shaft, which emits a laser beam
towards a target plate inside the shield.
- Any deviation of the beam from the target can be corrected by applying
steering corrections through the steering jacks in the shield.
- For drives longer than about 200m, the accuracy of the laser beam will
diminish. In such case (and in curve drives), the laser theodolite will have to
be moved into the pipe to form a moving total station.
- In the majority of pipe jacking operations using mechanised shields and in
all micro-tunnelling operations, monitoring of the real-time survey results as
well as control pf the pipe jacking operation is carried out at a control panel
housed in a container at the launch shaft.
- The control panel can control almost all operations including movement of
jacks at the launch shaft and at interjack stations, steering of the shields,
overcut control, slurry and compressed air circulation, injection of
lubricants, etc.
4. How to overcome the obstructions encountered during pipe jacking?

Obstruction commonly encountered during pipe jacking:
- Based on past experience, obstructions such as rock, concrete, steel, derelict
sheetpiles and timber may be encountered from time to time.
- The risk is especially high in old reclamation areas where the ground may
contain much junk and debris.
- Mechanised shields designed for excavation in soft ground may be unable
to overcome these obstructions and got stuck in the middle.
- Even shields with rock cutters may not be able to overcome large metallic
obstructions or reinforced concrete.
- Tree roots or wood may be very difficult to excavate by the cutting tools,
may not enter the crushing chamber or may block the slurry pumping
direction in an attempt to dislodge the obstruction, bring it to the excavation
5
face for excavation or make it enter the slurry pipe.

- Hard materials present in only part of the excavation face may cause the
shield to deviate sharply.
Ways to mitigate the problems:

- In case the risk and consequences are high, it is more preferable to use
either tunnelling machines capable of hard rock excavation, hand shields or
shields which allow human access to remove the obstruction.
- Hand shields or shields which allow human access to inspect and overcome
obstructions manually may offer greater flexibility than rock-cutting
shields.
- In case an obstruction cannot be overcome during a drive, it may still be
necessary to sink a rescue shaft from ground level or to jack an oversized
rescue tunnel (normally a steel casing) from the reception shaft to the
tunnelling machine to remove the obstruction.
5. What can be done if the shield getting stuck due to high frictional forces?
Shields stuck due to high frictional forces:
- Sometimes, the friction between the pipe and the soil may become so high
that no movement occurs even when the jacking force is increased to the
maximum allowable.
- This phenomenon is much prominent in jacking pipe through highly
cohesive soils and the driving length is long.

- Injection of lubricant to the outer surface of the pipes (through ports along
the pipes) can reduce the jacking force significantly.
- This applies especially to sandy soils. Lubricants are usually
bentonite-based, with polymer or other additives to suit the type of ground
encountered.
- Some shields manufacturers supply full automatic lubrication systems
which inject calculated amounts of lubricant at pre-programmed locations
and intervals.
- The volume of lubricant pumped in should be larger than the volume of the
annular space created by overcut of the shield.
- In addition, the ground can be conditioned by proper control of the slurry
for face support and muck removal.
- Bentonite slurry, with polymers or other additives, can stabilize sandy soil
6
so that it has less potential to flow around the machine and increase the
friction.
- In cohesive soil, the slurry increases excavatability of the material and
prevent it from smearing the cutting wheel and thereby reducing the
effectiveness of the cutting tools.
- However, the use of polymer in gravelly or sandy soils should be subject to
caution as improper selection can result in loss of face support.
- There are other causes of high friction and high jacking force, including
sharp steering corrections, dewatering in non-cohesive soil (which increases
the normal stress on the soil), too little overcut and idling of pipe jacking
work.
6. What can be done if the shield getting stuck due to worn-out cutting tools?
Shields stuck due to worn-out cutting tools:
- For long drive in stiff soil, the cutting tools may be worn-out, causing the
shield getting stuck in the middle no matter how large the jacking force is
provided.

- Use of shields designed for more heavy-duty excavation and with more
resistant cutting tools (e.g. shields for hard rock excavation, cutting wheel
with hydraulic drive unit, disc-cutters and cutting tools with tungsten
carbide bits)
- Use of shields which allow access to the cutting wheel for replacement of
cutting tools in the middle of the drive.
- If all above measures are not implemented, the defected shields have to be
replaced/repair by sinking a rescue pit in the midway or jack an oversized
rescue tunnel from the reception shaft to the tunnelling machine to remove
the shield.
7. How to minimize the deviation in line/level of the jack pipes?

Deviation in line/level:
- Under the contract, tolerances are set for the deviation in line/level of pipe
jacking. The horizontal alignment of the jacking pipe should within 50 to
75mm from the designed alignment, whereas the level should within 25 to
50mm.
- The causes of deviation are mainly the presence of hard material in part of
the excavation face; or very soft ground; or the shield moving from soft
7
ground into hard ground at a slanting interface angle.

- In these condition, use of a shield suitable for hard rock excavation alone
will not solve the problem.

- Employment of a skilful tunnelling machine operator who can correctly
identify the soil conditions at the excavation face at an early stage and steer
the shield appropriately to minimize deviations is considered essential.
- If the above situations are known to exist in advance, it is suggested that the
ground be grouted to stiffen the softer soil. This will enable the cutting
wheel to grind against the hard material/hard ground without deviating in
line/level.
- The best measure to deal with very soft ground is still grouting prior to pipe
jacking. Grouting should be aimed at improving the strength of the soil,
minimizing settlement of the jacked pipe and perhaps providing long-term
support to the jacked pipe.
- In order to minimize the risk of excessive deviation in level resulting in
negative fall or inadequate gradient, it is suggested that the design gradient
of pipes should not be less than 0.2% (or 200mm fall in every 100m length),
and the difference in invert level between manholes should not be less than
100mm as far as possible.
8. How to minimize the ground settlement or ground collapse arising from pipe
jacking?
Causes of ground settlement/ground collapse:
- Voids might be present in the ground concerned prior to pipe jacking.
- Boulders may be dislocated by the shields, causing void in the top portion
soil of the jack pipes.
- Loss of ground water due to dewatering.
- Loss of fine particles due to flushing.
- Cracks may be formed in the carriageway or footpath above the line of pipe
jacking; nearby structures may be damages; and nearby utilities may be
affected.

- Hand shields which have no face support would encounter higher ground
settlement. Use of mechanised shields with full face support can minimize
the settlement.
8
- There should be sufficient cover provided to the jacking pipes.
9. In general, how to minimize the risk associated with pipe jacking method?
Advance planning and making suitable allowance:
- To obtain better knowledge of the ground conditions and the locations of
underground utilities/structures through site investigation
- To use tunnelling shields, equipment and techniques which can cater for the
situations concerned
- To use experience personnel and improvement in workmanship
Other recommended measures to tackle the risks:

- If the pipe jacking works are of sufficient large scale, site investigation and
preparation work could be carried out in form of an advance contract. In
addition, surveys by geophysical methods should be carried out for the
entire route of pipe jacking.
- If boulders or other obstructions are likely to be present, it is advisable to
use shields designed for hard rock excavation. Alternatively, hand shields or
shields which allow human access for inspection and clearance of
obstruction may be used. If a shield for hard rock excavation is used,
pre-grouting of the locations suspected to contain obstructions is
recommended in order to reduce the risk of excessive deviation in line/level.
- Excessive increase in jacking forces due to increase in frictional forces
between shield and soil can be minimized through lubrication and/or
conditioning of the ground by the slurry.
- Shields which allow access to the cutting wheel for replacement of cutting
tools should be used if wearing out of cutting tools is a significant risk.
10. What is the importance of site investigation for pipe jacking?

Site investigation at design stage:
- Site investigation should be aimed at finding out the geological ground
conditions and the existence or not of possible obstructions to pipe jacking,
and locating underground utilities and structures which might obstruct the
construction of shafts.
- The risk of the shield being obstructed by boulders, etc. might not occur if
site investigation had revealed the existence of such materials and the
contractor had decided to use shields with rock cutters accordingly.
- The risk of excessive deviation in line/level due to shield moving from soft
ground into hard ground at a slanting angle could be minimized if this was
9
revealed in site investigation and the contractor had elected to apply

grouting to the ground. This information would be available for
examination by the tenderers.
- Obstruction to shaft construction by utilities etc. would not occur if the
locations of the shafts had been finalized, utilities and underground
structures existing within each shaft located, and necessary revision to the
permanent works and/or utilities diversion works had been initiated at the
design stage.
- An intensive pre-tender site investigation will assist the contractor in
selecting the most appropriate type of shield, equipment and techniques for
the works, and in reducing his risks due to unknowns and uncertainties. This
may in turn result in lowering tender prices to the benefit of the Employer.
Inadequacy of site investigation:

- Boreholes and trial pits can only be drilled/dug at a relatively small number
of locations. They cannot give a complete picture of the ground conditions
and utilities present.
Utility detection:
- Survey by geophysical methods using ground probing radars (GPR),
electromagnetic detectors or other devices at ground level is suggested.
Electromagnetic detectors are useful for survey of metallic utility ducts,
while GPR is useful for both utility survey and survey of lithology and
boundaries between soil layers. It is suggested that the surveys should cover
the entire route of pipe jacking.
11. What criteria affect the rates of progress for pipe jacking?
Choice of shields:
- In general, mechanised shields have a higher rate of progress than hand
shield
- Among the mechanised shields, full-face slurry shield is fastest.
Ground conditions:
- Excavation in sand appears easier than rock. For “Herrenknecht AVN
1200C” shield, the average rate of progress is about 4m/day in rock and
8m/day in sand.
- However, extremely soft clay would have adverse effect to the pipe jacking
operation.
10
12. Can you compare the cost for pipe construction by open trench method and
pipe jacking method?
Ways for comparison:
- Construction of pipeline by trenchless method is measured in the BQ by a
number of items comprising establishment of equipment, temporary work
shafts and pipe laying. Therefore the unit rate of trenchless method for a
certain pipe size and depth is calculated by summing the total measured cost
tabulated in the BQ and dividing by the corresponding pipe length.
- For unit rates of open trench method, they can be directly extracted from the
relevant BQ rates for pipelaying as these items cover all the necessary
construction works and are already itemized according to pipe size and
depth.
- Besides the BQ rates for pipelaying, the cost of traffic diversion should also
be included.
Results of comparison:
- According to the previous contracts, the ratio between the unit rates of the
trenchless method and the open trench method ranges between 2 and 7.
- It is also worth noting that for long and deep sewers to be constructed, the
difference between the cost for trenchless method and open trench method
is small.
- In addition, if the indirect cost such as social costs and economic costs
arising from the traffic delay, loss of business of nearby commercial,
environmental impact, increase in safety risk, etc., it will provide a strong
case for adoption of less disruptive, albeit more costly trenchless
techniques.1
13. What types of jacking pipes are adopted under your contract?
Precast concrete pipe:
- Size:- DN900 (900mm internal diameter)
- Length:- 3m
- Weight:- 2050kg (or 680kg/m)
- An embedded steel collar is equipped as the socket. A cushion ring is also
provided at the collar end of the pipe with special epoxy resin.
Ductile iron pipe:
1
It is estimated that economic cost for a 80-day construction period is found to be 35% of the construction cost.
11
14. What are the general requirements for pipe jacking work under your contract?
Choice of construction method and plant:
- The drawings and specification laid down in the contract have defined the
basic requirements for finished manholes and pipe jacking works, and have
covered the appropriate techniques that may be applicable to the works.
- However, such details should not define the limits of hand or mechanised
work or type of plant to be used.
- The contractor should not be precluded from seeking approval to modify the
designs to suit his method of working or to other methods of shaft sinking
and pipe jacking provided that the works as completed conform to the
drawings and specification.
Working area:
- The working area for pipe jacking which includes the jacking/reception pits,
positioning of equipment, stockpiling of materials, accommodation, etc.
should all within the site boundary with sufficient lighting and guarding.
Pipe jacking personnel:

- All personnel employed by the contractor in the execution of the pipe
jacking works including sinking of and attendance at shafts shall be
experienced and competent in their respective tasks and shall work only
under the direct control of a suitable supervisor.
- Operators shall be aware of all specified tolerances and maximum allowable
jacking loads.
Pre-work site investigation:

- The contractor shall notify all utility companies before the commencement
of pipe jacking works.
- Trial excavations shall be carried out to identify the location of any utility
which could be interfered with or damaged by the pipe jacking works.
Support to nearby sensitive structures:

- Adequate temporary support should be provided to ensure the stability of
the existing nullahs, box culverts, roads, footpaths, verges, and adjacent
structures and properties during the execution of pipe jacking work.
Pipe jacking shield:
12
- The pipe jacking work should be undertaken using a full face earth balance
slurry shield suitable for the ground conditions or any other suitable method
as approved by the engineer.
- The shield should include a powered cuter head capable of working through
varying ground conditions including boulders and stones.
- The shield should be equipped with steering jacks for adjusting the
alignment and level.
Transfer of thrust load to the jacking pipe:

- The thrust load should be imparted to the sewers/pipes through a suitable
thrust ring which should be sufficiently rigid to ensure even distribution of
the load.
- Resilient packing material should be used between the sewer/pipe end and
the thrust ring.
- A compressible packer should be included between the thrusting surfaces at
each joint. The packer should be placed in position and securely attached to
each pipe.
15. What should be done before the commencement of pipe jacking work?
Submission of method statements:
- The method statement should include details of the proposed working
method, plant and equipment to be used, method to overcome obstruction,
details of trial trenches in the vicinity of nullah, box culvert or roads, safety
measures, monitoring proposal on ground movement, pressure, line and
level monitoring and emergency/contingency measures.
- The above method statement should be forwarded to the relevant authorities
for comments and agreement.
Submission of temporary works design:

- It is the responsibility of the contractor to design all temporary works.
- The contractor should submit the design of temporary works for shafts and
pipe jacks, together with the checking certificates prepared by the ICE.
- The design should include the structural and geotechnical design of all
shafts and pits as well as the method of protecting the excavation from
traffic and the method of dealing with ground water.
- The thrust wall for pipe jacking should be designed to transfer jacking
forces to the ground without visible settlement or deflection and should be
adequate for installation of the pipeline. Each thrust wall should be
13
constructed normal to the proposed line of thrust. The jacking force should
not be exceed the maximum allowable jacking force which each thrust wall
has been designed for.
Submission of reports of pre-construction survey and setting out:

- Site investigation should be carried out to identify the nature of sub-surface
materials and to propose the type of pipe jacking machine to be used.
- A thorough investigation should be conducted for all service crossings along
the pipe jacking alignment and to identify all suspected obstructions.
- The contractor should propose the locations of the pipe jacking pits and
reception pits, the sequence and direction of pipe jacking.
- The contractor should establish sufficient reliable temporary survey stations
adjacent to the shaft or pit to facilitate the setting out of the underground
works and checking of setting out.
- The contractor should carry out a level survey of the existing ground surface
or nullah above the centerline of each pipe jack, with cross sections spaced
at an intervals to be agreed with the engineer. Whereas the points at which
levels are to be recorded at each cross section should not less than the depth
from the ground level to the invert level of the pipe jack.
16. What should be noted in the excavation for shaft and pipe jacks?
Excavation for the shafts:
- Ground water seepage should be properly addressed in the design of the
excavation.
- Shafts should be completely fenced off for safety reasons.
Excavation for pipe jacks:

- During pipe jacking, the contractor should make daily observations of
surface levels to detect subsidence.
- Excavation should not be carried out ahead of the leading edge of the shield
except for the purposes of removing obstructions or making clay pockets.
- Regular check should be made to compare the volume of material removed
with the calculated volume of the pipe jacking works to provide a safeguard
against excessive loosening or loss of material beyond the pipe jacking
dimensions.
- Grouting techniques may be required to control groundwater flows or
pressures or to consolidate weak or fissured ground.
14
17. What are the tolerances for the pipe jacking operation?
Centreline of pipe jack:
- Vertically:- 50mm
- Horizontally:- 75mm
Gradient of the jack pipe:

- The gradient should not deviate by more than 0.5%.
Ground movement:
- No ground movement in excess of 10mm should be permitted.
Groundwater table variation due to dewatering measures:

- In any event, the groundwater table should not be drawn down by more than
1m (measured vertically) at any point more than 2m (horizontally) from the
face of an excavation.
Rectification on divergence:
- Any divergence from the required line should be rectified without delay.
- However, adjustment of line and level should be gradual and take account
of the maximum recommended angular deflection of the pipe.
- Whenever the above tolerances are exceeded, the pipe jacking operation
should cease and should not recommence until the contractor has instituted
adequate remedial action.
18. Can you provide more details for the pipe jacking of the twin rising mains as
describe in your Project Report?
Background:
- Under Contract No. DC/2002/03, two sections of DN700 rising mains of
70m long were laid across the Yuen Long Highway embankment.
- The embankment is at least 4m higher than the surrounding areas.
- In view of the technical feasibility in laying the rising mains across the
embankment and to avoid prolonged disruption to the traffic, it was decided
at the design stage that the concerned sections of rising mains should be
constructed with trenchless method by which the disturbance to the highway
should be minimal.
- The two sections of the rising mains are parallel to each other at spacing of
1.5m centre-to-centre.
15
Pipe jacking shield:

- The pipe jacking shield used for the above drive was “Unicorn DH-600”
from RASA which equipped with roller cutter and disc cutter and is capable
of tunnelling through rock formation.
- In normal operation, each roller cutter or disc cutter would last for 300m
operation even for boulders. But it may not tunnel through artificial
materials such as steel, reinforced concrete, etc.
- The shield is powered by electric motors and hydraulic steering jacks.
- A rotary crusher, roller cutter and disc cutter are placed on the front portion
of the shield. Spoil is progressively crushed down into fine fragments by the
rotary crusher. The crushed materials should then fall into a slurry chamber
through the grid, which are then pumped to the surface through slurry
discharge line.
Modification of jacking shield to suit pipe size:

- The shield is able to jack a 600mm diameter concrete pipe and up to 790mm
diameter ductile iron pipe or steel pipe. However, the outer diameter of the
proposed DN700 jacking pipe was 831mm diameter. A slightly modification
work to the shield was required to jack such jacking pipe.
Utility detection:
- Utility plans must be obtained from relevant utility undertaking such as
DSD, WSD, CLP, Town Gas, Telecom companies, etc.
- Should there is any utility falls within the pipe jacking zone as well as the
jacking/receiving areas, trial trench would be conducted to locate the actual
location in order to avoid any damage to those utilities.
Location of jacking/receiving pits:

- Traffic condition, ingress and egress of works areas, delivery and storage of
material, machine, etc. have to be carefully assessed prior to deciding the
final layout for the working areas.
- The minimum size for the jacking pit and receiving pit should be 4m (W) x
10m (L) and 4m (W) x 4m (L) respectively.
Construction of jacking/receiving pits and thrust wall:

- With due consideration of the above, the locations of the jacking/receiving
pits were set out on site.
- Sheetpiles were driven to the designed founding level in order to provide
16
adequate support to the shoring system and acted as a cut-off to ground

water. Excavation works would commence after the sheetpiling work had
been completed.
- Dewatering was carried out in parallel with excavation by means of
submersible pumps. The variation of ground water table and ground
movement around the pits were frequently monitored.
- Once the formation level was reached, a layer of blinding concrete was
placed which provided a firm ground for subsequent pipe jacking operation.
- A thrust wall was constructed behind the jacking system in the jacking shaft
for transmitting and dispersing jacking reaction force to ground behind the
jacking shafts.
Setting up of pipe jacking equipment:

- Entrance ring with a rubber seal was fitted, and then an entrance wall was
formed. It aimed at preventing the ingress of groundwater and soil during
pipe jacking operation.
- Jacking equipment, laser, guide rails, the pit by-pass unit and the discharge
pump were set up in the jacking pit.
- Operation panel for the shield machine was also set up. Electric power and
control cables are connected to the operation board, the main power supply
and other ancillary equipment.
- Hydraulic hoses between power pack and jacking equipment were
connected.
- Shield head was lowered down to jacking shaft and set on the guide rails.
Start of pipe jacking:

- Some small holes were drilled through the sheetpile wall to make sure that
there is no ingress of groundwater.
- The sheetpile was then cut off to make an entrance hole for the shield
machine. The soil in the entrance hole was removed to make a clear path for
the shield.
- The main jacks were extended to push the shield close to the work face
through the entrance runner seal.
- Switch on the rotary cutter head of the shield and the excavation was started
by extending the hydraulic jacks.
- During driving, the operator should control the jacking speed, the torque of
the cutter head, the earth pressure and the inclination of the shield. The
proposed maximum pipe jacking speed should be up to 150mm/min.
17
Control of the line/level of the shield should be carried out by the operator
at the control panel where adjustments can be made if necessary.
- After the shield was driven into the ground, one segment of the jacking pipe
was lowered to the shaft and placed on the guide rails. The pipe was jointed
properly to the tail of the shield. The pipe jacking operation was resumed.
- The length of the jacking machine was shorter than jacking DI pipe. When
the main jacks reached the end of the stroke, it was retracted. The spacer
was put in place to supplement the jacking stroke.
- When the shield was about 300mm away from the receiving pit, the pipe
jacking operation was halted. A small hole was drilled through the sheetpile
at receiving pit to confirm the position of the shield and also to make sure
that there was no ingress of ground water. Grouting work might be carried
out at the face of receiving pit to stop any water seepage from receiving pit.
- The exit ring and rubber seal were fixed and the guide rails were set to
receive the shield into the pit.
- The wall of the sheetpile was cut and the jacking operation was resumed to
push the shield into the receiving pit.
- After the shield was completely driven into the receiving pit, it was
dismantled and removed.
Settlement and ground water monitoring:

- The pipe jacking method was basically the same as ordinary pressurized
slurry system, where slurry was pressurized against the work face.
- The ground was mechanically excavated while the face was stably secured
by the action of keeping a balance between the slurry pressure and the water
pressure with the ground pressure..
- Hence the settlement and water drawn down would be minimal in the slurry
type pipe jacking method.
- Settlement monitoring points would be set along the pipeline alignment and
regular checking would be conducted to ensure no excessive settlement in
the area.
- The exact location and number of settlement points were agreed on site and
should be positioned along the line of pipe jack.
- Piezometers were also installed near the pipeline alignment and regular
checking was carried out.
Contingency plans for removal of obstructions/recovery of jacking shields:

- The proposed “Unicorn” jacking shield was capable of going through all
18
sorts of solid rock layers or boulders under normal conditions.

- Jacking shield cannot pass through artificial hard materials such as
reinforced concrete structure or steel structures.
- If the obstruction was found within 2/3 of the total length from the jacking
pit, pull back of jacking shield would be carried out.
- If the obstruction was found beyond 2/3 of the total length from the jacking
pit, a steel pipe of larger diameter would be jacked in the opposite direction
from the receiving pit (by means of hand-dig or pipe ramming).to clear the
obstruction
- When very soft clay is encountered, concentrated bentonite will be jetted to
stabilize the front soil so as to avoid the machine to dip.
- The alignment of the pipe jack was controlled by a laser system, so that the
alignment can be able to keep the tolerance not over 50mm.
Pipe jacking adjacent to gas main:

- At one location, a 150mm diameter steel gas main was identified at only 3m
away from the receiving pit, running above and perpendicular to the
proposed jacking alignment of the rising mains.
- The clear vertical spacing between the gas main and the jacking pipe was
about 2m.
- In view of the limited land availability, it was not viable to relocate the
receiving pit nor to swap the jacking pit and receiving pit.
- in order not to affect the works progress and to ensure the safety of the
public and all personnel for the works, I convened a site meeting with the
concerned utility undertaker (Town Gas) and our Contractor to resolve the
issue.
- It was agreed in the meeting that the invert levels of our rising mains at the
receiving pit end should be lowered for about 500mm in order to provide
sufficient clearance from the gas main.
- In addition, the concerned portion of gas main should be exposed
throughout the pipe jacking operation.
- Supervisory staff from Town Gas was invited to closely monitor the
conditions of the gas main when the pipe jacking machine was crossing
under the gas main.
- I also urged the Contractor that the rate of pie jacking at proximity to the
gas main should be slowed down to minimize any disturbance induced.
19. Why not use pipe ramming in your contract?
19
Limitation of pipe ramming:

- Pipe ramming cannot pass through rock formation.
- The maximum driving force provided by pipe ramming method is not
sufficient to jack 80m long of 900mm diameter pipe through the layer of
cohesive soils.
20. Have you accepted the alignment of pipe jacking which is out of tolerance?
Limitation of pipe ramming:
21. What are the jacking forces for the operations in your contract?
DN900 precast concrete pipe across Yuen Long Highway embankment:
DN900 precast concrete pipe across nullah:
Twin DN700 ductile iron rising mains across Yuen Long Highway embankment:
20
Topic: Construction of Reclamation
1. What reclamation methods are adopted in your Contract?

Drained method:
- Soft marine deposit left in place
- Consolidation accelerated by use of vertical drains with or without
surcharge preloading
Dredged method:
- Soft marine deposit would be removed and disposed of before placing the
fill material
Displacement method:
- Direct tipping of fill from trucks onto seabed, without removal or treatment
of marine deposit
- Mud wave would be resulted which may give rises to long-term differential
settlement
- This method should not be used unless the reclaimed land would be left for
decades without development.
Remarks:
- Sediment should not be removed
2. Can you describe briefly the drained method?

Preparation work at seabed:
- Marine deposits and any underlying soft alluvial clay are left in place
- Geotextile should be laid to separate the fill from the underlying soft marine
deposits –
- to prevent migration of fines
- to enhance stability of the soft marine deposit is enhanced
- A 2m thick blanket consists of free draining granular material installed in
thin layers under a controlled manner –
- to enable drainage from the clayey deposits
- to act as a capping layer to spread out the fill load
- Prefabricated band drains should be installed –
- spaced at 1.5 to 3.0m with triangular pattern
- installed using marine plant prior to fill placement to commence the
acceleration of consolidation earlier
1
- installed using land plant if access for marine plant is inadequate or fill
material need to be placed
Placement of fill:
- Fill should be placed evenly in thin layer
- Placed by bottom-dump barges, hydraulic filling or grabbing
- Thickness of fill would increase subsequently but should not be excessive
- Distance and the slope of the leading edges should be specified
- Maximum height of stockpiling should be stated
Settlement of reclamation:
- Pore water pressure develop due to the placement of fill
- Excess pore water pressure dissipates gradually and the loading is
transferred to the soil skeleton, and settlement takes place
- Such dissipation of water pressure depends on the layer thickness,
permeability and loading applied.
- Preloading surcharge, applied by stacking fill material, is effective
- Instrumentations for settlement monitoring includes piezometers,
inclinometers, sub-surface and surface settlement measurement systems
Advantages:
- No dredging of marine deposits is required
Disadvantages:
- A tight control is required on Site
- Detailed method statement should be submitted by the Contractor (placing
geotextile and sand blanket, installation of vertical drains)
- Close supervision of filling sequence is necessary
- Controlled thin layer fill placement may not be workable in shallow water
(not practicable for bottom-dumping; slow for grabbing)
- Monitoring instrumentation is essential to ensure the stability of reclamation
(to avoid mud wave)
3. Can you describe briefly the dredged method?

Fully dredged method:
- All marine deposits and alluvial clays and silt are removed by dredging and
replaced by fill (partially dredged method may also be used)
- It may be expensive if the layer of marine deposits is thick
2
Advantages:
- Settlement is more predictable
Disadvantages:
- Dredging and disposal of marine deposits is involved
- Disposal of contaminated mud is problematic
- Chemical testing of the sediment is required to determine the level of
contamination
- Access must be provided for plants to carry out dredging work
4. How do water depth affect the method of reclamation?

Access for marine plant:
- For shallow water, access channel has to be dredged for dredger
- Access for marine plant to install vertical drains should be provided,
otherwise land plant should be used
Placement of fill:
- Bottom dumping may not be feasible in shallow water (seabed > -2.5mPD).
- End-tipping may be carried out for fill placement above -2.5mPD in deep
waters
- Fill placement using grab is too slow in shallow waters
Works programme:
- Reclamation sequence is affected by the water depth
- Water depth should be taken into account to determining the method and
programme of the reclamation
5. What particulars shall be submitted?

General:
- Any (dumping) licences, (environmental) permits and correspondence
(notification to Director of Marine) required.
- Details of methods for controlling marine traffic.
Dredging:
- Type and capacity of dredgers
- Methods of anchorage and positioning of dredgers
3
- Arrangements for transportation and disposal of dredged material.
- (The Fill Management Committee shall be contacted for advice on suitable
locations for the disposal of dredged material)

- Details of Constructional Plant and transport
- Sources and properties of each type of fill materials
- Methods of deposition and compaction of fill material
- Methods of controlling the moisture content of fill material
6. What are the general requirements for marine works?

Marine works:
- The Contractor shall notify the Director of Marine in accordance with
Section 70 of the shipping and Port Control Regulations, Chapter 313.
- Before the Works to start, it should be checked that a Notice to Mariners or
a Marine Department Notice in respect of the concerned Works has been
issued.
- The Site for marine works shall be marked with flags, marker buoys and
lights.
- The marine traffic shall not be obstructed
- Temporary marine traffic arrangements and control shall be made with
approvals from the Director of Marine
- Temporary tide gauges shall be mounted at locations agreed by the Engineer
- Work boats shall be provided
- Floating debris within the Site shall be collected and removed to prevent
from dispersing outside the Site.
Surveys for marine works:

- Echo sounders shall be used
- Initial survey and final survey shall be carried out before and after dredging
- The final survey for dredging may be taken as the initial survey for
deposition of fill material if it was carried out within 30 days .before the
deposition of fill materials
- The final survey for deposition of fill material shall be carried after
completion of first layers, intermediate layers, and final layers. -
7. What should be noted in dredging?
4
- Samples shall be taken during dredging to determine the sand content
- Any sudden or significant change in the properties of dredged materials
shall be noted
- Localized deterioration of water quality is kept to minimum.
8. Where should be the dredged material disposed of?

Disposal of uncontaminated mud:
- Uncontaminated mud should be disposed of at the gazetted marine disposal
site at East of Ninepin and should be controlled through a dumping licence.
- The Contractor should apply under the Dumping at Sea Ordinance for a
marine dumping licence
- The Contractor should submit to DEP and the Secretary of Fill Management
Committee an estimated programme prior to the commencement of
dumping and monthly returns of such
Disposal of contaminated mud:

- Contaminated mud should be disposed of at the Contaminated Materials
Disposal Ground at east of Sha Chau.
- The Contractor should submit a method statement regarding the disposal of
this mud for getting a marine dumping licence1
- Access to the disposal area is on a non-exclusive basis2.
- The Contractor should submit to DEP and the Secretary of Fill Management
Committee an estimated programme prior to the commencement of
dumping and the Engineer should submit monthly revised programme of
such
- After the dredged survey, the Contractor should report to the Committee of
the volume dredged and reconcile this with the reported volumes
- It should be ensured that no over-dredged is carried out and that no
contaminated mud was classified as uncontaminated mud3
9. What should be noted in deposition of fill material?

Deposition below +2.5mCD:
- Method statement should be submitted for approval4
- Construction sequence and details of reclamation should be delineate to
avoid the formation of mud waves
- Proposed details to prevent damage to prefabricated band drains installed
1
Another dumping licence?
2
What is the so-called “non-exclusive” basis?
3
How to ensure?
5
- Should mud waves be formed, remedial measures should be taken.
- Gradient of leading edge should not exceed 1 in 3
- A 2m sand blanket should be placed prior to the installation of prefabricated
band drains by marine plant.
- No deposition should be carried out within 30m from the dredged trench
- Dredged trench for proposed box culvert should be filled to the original
seabed level as soon as possible
- The fill should be deposited without causing displacement or migration of
deposited materials
Deposition above +2.5mCD:

- Deposition above +2.5mCD should follow the requirements of earthworks
10. What should be noted in deposition of public fill?

- Public fill contain inert building debris, soil, rock and broken concrete, etc
- The Contractor shall be responsible for sorting, spreading, placing and
compacting of the public fill materials including oversized rock and
building debris
- Reinforcement bars and timbers should be removed off site
- Wet soil should be processed or mixed to make it suitable for use in the
permanent work
11. What should be noted in compacting public fill?

Compaction above +2.5mCD:
- The Contractor can use whatever method if it is demonstrated that the
required level of compaction can be achieved
- Common plants used for compacting the fill material include vibratory
roller, vibrating-plate compactors, vibro-tamper, power rammer
- The achieved level of compaction of public fill can only be gauged by
ensuring the method of compaction (method specification) rather than the
final test such as sand replacement test (performance specification) as sand
fill material.
Compaction below +2.5mCD:

- No compaction can be carried out for public fill under +2.5mCD.
12. What should be noted in compacting sand fill material?
4
Check the Method Statement.
6
- Before compaction start, the Contractor should carry out a trial to
substantiate his proposed method can achieve the required degree of
compaction
- Compacted by deep compaction should be carried over the full depth of fill
- Deep compaction should be carried out prior to the construction of drainage
work and placement of surcharge mound
- No compaction should be carried out at a distance less than 20m from the
cope lines of any blockwork seawalls
- Static cone penetration tests (SCPTs) should be carried before
commencement of any compaction for the Contractor to design the
appropriate compaction method
- After carrying out the deep compaction, a second series of SCPTs should be
carried out to establish the degree of compaction achieved.
- The acceptance criteria for deep compaction is that the static cone
penetration resistance should be greater than 7.5MPa for at least 90% of the
test results at each SCPT location
13. What are the requirements for surcharge of reclamation?

- Surcharge material should be sand fill material placed above the earthwork
final surface
- Surcharge material should be compacted to at least 18kN/m3 and to ensure
the stability of side slopes
14. How to make sure the work carried underwater is in order?

- Underwater inspection is carried out by the divers of the Employer.
15. What is geotextile fabric?

- Geotextile fabric is a permeable sheet of synthetic material
- Tensile strength of 100kN/m.
- Apparent Opening Size (AOP) should not greater than 200 microns.
- The fabric should be placed with roll width greater than 30m after sewing
- Geotextile Type 1 is stronger than Type 2
16. What is prefabricated band drain?

- The prefabricated band drain should consist of a core and filter.
- The core should be a continuously extruded material to allow continuous
flow along the length of the drains
- The filter jacket should be able to prevent excessive migration of soil
7
particles into the core and be proved to be effective under similar soil and
pressure conditions
- The core of the band drain should not buckle or crimp with the soil
deformation
- Methods of installation and the details of the mandrel, anchors, etc should
be submitted (installed by static hydraulic force or else)
- Length of the band drain should be confirmed by carrying out site
investigation
- The band drain should be installed through the in-situ soft clay into the
underlying layer by at least 500mm
- Each band drain should be installed in on continuous length without joints
- Tensile strength should be greater than 1kN
- Width of band drain is about 100mm
- Apparent Opening Size (AOS) of the filter should not be greater than 90
micron
8
Topic: Design Considerations of Reclamation
1. Why do we need reclamation?

Land requirements:
- For transport infrastructure (new route)
- For housing, industries, etc
Environmental purposes:
- To eliminate areas of badly polluted water
- To improve hydraulic conditions
- To better use the public fill
2. What considerations are made at design stage?

Future land use:
- Area of land required (size of reclamation)
- Types of land uses (choice of fill materials, methods of reclamation)
- Time of development (methods of reclamation)
- Location of infrastructures (choice of fill materials, methods of reclamation)
Layout of the reclamation:

- Effect on the hydraulic regime (too “straight” shoreline)
- Effect on groundwater regime (permeability of fill materials)
- Effect on marine traffic (types of seawalls: pitch slope or vertical)
- Any marine-frontal uses required such as piers, drainage outfall, etc.
Formation level:
- Availability and cost of fill (too much “free” public fill)
- Levels of existing utilities
- Projected residual settlement of the fill and underlying soils
- Type pf seawall and the extent of wave overtopping expected
- Expected water levels due to tide and storm surge (at least higher than the
extreme water level with a return period of 100 years)
- Proposed land uses
- Possible long-term increase in mean sea level
Reclamation methods:
- Drained method or dredged method
- Depends on the thickness of existing marine deposits and future land uses
1
Fill material:
- Availability and cost of various fill materials (public fill is “free”)
- Future land use (Sand fill for locations in where deep excavation may be
carried out, to facilitate the installation of sheetpiles/diaphragm walls)
Methods to speed up settlement:

- Depends on the time of development
- Surcharge preloading with or without preinstalled band drains
- Dynamic compaction
- Vibro-compaction
Types of seawall:
- Any marine-frontal uses (Vertical seawall, piled deck)
- Marine traffic (wave absorbing seawall)
2
Topic: Testing and Monitoring for Reclamation
1. What testing should be carried out for marine works?

Dredged material:
- Standard soil mechanics tests, such as particle size distribution, plasticity
index and coefficient of uniformity.
- Checking of sand content of dredged material1.
Fill materials:
- To determine the particle size distribution, plasticity index and coefficient of
uniformity.
- If the results do not comply with the requirements, additional samples shall
be obtained.
- The batch shall be considered non-compliance for any non-compliance of
additional tests
Rock armour:
- Tests for the rock for rock armour shall include relative density, water
absorption, aggregate impact value, ten percent fines value, aggregate
abrasion value and soundness.
- Tests for rock armour shall include dropping test to the determine the
resistance to fracture.
Static Cone Penetration Tests:

- It should be carried out using an electrical cone equipment for measuring tip
resistance, sleeve friction and pore pressure
- The cone is advanced hydraulically at a steady rate, and the side friction, tip
resistance and pore water pressure are recorded at the same time
2. What should be noted for the geotechnical instrumentation?

Instruments used in the Contract:
- Vibrating wire piezometers
- Inclinometers
- Settlement plates
- Surface movement markers
Installation and maintenance of the instruments:
1
Why to check the sand content?
1
- Instruments should be installed by specialist suppliers
- Measures should be provided to ensure the sleeve protecting the instruments
can stand above the seabed
Recording readings:
- At frequency set forth in the Contract
- Last until the expiry of the Maintenance Period
3. What is settlement plate?

- Installed on top of sand blanket and at any level inside the fill
- The base plate should be rigid and securely connected to the riser pipe
- Optical survey techniques used to determine changes in elevation and
horizontal positions of the pipe2
4. What is surface movement marker?

- Installed when the fill reaches its final formation level
- Optical survey techniques are employed again
5. What is vibrating wire piezometers?

- Have an operating range from 5 kPa to 500 kPa water pressure
- Cable should be laid from the instrument to the terminal panel
- Sufficient slack should be provided when laying the cable for the
piezometers to allow settlements and other deformation of the fill (35% of
length)
- The piezometers should be pushed into soil by appropriate means
- The piezometers should not be placed too close to the vertical band drain
6. What is inclinometer?
- A 50mm diameter plastic access tube with a biaxial inclinometer torpedo
inside should be installed in 140mm diameter borehole and should be sealed
to prevent water or grout from entering.
- Magnetic settlement targets should be used to monitor the settlement
2
How?
2
Topic: Construction on Reclaimed Land
1. What should be noted for piling in a reclamation area?

Obstruction:
- Obstruction to piling may result in serious cost overruns and programme
delay.
- To this end, boulders of size > 250mm should not be incorporated into the
fill to avoid the problem.
Necking of piles:
- Permanent steel casings are necessary for bored piles to avoid necking.
2. What should be noted for construction of culvert in reclamation area?

Settlement:
- Surcharge preloading provided to reduce the residual settlement for drained
reclamation
- Fill densification measures should be adopted
- Allow movement joints in the design of the culvert
- Use of pile foundation (but expensive)
- Differential settlement between the piled culvert, if any, and outfall made of
concrete blocks in the seawall.
3. What should be noted for construction on a newly reclaimed land?

Carriageways and pedestrian walkways:
- Differential settlement affects the serviceability
- Using flexible pavement to allow future overlay
Underground drainage and sewerage pipes:

- Use of flexible joints, particularly the connection to building structures
- Use of shorter pipes to accommodate severe differential settlement
Buildings:
- Buildings should be supported on piles
- Negative skin friction on piles should be taken into account in the design
1
Topic: Fill for Reclamation
1. What kinds of materials are used for marine works?

Fill material:
- Type 1, Type 2, rock fill or public fill
- Particle size distributions within the ranges stated in Table 6.1 and Table
21.1
- Type 1 (underwater fill material) shall consist of natural material extracted
from the seabed or a riverbed. (basically natural sand)
- Type 2 (underwater fill material) shall consist of material which has a
coefficient of uniformity exceeding 5 and a plasticity index not exceeding
12. (basically decomposed granite or similar type of rock; clay content is
limited by the plasticity index)
- Sand fill for drainage blanket (contains coarse and sharp sand and less than
15% passing 63 um BS sieve)
- Grade 75 (rock fill material) shall be hard, durable rock which are free from
cracks, veins, discolouration and other evidence of decomposition.
- Grade 700 (rock fill material) shall be rock which are free from cracks,
veins and similar defects. (Pell-mell rubble)
- Grade 200A (rock fill material)
Rock armour for sloping seawall:

- 7 types of rock armour classified according to the maximum and minimum
mass of individual rock piece.
- Type 1 rock armour is the lightest while Type 7 is the heaviest.
- At least 50% in number of individual pieces shall be heavier than the mean
of the individual group
- Apart from the mass of the rock piece, other requirements for rock armour
include density, ten percent fines value, sizes, defects and sign of
decomposition
- Rock armour shall be deposited piece by piece and shall not be deposited by
tipping, dumping or dropping.
Underlayer for seawall:

- Same properties as rock armour which should weigh 0.25-0.4 tonne
- Actually a smaller rock armour
Filter layer for seawall:
1
- Natural crushed rock less than 80mm and well graded
Facing stones:
- Used for seawalls and pitched slopes
- Hard, durable fresh granite, free from cracks, veins and similar defects.
- Uniform in shape, size and colour, roughly squared and hammer dressed.
- For facing stone used in vertical seawall, the width shall be >300mm
Bermstones:
- Used for seawalls and revetments
- Sound fresh rock, free from cracks, veins and similar defects.
- At least 1000 kg in mass and between 450mm and 750mm thick.
Levelling stones:
- Used for founding layers for marine structures
- Rock fill material (Grade 75)
2. Where is the fill material come from?

- Excavation from the Site
- Public fill material
- Sources outside the Site provided by the Contractor
3. What fill materials are used in your Contract?

Administration:
- The Public Fill Committee (PFC) and Marine Fill Committee (MFC) should
be consulted for the use of fill and related procedural requirements
Public fill:
- Inert portion of construction and demolition material
- Priority is given to its use due to shortage of areas to accommodate them
- Government’s policy to maximize the use of public fill in reclamation so as
to make good use of “construction waste”.
- Both quality and quantity are uncontrollable
Marine sand fill:

- Rate of formation of reclamation can be very rapid compared to other fill.
- Maximum fines content should <30%, for hydraulically placed 10%
- Maximum fines content requirement is more stringent if vibro-compaction
2
is employed
- Samples have to be taken to check the grading and segregation of material
Crushed rock:
- Not use normally
- Used as foundation materials
- Similarly, oversized crushed rock should be placed in areas over where no
building development will take place.
4. What are the drawbacks for the use of public fill?

- Rate of supply is non-controllable
- Strict site control to ensure no unsuitable materials are mixed in public fill
- Oversized rock or concrete (> 250mm) would impede piling work
- Large number of delivery trucks not to disturb the existing traffic
- Measures should be taken to contain the debris (refuse containment booms)
5. What measures were adopted to speed up the consolidation or densify the fill?
Surcharge preloading:
- To accelerate settlement of fill
- Monitoring the fill densification achieved is essential (when to removal)
- Field measurement tests can be carried out
Dynamic compaction:
- Repeated dropping of heavy weights
- Suitable for use in most soil except cohesive soil below water table
- The pounders used weigh about 200 tons and dropped from 40m
- It can also be carried out underwater
- Compaction compliance tests can be carried out
Vibro-compaction:
- Suitable for granular materials, in particular sand
- A vibrating vibroflot is penetrated and retracted in the soil
- Under high frequency vibration and assistance of water jet or compressed
air, the soil particles are temporarily nullified and liquefaction occurs,
allowing a denser soil matrix to develop
- Spacing is about 2.5m to 4m
- Compaction depth may be up to 25m to 35m
- Compaction compliance tests can be carried out
3
Make a choice:
- Degree of improvement
- Depth of fill (vibro-compaction)
- Proximity to existing structures or facilities (damage may be made by
dynamic compaction)
4
Topic: Seawall Construction
1. Can you describe briefly the construction of pitched slope seawall?

(Similar to blockworks seawall)
2. Can you describe briefly the construction of vertical blockworks seawall?

Dredging for seawall:
- Dredging is carried out by the dredger equipped with a grab.
- Dredging should be carried out to a depth where the minimum sand content
in the dredged material exceeds 70%
Sand filling:
- Sand fill material should be deposited after the dredging of the trench to the
required profile
- Echo-sounding survey should be carried out to check the profile
- Sand for filling should be coarse, sharp and free from deleterious materials
- Sand fill forms the inner core of the rubble mound
Rubble dumping:
- Rubble should be sound, dense and well-graded granite rock which weighs
between 25 kg to 500 kg.
- Rubble can withstand a high wave pressure and forms the outer layer of the
rubble mound
- Rubble covers the sand fill is generally 1.3m thick
- Rubble is compacted with precast concrete blocks (“A” or “B” ~10 tonnes)
Levelling stones:
- After the rubble mound are consolidated, the top surface of the mound
would be levelled by placing a layer (~150mm thick) of levelling stone (i.e.
Grade 75 rock fill).
- The placing of the levelling stone should be assisted by using a mild steel
rail.
Concrete seawall blocks:

- Seawall blocks are precast concrete blocks which are either standard
(marked “M”) or non-standard (marked “S”)
- The toe block is set after the surface is levelled.
- The setting of tow block is crucial to the alignment of the proposed seawall
1
- The seawall blocks are lowered and set to its final position layer by layer.
- Channels in seawall blocks should be filled up with rock pieces
Concrete backing and granite facing:

- Settlement of the seawall blocks should be made good by construction of
the concrete backing and granite facing, if any.
- The granite stone should be washed thoroughly to show no discolouration.
Concrete coping:
- Concrete coping should be constructed on top of the concrete backing at the
end of the maintenance period, while filling behind the seawall has been
completed.
- The concrete coping aims at protecting the granite facing and to adjust the
final alignment and level of the seawall.
Hand-packed rubble:
- Hand-packed rubble should be placed against the inner face of the seawall,
and acts as a filter drain.
Filter layer:
- Prior to filling any material over the rubble mound, a layer of selected rock
fill (~75mm-225mm) should be deposited behind the mound.
- This layer acts as a filter to prevent the earth filling to escape through the
voids in the mound and forms the backing to the mound as well.
Bermstones:
- Bermstones should be sound fresh rocks which are at least 1000 kg in mass,
rectangular in shape and between 450 mm to 750 mm thick.
- The functions of bermstones are to prevent the levelling stone and rubble
being washed away, and to prevent the seawall from being pushed out of
position when filling behind the seawall is in progress.
- The bermstones should be placed in front of the toe block and should be
inspected by diver after setting.
Slip joints:
- Slip joints should be provided in seawall and should be straight and vertical
and perpendicular to the face of the seawall, and shall extend through the
seawall to the foundation.
2
- The functions of the slip joints are to overcome the differential settlement
and to serve as an expansion joint, and also facilitate future maintenance.
3. Can you describe briefly the construction of wave absorbing seawall?

Problem facing:
- Wave conditions in certain parts of the Victoria Harbour have deteriorated
- Ship berthing, cargo handling, etc are adversely affected
Causes of the undesirable wave conditions:

- Increased shipping activity
- Existence of an increasing number of vertical blockwork seawalls, which
has a low wave-energy absorption capacity
Solutions:
- New marine structures in the Harbour area should be designed to be low
wave-energy reflection structures
- The maximum wave-reflection coefficient of 0.5 for waves with periods of
less than 5 seconds
Wave absorbing seawall:

- The wave absorbing seawall constructed under the Contract is a pilot trial to
test the suitability of using such kind of seawall along the harbour.
Deficiencies of the seawall:

- Difficult in casting, handling and installation
- Floating refuses may be trapped inside the chambers of the seawall, which
requires regular cleaning
3
Topic: Settlement of Reclamation
1. What is the residual reclamation settlement?

Residual settlement:
- Amount of future settlement of the in-situ soils (marine deposits) and fill
expected to occur, from a given time
- The start time defined for the “given time” should be described clearly
- Residual settlement comprises primary consolidation settlement, secondary
consolidation and creep of fill.
Primary consolidation settlement:

- Gradual reduction in the volume of a fully-saturated soil due to the drainage
of pore water1.
- Speed of this process depends on the permeability
- Initial excess pore water pressure is equal to the increase in vertical stress
Secondary consolidation:
- Long-term settlement (creep) under constant effective stress.
- Due to squeezing out of the water absorbed on the clay particles
Creep of soil:
- Occur in granular fill, similar to the secondary settlement
- Due to crushing of contact points between the particles
2. How to assess reclamation settlement?

General assumptions:
- Based on classical theory of Terzaghi
- One dimensional strain and negligible lateral deformation are assumed
(justified as reclamation usually covers a large horizontal area relative to the
thickness of the sub-soil)
- Computation based on two components of strains: changes in effective
stress and the time dependent strain, which are taking place simultaneously
Primary consolidation:
- Residual settlement at due to primary consolidation at time t is given by
Sp,t(residual) = Sp – Sp,t
- The ultimate primary consolidation settlement (Sp) depends on compression
1
Where have the water gone? Through the edge of reclamation, and then?
1
(or recompression) ratio (oedometer test), thickness of the concerned soil
layer, the initial effective stress in the soil layer, applied loading due to fill
and other imposed load, and the effective preconsolidation pressure
(oedometer test).
- The primary consolidation settlement achieved at time t depends on change
in effective vertical stress at time t and the average degree of consolidation.
Correction of primary consolidation for construction period:

- The primary consolidation so calculated may be corrected for construction
period.
- It is assumed that the fill load increases linearly throughout the construction
period, and that the total fill load had applied constantly for a period of tc/2)
Secondary consolidation:
- Secondary consolidation of a soil layer at a given time t depends on
thickness of soil layer, coefficient of secondary consolidation in term of
strain (laboratory test according to Geospec 3).
- The secondary consolidation begins when about 90 to 95% of the primary
consolidation has taken place
- Theoretically, secondary consolidation continues indefinitely at an
ever-increasing rate.
- For the purpose of calculating the residual settlement, a period of 50 years
may be adopted.
Creep settlement of granular fill:

- Primary consolidation for granular fill will be complete very soon after the
fill placement and will not contribute to the residual settlement in principle
- Residual settlement of fill due to creep settlement depends on the thickness
of the fill layer and the logarithmic creep compression rate (~1-2%)
Calculation of total residual settlement:

- The residual settlement of a reclamation is the summation of the primary
consolidation, secondary consolidation and creep of granular fill.
- Where it is known that development will commence immediately after the
completion of the reclamation, the residual settlement should be limit to less
than 500 mm, and 300 mm for areas designated for roads and drains.
- The amount of residual settlement estimated in the design stage should be
verified by field monitoring data.
2
General situation in Hong Kong:
- For reclamation near the shore where the thickness of the clay layer is about
5 to 8m, it is possible to limit the residual settlement arising from primary
settlement to 50mm for drained method with preloading.
- For reclamation extends to deep water where the thickness of clay layer is
about 20m, residual settlement of 250mm can be achieved. (Placing
surcharge is effective to reduce the consolidation but may be costly)
- Residual settlement due creep of fill with thickness up to 15m may be in
order of a few hundred millimetres. (It can be reduced by adopting
appropriate fill treatment)
3. What are the effects of vertical drains and surcharge loading on settlement?
Consolidation with vertical drains:
- The presence of vertical drains shortens the drainage path within the soil
layer, resulting in faster dissipation of excess pore water pressure
- The magnitude of the degree of consolidation increases within a given time
- Soil surrounding the band drains (smear zone) may be disturbed which will
decrease the permeability and affect the performance of the vertical drains.
- Secondary consolidation cannot be accelerated by the vertical drains
Consolidation with surcharge loadings:

- It is often used together with the surcharge loading
- The surcharge serves to pre-compress the underlying soils to eliminate the
consolidation settlement that would occur in future
4. How to monitor the rate of settlement?

Importance of settlement monitoring:
- Monitoring instruments provide data for assessing the stability and the
settlement of the sub-soil and reclamation fill.
- Settlement calculated in the design stage is verified using the field
monitoring data.
Pore water pressure:

- To ensure the excess pore water pressure generated by fill placement in line
with the predicted one
- Using piezometer (Geoguide 2 – Chapter 20)
- Vibrating wire piezometers – rapid response and relative simple to set up
3
- Effect of tidal vibration should be checked and eliminated from the
piezometers reading at a given time and location by installing a piezometers
outside the reclamation
- The fill level should be recorded together with the water pressure for
analysis
Settlement:
- Important monitoring parameter for reclamation
- Using settlement plates, extensometers or surface markers
- Settlement plates measure the settlement by comparing the levels of the
plates at different times2
- Extensometer is more reliable, in particular if settlement for individual
sub-soil layer is required.3
Lateral deformation:
- Using inclinometers
- To reveal any sign of instability in the sub-soil
Choosing locations for monitoring instruments:

- Instrumentation should be as far as possible installed before the start of fill
placement
- It should be placed at critical areas such as where the marine mud is thick
- It should also be placed near the leading edge of the reclamation for
monitoring the lateral deformation.
- It should also be noted that the installed instrument may cause obstruction
to the movement and operation of plant on the site.
- It should be well protected to avoid damaging.
- The location of instrumentation should only be finalized when the
reclamation sequence and plant operation are known.
5. How to verify the settlement estimation based on the field data?

Back-analysis method:
- Calculating the settlement by substituting different values of coefficient of
consolidation into the relevant equations.
- The calculated results are compared with the actual settlement-time curve
plotted from field monitoring data.
2
What is the different in uses for single settlement plate and double settlement plate?
4
Asaoka’s method:
- The data measured by settlement plates at the seabed (or on top of drainage
blanket) are plotted.
- The plot gives the estimate of total primary consolidation settlement of the
soil beneath the seabed, and it can be compared with the predicted value.
- The residual settlement can also be re-assessed using this method
- This method is simple but relies on the availability of frequent field data
6. What is the degree of consolidation?

- When a vertical load is applied, an uniform excess pore water pressure will
be generated instantaneously throughout the soil stratum.
- This excess pore water pressure will be dissipated with time subject to the
permeability of the soil.
- The average degree of consolidation indicates how much of the imposed
load is transferred to the effective stress in the soil.
3
Are settlement plates unable to serve this function?
5
Topic: Stability of Reclamation
1. How to ensure the stability of the fill material?

Strength of marine and alluvial deposits:
- Predominantly soft clay, assumed undrained (undrained strength cu)
- Field vane shear test (in-situ, reliable)
- Triaxial test (in laboratories, disturbed sample)
- Cone penetration test (reliable, quick, can correlated with undrained shear
strength)
Stability analysis:
- Similar method for assessing stability of slope (Slope-W)
For drained reclamation:

- Placement of filling is particularly important to the stability
- Fill placement in shallow water onto thick marine mud is likely to cause
mud wave formation
- Quick and simplified method should be used to assess the short term
(interim) stability of leading edge of the reclamation (lateral displacement
of clay layer)
- Geotextile separates the fill with marine mud preventing punching of fill
into the seabed, and creation of mud waves (problem: improper overlapping,
inadequate seaming at the joints)
- Monitoring using instrumentations (settlement, lateral deformation and pore
water pressure)
- Fill placement should not commence until completion of preparation work
in the seabed and the seawall foundation.
- Stockpiling of fill should not be allowed adjacent to constructed seawalls or
edges of the reclamation
- Placement of fill in thin layers should be controlled under stringent site
supervision
- Irregularity of seabed topography should be noted
2. What is the significance of mud wave?

Definition of mud wave:
- Excessive displacement of mud in a reclamation following successive slip
failures as the reclamation works progress
1
Causes to the formation of mud wave:
- Sudden placing of fill material onto the seabed where marine deposit is left
in place causes the punching failure
- Uneven distribution of fill load onto the seabed causes shear failure of the
marine deposit
Consequences to the formation of mud wave:

- Progress of the reclamation works affected and the disturbed seabed
requires rectification
- Differential settlement on the reclaimed land may appear, which may affect
future development
- Vertical band drains and instrumentation disrupted
3. How to deal with mud wave?

Investigation:
- Extent of failure is identified by carrying out site investigation
- Tests (vane shear tests) are conducted to determine the remoulded strength
of the disturbed material for the design of remedial works (disturbed mud
consolidates slower than undisturbed mud)
Complete removal:
- Displaced mud in small scale mud wave can be removed by grabbing away
- Complete removal of all disturbed mud for large scale mud wave is the
quickest way but a high cost would be incurred in dredging the mud
- Differential settlement may arise between the non-disturbed area and the
rectified area
Accelerated consolidation:
- Granular fill would be placed on top of the mud wave together with the
installation of vertical band drains and surcharging to accelerate the
consolidation but the progress of works is adversely affected.
- An economical method which applies to mud wave occurred at a deeper
level.
4. How to prevent mud wave?

- History of the site (any sign of distress caused by the works in the past)
- Planning of reclamation sequence (predict intake of fill, stockpile of fill)
- Use of geotextile (to reinforce the seabed and enhance the stability)
2
- Design of staged construction (reclaiming in stages of thinner layer)
- Provision of berm at the edge of reclamation (formation of stabilizing berm)
- Precaution and monitoring (sand blanket helps to spread the load evenly)
- Signs of imminent failure (tension cracks, settlement, etc)
- Pore water pressure measurement (using piezometers)
- Settlement and lateral deformation measurements (with appropriate plots)
5. How to monitor the stability during fill placement?

Indication of reclamation stability:
- Monitoring data
- Tension cracks at the top and side slope of the reclamation
- Settlement at the centre of reclamation increase rapidly
- Up and down curve profiles of seabed near the edge of the reclamation as
revealed by sounding survey
- Filling rate increasing suddenly
- Fill being stockpiled on the site excessively
Analysis of monitoring data:

- Plot of excess pore water pressure against vertical stress imposed by the fill.
(If excess pore water pressure rises faster than the applied vertical stress,
action must be taken to avoid failure)
- Plot of settlement at centre against lateral deformation in mud at the edge.1
(When failure is imminent, the lateral deformation increases at a faster rate
than the settlement at centre.)
- Relationship between the height of filling, time and lateral deformation. The
ratio of change in fill height to change in lateral deformation after a time lag
is plot against the fill height. The h-intercept of this plot gives the predicted
maximum height of filling which should not exceed until after consolidation
of mud layer.
1
How to measure the increase in lateral deformation?
3
Topic: Planning and Design of Sewerage
1. Why we need sewerage?

- Sewerage has always been part of the essential infrastructure of a modern
city.
- Effective sewerage improves the quality of waters as well as the public
hygiene and health.
2. Can you describe briefly the development of sewerage in Hong Kong?

Demand for a Public Sewerage:
- At 1970’s, the population of Hong Kong has increased significantly.
- The commercial and industrial activities have also grown dramatically.
- This led to an increase in water consumption and consequentially the
quantity of wastewater generation.
- Public sewers were installed incrementally in the past decades to meet the
demand.
Early Sewerage Strategy:

- In early 1970’s, a consultancy was commissioned by the Hong Kong
Government to investigate the state of Hong Kong waters and to
recommend the programme of improvement works.
- Recommendations given in the study formed the blue print for the sewerage
treatment and disposal strategy, which focused on the fully utilization of the
natural assimilative capacity of the sea.
New Sewerage Strategy:

- In 1980’s, it was realized that the current sewerage arrangements were
inadequate to mitigate the pollution problems of Hong Kong’s waters.
- With the issue of the White Paper entitled “Pollution in Hong Kong – A
Time to Act” and the enactment of Water Pollution Control Ordinance
(WPCO), a new sewerage strategy was formulated to tackle the water
pollution problem.
- By that time, sewage generated on both sides of the Harbour was discharged
into the central Harbour after receiving preliminary treatment.
3. Can you introduce briefly the current sewerage strategy in Hong Kong?
General:
- In 1989, a sewage strategy was formulated by the Government to tackle the
1
water pollution in Hong Kong.

- The sewerage strategy focused on two major areas: (1) the territory-wide
sewerage rehabilitation and improvement programme; and (2) the
arrangements of for sewage disposal combining elements of land based
sewage treatment with the natural self-purification capacity of the ocean.
Sewerage Master Plans:

- The whole territory was divided into 16 catchment areas.
- Sewerage Master Plan (SMP) study was commissioned by the EPD for each
of the 16 catchment areas.
- The studies covered the whole of Hong Kong to identify the specific
sewerage problem in various districts.
- The studies recommended measures to mitigate the pollution problem and
provision or upgrading of sewerage system on a catchment by catchment
basis.
- DSD has taken up the role of works agent to implement the proposed
mitigation works.
Harbour Area Treatment Scheme (HATS):

- Everyday, over one-third (i.e. 1.5 million cubic metres) of waste water is
discharged into Victoria Harbour.
- The water quality of Victoria Harbour has progressively deteriorated.
- HATS is aimed at improving the water quality of Victoria Harbour and is
implemented in two stages.
- It is an overall sewage collection and treatment scheme for areas on both
sides of Victoria Harbour.
- Under HATS Stage 1, sewage generated in Kowloon and Northeastern part
of Hong Kong Island is transferred by a deep tunnel system to a
chemically-enhanced primary sewage treatment (CEPT) plant at
Stonecutters Island for treatment and disposal.
- Following the full commissioning of Stage 1 of HATS1 in December 2001,
around 75% of the sewage generated (about 1.4 million cubic metres) in the
Harbour area is now treated at the Stonecutters Island Sewage Treatment
Works (SCISTW) and discharged through an interim outfall to the western
Harbour.
- Based on a series of studies and trials, the Government has developed a
proposal for Stage 2 of HATS in two phases to further improve water
1
Stage 1 of HATS valued $8.2B.
2
quality of Victoria Harbour. Additional facilities to convey all sewage from

the Harbour area to SCISTW for chemical treatment and disinfection will
be included in Stage 2A2, while the facilities for subsequent biological
treatment will be constructed under Stage 2B3.
- A public consultation exercise4 is currently carried out before deciding the
way forward for HATS.
4. What is Strategic Sewage Disposal Scheme?

Background and Scope:
- Strategic Sewage Disposal Scheme (SSDS) was recommended by the
Government in 1989 after the completion of the Sewage Strategy Study
(SSS), and later renamed5 as HATS in 2001.
- The scope of the SSDS was to collect, treat and dispose of sewage
generated around the Harbour. Sewage generated in the catchments will be
conveyed by deep tunnels to a chemically enhanced primary treatment
works at Stonecutters Island for treatment and disinfection before
discharging into the sea south of Lamma Island via an oceanic outfall.
Staging of SSDS:
- The SSDS was divided into 4 stages.
- Stage I consisted of collecting sewage from urban areas of Kowloon, Tsuen
Wan, Tseung Kwan O and the northeastern part of Hong Kong Island for
treatment at SCISTW. It included 23.6km long sewage tunnels up to 150m
below the city. The SCISTW is the most efficient chemically enhanced
primary treatment works over the world which performs as efficient as a
conventional secondary treatment plant6.
- Stage II comprised construction of a deep effluent transfer system from
SCISTW to an oceanic outfall at south of Hong Kong.
- Stage III/IV collected sewage from north and south-western parts of Hong
Kong for treatment at Mount Davies before adding to the oceanic outfall.
- Following a review carried out in 1995, the SSDS was subsequently revised
such that (1) the treatment system at SCISTW was upgrade to a chemical
process; (2) Stage III/IV to be diverted to convey sewage to SCISTW; and
(3) Stage II to undergo further EIA assessment of the outfall location and
treatment level.
2
Stage 2A of HATS will cost $8.4B to construct and $440M a year to operate.
3
Stage 2B of HATS will cost $11.1B to construct and $720M a year to operate
4
The four-month public consultation exercise will last until the 20th October 2004
5
Why rename?
6
Why not use secondary treatment process?
3
Review of SSDS:
- Considering the progress of the tunneling works in Stage I of the SSDS and
the continual public questions on a number of aspects of the system,
including the adequacy of the treatment to be provided and its cost
effectiveness, the Government decided to conduct an independent review on
the scheme as announced in the 1999 Policy Address.
- The review is to consider the experience in Stage I works, the present plans
for later stages, and alternative proposals, so as to make recommendations
as to whether the current plans should be adhered to, modified or replaced.
- This would help avoid further changes or delays to projects needed to
improve the water quality of Victoria Harbour.
- An “International Review Panel” (IRP) was set up in April 2000 and the
panel members presented their report on November 2000 in which they
recommended upgrading the sewage treatment process to tertiary level.
With this level of process in place, the treated sewage could be discharged
into the Harbour via the existing short outfall.
5. What is your view towards SSDS/HATS?

- Personally speaking, I support the government to implement the centralized
sewage discharge scheme around the harbour in order to improve the water
quality at Victoria Harbour.
- I believe that Victoria Harbour is an important asset to Hong Kong which
plays an irreplaceable strategic role to sustain the development of the city. I
also recognize that it is our responsibility to keep our harbour water clean.
- However, the government is currently providing a huge subsidy to finance
the operation of sewage service. In the 2002-2003 Financial Year, the
recurrent cost for providing sewage services in Hong Kong (excluding
depreciation) was about $1,633 million but the government was only able to
recover some $488 million through sewage charges taking into account the
charges concession. The remaining $1,145 was topped up from the General
Revenue. Sewage charges will need to go up if the Government adheres to
the polluters-pay principle after the commissioning of the remaining stages
of HATS.
- Nevertheless, in view of the huge construction cost and operation cost, and
the potential increase in sewage charges after the commissioning of the
Stage 2A and Stage 2B, I agree that a public consultation should be
conducted and that in-depth briefing sessions/public hearings should be
4
provided to our stakeholders such as green groups, academics, professional

bodies and community representatives. A consensus among the community
must be reached before implementing the project.
6. What is SMP?
Background:
- In 1980’s, it was considered that the existing sewerage arrangements were
not adequate to contain the increasing threat of pollution.
- In order to identify specific sewerage problems in various districts of Hong
Kong and to propose improvements to the sewerage system, a series of
“Sewerage Master Plans” (SMP) Study was commissioned by EPD.
- For the purpose of the study, the whole territory was divided into 16
catchment areas.
- The studies recommended measures to mitigate the pollution problem and
provision or upgrading of sewerage system on a catchment by catchment
basis.
- As resources permitted, the recommendations of SMP will be implemented
in a prioritized manner which will greatly improve the effectiveness of the
sewerage system.
- DSD has taken up the role of works agent to implement the proposed
mitigation works7.
Details of the SMP study:

- An investigation of the existing condition of the sewerage system.
- An assessment of flow and pollution loads within the sewerage system
under existing and future/ultimate development conditions.
- An analysis of the hydraulic capacity of sewerage system.
- The recommendation of measures to mitigate pollution problems or
shortfalls in the existing sewerage system.
- Recommendation for the provision or upgrading of sewage treatment works
and sewerage systems.
- The preparation of the cost estimate for carrying out the recommendations
in above, and the recommendation of an implementation programme.
- SMP’s give priority to eliminating wastewater connections to the
stormwater drainage system rather than eliminating stormwater from the
sewers.
7
There exist some sewerage projects not included in the SMP for particular need.
5
7. Can you describe briefly the recommendations of the Outlying Islands

Sewerage Master Plan?
Background:
- In 1994, the EPD completed the Outlying Islands Sewerage Master Plan
(SMP) study and devised a sewerage master plan for Lantau Island, Cheung
Chau, Lamma Island, Peng Chau and other smaller islands to the west and
south of Hong Kong Island.
- The SMP proposed upgrading and expanding the sewerage systems to cover
unsewered areas and to cope with future development in two stages.
- The Stage 1 of the Outlying Island Sewerage project is implementing high
priority works in DSD. The remaining sewerage works will be carried out in
Stage 2.
- Stage 1 works are divided into two phases: Phase I comprises works with
limited land resumption. The remaining Stage 1 works are grouped under
Phase II.
Existing sewerage network in Peng Chau:

- The Peng Chau sewerage system is a combined system with the exception
of the sewers serving Peng Lai Court and Kam Peng Estate, which are
located in the north-western part of the island.
- Currently, all sewage apart from that from the above-mentioned housing
estates is discharged to sea untreated via three seawall outfalls.
- Sewage from Peng Lai Court and Kam Peng Estate is pumped to Tai Lei
Island where secondary treatment and disinfection are provided prior to
discharge through a seawall outfall.
- There was an existing sewage pumping station located adjacent to Kam
Peng Estate which is designed to accommodate a sewage flow of 15l/s.
Recommendations in SMP:
- A separate system for sewage should be provided at Peng Chau to alleviate
the current water pollution problem.
- Under the Outlying Island Sewerage Stage 1 Phase II – Peng Chau
Sewerage Phase 1, new sewers will be constructed to connect all the
households in the central area to the foul sewers.
- Phase II works, which will cover the villages outside the Phase I catchments,
will be carried out subsequently once the land resumption work is
completed.
- The Peng Chau Sewage Treatment Works should be expanded in order to
6
cope with the additional flow and sewage load.
8. Can you describe briefly the recommendations of the Yuen Long and Kam Tin
Sewerage Master Plan?
Background:
- The SMP study area is Yuen Long District. The NWNT is currently served
by two sewerage systems: the Yuen Long System and NWNT Sewerage
System.
- The Yuen Long System covers the catchments at Yuen Long town. Sewage
is treated to secondary level at the Yuen Long Sewage Treatment Works and
the effluent is discharged to the Shan Pui River, which flows into Deep Bay.
- The NWNT Sewerage System was formulated to serve major new urban
developments in Tin Shui Wai and the TM/YL Corridor and the smaller
developments on the periphery of Yuen Long. Sewage collected within
these areas is conveyed to the Ha Tsuen sewage pumping station and
subsequent to the San Wai Sewage Treatment Works, the NWNT effluent
tunnel and the Urmston Road outfall.
- In 1992, the Yuen Long and Kam Tin Sewerage Master Plan was developed
out of a review and performance assessment of existing sewerage systems
and consideration of appropriate mechanisms for serving the outlying areas
to the major urban centres of Yuen Long, Tin Shui Wai and the TM/YL
corridor.
Recommendations in SMP:
- Trunk sewers to serve the entire Study Area. The trunk sewerage system
will consists of four major routes.
- Wastewater from the Study Area will be treated at two locations (Yuen Long
STW and San Wai STW) and the effluent will be disposed to sea via the
existing effluent tunnel and the Urmston Road submarine outfall.
- The effluent would receive at least preliminary treatment in the form of
screening and grit removal prior to discharge. Consideration should be
given to upgrading to primary treatment in the future.
- Five-stage programme was proposed for the construction of a sewerage
system covering the whole Study Area. Emphasis was placed on marking
early improvements in the water quality of streams and Deep Bay by
servicing the major urban areas.
9. What is the legislation governing the effluent discharge?
7
Water Pollution Control Ordinance:

- The Water Pollution Control Ordinance (WPCO), enacted in 1980, is the
main legislation to control water pollution in Hong Kong.
- The Ordinance and its subsidiary legislation allow the government to
declare Hong Kong waters into ten water control zones (WCZs).
- Control of discharge in these zones to achieve and maintain water quality
objectives is exercised mainly through a licensing system.
- It ensures that sewage and industrial wastewater will be discharged in an
environmentally acceptable manner.
Effluent discharge:
- Under Water Pollution Control Ordinance (WPCO), all discharges, other
than domestic sewage to a foul sewer or unpolluted water to a storm drain,
must be covered by an effluent discharge licence.
- The licence specifies the permitted physical, chemical and microbial quality
of the effluent.
- The general guidelines are that the effluent does not damage sewers or
pollute inland or inshore marine waters.
- Details of the effluent standards are listed in the Technical Memorandum on
Effluent Discharges.
Sewerage connections:
- The government is extending public sewers to some major rural areas in an
effort to improve the environmental there.
- In areas where these new sewers become available, a notice would be issued
under WPCO asking owners to connect their sewage to the public sewer. If
necessary, a further notice may be issued asking the owner to demolish or
fill in any redundant sewage treatment facilities or septic tanks and
soakaway-pits.
- The owner is required to construct and pay for the terminal manhole and
any pipework leading from the premises to the terminal manhole.
10. What are the standards for effluent discharge?

General:
- The WPCO allows the government to declare water control zones and to set
water quality objectives.
- The objectives describe the water quality that will promote the conservation
and best use of the waters in the public interest.
8
- In deciding whether to grant a licence for an effluent, the authority has to

consider the need to protect the drainage or sewerage system, including
disposal works, treatment processes, and the health and safety of workers in
them.
- Each control zone contains four systems into which wastes may be
discharged. They are foul sewers, storm water drains, inland waters
(including ground water) and coastal water.
- The effluent standards take account of the beneficial uses of the different
systems, but the systems and control zones fall into convenient groups.
Foul sewers:
- Effluent standard for foul sewers leading to similar sewage treatment plants
do not differ from zone to zone.
- However, effluents into foul sewers leading to a treatment plant with
microbial processes must meet more stringent standards for some toxic
metals. This is to protect the processes and ensure that they can continue to
treat domestic sewage effectively.
- Harmful substances8 are not allowed to be discharged into foul sewers.
- Unpolluted water nor diluted pollutants are not allowed to be discharged
into foul sewers to avoid overloading to the disposal system.
Storm water drains:

- Most storm water drains discharge directly into inland or coastal waters.
- The Authority will not normally allow effluents to them.
- If, exceptionally, he does so, effluents to them must meet the standards for
the next receiving waters downstream, and the available capacity of the
storm water drain has to be checked.
- In a few areas where the foul sewerage is not adequate for existing sewage
flows, storm water drains may serve as combined sewers. Effluent standards
will be fixed for these kinds of storm water drain.
Inland waters:
- The beneficial use of inland waters 9 is the only factor governing the
effluent quality and quality that the Authority will licence.
- There is no distinction between different zones.
- The Authority will not allow new effluents to rivers, streams or storm water
drains that are within 100m of a gazetted bathing beach and flow through
8
Pesticides, radioactive substances, flammable or toxic solvents, petroleum oil, waste liable to form scum or deposits, etc.
9
the bathing beach, in order to protect the health and comfort of bathers.
- Similarly, harmful substances and diluted pollutants are not allowed to be
discharged into the inland waters.
- However, the effluent standards do not apply to household septic tanks that
discharge to the ground. The Authority will control them by design and
maintenance standards.
Coastal waters:
- The water quality and beneficial use of coastal waters vary in different
water control zones.
- They need separate effluent standards.
- Within the coastal waters are special areas that need specific restrictions.
These areas include bathing beaches, sites of special scientific interest,
marinas and mariculture sites.
- No discharge is allowed near the sensitive areas such as beaches, marine
fish culture zone, typhoon shelter, marina, sweater intake point, etc.
- Similarly, harmful substances and diluted pollutants are not allowed to be
discharged into the coastal waters.
Effluent standards:
- Standards for effluents discharged include pH value, temperature,
suspended solids, settleable solid, BOD, COD, oil & grease, metal, cyanide,
phenols, sulphide, sulphate, total nitrogen, total phosphorus, surfactants,
and E. coli.
- The standards for effluent discharged into the foul sewers are least stringent
among different systems.
- For inland waters, the standards for effluent discharged into the potable
water supply is the most stringent.
- Different standards are prepared for different water control zones.
- For Port Shelter Water Control Zone -
(1) pH value 6 to 9
(2) Temperature 45
(3) Suspended Solids 30
(4) BOD 20
(5) COD 80
(6) E. coli 1000
- For Deep Bay Water Control Zone -
9
Such as for potable supply, irrigation, pond fish culture, general amenity, etc.
10
(1) pH value 6 to 9
(2) Temperature 45
(3) Suspended Solids 50
(4) BOD 20
(5) COD 80
(6) E. coli 1000
11. Why do we need sewerage at Peng Chau?

Background:
- At present, the sewage generated in Outlying Islands is only partially treated
by private facilities (like septic tanks, soakaway system) and then discharge
into the sea.
- This has caused pollution in the Southern Waters of Hong Kong.
- In view of this, the EPD had commissioned the “Outlying Islands Sewerage
Master Plan Study (SMP)” and developed an Outlying Islands Sewerage to
alleviate the water pollution problem by providing adequate public sewers,
sewage treatment and disposal facilities in Lantau Island, Peng Chau,
Cheung Chau and Lamma Island.
Sewerage at Peng Chau:

- Peng Chau is one of the study areas in the Outlying Islands SMP study.
- As recommended in the SMP, public sewers will be provided at Peng Chau
to replace the existing combined system for serving a planned ultimate
population of 10,225.
- There are two catchments in Peng Chau, i.e. Phase 1 catcment which covers
the central area of Peng Chau while Phase 2 catchemnt covers villages
outside Phase 1 catchment. The design population for Phase 1 catchment is
4863 whereas for Phase 2 catchment is 5362.
- The scope of the project that I was involved includes construction of gravity
sewers to collect sewage generated in Phase 1 catchment, a sewage
pumping station (and a temporary pump pit) and the associated rising mains
to collect and convey the sewage generated within the catchments to the
existing Sewage Treatment Works in Peng Chau. The upgrading work for
the Peng Chau Sewage Treatment Works (PCSTW) will be carried out
under another project item and will be completed prior to our project.
12. How is the existing sewage from village treated and disposed of?
Existing situation:
11
- At present, the sewage generated in most villages where no communal

sewer is available is only partially treated by private facilities like septic
tank system (STS) and is then discharged into the sea.
Design of septic tank:

- A STS consists of a septic tank, a soakaway pit or some soakaway trenches,
and the surrounding soil into which wastewater is finally disposed.
- The septic tank should be large enough to hold at least the volume of
wastewater collected in one day. The soakaway system and the surrounding
soil should be able to soak away the same volume in one day.
- Overflow from septic tank or soakaway pit, or direct discharge without
passing through a soakaway system, is polluting and should not be
permitted.
- Polluting material is only removed from the wastewater after traveling a
long distance in the soil. Pollution would result if a STS is located too near
to a beach, a stream, a well, etc., or even too near to a retaining wall where
wastewater might seep out from the face of the wall.
Mechanism of septic tank:

- Toilet wastes and sullage are collected by pipes to the STS. Rainwater,
which should be discharged into stormwater channels, should always be
excluded from the STS.
- Inside the septic tank, wastewater is partially broken down and separates out
into 3 layers, the scum on the top, the sludge at the bottom, and the main
body of liquid which then becomes the effluent from the septic tank. When
the STS is properly used, maintained and desludged, few solids would leave
the tank together with the effluent.
- Toxic and explosive gases are produced in the STS. Vent pipes are installed
to disperse these gases into the open air.
- A soakaway pit has a perforated lining through which effluent from the
septic tank can soak into the surrounding soil. This effluent contains
dissolved polluting material and also many small organisms that can cause
illness. Soakaway trenches perform the same function as a soakaway pit,
but are usually more efficient.
- The soil type and pit configuration will control the rate at which the effluent
will soak away.
- As the effluent seeps through the surrounding soil, a process of natural
purification occurs. This process includes the breakdown of the polluting
12
material by bacteria occurring naturally in the soil, and the eventual “die
off” of the pathogens. Adequate purification can only be achieved after the
effluent has traveled a fairly long distance through the ground.
13. Why carry out the works in phases?

- The whole of Peng Chau island is divided into two catchments
- The central area of Peng Chau is called Phase 1 catchment and the
remaining part is the Phase 2 catchment
- Since the works in the Phase 2 catchment is being reviewed by the EPD,
only the gravity sewers system in Phase 1 catchment will be included in this
contract.
14. How can you deal with the future flow development in your design?
Present:
- At present, a sewage pumping station and a sewage treatment plant in Peng
Chau serving the a few public estates at the eastern coast of Peng Chau
(Kam Peng Estate and Peng Lai Court).
- The design population and design flow of the existing sewage pumping
system which consisted of an existing sewage pumping station and the
associated twin DN150 rising mains is 1,500 and 15l/s respectively.
- The existing sewage pumping system is inadequate to cope with the
additional flow arising from the extension of the sewer network10.
Proposed Works:
- In view of this, a new sewage pumping system which comprises a new
sewage pumping station and the associated twin DN250 rising mains will be
constructed to replace the old one.
- The new sewage pumping station will be constructed adjacent to the old
sewage pumping station.
- 2 Duty and 1 Standby pump will be provided at the new sewage pumping
station, each of capacity 75l/s.
- The intermediate condition after the completion of Phase 1 networks and
before the completion of Phase 2 networks can be satisfied by adopting the
arrangement of 1 Duty and 2 Standby pump combination.
15. What does design life mean?

- Design life of a structure means the period after which the maintenance
10
The design flow for Phases 1 and 2 are 50l/s and 83l/s. But the design peak flow is 150l/s with stormwater allowance.
13
work for this structure becomes uneconomical.

- The design life of a sewage pumping station is 50 years, sewer 40 years and
rising mains 25 years.
16. What should be noted in designing the sewer alignment?

Population size and its distribution:
- As the first step in carrying out the sewerage design, I have to find out the
size and distribution of the population within the catchment.
- I obtained this information from the development programme by Planning
Department.
Land matters:
- The sewerage system should be located on Government land as far as
possible to minimize land resumption.
- The proposed sewerage should also be located at either road reserve or
designated drainage reserve. Both reserves are non-building areas, which is
essential to ensure there is an access at all times for construction, operation
and maintenance.
Underground utilities plans and drainage records:

- The updated utility plans from the relevant utility undertakers and the
drainage records of DSD should be checked in carrying out the design of
sewer alignment, in order to avoid any clashing of the proposed sewers with
the existing underground utilities
Topographical map:
- The routing of the sewer alignment also depends on the topography of the
catchment. As such, a topographical survey should be conducted
- The gradient of the sewer should be as far as possible comparable to the
ground surface. This is because we don’t want to construct too deep sewer
in village, which involves deep excavation along narrow alleys
Draft sewer alignment:

- Having finished the desk study, I worked out the draft sewer alignment and
the preliminary hydraulic design.
- In draft the alignment, I ensure that the collection points are covered.
- I also estimated the design flow based on the size and distribution of the
population, and then worked out the preliminary hydraulic design.
14
Site reconnaissance:
- After that, I carried out a site reconnaissance to identify the site constraint
and verify if the proposed sewer alignment is feasible.
- In the site reconnaissance, I found that there are some changes in the actual
condition. So I revised the sewer alignment and levels accordingly.
Detailed hydraulic design:

- In carrying out the hydraulic design, the maximum flow capacity is checked
to ensure the flow velocity within 1m/s to 3m/s.
- The minimum velocity should be at least 1m/s to ensure self-cleansing.
- On the other hand, the maximum velocity should be less than 3m/s. Very
fast flow is undesirable because the very fast flow is unstable which will
give rises to scouring and cavitation. The pipeline may be damaged. Also,
maintenance and inspection work inside the sewer with very fast flow
sewage is unsafe and may be impossible.
- If the pipeline is to be the laid on a steep ground surface, the flow velocity
should be reduced by laying the pipe on a flatter gradient or using the
backdrop manholes or other energy dissipators such as cascade.
17. What should be noted in choosing the location for pumping station?
- Similar to the design of gravity sewer, the proposed pumping station should
be located on Government land as far as possible.
- It should also be placed on a low point within the catchment in order to
facilitate the design of the gravity sewer.
- In addition, it should be located in an area remote from the existing
development to minimize the potential nuisance caused to the residents and
objections might be raised by them.
- The location of the pumping station must be accessible at all times.
18. What are the environmental considerations in designing the pumping station?
Odour:
- To minimize the odour impact, both the inlet chamber and the wet well of
the proposed pumping station will be located underground and enclosed by
air-tight cover
- A forced ventilation system will be installed whereby air is extracted from
these two spaces and passed through a de-odorizer for cleansing
15
Water quality:
- To minimize water quality impacts arising from the bypass of sewage, a
standby pump will be provided to cater for the periods of equipment
breakdown and maintenance.
- Also, dual electricity supply will be provided for the pumping station.
- Apart from these, a 2-hour storage capacity will also be provided in the wet
well as requested by EPD.
Noise:
- To minimize the noise impact from operating pumps, all pumps will be
located underground in the wet well, and is enclosed inside the pumping
station building.
Visual impacts:
- Aesthetics is also a major consideration in the design of the pumping station.
Architectural finishes will be provided on the external surface of the
pumping station.
- Moreover, the building will be surrounded by a planting strip to enhance its
appearance.
19. How can you determine the design population?

- In determining the design population, I made reference to the development
programme issued by the Territory Development Department.
- According to the figures listed in the programme, I found that the interim
population of Peng Chau by the year 2016 will be about 8,000 whereas the
forecasted ultimate population will be about 10,000.
- I found that the interim population is not far away from the ultimate
population, and that there should not be any significant changes in the land
use within the catchment.
- So it would be more economical to design a sewerage system with a
capacity to cater for the ultimate population.
20. Are there any other ways to obtain the population over the design area?
Source of population data11:
- Latest Forecasts of Population Distribution based on latest Working Group
on Population Distribution (WGPD) Papers.
- Territorial Development Strategy
11
How to select the source?
16
- Latest Census data
21. How can you obtain the design flow?

- First of all, I estimated the size and the distribution of the projected
population within the catchment based on the data available.
- The concerned catchment comprises mainly low density residential
developments in the form of modern villages.
- So, the domestic sewage flow is the major component of the total sewage
flow.
- I calculated the Average Dry Weather Flow (ADWF) by multiplying the
population with the corresponding global unit flow factors.
- To cater for the diurnal, seasonal and ground water infiltration factors, I
worked out the design peak flow by multiplying the ADWF with a peaking
factor based on the population to be served.
22. What is the global unit flow factor?

- The recommended global unit flow factors for use in the design are listed in
the design manual.
- The factors depend on the type of land use and class of housing.
- The value for domestic and commercial categories is based on 80% of the
mean daily water demands.
- The value for institutional and industrial categories is based on 100% of the
mean daily water demands.
23. What is the peaking factor?

- The peaking factor comprises the diurnal peak, seasonal peak, industrial
peak and stormwater infiltration.
- The diurnal peak reflects the general pattern of water usage throughout a
day
- The seasonal peak reflects the variations in water usage at different time of
the year
- The stormwater infiltration accounts for expedient or illegal stormwater
connections.
- For population lies between 10,000 and 50,000, a peaking factor of 4 is
adopted.
24. What are the criteria in hydraulic design of gravity sewers?

- The proposed sewers should have sufficient capacity to cater for the design
17
peak flow.
- Surcharge should be avoided to minimize the risk of overflow and the
difficulty in inspecting and carrying out maintenance operations.
- A minimum velocity for self-cleansing should be achieved.
- The velocity should not be too fast.
- Soffit of pipeline should be aligned at the same level at the manhole to
prevent surcharge by backwater.
- Special attention should be paid to the possible traffic disruption during
construction and future maintenance operation.
25. What equation did you used in carrying out the hydraulic design?
- Colebrook-white equation is adopted for hydraulic calculation and the
roughness value for UPVC, VC and PC pipes are taken as 0.6, 1.5 and 3
respectively.
26. What material did you choose for the sewer?

General criteria:
- Gravity flow or pressurized flow
- Design strength or pressure rating of the pipes
- Nature of the fluid to be conveyed
- Nature of groundwater and external environment
- Cost considerations – i.e. capital cost and maintenance cost
- Pipe jointing system
- Durability – i.e. resistance to corrosion and abrasion
- Availability of pipe sizes, fittings and lengths in the market
- Ease of cutting and branch connections
- Length and weight of individual pipes
- Future operating procedure and system development
Pipe material for village sewerage:

- UPVC pipes are adopted for all gravity sewers with pipe diameter not
exceeding 500mm to facilitate the construction within village where
transportation and mobilization of plant are difficult.
- UPVC has good corrosion resistance.
27. What is the pipe joint used?

Rigid joint:
- In the past, many pipes were welded or bolted which allow no pipe
18
movement after laying

- Any movement of the pipeline may result to differential settlement between
the pipelines and the structure. The high stresses between the pipe and joints
may lead to fracture and joint leakage12.
Flexible joint:
- Flexible joints are commonly used for sewers and rising mains.
- This reduces the problems arising from the settlement and speeds up the
pipe laying work.
28. How to check the structural capacity of the sewer?

Rigid pipe:
- Vitrified clay pipes and precast concrete pipes are rigid pipes.
- Rigid pipes support loads by the resistance of the pipe wall.
- The load concentrated at the top and bottom of the pipe.
- Bending moment is then created.
- The design criterion is the maximum load at which failure occurs.
Flexible pipe:
- Ductile iron pipes and UPVC pipes are flexible pipes.
- The vertical load acting on the flexible pipe relies on the horizontal thrust
from the surrounding soil through deformation.
- The loading on flexible pipe is mainly compressive force which is resisted
by arch action.
- The design criteria are maximum acceptable deformation and the buckling
load.
29. How to determine the pipe bedding?

Design of bedding for rigid pipe:
- The strength of a rigid pipe is given by the standard crushing test.
- It is found that the load required to produce failure of a pipe in the ground is
higher than the crushing load.
- The ratio of this is called bedding factor.
- Different types of bedding have different bedding factors.
- The choice of bedding factor/bedding type depends on the site conditions.
Design of bedding for flexible pipe:
12
Why watermains adopt rigid joint?
19
- The design is similar to that of the flexible pipe except that the design
criteria are the maximum acceptable deformation and the buckling load.
30. What is the use of manholes?

- The uses of manholes are provided to allow access for inspection and
maintenance of the sewerage system, separate the trunk sewers from the
private sewers (terminal manhole), and act as energy dissipators (backdrop
manhole).
- Manholes should be located at the intersection of sewers, junction between
different sizes or gradient of sewers, location where the sewer changes
direction, and on regular interval on long straight lengths13.
- The location of manholes should be such that no interruption to the traffic
during maintenance and no adverse impact on riding quality.
31. Why not use combined system?

- Using combined system inevitably can reduce the construction cost of
providing a separate system, and occupy less land
- However, large volume of flow will be treated especially in wet season,
which will increase the loading of the sewage treatment works.
- Also dilution of sewage would lower the efficiency of the treatment process.
32. What is terminal manhole?

Functions of terminal manholes:
- Terminal Manholes (TMH’s) are the interface between the public and
private drainage which are designed for a separation of maintenance
responsibility
- TMH’s are private properties and their construction costs are borne by
private lot owners. The government is only responsible for the construction
of the sewer connecting the terminal manhole and the trunk sewer.
- TMH protects the public sewerage system from damage or blockage due to
the indiscriminate discharge of sewage by the occupants.
- TMH also acts as a seal to prevent the emission of gases from the public
sewer.
- TMH should be positioned at a position agreed between the premise owner
and EPD, and should be constructed within the allocated land as close as to
the site boundary by the premise owner.
13
Smaller size of the sewer requires more manholes on a long straight length.
20
Physical constraints on design of terminal manholes in villages:

- Confined working space within the alley gives rise to lacking of space to
optimize the TMH design.
- Detailed liaisons among relevant government departments and utility
undertakings are required to identify all underground services and close site
supervision is necessary during excavation to safeguard those services.
- Any excavation works in the narrow alleys might cause significant noise in
addition to obstruction of access to residents.
- The existing septic tanks should be properly dealt with during design and
construction.
- It would be difficult to lay connecting pipes from the existing toilets to the
trunk sewer. Opening up of the existing floor may be required.
- Multiple domestic outlets may be considered by which one TMH may have
to service 3 or 4 or more houses.
- All proposed TMH’s shall be vented at the highest point of the building they
serve to prevent ingress of gases into houses.
- Generally, TMH’s cannot be constructed within alleys less than 1.2m wide.
Decommissioning of existing septic tanks:

- Decommissioning of existing septic tanks should be carried out the owners.
- Either temporary bypass the trunk sewers or temporary suspension of the
existing sewerage system is required in case the existing septic tanks are in
conflict with the proposed public sewers.
Cost to be borne by the owners:

- Provision of TMH.
- Modification of air vent to suit
- Provision of new downpipe from roof to open channel for stormwater
- Modification of pipe connection from toilets to TMH
- Maintenance of TMH
- Sewage charge
Materials for terminal manholes:

- The common materials available for TMH are concrete, vitrified clay (VC)
and UPVC.
- Concrete is strong, is easily manufactured and can be designed to suit
particular site conditions. The drawbacks of this type TMH is that it is
heavy and is susceptible to chemical attack.
21
- UPVC is cheap, light, strong and chemically inert.

- VC is relatively light in weight, and is chemically inert with high durability.
However, it is more brittle than concrete and UPVC.
33. What are the main difficulties in carrying out sewerage works in villages?
- The major difficulty in carrying out sewerage works in village is that the
working space is very limited.
- Underground utilities are congested
- Development of village change very fast
- Causes nuisance to the residents
- Large machine may not be deployed, works progress may be slow
- Low cost effectiveness
- Restricted working hours
34. What are the main difficulties in carrying out sewerage works in urban areas?
- Traffic diversion
- Utility diversion
- Limit working space
35. Why do we need sewerage at Sai Kung Area 4?

Background:
- In 1989, a consultancy study was commissioned by EPD to carry out the
“Port Shelter Sewerage Master Plan Study” to recommend measures for
implementation to reduce water pollution at Port Shelter, Sai Kung.
- The proposed sewage conveyance system is one among many sewerage
projects recommended under SMP.
- It is essential in conveying the sewage collected from developments in Sai
Kung Planning Area 4 and its upstream areas to the Sai Kung Sewage
Treatment Works for treatment and disposal.
- In accordance with the approved Sai Kung Town North Planning Area 4
Layout Plan, the planned developments include hotel, school and
recreational, residential and commercial developments.
- The upstream areas are mainly village type development.
Sai Kung Area 4 Sewerage:

- The project is to provide a sewage conveyance system to convey sewage
collected from its catchment, which includes Sai Kung Planning Area No. 4
and the adjoining villages to the existing Sai Kung Sewage Treatment
22
Works (SKSTW) for treatment and disposal.

- The works proposed under this project mainly comprise the construction of
a sewage pumping station which will be equipped with 4 nos. sewage
pumps at Sai Kung Planning Area No. 4, 2,200m twin rising mains of
450mm diameter and 700m gravity sewers of 600mm diameter.
- The sewage collection system immediately upstream of the proposed
sewage pumping station is to be provided under other projects.
- The design population for this project is about 18,700 according to the
“Study on South East New Territories Development Strategy Review”.
- Sewage flow generated from the domestic population as well as tourists and
commercial activities.
- The design ADWF adopted is 304l/s or 7,500m3/day.
- To convey the sewage generated from the catchment to the existing SKSTW,
a pumping system must be provided to overcome the topographic constraint
as the path leading to the SKSTW runs through a long distance of flat areas
and uphill.
36. Can you tell me briefly how to design rising mains?

Land matters:
- Similar to gravity sewer system, the rising mains should also be located on
Government land as far as possible to minimize land resumption.
Underground utilities plans and drainage records:

- Updated utility plans should be checked to avoid any clashing of the
proposed sewers/rising mains with underground utilities.
Topographical consideration:
- The routing of rising mains may not depend on the topography of the road
under which the pipes will be laid. However, it is preferable to design the
rising main with its gradient comparable to the ground surface in view of
cost effectiveness and workability.
Hydraulic design:
- The hydraulic design of a rising main takes into consideration of the size
and configuration of the sewage pumping station or the size of the wet well,
magnitude of the flow, distance and height (or head) to be travel, number of
the pumps provided, the operation requirement of pumps, and number of
rising mains to be provided.
23
- Criteria for minimum and maximum flow velocities should be met. Too fast
flow in rising main will also give rise to an increase in power cost due to the
additional head loss.
- The proposed sewers/rising mains should have sufficient capacity to cater
for the design peak flow.
- Size of the rising mains is important in respect of the flow velocity, and
hence the surge and head loss.
- Apart from the steady state, transient state should also be catered for in the
design of rising mains. Surge suppression measures should be considered in
case the surge is likely to be significant.
- Thrust blocks should be designed to prevent the pipes from being moved by
forces exerted within the pipe by the flow of water hitting bends, tapers, and
closed or partially closed valves.
Operation and maintenance considerations:

- Air release valves should be provided at high points and washout should be
installed at low points. The locations of the washout should be so designed
such that the time required for sewage discharge during emergency can be
reduced.
- Inspection chambers with access hatch and isolating valves should be
included to facilitate inspection and maintenance.
- Discharge chamber is positioned at the discharge end of the rising mains to
dissipate the energy of the flow, in order to achieve a non-turbulent14
condition before the sewage will gravitate through the downstream system.
37. What is surge?

Occurrence of surge:
- Surge pressure is caused by rapid change in flow velocity in pipeline.
- A series of wave is generated and will propagate along the rising mains.
- The pump decelerates rapidly, creating a negative pressure wave travels
from the pumping station end to the discharge end, and the flow is
decelerated.
- The negative pressure wave reaches the discharge end, and is reflected back
toward the pumping station as a positive pressure wave, which further
decelerates the flow.
- A cycle of pressure wave travel is completed when the positive pressure
wave reaches the pumping station, where it is reflected again and a second
14
Turbulent flow/condition promotes the liberation of H2S, so it should be avoided in any cases.
24
wave of reduced pressure travels up the pipe.

- After a short period, the pump speed is reduced to a point that it no longer
develops a sufficient head to pump against the discharge head.
- The check valve on the pump discharge will then closes which isolates the
pump from the transients in the pipeline.
- The wave propagation will be dissipated by friction or some positive means
of damping action.
- During this sequence of events, the head at the discharge end remains
constant. At intermediate points, the head is determined by the sum of the
pressures of positive and negative waves.
- Surge is likely to be significant in long rising mains or where high velocities
occur.
Analysis of surge pressure:

- The roundtrip time of travel of the pressure wave from and back to the point
of flow change is termed the critical period and is given by “2L/a”, where
“L” is the length of the rising main and “a” is the velocity of pressure wave.
- The magnitude of pressure buildup at the point of flow change related to
whether the flow is stopped in a time interval equal to or less than or greater
than the critical period.
- The velocity of a surge wave “a” depends on the physical properties of the
fluid and the rising mains. Higher bulk modulus of the conveying fluid,
lower the wave speed. Larger pipe diameter/thickness ratio gives lower
wave speed. Stronger pipe produces a higher wave speed.
- If the flow velocity decelerates to zero within the critical period, the change
is said to be “instantaneous”, in which case the surge pressure is estimated
by “aV/g”, where V is the flow velocity. Check valve installed at the end of
the pipeline will give rises to a positive pressure which will give rises to an
additional pressure. Whereas a rapid closure of check valve at beginning of
the pipeline will produce a negative pressure to be subtracted from the
initial pressure. However, such valve closure may create “vapour cavity” in
the pipeline, if the pressure in the pipeline drops below the vapour pressure.
- On the other hand, slow closure of check valve will result in a longer time
for the flow to decelerate.
Surge suppression measures:

- The surge pressure can be limited by minimizing the rate of change of
velocity.
25
- Flywheel to increase the pump inertia so as to prevent rapid drop of pump

speed and flow rate. It is simple and is effective on low-head in short
pipelines. However, it is heavy and it requires a higher power, and hence
higher recurrent cost.
- Surge tank is a large capacity tank. Water in the surge tank will flow into the
pipeline in case the pressure in the pipelines drop below the pressure in the
tank. To this end, further pressure drop could be avoided.
- Air relief valves should be installed at locations of minimum pressures to
allow air to enter the pipeline when the pipe internal pressure falls below
atmospheric pressure.
- Air vessel is a pressurized vessel. When the internal pressure of the pipe is
reduced, the pressurized water in the vessel will be forced into the pipeline
and thus the internal pipe pressure will be increased.
- Slow-closing check valve will close slowly against reverse flow to reduce
pressure rise.
38. What is septicity?

Causes of septicity:
- In the sewerage network, bacteria breaks down the organic components in
sewage.
- If there is a lack of oxygen during the degradation process, septic conditions
will occur which will result in the formation of hydrogen sulphide.
- This causes an offensive smell and is a health hazard.
- Septicity becomes a problem when the retention time of sewage in the
mains is long and the temperature is high or the incoming sewage to the
pumping station is already septic.
Effects of septicity:
- When the pump begins to operate, the heavy sulphide concentration will be
discharged through the rising mains to gravity sewer or downstream
treatment units where severe corrosion of concrete can take place.
- Septic sewage will also inhibit the sewage treatment process.
Ways to minimize the problems of septicity:

- For the estimation of the amount of sulphide, key parameters include BOD
or COD, sewage temperature, flow, the gradient of pipe and slime/sewage
interface.
- The most common method to control septicity in the rising mains is the
26
direct injection of oxygen into the mains.

- Other methods include some pre-aeration in the wet well of the pumping
stations or to add controlled dosage of nitrite solution.
39. How can minimum velocity be achieved for sewers in flat land?
- To achieve a minimum flow velocity for self-cleansing, it is necessary to
provide a minimum gradient in the gravity sewer. So deep sewers will be
required if the sewer is long.
- When very long deep sewer is not practicable, alternative sewerage system
may be used such as pumping station combined with gravity sewer or
vacuum sewer system. However, it will involve higher capital and operation
cost.
40. Discuss the difficulties in designing a sewage collection system in urban areas?
Land availability:
- There is only very limited space available in the congested urban areas for
the sewerage work, as well as stockpiling of material.
- Sometimes, land resumption is very difficult, and the process could be
lengthy.
- Pipe size should be minimized so as to reduce the trench width during
construction.
- Shallow sewers are preferable to minimize effect on open trench
excavation.
- Selection of type of sewage pumping station is also dictated by the land
availability.
Underground utilities:
- Underground utilities are always found along the proposed alignment of the
sewer or rising mains.
- Better coordination with the utility companies is required at the design stage,
to minimize the chance of utility diversion.
- Trial pits may be dug to locate the alignment of the utilities.
- In case the alignment of the utilities cannot be confirmed during design,
additional construction should be allowed in the contract for subsequent
utility diversion during construction stage.
- In addition, flexibility should be allowed in the designed alignment of the
pipelines.
- In view of the congested utility around the pipeline, it might be the case that
27
the soil around the pipeline will be excavated. In this connection, in design
of thrust block, only the frictional forces between the underside of the thrust
block and the soil underneath are considered.
Ground conditions:
- Ground investigation should be carried out to find out the ground conditions
on the proposed site to facilitate the design of the foundation work.
Disruption to local traffic:

- Due consideration should be given to the impact to local traffic in design
stage. The alignment of the sewers/rising mains should be so designed such
that the proposed works will not affect the traffic significantly.
- Tentative temporary traffic arrangement should be formulated to ensure that
the proposed works can be carried out with the assumed resources and time
frame.
- Push-in joints of pipeline can be adopted to shorten the construction time so
as to minimize the disruption to the traffic.
- In some cases, only night work will be permitted to reduce traffic disruption.
Extra time should be allowed in the estimation of Contract period.
41. Discuss the difficulties in designing a sewage collection system in rural areas?
Siting of sewage pumping station:
- Selection of site location for sewage pumping station must be careful.
- The sewage pumping station should be located far from the sensitive
features, such as temple, local village, etc.
- Fung shui issue should be addressed in the design.
- The appearance of the sewage pumping station should be blended with the
surroundings.
Design of rising mains and sewers:

- In most cases, the rising mains and sewers will be laid under the public
roads which may be the only access of some villages.
- The pipelines should be designed to be as shallow as possible to minimize
the disturbance to the villagers.
- Possibility of provision of alternative access should be considered.
- The pipe materials to be used should be duly considered for the construction
of village sewerage.
- Location of the existing septic tanks and the like should be located as
28
accurate as possible.
- Flexibility for changes should be allowed in terms of the pipeline alignment
in both horizontal and vertical directions to suit the actual site conditions.
Environmental consideration:
- Compliance with relevant environmental ordinance and regulations should
be properly addressed in the design for the estimation of project cost and
contract period.
42. Please compare the option of constructing deep sewers versus a pumping
station?
Cost effectiveness:
- In general, construction cost and maintenance cost15 of sewage pumping
station is higher than that of deep sewers.
- For a sewage pumping station with intermediate size, say for design peak
flow of 250l/s, the construction cost is about $10M according to the past
records of DSD. Meanwhile, the unit cost for construction of deep sewers,
say 900mm dia. with about 10m deep, is about $10,000/m.
- In this connection, construction cost for deep sewers will be less than that
for sewage pumping station provided that the total length of the sewers is
less than 100m.
Constructability:
- However, if constructing very long or very deep sewers will give rises to
exceptionally high difficulties and hence the cost of construction, it is
preferable to construction a sewage pumping station.
- If the discharge point is at the relatively high point, it is inevitably to
construct a sewage pumping system to convey the sewage collected up to
the discharge point.
43. Can you describe briefly the design of a sewage pumping station?
General:
- The function of the sewage pumping station is to provide sufficient
hydraulic head for the collected sewage in overcoming the topographical
constraints in carrying sewage to the sewage treatment works
- Careful planning is required to minimize both the cost and unnecessary
nuisance brought to the public.
15
How about the comparison on recurrent cost?
29
Identification of catchments and flow buildup:

- Reference should be made to the sewerage catchment areas (SCA) defined
in the respective SMP.
- Forecast the size and distribution of population within the catchment areas
for the design years based on the available population data.
- Estimate the average sewage flow (ADWF) and subsequently determine the
design peak flow based on the forecast population.
Siting and land requirements of sewage pumping stations:

- The proposed sewage pumping station should be positioned in government
land as far as possible to minimize land resumption.
- It should be located at the low point within the catchments in order to
facilitate the sewage collection.
- It should also be located as close to the discharge points as possible to
shorten the length of the rising mains so as to minimize power
consumptions during future operation.
- It should be remote enough from the nearby residence or other sensitive
features in order to minimize the nuisance caused to them during
construction and operation.
- Environmental considerations should be given to the impacts on air, noise
and water pollution.
- The proposed site for sewage pumping station should be covered by the
local electricity supply. Nearby drainage system should be identify for
emergency discharge.
- The site for the sewage pumping station should be accessible at all time for
future inspection and maintenance.
- Sites for sewage pumping station should be included on the various
statutory or town plans.
- The land required for a sewage pumping station depends on the designed
and standby capacity, site configuration, type and nature of the ancillary
facilities required.
Classification of sewage pumping stations:

- In general, sewage pumping stations can be classified according to the type
and the arrangement of pumps into wet well/dry well pumping station,
submersible pumping station and screw pumping station.
- In wet well/dry well pumping station, centrifugal pumps are located in a dry
30
well and draw sewage from an adjacent wet well through suction pipes.
This type of pumping station usually occupies more land area and is thus
limited to large pumping installations with high flows and high heads.
- In submersible pumping station, centrifugal pumps are mounted at the
bottom of a single wet well and draw sewage through the bottom of the
pump body and the flow is pumped into the discharge pipework connected
to the pumps. This type of pumping stations has advantages over other types
due to their relatively low cost in civil construction works and less land
areas required. However, the type of submersible pumps available in the
market is quite limited and there might be no such particular type of
submersible pumps to cope with the designed pumping conditions16.
- In screw pumping station, screw pumps are installed to provide the required
lift to the sewage. Screw pumps are more robust than centrifugal pumps that
it can pump large solids without clogging and it operates at a constant speed
over a wide range of flows with relatively good efficiencies. However, this
type of pumping station requires much more land areas than the other two
types, and it is only suitable for high flow with low heads. In addition,
screw pumps are always exposed which may create nuisance to the nearby
residence. As such, this type of pumping stations is not suitable for ordinary
sewage conveying pumping station except the one inside the sewage
treatment works.
Hydraulic design of sewage pumping stations:

- The inlet chambers, screening chambers and wet wells should be so
designed such that sufficient flow gradients are provided and that no
stagnant zones for sediment deposition.
- If situation allows, it is a good practice to carry out physical hydraulic
model tests for the wet wells to ensure that uniform hydraulic distribution is
achieved at all flow conditions and pump operations, in particular to the
vortices and air entrainment17 which may reduce the pump efficiency and
cause vibration and damages to pump parts, and the pre-swirl in pump
intake which may result in cavitation and damage to pump parts as well.
- The flow depth and velocity at the screening channels should be sufficiently
large for the proper functioning of the proposed screening device.
Hydraulic design of sewage pumping system:
16
For an exceptioanlly high head or flow.
17
Vertices and air entrainment may be overcome by providing various features attached to the inlet sever of the wet well, such as
vertical drop tube, baffle wall, etc.
31
- The sewage pumping system comprises the wet wells of the sewage
pumping station, pumps, suction and discharge piping, rising mains and the
discharge chamber. In some situation, inlet works of the sewage pumping
station also becomes part of the pumping system.
- The hydraulic design of the pumping system based on the size of the wet
well, number and arrangement of pumps and rising mains system, size of
the pumps, pumping mains and rising mains, and static head required. The
design is more or less a trial and error procedure in order to formulate the
most favourable condition.
- The required wet well volume (or control volume) should be large enough
to prevent short-cycling of the pump and motor, and is thus a function of the
sewage inflow rate and the capacity of the pumps used18. However, the wet
well volume should not be too large such that the retention time would be
increased and septic condition would be developed. Economical
considerations should be given in the design of wet well volume.
- A “Low Water Level” (LWL) should be set at the wet well such that the
water level in the wet well should not be lowered than LWL at all times.
LWL should be kept to a minimum stagnant storage volume. However, the
LWL should be high enough to provide sufficient submergence19 to prevent
vortex formation and to provide sufficient suction head at the pump inlet.
All pumps must switch off at this level.
- The depth between each pump switch on level and pump switch off level
can be determined by dividing the control volume (of a single pump, or the
increment between the consecutive pumps in multiple pump case) with the
wet well sectional area.
- The “Maximum Top Water Level” (MTWL) should be set 150mm below
the invert of the incoming sewer to avoid surcharging of the upstream
sewers20. All pumps will be switched on at this level.
- A minimum difference in control setting levels of 100mm to 150mm should
be allowed so that switching would not be affected by turbulence.
- The desirable flow velocity in pump suction piping and discharge piping
ranges between 1m/s to 2m/s.
- The static head of the pumping system is the water level difference between
wet well and the discharge point21.
18
V = θq/4 (or 900Q/N), where “θ” is minimum time of one pumping cycle, and “q” is the pump capacity
19
Submergence required depends on the inlet velocity. Higher velocity requires larger submergence depth. – to provide a larger
net positive suction head (NPSH).
20
If the wet well volume is small for reasons, the overall storage volume can be increased by adding the volume in incoming
sewers. In this case, the MTWL should be set above the invert level of the incoming sewer and the flow velocity through the
screening device should be checked. Anyway, such design is not recommended in the local practice.
21
Since the water levels keep varying, the static head is changing from time to time.
32
- The frictional loss in the pumping system depends on the length and sizes of
the pipes, whereas the minor loss depends on the type and number of
different pipe fittings and size of the pipes22.
- Total dynamic head is determined by adding the static head, frictional loss
and minor loss together, and is represented graphically by a “System Head
curve” with the head against flow. The “Pump Characteristic curves” of
short listed pumps are then superimposed on the “System Head curve”. The
pump finally selected should have its “Pump Head curve” intersecting the
“System Head curve at a point (called duty point) at the required flow rate
and head required. The efficiency and power output at duty point should be
checked.
- If multiple pumps are to be used, the pumps so selected should be suitable
for different pumping arrangements23.
Layout design of sewage pumping stations:

- Layout design of a sewage pumping station highly depends on the land
availability, designed sewage flow and the ancillary facilities to be
provided.
- The layout of the sewage pumping station should be so designed in order to
facilitate future operation and maintenance.
- The inlet chambers, screening chambers and wet wells should be arranged
in accordance with the previous hydraulic design. The storage volume of
these chambers should be checked to see if the required (2 hours)
emergency storage capacity at average flow rate can be achieved.
- The wet well is compartmentalized to allow a portion of the wet well to be
out of service for inspection and repair. In some cases, the wet well is
divided into identical partitions, so that in case of low flow situation sewage
would be stored in only one partition and less time for the sewage to stay in
the wet well and hence to minimize the occurrence of septic condition
- To minimize the potential adverse impacts to the environment due to
sewage bypass from the pumping station during emergency situation like
power failure and breakdown of pumping facilities, standby pumps would
be provided. Dual electricity supply would also be provided as far as
possible.
22
Frictional loss and minor loss is directly proportional to V2,, and is inversely proportional to D4. So a slightly decrease in pipe
size will add a considerable amount of head loss to the pumping system, as well as the pumping head required.
23
It is worth noting that doubling the flow in the rising mains will increase the frictional loss and minor loss by four times, but
no change to static head. The overall change in total dynamic head depends on the ratio of static head to the sum of frictional loss
and minor loss. In addition, two identical pumps operating in parallel will double the flow capacity of the pump for a particular
pump head. So a new duty point will be located.
33
- To prevent odourous gas emission, inlet chamber, screening chambers and

wet well would be enclosed underground. An air extraction system would
be installed in which air would be cleansed by an activated carbon
de-odouriser before being discharged into the open air.
- To reduce the noise level and visual impact, all machinery would be housed
inside the building.
- The dry well (for wet well/dry well pumping station) should be of sufficient
size to allow personnel to move around the machinery as well as dismantle
and assemble it.
- Superstructure is needed to house the machinery such as pump motors,
deodouriser, control panel, switch board, and transformers.
- In designing the framing plan of superstructure, considerations on
functional suitability, operational convenience, ease of maintenance and
economical viability were taken into account. Sufficient space was provided
for maneuvering and installation of E&M equipment and movement of
overhead cranes.
- Appropriate architectural finishes and colour scheme were chosen to
harmonize the pumping station with its surroundings. A peripheral planting
strip around the building was designed to enhance its appearance. Glass
blocks were used on the external walls to enhance the transmission of
sunlight into the building to reduce power consumption.
- The general layout of the sewage pumping station should be circulated
among the E&M counterparts (E&MP Division), maintenance authority
(BCM Section & MN/MS/HK&I Division), electricity supply company
(CLP Power / Hongkong Electric), water supply authority (WSD), etc for
their comments.
- Ventilation system is also provided for provision of oxygen for breathing,
removal of products of respiration and occupation, and removal of artificial
contaminants in the workplace.
- Penstocks would be incorporated so that every component of the pumping
station can be isolated for maintenance.
- Lifting facilities were provided to allow easy maneuvering and installation
of pumps and accessories.
- Cat ladders with safety hoops and intermediate platforms surrounded with
safety chains and handrails were also provided to all underground wells to
enable easy and safe access for maintenance
Structural design of sewage pumping stations:
34
- The proposed pumping station mainly comprises a single storey

superstructure and a substructure. The structure above the finished ground
level was classified as superstructure.
- All structural elements were designed in accordance with the
recommendations given in BS 8110:Part 1:1997 – “Structural Use of
Concrete”.
- For the structure below the finished ground level such as the inlet chamber,
screening chamber, wet well and valve chamber, it was classified as
substructure. The substructure was designed as aqueous liquid retaining
structure in accordance with the recommendations given in BS 8007:1987 –
“Design of Concrete Structures for Retaining Aqueous Liquids”.
- Typical cast in-situ beam-column system was adopted to maximize the clear
span of the pumping station. This system had a characteristic of moment
continuity across supports leading to a more economical design. The
structural integrity and lateral stability could be easily achieved since all the
members were securely joined together. Because of its strong frame action
and low-rise nature, the provision of wind resisting elements such as braced
walls was not necessary.
- In order to accommodate various ancillary facilities such as transformer,
lifting devices, mechanical screens, deodourization system as well as surge
suppression equipment, the number of interior columns and partition walls
is minimized. To avoid excessive deflection, each structural member should
comply with the ratio of span to effective-depth of continuous beams.
- Having established the framing plan, structural analysis is carried out with
reference to three basic types of loading namely dead load, imposed load
and wind load as stated in BS 8110. The dead weight of structural elements
plus their finishing are classified as dead loads while the floor loads and the
machinery loads are classified as imposed loads. In determining the
machinery loads of E&M equipment such as overhead gantry cranes, pumps
and deodourizer, reference should be made to the information provided by
the equipment suppliers and the recommendations from the Electrical &
Mechanical works designer.
- For pumping station was located in a general terrain and its height was less
than 10m above the finished ground level, the wind pressure was taken as
1.2kPa according to the Code of Practice on Wind Effects Hong Kong –
1983 published by the Building Development Department (the former
Buildings Department).
- In carrying out the structural analysis, the structure can be simplified from
35
3-dimensional into 2-dimensional models. Taking into account of various

combinations of dead loads, imposed loads and wind loads, the most critical
frames in both longitudinal and transverse direction will be chosen for the
analysis.
- A computer package – “SAP2000” can be utilized in carrying out the
structural analysis of the frame models and determining the internal
member forces of the plane frames. The computer results should be verified
by analyzing a critical plane frame using moment distribution method
manually. The critical moment, shear and axial forces of each type of
structural elements under ultimate limit state will then be extracted for
subsequent structural design.
- In the structural design of the superstructure, the size and spacing of
reinforcements required can be determined for slabs, beams, columns and
other structural members and prepared sketches for the preparation of
reinforced concrete drawings accordingly.
- The substructure consisted of inlet chamber, screening chambers, wet well
and valve chamber. The functions of these structural elements were to retain
and convey sewage before pumping into the rising pipes. It was necessary
to prevent the ingress of ground water into the substructure and egress of
sewage from the substructure to the surrounding soil. Therefore, the
reinforced concrete structure should be designed to the standards of aqueous
liquid retaining structure.
- An important criterion for designing aqueous liquid retaining structure was
to control the crack due to both flexural and thermal effects. The
substructure is designed against serviceability limit state design in
accordance with BS 8007 to ensure that the crack width would not exceed
0.2mm under flexural tension in mature concrete and direct tension in
immature concrete. For the ultimate limit state design, critical moment and
shear were checked in accordance with recommendations given in BS 8110.
- As the basement walls of the substructure would be mainly subject to lateral
earth pressure, ground water pressure and hydrostatic pressure of sewage,
the most critical load combination occurred when the lateral earth pressure
and ground water pressure applied on the external side, but no hydrostatic
pressure of sewage applied on the internal side. To carry out the structural
analysis, two models should be established based on the assumption that the
three edges of wall were fixed while the top edge was free ended and
hinged before and after the ground floor slab was constructed respectively.
Based on the “Moody Design Chart”, the critical moment and shear on the
36
rectangular plate can then be determined.

- In the structural design of basement walls, the quantities of reinforcements
would be determined based on the crack width limitation under the
serviceability limit state. Their flexural strength under the ultimate limit
state is then checked until it is found that the reinforcements were adequate.
- Through this exercise, it is understood that the amount of steel
reinforcements for an aqueous retaining structure was mainly governed by
the crack width limitation under the serviceability limit state.
44. How can you prevent corrosion of the wet well of the sewage pumping station?
- The wet well and other underground structures (collectively known as
substructure) of the sewage pumping station were designed as a water
retaining structure. Durability and crack width control have been properly
addressed in the design.
- Corrosion protection coating will be applied on the concrete surface.
- The size of wet well and pump settings are designed in such a way that the
sewage retention time in wet well is minimized. Septic condition is avoided
as far as possible.
- A forced ventilation system will be installed for the substructure to get rid
of the corrosive gas emitted from the sewage.
45. Have you considered explosive force in your design as there will be explosive
gas emitted from sewage?
- Explosive gas such as H2S will be emitted from the sewage under septic
condition.
- To avoid the occurrence of septic condition, the sewage retention time have
been minimized by optimizing the pump settings, as well as the wet well
volume.
- In addition, a forced ventilation system will be provided to avoid the
accumulation of harmful gases inside the substructure.
- The structures have been designed in accordance with design code BS8110
with a severe exposure conditions and 2 hours fire resistance.
- All covers to the substructures are airtight so that the aggressive gas cannot
be escaped from the sewage containing chambers.
37
Topic: Design and Construction of water Retaining Structures
Topic: Design and Construction of Water Retaining Structures
1. Why is the pumping station designed as water retaining structure?

- The primary function of the sewage pumping station is to store the sewage
collected from its catchments before it is pumped to the discharge point.
- In this connection, water-tightness is the basic requirement for the
substructure of sewage pumping station in order to retain the sewage
without leakage. Failure to do so might give rise to environmental nuisance
to surroundings.
- Groundwater will also be excluded from the sewage pumping station for the
proper functioning of the underground portion of the sewage pumping
station.
- In case the substructure of the sewage pumping station is made of
reinforced concrete, percolation of sewage and ground water through the
concrete structure should be avoided as far as possible in order not to
adversely affect the durability and the long term performance of the sewage
pumping station.
2. Why do you use reinforced concrete for water retaining structures?

- Concrete is generally the most economical material of construction.
- Concrete structures will provide long life1 and low maintenance costs.
- Construction of concrete structures involves only conventional techniques.
- Concrete structure can be designed and constructed to any configuration to
suit the functional requirements of the structures.
3. What are the design objectives for water retaining structures?

- Water retaining structures must be designed to fulfill the requirements of
normal reinforced concrete structures in having adequate strength and
durability.
- In addition, it must be designed to prevent water from leaking or percolating
through the structure.
- Additional requirements for ensuring a reasonable service life for the
structure without undue maintenance are also onerous for water retaining
structure2.
- The performance of the water retaining structures highly depends on the
quality of the concrete and the workmanship of concreting. So, good quality
1
For a correctly designed structure and good quality of material and workmanship, the design life of the structure should be
between 40 and 60 years.
2
It is necessary to design for a more severe exposure condition and to provide sufficient concrete cover to reinforcement.
1
control and workmanship are especially critical for water retaining

structures. Such requirements should be properly addressed at the design
stage and should be duly specified in the contract documents.
4. What factors affect the durability of the water retaining structures?

General:
- The durability of the water retaining structures depends highly on the
permeability of the structures (internal), and exposure conditions and
loading conditions (external conditions).
Permeability of concrete:
- It is necessary for the water retaining structures to have low permeability so
as to prevent water leakage through the concrete structure and to provide
adequate protection against corrosion of the reinforcement and other
embedded steel, if any.
- Water loss always occur at the joints and cracks formed inside the concrete
structures. To enhance the impermeability of concrete, it is necessary to
control the joints and cracks in the concrete structures.
- Number and locations for joints in concrete should be properly designed.
Requirements for preparation of all joints in concrete should be delineated
in the contract drawings and specifications. Basically, waterstops should be
provided at the joints3.
- Cracks would be formed on the concrete structure due to the early thermal
movement, flexural and direct tension stress and shrinkage of concrete.
Most cracks cannot be avoided. However, sufficient reinforcement is
adequate to limit the crack to the desired width such that water leakage
cannot be occurred.
- Proper control on the concrete design mix can effectively minimize the
shrinkage effect of concrete and heat generation during cement hydration.
- Construction sequence may be controlled in such a way that the restraining
forces which tend to cause cracks in the newly placed concrete can be
minimized. Proper type of formwork, good workmanship and adequate
curing measures are crucial to improve the impermeability of concrete.
Loading and exposure conditions:

- The worse cases for loading and exposure conditions should be properly
addressed in the design stage of the structures.
3
It is often argued that poorly installed waterstops are the causes of water leakage.
2
5. How to deal with cracks due to direct or flexural tension in reinforced concrete
structures?
Cause of cracks due to direct or flexural tension:
- Concrete is very weak in tension which will break easily under tensile
stresses.
- If a reinforced concrete member is laterally loaded, the concrete on the side
of the tension reinforcement will extend and will eventually crack as the
load increase.
- Cracks formed due to direct or flexural tension arising from the applied load
are supposed to be occurred in mature concrete.
Estimation of crack widths due to direct tension:

- A crack due to direct tension is of significance than a crack due to flexural
as the crack penetrates the full depth of the section, and is therefore more
likely to allow leakage to occur.
- By using the elastic theory, the strain at each steel layer across the section
(es) and hence the strain at concrete surface (e1) can be calculated.
- Taking into account the stiffening effect4 of concrete between cracks (e2),
the average surface strain can be computed (em = e1 - e2).
- The design crack width (w) can be determined.
- w = 3 x acr x em
Estimation of crack widths due to flexural:

- The maximum service bending moment is calculated using the
characteristic loads with γf = 1.0.
- The depth of the neutral axis, lever arm and the steel stress are computed by
elastic theory.
- The average surface strain (em) is calculated with a similar approach with
that for direct tension (em = e1 - e2).
- The design crack width (w) can then be determined.
- w = (3 x acr x em)/[1 + 2(acr – cmin)/(h-x)]
Ways to reduce crack widths due to direct tension or flexural:

- As revealed from the above formula, the crack widths can be effectively
reduced by increasing the section thickness5 or increase the steel ratio6.
4
How to assess or determine such stiffening effect?
5
h ↑ > Z ↑ > fs, fcu ↓ > es, ec ↓ > w ↓
6
As ↑ > fs ↓ > es ↓ > w ↓
3
6. How to deal with cracks due to early thermal movement and shrinkage effect
in reinforced concrete structures?
Cause of cracks due to early thermal movement:
- Considerable amount of heat will be evolved during the hydration of
cement.
- This heat of hydration causes the temperature of the concrete to rise until
the reaction is complete, and then heat is dissipated to surroundings.
- The value of maximum temperature is dependent on the quantity of cement
in mix, the thickness of the concrete section, and any insulation that is
provided.
- High cement content will emit larger quantity of heat. A thicker section will
not cool quickly. Temperature gradient will occur across the concrete
section. Such temperature gradient may be reduced by minimizing the total
heat evolution or providing insulation to the concrete members in the first
few days after concreting.
- During the period when the concrete temperature is increasing, expansion
will take place. As the concrete subsequently cools, it tries to shorted but, if
there are restraints present, tensile strains will develop within the concrete
member leading to cracking.
Cause of cracks due to drying shrinkage:

- As concrete hardens and dries out, it shrinks7. It is an irreversible process.
- The shrinkage movement is prevented by the steel reinforcement.
- The steel is therefore in compression and the concrete in tension.
- If steel ratio is high and no external restraint exists, no crack will form.
However, if steel ratio is relatively low or external restraints are present,
cracking is certain.
- It is important that there is sufficient reinforcement to control the cracking
so that the cracks may form at close centres and be fine in width.
Estimation of crack spacing due to temperature and moisture effects:

- A critical steel ratio is defined at which the reinforcement yields and the
concrete reaches its ultimate tensile stress8 at the same time (ρcrit = fct/fy).
- The actual steel ratio should in any cases not be less than the critical steel
ratio9.
7
Why concrete shrinks as drying out?
8
Concrete strength at 3 days should be used.
9
Otherwise, rebar yields before concrete breaks in tension. Cracks formed in this case will be wide and unrestrained.
4
- As cracks form when the bond force between the reinforcement and
concrete is greater than the tensile strength of concrete. A bond length “s” is
required to develop the cracking force (fbsΣus = fctbh).
- Maximum crack spacing equals to twice of the bond length “s”.
- Smax = 2s = (fct/fb)x(ø/2ρc)
Estimation of crack widths due to temperature and moisture effects:

- The number and width of cracks which form will depend on the total
contraction strain that is unrelieved in the length of section.
- The tensile strain in concrete may be assumed to vary from zero adjacent to
a crack to a value of εult midway between cracks at a distance smax apart. The
average tensile strain is therefore εult /2.
- w/smax = εte + εcs - εult = εte = α(T1 + T2)/2 10
- The thermal contraction accounts for the strain due to the cooling from the
peak of hydration temperature T1 to ambient temperature, and a further
variation in temperature T2 due to seasonal changes.
- An effective coefficient of expansion of one half of the value for mature
concrete is used due to the high creep strain in immature concrete.
- In addition, the bond length to develop the required cracking force will
increase in mature concrete. So a smaller cracking spacing is expected and
hence the actual contraction can be effectively halved.
- With all assumptions made, w = smax α(T1 + T2)/2
Ways to reduce crack widths due to temperature and moisture effects:

- Using aggregate with smaller coefficient of thermal expansion.
- Reducing cement contents in the concrete mix or using low heat cement.
- Adopting substitutes to cement, like PFA and CSF.
- Reducing the concrete placing temperature.
- Minimizing the thermal gradient within the concrete section, as well as the
difference between the concrete temperature and ambient temperature.
Proper insulation may be provided.
- For a given steel ratio, smaller bar size should be used provided that the
requirements for bar spacing have been complied with.
- The steel reinforcement for crack control should be placed as near to the
surface of the concrete section as possible11.
10
The last two terms are assumed to be canceling out.
11
It is not necessary to increase the total amount of thermal reinforcement beyond that necessary for a slab of 500mm thick.
5
7. What is the major difference between the design codes for water retaining
structures and ordinary reinforced concrete structures?
- Section 2 of BS 8007 takes precedent over Section 2 of BS8110 in respect
of the basis of the design.
- The design ultimate anchorage bond length for horizontal bars in sections
subject to direct tension should not exceed 0.7 times the values obtained
from clauses 3.12.8.4 of BS8110.
- The maximum calculated design crack widths are either 0.2mm or 0.1mm
depending on the exposure conditions, rather than an assumed value of
0.3mm.
- The basis of the design is the serviceability limit state of cracking rather
than ultimate limit state.
- For the design of flat slab roofs at serviceability limit states, the simplified
method of design in clause 3.7.2.7 of BS8110 may be used.
- The provisions of BS8007 in respect of joints are to be used.
- The provisions of BS8007 in respect of nominal cover are to be used.
- The provisions of BS8007 in respect of exposure conditions are to be used.
- The provisions of BS8007 in respect of minimum areas of reinforcement are
to be used.
- BS8007 contains restrictions relating to the spacing of bar reinforcement.
8. Can you briefly describe your submitted design of water retaining structure?
Design principle:
- The design of the water retaining structure adopted the limit state design
approach in accordance with BS8110 as modified by the recommendations
given in BS8007.
- The structure must be designed to fulfill the requirements of having
adequate degree of safety against failure.
- The sizes of the structural members and the amount of reinforcement are
assessed on the basis of the serviceability crack width limit state, and that
the ultimate limit states are checked. For a severe to very severe exposure
condition, a design crack width of 0.2mm should be adopted12. On the other
hand, design crack width of 0.1mm should be used where aesthetic
appearance is critical.
- Flotation checking should also be carried out to ensure an adequate safety
margin against uplift pressure due to water during construction and in
12
Cracks with width of 0.2mm or less tend to seal themselves by autogenous healing.
6
service.
Structural layout:
- Layout of the structures was determined to fulfill the requirements with
respect to the functional, operation and maintenance considerations.
Sizing of wall thickness:

- A wall thickness of about 1/10 of the span is assumed for a simple
cantilever, and somewhat less than this for a wall which is restrained on
more than one edge.
- The minimum thickness of a wall over two metres high should be not less
than 250–300mm to facilitate the concrete placing and compaction. A wall
thickness less than 200mm is not normally adopted.
- It is inconvenience to use shear reinforcement in slabs because it is difficult
to fix, impedes placing of concrete, and is inefficient in the use of steel. The
wall thickness therefore should be at least sufficient to allow the ultimate
shear forces to be resisted by the concrete in combination with the
longitudinal reinforcement13.
- The overall thickness of a wall should be no greater than necessary, as extra
thickness will cause higher thermal stresses when the concrete is hardening.
Checking for crack widths:

- Upon the completion of sizing of structural members, the amount of
reinforcement should be assumed.
- Checking of cracking due to flexural/tension, and temperature and moisture
effects is carried out by using the formula provided in BS8007.
- The limit state of cracking must be satisfied by ensuring that the maximum
calculated surface width of cracks is not greater than the specified value.
- Should the calculated crack widths due to flexural/tension exceed the
specified value, then a thicker section or more reinforcement is required.
- Should the calculated crack widths due to temperature and moisture effects
exceed the specified value, then higher amount of reinforcement or smaller
size reinforcement in closer spacing is required.
Checking for moment and shear force capacity:

- Having fulfilled the serviceability limit state on crack widths, it is necessary
13
The maximum shear force in a cantilever occurs at the foot of the wall. However, the critical level for checking the
permissible shear stress is at distance of twice the effective depth above the base level. This is due to the proximity to a support,
and can be applied at any section within a distance of twice the effective depth from the face of the support.
7
to make sure that the structural possessed sufficient capacity to resist

moment and shear force arising from the externally applied load.
- From experience, the amount of reinforcement designed for serviceability
limit state of crack width control is sufficient to fulfill the requirements for
ultimate limit state.
Checking for deflection and flotation:

- Similar to normal concrete structures, the deflection of the structural
members should be checked.
- Flotation of the structure should also be checked to ensure the structure will
not be subject to an uplifting force during construction and in service.
Reinforcement detailing:
- The reinforcement for controlling the temperature and moisture effects
should be placed as close to the concrete surface as possible.
- Construction joints should be properly located. A higher lapping and
anchorage length are recommended in BS800714.
9. Any maintenance required for water retaining structures?

- The completed structure will be inspected regularly.
- The inspection will include examination of the concrete for cracking,
leakage, surface deterioration and settlement.
- Particular attention will be paid to any rust stains that might indicate
corrosion of the reinforcement.
10. Have you carry out a checking on floatation for water retaining structures?
- As the water retaining structure is an underground structure, it is inevitably
subject to groundwater pressure.
- It has been checked that the dead weight of the empty substructure15 should
provide a safety factor of not less than 1.1 against uplift pressures during
construction and in service.
11. Why not use prestressed concrete for your water retaining structures?
- Prestressed concrete is commonly used for water retaining structures with
cylindrical shape.
- Maintenance would become much more difficult for underground
14
The lapping and anchorage length are designed based on the 3 day concrete strength.
15
On occasion just after completion of the substructure and associated backfilling work, and before commencement of
construction of superstructure.
8
prestressed concrete structure.

- In long term, the sewage contained in the structure might cause corrosion of
the steel strands, which in turns causing loss of prestressing force.
12. Tell me more about early-age thermal crack control in reinforced concrete
structures?
Mechanism of early-age thermal movement:
- As cement hydrates, it generates heat. The temperature of the concrete rises
on heating.
- If no restraint exists, the concrete can expand and contract freely without
creating any stresses.
- However, in practice, there are restraints present internally and externally.
- The restrained movement induces stresses in the concrete which
subsequently cause cracking.
- This strain is not directly converted into stress because of the influence of
creep. Creep in immature concrete can significantly lower the induced
stress.
- Cooling down of the concrete leads to contraction of the concrete member.
The concrete is then put into tension. Cracking occurs when tensile stress
exceeds the tensile strength of early-stage concrete.
Evaluation of temperature rise:

- For the control of early-stage thermal cracking, there are two important
temperature differences: the peak temperature rise and the maximum
temperature gradient within the section.
- The temperature rise in a section depends on the balance between the heat
generated during the hydration reactions and the heat lost from the concrete.
Effect of section thickness on temperature rise:

- Concrete is a poor conductor of heat. Therefore dispersal of heat generated
in the centre of a thick section into the surrounding material is slow.
- The thicker the section, the greater the temperature rises.
Effect of formwork and insulation on temperature rise:

- The higher the insulation value of the formwork, the longer the heat is
retained in the concrete and the higher the temperature rise.
- On the other hand, the higher the insulation value of the formwork, the
lower the temperature gradient across the section.
9
- If the restraint is mainly external and the peak temperature is the critical
factor, and in member with less than 500mm thick, temperature rise can be
reduced by using formwork with higher conductivity of heat.
- However, if the section is thick, and internal restraints is keen, formwork
with good insulation is the best material to use. This formwork must be left
in position until the section is cooled down sufficiently so that when it is
removed, no significant cooling and contraction of the surface will occur.
- Early formwork removal tends to reduce the peak temperature rise but to
increase the temperature gradient across the section.
Effect of ambient and placing temperature on temperature rise:

- The rate at which the cement reacts is a function of the temperature of the
concrete.
- The concrete placed at a higher temperature has a higher temperature rise.
- It is thus better to specify the maximum concrete placing temperature
required in order to reduce the subsequent temperature rise in concrete
section.
Effect of concrete mix proportion on temperature rise:

- As only the binders produce heat of hydration, the higher the binder content,
the greater the heat evolved per unit volume and the greater the temperature
rise.
- Water reducing agent has little effect on the temperature rise as it alter the
mix proportion by reducing amount of binders for the desired workability,
and the time-scale of the temperature curve16.
- Different types of binders has different rate at which the heat is evolved.
Amount of heat evolution increases with the cement content.
- Use of pozzolanic materials such as PFA and CSF will affect the
temperature rise. PFA replaces part of the cement and hence reduces the
total heat generation. On the other hand, silica fume contributes more to the
temperature rise than an equivalent mass of Portland cement. But if is often
offset by lowering the total binder contents.
External restraint to thermal movement:

- As the concrete cools to the ambient temperature from peak, it attempts to
contract.
- With the presence of external restraints, the concrete member under
16
Retarding effect
10
consideration must remain compatible with its neighbouring.

- Forces required to maintain the compatibility will cause cracking in the
concrete member.
- Another important type of partial restraint is that resulting from the friction
between a slab or base and the ground. If the sub-base is rough, the restraint
increases.
Internal restraint to thermal movement:

- Due to the temperature variation across the section, one part of the section
may restrain the movement of another part of the same section.
- If the formwork is removed from a deep section while the surface is still hot,
the rapid cooling and contraction of the surface zone is restrained by the hot
interior and the surface cracks. These cracks will penetrate deeper than the
reinforcement but will not be continuous through the section.
Tensile strain capacity of concrete:

- The tensile strain capacity of a concrete depends on the mix proportions, in
particular on the shape, type and size of aggregate.
- Crushed rock aggregates give higher tensile strain capacities than round
aggregates.
- The higher the cement content of the concrete, the higher the tensile strain
capacity.
Measures to control early-age thermal cracks:

- Selection of mix proportion
- Cooling of aggregates and water
- Cooling of the freshly placed concrete
- Selection of formwork materials
- Consideration on the formwork striking time
- Influence of construction sequence17
- Provision of movement joints
- Control of crack widths by reinforcement
13. Why your water retaining structure has no movement joints?

Purposes of using movement joints:
- According to BS8007, movement joints may be provided to release the
17
Generally, less cracks are formed for sequential bay construction. But if the “infill bay” for alternate bay construction is short,
no cracks would be formed.
11
restraints to the contraction and expansion of the concrete structure.

- The joint materials including waterstops, joint fillers and joint sealants
should be capable of accommodating repeated movement without
permanent distortion or extrusion, and be stable under a high liquid
pressure.
Reasons for no movement joints:

- As the substructure of the sewage pumping station is considered as a whole
to withstand the external loading, provision of movement joints appear
inappropriate.
- In addition, maintenance of movement joints for the underground structure
will be difficult. Lengthy stoppage of the service might be required during
maintenance.
14. Can your water retaining structure withstand earthquake load?

- The structure was designed to withstand wind load in accordance with the
wind code.
- Hong Kong is not located within the earthquake active zone.
- The consequence of the failure of the structure in an unanticipated
earthquake event is relatively low.
- Balancing between the consequences and economical considerations, the
structure is not designed to withstand an additional earthquake load.
- However, it is believed that the structure can withstand an earthquake with
Richter Scale of 5 of less.
15. How can you make sure that the water retaining structures is watertight during
construction stage?
Concrete:
- The allowable ranges for the constituents in the concrete mix were specified
in the contract.
- Maximum concrete placing temperature was also stated. If ambient
temperature is high, ice water may be used in place of water to reduce
temperature rise.
- Tight supervision is necessary during concreting to ensure proper
compaction of concrete, especially at locations around waterstops.
- After concreting, the concrete should be properly cured for the specified
period so as to reduce shrinkage cracks.
- Tie-holes formed in concrete surfaces should be filled with non-shrinkage
12
grout to ensure the required impermeability.
Reinforcement:
- Reinforcement must be fixed in strictly compliance to the requirements of
bar spacing, lapping length and anchorage length.
Formwork:
- The minimum time for removal of formwork is also specified in the
contract.
Concrete joints:
- The concrete joints should be provided at location as specified in the
contract as far as possible.
- In case additional construction joints are to be provided, the joints must be
prepared in accordance with the requirements in the contract, such as
provision of waterstops, joint sealants and joint fillers.
Construction sequence:
- As specified in the contract, the time elapse between bays of concreting
should not be too high.
Testing on watertightness:
- Upon the completion of the substructure, watertightness test will be carried
out.
- Water should be allowed to stand for three days for absorption before
testing starts.
- The drop in water level after a further seven days is then measured to see if
it is within the specified limits.
- If the test failed, the source of leakage should be searched for and rectified
before the structure is retested.
13
Topic: Soil Mechanics
1. What is the Particle Size Analysis?

Definition:
- Particle Size Analysis is to determine the percentage by mass of particles of
a soil sample within the different size ranges
- Soil particle sizes range from over 100mm to less than 0.001mm.
- Generally, soil particles can be described as “clay”, “silt”, “sand”, “gravel”,
etc
Methods to determine PSD:

- Coarse grained soil (sand/gravel) - Sieving
- Fine grained soil/fine grained fraction in coarse grained soil - sedimentation
Interpretation of PSD:
- PSD of a soil sample is presented graphically as a curve on a semi
logarithmic plot.
- The y-axis is the percentage by mass of particles smaller than the size given
in the x-axis
- The flatter the PSD curve, the larger the range of particle sizes in the soil
- The steeper the PSD curve, the smaller the range of particle sizes
- A coarse grained soil is described as well-graded if there is no excess of
particles in any size range and if no intermediate sizes are omitted.
- Either uniform soil or gap-graded soil is poorly graded soil.
- D10 ,which is the size such that 10% of particles are smaller than that size, is
defined as effective size
- The coefficient of uniformity (Cu) = D60/D101
- The coefficient of curvature (Cz) = D230/(D60D10)2
2. What is plasticity of fine grained soils?

Definition:
- The ability of a soil to undergo unrecoverable deformation at constant
volume without cracking or crumbling
- Soil may exist in one of the liquid, plastic, semi-solid and solid states,
depending on the water content.3
1
Higher Cu means more well-graded soil
2
Well-graded soil with 1<Cz<3
3
Most fine-grained soil exist naturally in the plastic state
1
Plasticity Index:
- Liquid Limit (LL) and Plastic Limit (PL) are the extremes of water content
over which a soil exhibits plastic behaviour.
- Plasticity Index (PI) = LL – PL
- LL and PL are determined arbitrary since the transitions between different
states are gradual.4
3. How to determine degree of compaction for soil?

Definition:
- Compaction is a process of increasing the density of a soil by packing the
particles closer together with a reduction in air void.5
- Compaction of soil can be carried out by means of rollers, vibrators or
rammers.6
- The higher the degree of compaction, the higher will be the shear strength
and the lower will be the compressibility of the soil
Method to determine Degree of compaction:

- Degree of compaction is measured in terms of dry density7.
- A given soil sample is compacted using standard testing procedures8. Bulk
density and the water content of the compacted soil sample are determined,
and the dry density is calculated.
- By repeating the above process at least 5 times with the water content of the
soil sample varies each time, a plot of dry density against water content is
obtained.
- Form the plot, the maximum dry density of the soil sample and the
respective optimum water content are determined9.
- The maximum dry density obtained increases with the compaction effort10.
- The specification on the degree of compaction may be either a method
specification11 or a performance specification, depending on the type of
soil.
4
Test shall be carried out in accordance with relevant standards in GEO Report No. 36.
5
No significant change in the volume of water in the soil.
6
To find out the use of different types of machines.
7
ρd = ρ/(1+w), where ρ is bulk density and w is water content
8
GEO Report No. 36 (BS 1377)
9
Water makes soil more workable and facilitates compaction.
10
How the in-situ compaction effort be compared with the compaction process in laboratory.
11
Method specification should be avoided as soon as practicable in other areas as it would limit the method of construction and
most probably the performance of the end-product. Contractor should be allowed to carry out the works with their own resources
and method.
2
4. How to deal with groundwater seepage for deep excavation?
Effect of water seepage:
- Work under water
- Seeping water may cause internal erosion which is known as “piping”.
Installation of sheetpiles:
- Toe-in of the sheetpiles lengthens the water seepage path, and hence
decrease the hydraulic gradient (i = H/L).
- Flow rate of groundwater or the pumping rate could be decreased by
increasing the toe-in of the sheetpiles.
Ground treatment:
- Applying cement grout or chemical grout to the in-situ soil in order to blind
the pores of the soil
- Permeability of the treated soil could then be reduced.
- Extent of penetration of the grout depends on the viscosity and setting time
of the grout, and pressure under which it is injected12.
5. How to design for a geotextile filter?

- Filter should be a material with small pore size (to prevent particles from
entering) and high permeability (to ensure free drainage).
- Strong enough to withstand unexpected high hydraulic gradient.
- It is recommended that proposed filter material should satisfy
(D15)f/(D85)s<5
- Attention should be made to avoid segregation of filter material during
construction13.
6. What is effective stress?

Principle of effective stress:
- Total normal stress (σ) is force per unit area transmitted in a normal
direction across the plane
- Pore water pressure (u) is pressure of the water filling up the voids between
the soil particles
- Effective normal stress (σ’) is stress transmitted through the soil skeleton
only
12
Grouting pressure should be controlled, or ground heaving may occur.
13
How to ensure this?
3
- σ = σ’ + u (i.e. the normal stress is jointly supported by interparticle forces
and pore water pressure)
- σ’v = (γsat – γw)z = γ’z
- σ’ does not represent the true contact stress between two particles
Response of effective stress to a change in total stresses:

- When a saturated soil layer is subject to an increased vertical stress, volume
change is entirely due to the deformation in vertical direction. (this
assumption is justified when the change in vertical stress in a very large
area compared with the thickness of the soil layer)
- Immediately after the application of external stress, no soil particle can be
rearranged to take up the additional force as water is incompressible. Pore
water pressure increases to resists the additional stress.
- This is the undrained condition.
- The “excess” pore water pressure will cause a pressure gradient, resulting a
flow of pore water towards a free-draining boundary
- The flow will continue under the pressure becomes equal to the steady value
- At this stage, the soil is said to be in the drained condition
- As drainage of pore water takes places, soil particles can take up new
positions with a resulting increase in interparticle forces
- Effective stress increases, accompanied by a reduction in volume
- This process is known as consolidation, and the time taken for this process
depends on the permeability of the soil
7. How to determine shear strength of a soil sample?

Direct shear stress:
- Shear strength parameters are obtained with simple set up - shear box.
- Drainage conditions cannot be controlled.
Triaxial test:
- Widely adopted test suitable for all types of soil.
- Drainage conditions can be controlled, and pore water pressure can be
measured.
Vane shear test:

- In-situ determination of undrained strength of fully saturated (soft) clays14.
14
Shear strength of soft clay may be significantly altered by the sampling process and subsequent handling
4
8. Describe briefly the use of triaxial test?
General testing procedures:
- A cylindrical soil specimen, having a length/diameter ratio of 215, is placed
on either a porous or a solid disc on the pedestal of the apparatus.
- A loading cap is placed on top of the specimen and the specimen is then
sealed in a rubber membrane.
- The specimen is subjected to an all-round fluid pressure in the cell,
consolidation is allowed to take place, and the axial stress is gradually
increased until failure of the specimen takes place.
- Lateral strain is not equal to zero during consolidation and dissipation of
excess pore water pressure takes place due to the drainage through the
porous disc at the top/bottom of the specimen.
- The all-round pressure is taken as the minor principal stress (σ’3) and the
sum of the all-round pressure and the applied axial stress as the major
principal stress (σ’1)16. The axial stress is thus referred to as the principal
stress difference (q’).
- Specimens with different all-round pressure are tested. The failure envelope
can be drawn and the shear strength parameters (c’ and Φ’) can be obtained.
Unconsolidated-Undrained (UU) triaxial test17:

- The specimen is subjected to a specified all-round pressure and an
immediate axial stress.
- No drainage is allowed throughout the test.
Consolidated-Undrained (CU) triaxial test18:

- The specimen is subjected to a specified all-round pressure and
consolidation occurs.
- Upon the completion of consolidation, axial stress is applied with no
drainage being allowed.
Drained triaxial test19:

- The specimen is subjected to a specified all-round pressure and
consolidation occurs. Afterwards, axial stress is applied with drainage being
allowed. Excess pore water pressure is maintained to zero in the test.
15
Why 2? To eliminate the non-uniform deformation due to the fractional forces at the top and bottom interfaces?
16
Why the principal stresses can be assumed in this way? Is the all-round pressure acting on the specimen through its top and
bottom?
17
To simulate the condition having low permeability soil (clay) and short time frame (e.g. during construction period)
18
When to use UU and CU triaxial tests?
19
To simulate the condition having high permeability soil (sand) or low permeability soil with long time frame.
5
9. What are the shear strength characteristics of sand?
Dense sand:
- A considerable degree of interlocking exists between particles.
- Extra force needed to overcome the interlocking before shear failure, which
results in a peak stress at a relatively low strain.
- Decrease in interlocking force would give rises to an increase in volume of
the specimen (known as dilatancy20).
- Eventually, the specimen would loose enough to allow particles to move
over.
Loose sand:
- No significant particle interlocking to overcome, and no prior peak
- Increase in stress is accompanied by a decrease in volume.
10. What are the shear strength characteristics of saturated clay?

Isotropic consolidation:
- Isotropic consolidation refers to deformation of soil specimen under equal
all-round pressure (p’ = σ’3).
- The relationship of applied stress and deformation depends on the stress
history (normal consolidation and over-consolidation).
-
20
Why sand compacts when moisture content increases?
6
Topic: Tendering
Topic: Tendering
1. Can you describe different tendering methods for public works projects?
Open tendering:
- Tender invitations are published in the Government of the Hong Kong
Administrative Region Gazette, on the Internet, and if necessary, in the
local press and selected overseas journals.
- For procurement covered by WTO, the procuring departments should also
consider notifying consulates and overseas trade commissions of the
tender invitations.
- All interested suppliers/contractors are free to submit tenders.
Selective tendering:
- Tender invitations are published in the Government of the Hong Kong
Administrative Region Gazette, or are sent by letter to all
suppliers/contractors on the relevant approved lists of qualified
suppliers/contractors established and approved for the purpose of selective
tendering.
- For procurements covered by the WTO GPA, suppliers/contractors not
already on the lists may also be considered provided there is sufficient time
to complete the qualification procedure.
- Suppliers/contractors who wish to apply for admission may approach
Government Supplies Department (GSD) or ETWB. Normally, they are
required to meet certain qualification criteria or technical assessment to
ensure suitability. Applications for inclusion may be submitted at any time
and will be dealt with expeditiously. Up-to-date lists and the method of
application for inclusion in the lists are published in the Government of the
Hong Kong Special Administrative Region Gazette annually and are
reviewed regularly.
Prequalified tendering:
- Tender invitations are sent by letter to those prequalified
suppliers/contractors approved by the Secretary for the Treasury (S for
Tsy).
- Invitations to apply for prequalification may take the form of open tendering
or selective tendering and the respective procedures will apply.
- Projects with the following specialty may be necessary to adopt this
tendering method:
1
Topic: Tendering
(1) Pre-testing of equipment is required to determine its suitability;

(2) An extreme complex project nature;
(3) High value projects;
(4) Very rigid completion programmes;
(5) A high level of coordination and technical expertise are required; or
(6) Non-standard forms of contract are involved, e.g. BOT, D&B.
Single or restricted tendering (limited tendering as specified in WTO GPA):

- Tender invitations are sent to only one or a number of suppliers/contractors
approved by the S for Tsy or the Director of Government Supplies. This
procedure is only used when circumstances do not permit open tendering.
- Projects with the following specialty may be necessary to adopt this
tendering method:
(1) Extreme urgency or security;
(2) For proprietary products or for reasons of compatibility; or
(3) No response to an open tender and selective tender.
Selection of tendering methods:

- As laid down in the Stores and Procurement Regulations (SPR),
government procurement exceeding HK$3million (for construction and
engineering services) in value is normally done by the use of open and
competitive tendering procedures so as to obtain the best value for money.
- Limited or restrictive tendering procedures are, in line with the WTO GPA
provisions, only permissible under specified exceptional circumstances.
- Where the nature of the contract (such as a contract that is time critical or
one that requires particularly high levels of skills and proven reliability)
dictates that tenders have to be invited from qualified supplies/contractors,
selective tendering or prequalified tendering may be used.
- For most of the PWP contracts, selective tendering is used.
2. What are the requirements of WTO on government procurement?

History:
- On 20 May 1997, Hong Kong acceded to the World Trade Organisation
Agreement on Government Procurement (WTO GPA).
- Prior to that, Hong Kong had been a signatory to the Agreement on
Government Procurement negotiated under the General Agreement on
Tariffs and Trade (GATT).
- From 1 July 1997 onwards, Hong Kong has continued to be a signatory in
2
Topic: Tendering
the name of Hong Kong, China.
Objectives of WTO GPA:

- The objective of the WTO GPA is to provide for open and fair competition
amongst domestic and foreign supplies and service providers.
- To this end, the Agreement prescribes a set of requirements regarding
non-discriminatory treatment of goods, services and service suppliers,
qualification of suppliers, tender procedures, tender specifications and
challenge procedures.
Application:
- The WTO GPA applies to the following procurement entitles in Hong Kong,
China for contracts above the values specified:
(1) For all government bureaux and departments, contracts value above
1
130,000 SDR for procurement of products and services; and
5,000,000 SDR for construction services.
(2) For non-government public bodies including the Housing Authority and
Housing Department, the Hospital Authority, the Airport Authority, the
MTR Corporation Limited and the Kowloon-Canton Raliway Corporation,
contracts value above 400,000 SDR for procurement of products and
services; and 5,000,000 SDR for construction services.
3. Can you describe briefly the tendering procedures?

Preparation of tender documents:
- The functions of the tender documents are to provide all necessary
information to assist the bidders to prepare their tenders, and to form the
basis for subsequent contract documents.
- In drawing up the tender specifications for goods or services to be procured,
departments are required to ensure that the characteristics laid down for
the products or services are based on functional and performance
requirements.
- Where standards are referred to, these should, where practicable, be
international standards.
- Tender specifications should not be drawn up to suit a particular brand or
country of origin.
- Tender documents should include standard contract forms covering the
general aspects of tender and contract requirements, special conditions of
1
SDR refers to “Special Drawing Rights” which is an international currency unit set up by the IMF. The current US dollar
3
Topic: Tendering
contract, detailed price schedules, additional information and instructions

application to a particular contract.
Tender notice:
- The function of a tender notice is for tender invitation.
- It should include a broad description of the requirements, estimated
quantities and timing, the closing date and time for tenders, the place for
lodging tenders, whether the procurement is covered by the WTO GPA,
where to obtain tender documents, and name of the office or officer and a
telephone contact for enquiry.
- Normally, we allow at least three weeks for tenderers to submit their bids.
- Where the procurement is covered by the WTO GPA, the time allowed for
submission of tenders is 40 days except in the case of extreme urgency.
Submission and opening of tenders:

- Tenderers must submit their tenders before the tender closing date and
time stipulated in the tender notice. We will not open any tenders received
after the tender closing dates.
- Tenderers must also ensure that their tenders are deposited correctly in the
tender box specified in the tender notice.
- At the closing time of tenders, the designated tender opening team,
comprising members who are not involved in the procurement process, will
open the respective tender box. Only tenders which are due are opened
and authenticated by the tender opening team.
- The tender opening team will make appropriate records on file of the
tenders received and then send the originals of the authenticated tenders
to the procuring department for evaluation.
Evaluation of tenders:
- The procuring department is responsible for evaluating the tenders to
determine whether they meet the conditions and specifications laid down in
the tender documents.
- To ensure the best value for money, these conditions and specifications
may include the time of delivery/completion, quality of goods offered,
designs proposed, maintenance and spare parts provision, warranty and
guarantees as appropriate.
- Usually, the department will recommend acceptance of a tender which fully
equivalent to 1 SDR is about US$1.30.
4
Topic: Tendering
complies with the tender conditions and specifications and is the lowest in
tender sum.
- Where pre-determined factors other than price are included in the tender
assessment, the recommended tender is the one which attains the highest
combined technical and price score. The procuring departments will then
submit their recommendations in the form of a tender report to the relevant
tender boards for approval.
Tender boards:
- The Financial Secretary has appointed the following tender boards, each
consisting of not less than three persons, to consider and decide on the
acceptance of tenders.
- Central Tender Board chaired by the S for Tsy to deal with high value
tenders which exceed those values specified for the subsidiary tender
boards. Currently tender for supplies and general services exceeding
$10million and tenders for construction services exceeding $30million are
considered by the Central Tender Board.
- Public Works Tender Board chaired by the Deputy Director of Architectural
Services to deal with tenders for works and related contracts of a value not
exceeding $30million.
- On considering a department’s tender report, the tender board takes into
account the department’s recommendation and justifications. The board
may seek clarification from the department before accepting the
department’s recommendation. The decision not to accept any tender in a
tender exercise must be made by the relevant tender board.
Award of tenders:
- Upon notification of tender board’s approval, the procuring department will
inform the successful tenderer in writing of the acceptance of his tender
and invite the supplier/contractor to execute a contract with the department.
- The procuring department will also inform unsuccessful tenderers of the
outcome of their bids and generally the reasons why their tenders are
unsuccessful.
- Given our commitment to respect commercial confidence, we ensure that
the details given will not disclose tender information provided by another
tenderer in confidence.
- We publish the name of the tenderer awarded the contract and the contract
sum of all contracts awarded in the preceding month in the Government of
5
Topic: Tendering
the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region Gazette and on the Internet
in the following month.
4. How did you deal with the mistakes in the tender?

General rule:
- The mistake is binding unless before the tender is accepted, the employer
or the engineer discovers the difference and realizes that it is not
intentional.
- However, if a party knows that the terms of the offer were not intended by
the other party, the former party cannot effectively accept the offer to
contract.
Lump sum contract:

- Any mistakes which are not discovered by the employer or the engineer
before the tender is accepted bind the contractor in relation to the original
contract work.
- For extra work, since the price of the work is calculated on the basis of the
individual rates and there does not seem to be any reason to apply to
additional work a mistake made by the contractor in pricing for the original
contract work.
- Anyway, the employer may validly accept the tender even if he realizes that
the contractor’s price is uneconomic.
Re-measurement contract:
- Since the contract price is on the final measurement recalculated from the
individual rates without any adjustment, so that errors in totaling or carrying
forward of rates have no effect.
- It is therefore particularly necessary for the engineer to check the individual
rates.
- Mistakes in the rates which are not found before acceptance of the tender
bind the contractor for all work done, including variations unless they fall
outside the variation clause in the original contract.
- The mistakes should only be rectified by the contractor in case the
employer realizes that the contractor did not put in the rate he intended, not
merely that a particular rate is uneconomic or the tender unbalanced.
- Therefore, the contractor should be informed for any obvious clerical errors
or where the rate makes the whole bid so low that it is obvious there has
been a mistake.
6
Tender Procedure
Authority to call for tender

For public works in the Public Works Programme, authority to call for tender is
automatically given when the item is approved by the Finance Committee or S for
Tsy for inclusion in Cat A or Cat D.
Availability of fund
Subhead has been created for Cat A. item and funds are available in the Block Vote
for Cat D item.
Availability of land
Land must be available by the time the Contract is expected to commence unless
specific provision has been made in the tender documents for staged possession of
the site by the Contractor.
Selective Tendering
Contract Sum Category Contractor Group
Up to 20M Chosen according to the predominant Group A, B
20M to 50M Nature of the work involved Group B
Above 50M Group C
In deciding the Group/Category of the Contractors to be invited to tender, the aim
should be to limit the eligibility of the contractors who have necessary experience and
capability, but a the same time including a sufficient number of tenderers to ensure
competition.
Single or Restricted Tendering

• Direct selection from contractors on WB list – For emergency or where public
invitation to tender is undesirable, the contractors should be chosen from WB list
for their known ability to deal with the type of work concerned, their ability to
complete the work on time and a proven record of high quality of workmanship.
• Prequalification from contractors on or outside the WB list. It is required when the
work
• Is of unusual scope or complexity
• Is of usual high value
• Has a rigid time constraint
• Require high level of coordination, technical expertise or unusual technology
• Require unusual funding or financial arrangement
• For special form of contract (like Design and Build contract and Build,
Operate, Transfer Contract)
For procurement covered by Agreement on Government Procurement of the World

Trade Organization (WTO GPA), single or restricted or Restricted Tendering can only
be used when open, normal or selective tendering would not be an effective means
of obtaining requisite supplies or services. For example
• Where there is extreme urgency
• Where for reasons of protection of copyright or technical reasons, the products or
services can only be supplied by a particular supplier and where no reasonable
alternatives exists
• Where there is no response to an open or selective tender or where there is
evidence that the tenders submitted not in conformity with the essential
requirements in the tender
• Additional work outside the terms of a contract but within the scope of the project.
However, the additional work must not exceed 50% of the original contract value.
Page 1 of 3
Tender Procedure
For prequalification, the prequalification document should make the prospective

tenderer aware of the salient features of the works and any major constraints.
Opportunity may also be taken to obtain the Contractor’s view.
A two stage screening applies:
Stage one – based on whether an applicant can satisfy the basic requirements
Stage two – contain all technical aspects of checking process
• Experience on contracts
• Experience, availability and organization of managerial, professional
and technical staff
• Availability and details of special plant, equipments and workshops
• Proposal for undertaking the project like preliminary method
statement, quality assurance plan
• Contractor’s site safety record
• Details of financial resources
• Brief history of claims
• Past environmental performance
• Record of conviction
Extension of tender period

The tender period may need to be extended under the following situations
• Tenderers with substantive reasons
• Queries raised by the tenderers require significant time to resolve
• The timing or the nature of tender addendum is disruptive to the pricing of bills of
quantities.
Extension of tender validity period

Before the tender closing date, a tender addendum should be issued
After the tender closing date but before acceptance by tender board, issue letter to all
tenderer asking for the extension of tender validity period without changing the
original bid.
After acceptance by tender board, letter to the successful tenderer asking for the
extension without changing the original bid.
Examination of Tender
Refer to Notes in Contract Document
Analysis of Tender
An analysis of the three lowest tenders in the form of comparative statement. The
lowest and the highest rate for each item will be underline in blue and red
respectively. Any rate which is obviously and substantially over- or under-priced or
not priced at all and where changes in quantities required under such items will
materially affect the contract price should be brought to the attention of the engineer
designate.
Matters to be referred to the tenderer

• Error rectified, or any substantially over- or under-priced items for the 3 lowest
ones shall request the tenderer either to confirm that he is going to abide by his
tender or to withdraw.
• Any omission or inadequate information in the lowest 3 tenderers should be
referred for clarification.
• If it is necessary to make changes to certain part of the works after closing date,
the three lowest tender may be contacted to negotiate revised offers.
Page 2 of 3
Tender Procedure
Other checks
• Tender signed by person authorized
• The Tenderer is on the right category
• Tenderer who is on probation can not exceed the amount of work.
• Past performance of the tenderer
• Conviction records related to safety offences
• Claim history of the tenderers
• Conviction record for employing illegal immigrants
Tender Negotiation
• When single tender is invited without prior authority from S for Tsy
• When only one tender is submitted and the tender sum of the only offer is too
high
• When only one tender received is technically acceptable but the tenderer has
asked for high price and/or made counter proposals/qualification which conflict
with the original tender conditions or specifications
• When the tender sum of the lowest conforming tender is too high
Tender Report
• Performance report of the recommended tenderer and the number of adverse
report
• Explanation on not giving the contract lump sum
• Omission and irregularities in pricing the in the three lowest tenders which are of
sufficient magnitude to materially affect the contract price.
• Explanation for poor response
• Claims history of the tenderer
• Reasons for not giving to the lowest tender
• The rates in the tender being recommended for acceptance should be checked
against those in similar contract
• If the lowest tender is recommended, the three lowest tender should be
submitted
• If the recommended tender is not the lowest, the one lower and the next two
higher should be submitted.
Page 3 of 3

ICE Study Pack

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ICE Study Pack

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Topic: Information about Institution of Civil Engineers

Topic: Information about Institution of Civil Engineers

1. Why you want to be a member of ICE?

2. Do you know the background of ICE?

3. Do you know who is the current President of ICE?

- Mr. Keith Howells (Mott MacDonald) will succeed Ed McCann in No-

4. Do you know who is the recent past President of ICE?

5. Do you know who is the representative of ICE Hong Kong Office?

6. Do you know what are the criteria to be qualified as a chartered engineer?

7. Do you know the anything about the Rules of Professional Conduct?

All members shall acquire continuing professional development:

8. Can you tell me more about the ethical conduct?

Clarity of communication with clients:

Preventing bribery and corruption:

Q1: What have you involved in the checking of interim payment?

Q3: How did you handle disagreement in IP?

Topic: Civil Engineering Contracts

Different between contract and tortious liability:

2. What are the essentials of a valid contract to make it enforceable by

offered. Unconditional acceptance binds both parties.

3. How the terms of contract are classified?

Grounds on which the court to decide a term is a condition or a warranty:

4. What is the standard form contract for PWP?

Acceptance by the Government:

Limitation period of the contract:

- This situation will be 12 years for a sealed contract3.

5. Why do we need conditions of tender?

6. What are included in the contract documents?

Form of tender (FT):

General conditions of contract (GCC):

project and are intended to be used in conjunction with drawings,

Special conditions of contract (SCC):

General specification (GS):

Particular specification (PS):

Standard method of measurement (SMM):

7. How to interpret the contract documents?

Meaning of a word can be considered from the immediate context:

Interpretation in a way less favourable to the drafter:

Delete the surplus clause:

Implied term/express term:

8. How to draft the contract documents?

9. Why do the clients employ contractors to carry out the projects?

training direct staff.

Contractor’s knowledge to the type of contract:

13. What is the most common type of the contract?

Re-measurement contract with schedules of rates contract:

Re-measurement contract with modified schedules of rates contract:

Pure lump sum contract:

This situation obviously cannot be applied in civil engineering contracts.

Lump sum with bills of quantities contract:

Design and build contract:

Turkey and build-operate-transfer (BOT) contract:

- In Hong Kong, we can find such arrangement in MTRC, KCRC projects,

16. Why do we need standard forms of contract?

Adjustment by means of a percentage:

Adjustment by means of a fixed amount:

18. Can you give me some examples for breach of contract?

Failure to comply with specification:

Conduct of the parties:

19. What is retention money?

Q2 Will the Contractor be entitled to EOT or payment for any disruption of

Q3 Can the Employer rescind the contract for delay/poor workmanship/poor